2015 Silverado2500hd

2k15i_ct_silverado_23208669B.
ai
(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)
Spine = Printer Adjust
(Image set @ 60% Transparency
Color = Black
Date = 05/14/14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Chevrolet 2015i Silverado Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/ Black plate (1,1)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2015 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-5 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-47 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-23
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-34
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-54
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-60
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Conversions and
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Settings . I.nf.or.ma. ti.on. P.ro.v.ide.d.b.y:. . . . . . . . . 7-48
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2015 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-95 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-100 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on the vehicle
because of optional equipment that Propriétaires Canadiens
was not purchased on the vehicle, A French language manual can be
model variants, country obtained from your dealer, at
specifications, features/applications www.helminc.com, or from:
that may not be available in your
The names, logos, emblems, region, or changes subsequent to On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and the printing of this owner manual. ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited If the vehicle has the Duramax® savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, diesel engine, see the Duramax
the CHEVROLET Emblem, diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated
SILVERADO, and Z71 are specific information on this engine. Attention: Customer Service
trademarks and/or service marks of 47911 Halyard Drive
If the vehicle has the bi-fuel engine, Plymouth, MI 48170
General Motors LLC, its see the Silverado/Sierra Bi-Fuel
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. supplement for additional and
specific information on this engine.
Using this Manual
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Refer to the purchase To quickly locate information about
Motors of Canada Limited” for documentation relating to your the vehicle, use the Index in the
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it specific vehicle to confirm the back of the manual. It is an
appears in this manual. features. alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
Keep this manual in the vehicle for it can be found.
quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
©
Part No. 23208669 B Second Printing 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

Cautions Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
Warning messages found on vehicle and what they mean. For more
labels and in this manual describe information on the symbol, refer to
hazards and what to do to avoid or the Index.
reduce them. A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
0 : Adjustable Pedals
{ Danger Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
this happen.” ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result Symbols g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls
in serious injury or death. or OnStar (if equipped)
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of $ : Brake System Warning Light
text. Symbols are shown along with " : Charging System
{ Warning the text describing the operation or I : Cruise Control
information relating to a specific
Warning indicates a hazard that component, control, message, B : Engine Coolant Temperature
could result in injury or death. gauge, or indicator. O : Exterior Lamps
M : This symbol is shown when # : Fog Lamps
you need to see your owner manual
. : Fuel Gauge
{ Caution for additional instructions or
information. + : Fuses
Caution indicates a hazard that * : This symbol is shown when
could result in property or vehicle
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
you need to see a service manual Changer
damage. for additional instructions or
information.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (: Heated Steering Wheel
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Introduction v
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
O : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

Steering Wheel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Lane Departure
Instrument Panel Throttle and Brake Pedal Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Rear Vision
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-5 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-17 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Universal Remote System . . . 1-27
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Performance and Maintenance
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Vehicle Features Traction Control/Electronic
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-29
Heated and Cooled Front Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-29
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-23 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Head Restraint Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Driving for Better Fuel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-24 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Roadside Assistance
Passenger Sensing Driver Information Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-3
1. Instrument Panel Illumination 8. Hazard Warning Flashers on 15. Cruise Control on page 9-57.
Control on page 6-6. page 6-4. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
2. Integrated Trailer Brake Control 9. Shift Lever. See Automatic System on page 9-63 (If
(ITBC) System (If Equipped). Transmission on page 9-34. Equipped).
See Towing Equipment on Tow/Haul Selector Button (If 16. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 9-90. Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode page 5-2 (Out of View).
3. Exterior Lamp Controls on on page 9-39. 17. Horn on page 5-4.
page 6-1. Range Selection Mode (If 18. Hood Release. See Hood on
Fog Lamps on page 6-5 (If Equipped). See Manual Mode on page 10-5.
Equipped). page 9-37.
19. Steering Wheel Controls on
4. Air Vents on page 8-8. 10. Light Sensor. See Automatic page 5-3 (If Equipped).
5. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Headlamp System on
page 6-3. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Lane-Change Signals on Controls (If Equipped). See
page 6-4. 11. Infotainment on page 7-1. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Windshield Wiper/Washer on 12. Electronic Transfer Case (Base Level) on page 5-30 or
page 5-4. Control (If Equipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
6. Favorite Switches (Out of View). Four-Wheel Drive on (Uplevel) on page 5-32.
See Steering Wheel Controls on page 9-42. 20. Parking Brake Release
page 5-3. Card Holder (If Equipped). See (Manual Transmission Only, If
Volume Switches (Out of View). Instrument Panel Storage on Equipped). See Parking Brake
See Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-1. on page 9-51
page 5-3. 13. Parking Brake on page 9-51. 21. Heated and Cooled Front
7. Instrument Cluster on page 5-10. 14. Data Link Connector (DLC) Seats on page 3-9 (If
(Out of View). See Malfunction Equipped).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Indicator Lamp on page 5-21.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-4 In Brief
22. Climate Control Systems (with @ Lane Departure Warning 26. Power Outlet 110 Volt
Heater Only) on page 8-1 or (LDW) on page 9-66 (If Alternating Current (If
Climate Control Systems (with Equipped). Equipped). See Power Outlets
Air Conditioning) on page 8-3 on page 5-6.
(If Equipped). 5 Hill Descent Control Switch 27. Passenger Airbag On-Off
Dual Automatic Climate Control (If Equipped). See Hill Descent Switch (If Equipped) (Out of
System on page 8-5 (If Control (HDC) on page 9-56. View). See Airbag On-Off
Equipped). q Exhaust Brake (If Switch on page 3-27.
23. Instrument Panel Storage on Equipped). See “Exhaust
page 4-1 (If Equipped). Brake” in the Duramax diesel
supplement.
24. g Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-54. g Power Take Off (PTO)
Button (If Equipped). See the
0 Pedal Adjust Switch (If Duramax diesel supplement.
Equipped). See Adjustable
Throttle and Brake Pedal on Auxiliary Button (If Equipped).
page 9-23. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9-100.
{ Cargo Lamp on page 6-6. 25. Power Outlets on page 5-6 (If
X Parking Assist Button (If Equipped).
Equipped). See Assistance
Systems for Parking or Backing
on page 9-60.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-5
Initial Drive See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Information Operation on page 2-4.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Remote Vehicle Start
important features that may or may If equipped, the engine can be
not be on your specific vehicle. started from outside of the vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer Starting the Vehicle
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry 2. Press and release Q.
(RKE) System K: Press to unlock the driver door.
Press K again within three seconds 3. Immediately, press and hold /
The RKE transmitter functions may for at least four seconds or until
work from up to 60 m (197 ft) away to unlock all remaining doors.
the turn signal lamps flash.
from the vehicle. Q: Press to lock all doors. Lock
When the vehicle starts, the parking
and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle lamps will turn on and remain on as
Personalization on page 5-47. long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
7 : Press and release one time to control system may come on.
initiate vehicle locator. Press 7 and The engine will continue to run for
hold for at least three seconds to 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
sound the panic alarm. Press 7 10-minute time extension. Remote
again to cancel the panic alarm. start can be extended only once.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-6 In Brief
Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks

To cancel a remote start, do one of
the following:
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-6. Base Trim
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim If equipped with power door locks:
Door Locks Shown, Other Models Similar Q: Press to lock the doors.
There are several ways to lock and
unlock the vehicle.
K: Press to unlock the doors.
See Door Locks on page 2-7 and
From outside, use the Remote
Power Door Locks on page 2-8.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the key in the driver door.
Windows
From inside, use the power door
locks or push down or pull up on the Manual Windows
manual door locks. If equipped, turn the hand crank on
From inside, pull the door handle each door to manually raise or lower
once to unlock the door. Pull again the windows.
to open the door. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-7
Power Windows Press the switch to lower the Power Sliding Rear Window
window. Pull the switch up to raise
it. See Windows on page 2-19 and
Power Windows on page 2-20.
Express Windows
If equipped, the express window
feature allows the windows to be
raised or lowered without holding
the switch.
To use express-down, press the
switch down fully and release.
The driver window may have the
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim express-up feature. Pull the switch
Shown, Other Models Similar up fully and release to activate. If equipped, the power sliding rear
window works when the ignition has
If equipped, the driver door has a been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
switch to control all windows. Each or ON/RUN, or when Retained
passenger door has a switch to Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
control that window. The power See Retained Accessory Power
windows work when the ignition is in (RAP) on page 9-28.
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power . Press the switch to open the
(RAP) is active. See Retained window.
Accessory Power (RAP) on . Pull down on the switch to close
page 9-28. the window.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-8 In Brief
The power sliding rear window 3. Try to move the seat back and
. If equipped, raise or lower the
cannot be operated manually. See forth to be sure it is locked in seat by moving the rear of the
“Power Sliding Rear Window” in place. control up or down.
Rear Windows on page 2-22. See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-4.
Seat Adjustment Power Seats
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Seats
Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

To adjust a manual seat:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control If equipped, move the lever up or
1. Pull the handle at the front of forward or rearward. down repeatedly to increase or
the seat. decrease lumbar support.
2. Slide the seat to the desired front part of the seat cushion by See Lumbar Adjustment on
position and release the handle. moving the front of the control page 3-4.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
up or down.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-9
Power Lumbar
. If equipped, press and hold the Reclining Seatbacks
control up to increase upper
lumbar support and decrease Manual Reclining Seatbacks
lower lumbar support.
Press and hold the control down
to increase lower lumbar support
and decrease upper lumbar
support.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3-4.
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
To adjust a manual seatback:
. Press and hold the control
forward to increase or rearward 1. Lift the lever.
to decrease upper and lower The seatback will automatically
lumbar support at the same time. fold forward.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-10 In Brief
2. To recline, move the seatback Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features

rearward to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Crew/Double Cab Shown, Other
make sure it is locked. To recline a power seatback,
Models Similar
if equipped:
See Reclining Seatbacks on If equipped, the SET, "1," "2," and
page 3-5. . Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
are used to manually save and
. Tilt the top of the control forward recall memory settings for the driver
to raise. seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
See Reclining Seatbacks on pedals (if equipped).
page 3-5. See Memory Seats on page 3-7 and
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-11
Heated and Cooled Front Press A to cool the driver or Safety Belts
Seats passenger seat.
See Heated and Cooled Front Seats
on page 3-9.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons while keeping the seat and the head Refer to the following sections for
restraint height in the proper important information on how to use
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
position. safety belts properly.
Similar
See Head Restraints on page 3-2 . Safety Belts on page 3-12.
If equipped, the buttons are on the
center stack. To operate, the engine and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. . How to Wear Safety Belts
must be running. Properly on page 3-13.
Press I to heat the driver or

. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-14.
passenger seatback only. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
Press J to heat the driver or page 3-44.
passenger seat cushion and
seatback. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-12 In Brief
Passenger Sensing Exterior Mirrors

System Manual Mirrors
The passenger sensing system, If equipped, adjust manual mirrors
if equipped, turns off the front by moving them up and down or left
outboard passenger frontal airbag to right to see a little of the side of
under certain conditions. No other United States the vehicle and to have a clear view
airbag is affected by the passenger behind the vehicle.
sensing system.
See Manual Mirrors on page 2-14.
If the vehicle has one of the
indicators pictured in the following Power Mirrors
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
front outboard passenger position
unless there is an airbag off switch Canada and Mexico
on the instrument panel endcap. See Passenger Sensing System on
If there is an airbag off switch, the page 3-29 for important information.
vehicle does not have a passenger
sensing system. See Airbag On-Off Mirror Adjustment
Switch on page 3-27 for more Using hood-mounted air deflectors
information. and add-on convex mirror
The passenger airbag status attachments could decrease mirror
indicator will be visible on the performance.
Base Power Mirrors
overhead console when the vehicle
is started. If equipped with power mirrors:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-13
2. Press one of the four arrows on 2. Press the arrows on the control Interior Mirror
the control pad to move the pad while the indicator light on
mirror up, down, right, or left. the (1) or (3) button is Adjustment
3. Adjust each outside mirror so illuminated, to move the mirror Adjust the mirror for a clear view of
that a little of the vehicle and the up, down, right, or left. the area behind the vehicle.
area behind it can be seen. 3. Adjust each outside mirror so Manual Dimming Rearview Mirror
4. Keep the selector switch in the that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen. If equipped, push the tab forward for
center position when not daytime use and pull it for nighttime
adjusting either outside mirror. 4. Press either (1) or (3) again to use to avoid glare from the
deselect the mirror. headlamps from behind. See
See Power Mirrors on page 2-15. Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2-19.
If equipped with power folding
mirrors: Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position. If equipped, the mirror will
automatically reduce the glare of the
2. Press (2) again to fold the
headlamps from behind. The
mirrors in to the folded position.
dimming feature comes on when the
See Folding Mirrors on page 2-16. vehicle is started.
The mirrors may also include a See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Uplevel with Power Folding memory function that works with the Mirror on page 2-19.
Mirrors memory seats. See Memory Seats
on page 3-7.
1. Press (1) or (3) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-14 In Brief
Steering Wheel Tilt and Telescoping Steering The ignition may need to be set
Wheel to the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
Adjustment RUN position to disengage the
tilt and telescoping steering
column and allow easier
adjustment.
2. Pull the lever (2) toward you to
move the steering wheel up or
down, then release the lever to
lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Throttle and Brake Pedal

To adjust the tilt and telescoping Adjustment
To adjust the steering wheel: steering wheel, if equipped: If equipped, the position of the
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull 1. Push the lever (1) down to move throttle and brake pedals can be
the lever. the steering wheel forward or changed.
2. Move the steering wheel up rearward. Lift the lever up to lock
or down. the wheel in place.
3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-15
Interior Lighting ON: Turns all dome lamps on.
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps
The switch used to adjust the

pedals is on the center stack, below
the climate controls.
Lift the switch up to move the There are reading lamps in the
There are dome lamps in the
pedals closer to your body. Press overhead console and the headliner,
overhead console and the headliner,
the switch down to move the if equipped. To operate, the ignition
if equipped.
pedals away. must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY
To change the dome lamp settings, or ON/RUN position or using
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
press the following: Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
Pedal on page 9-23.
OFF: Turns the lamps off, even
when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamps come on
automatically when a door is
opened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-16 In Brief
Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on the

headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights,
roof marker lamps (if equipped),
front/rear sidemarker lamps, and
license plate lamps.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the
headlamps.
Press m or n next to each reading 5 : Turns on the headlamps
lamp to turn it on or off. together with the parking lamps and
For more information about interior The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel lights.
lighting, see Instrument Panel instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. See:
Illumination Control on page 6-6.
O: Turns off the automatic
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
headlamps and Daytime Running page 6-1.
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
control to the off position again to on page 6-3.
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
. Fog Lamps on page 6-5.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, off

will only work when the vehicle is in
P (Park).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-17
Windshield Wiper/Washer The windshield wipers are controlled 8 : For a single wipe, turn to 8,
by turning the band with z on it. then release. For several wipes,
1 : Fast wipes. hold the band on 8 longer.
w : Slow wipes. L m : Push the paddle at the top of
the lever to spray washer fluid on
3 INT: Turn the band up for more the windshield.
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5-4.
The windshield wiper control is on OFF: Turns the windshield
the turn signal lever. wipers off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-18 In Brief
Climate Controls
These systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
Climate Control System (with Heater Only)
1. Fan Control 4. Defrost

2. Air Recirculation 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
3. Air Delivery Mode Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-19
Climate Control System (with Air Conditioning)
1. Fan Control 7. K Rear Window Defogger (If

2. A/C (Air Conditioning) Equipped)
3. Air Delivery Mode Control f Outside Heated Mirror (If
4. Defrost Equipped)
5. TEMP (Temperature Control) 8 Outside Air (If Equipped)
6. Air Recirculation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-20 In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Range Selection Mode
The Range Selection Mode switch,

if equipped, is on the automatic
transmission shift lever.
To enable:
1. Driver Temperature Control 10. Rear Window Defogger
1. Move the shift lever to the
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 11. SYNC (Synchronized M (Manual Mode) position. The
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls Temperature) current range will display next to
See Climate Control Systems (with the M. This is the highest
4. Fan Control
Heater Only) on page 8-1 or Climate attainable range with all lower
5. Defrost Control Systems (with Air gears accessible. As an
6. Passenger Temperature Control Conditioning) on page 8-3 or Dual example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
Automatic Climate Control System selected, 1 (First) through
7. AUTO (Automatic Operation) on page 8-5 (If Equipped). 5 (Fifth) gears are available.
8. Air Recirculation
9. Power Button
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-21
2. Press the plus/minus buttons on Manual Transfer Case Electronic Transfer Case
the shift lever to select the
desired range of gears for
current driving conditions. See
Manual Mode on page 9-37.
While using Range Selection Mode,
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
Mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-39.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, This transfer case shift lever is on This transfer case knob is to the left
the engine's driving power can be the floor to the right of the driver. of the steering column.
sent to all four wheels for extra
traction.
Transfer Case Controls
The vehicle will have one of these
three styles of transfer case
controls. Use these controls to shift
into and out of the different
four-wheel drive modes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-22 In Brief
Automatic Transfer Case Do not use AUTO mode to park on Vehicle Features
a steep grade with poor traction
such as ice, snow, mud or gravel. In
AUTO mode only the rear wheels Infotainment System
will hold the vehicle from sliding The base radio and base radio with
when parked. If parking on a steep connectivity information is included
grade, use 4 m to keep all four in this manual. See the infotainment
wheels engaged. manual for information on the
uplevel radios, audio players,
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use phone, navigation system, Rear
this setting when extra traction is Seat Entertainment (RSE), and
needed, such as on snowy or icy voice or speech recognition,
roads or in most off-road situations. if equipped.
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting
This transfer case knob is to the left only when towing the vehicle. See Radio(s)
of the steering column. Recreational Vehicle Towing on O : Press to turn the system on.
The different drive options that may page 10-95 or Trailer Towing on Press and hold to turn it off. When
be available are described following. page 9-76. on, press to mute; press again to
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This unmute. Turn to increase or
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This decrease the volume.
setting is used for driving in most setting sends maximum power to all
street and highway situations. four wheels. Choose 4n when RADIO: Press to choose between
driving in deep sand, mud, or snow, FM, AM, and SiriusXM®,
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel if equipped.
Drive): This setting is ideal for use and while climbing or descending
when road surface traction steep hills.
conditions are variable. See Four-Wheel Drive on
page 9-42. InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-23
MEDIA: Press to change the audio See “Storing Radio Station Presets” For more information refer to:
source between CD, USB, SD card, under AM-FM Radio on page 7-8. . www.siriusxm.com or call
AUX, and Bluetooth® Audio, 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
if equipped. Setting the Clock
See Clock on page 5-5.
. www.xmradio.ca or call
{: Press to go to the Home Page. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
MENU: Press to select a menu. Satellite Radio See Satellite Radio on page 7-10.
g: Press to seek the previous ®
Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
station or track.
radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM Portable Audio Devices
l : Press to seek the next station satellite radio subscription can This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
or track. receive SiriusXM programming. (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack, SD card
See Overview on page 7-3 about reader, and USB ports in the center
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
these and other radio features. console or armrest. There may be a
Service USB port in the upper glove box.
Storing Radio Station Presets SiriusXM is a satellite radio service External devices such as iPods®,
Up to 25 preset stations from all based in the 48 contiguous United laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
bands can be stored in the favorite States and 10 Canadian provinces. changers, and USB storage devices
lists in any order. Up to five stations SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide may be connected, depending on
can be stored in each favorite page variety of programming and the audio system.
and the number of favorite pages commercial-free music, coast to See USB Port on page 7-18, SD
can be set. coast, and in digital-quality sound. Card Reader on page 7-20, and
A fee is required to receive the Auxiliary Jack on page 7-21.
To store the station to a position in SiriusXM service.
the list, while on the active source
main page, such as AM, FM,
or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and
hold a favorites/soft key button on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the faceplate.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-24 In Brief
Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls g: If equipped with OnStar® or a

Bluetooth® system, press to interact
The Bluetooth® system allows users
with those systems. See OnStar
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
Overview on page 14-1, Bluetooth
to make and receive hands-free
(Overview) on page 7-31 or
calls using the vehicle audio system
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
and controls.
Base Connected Radio) on
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone page 7-42 or Bluetooth (Voice
must be paired with the in-vehicle Recognition - Base Connected
Bluetooth system before it can be Radio) on page 7-46 or Bluetooth
used in the vehicle. Not all phones (Infotainment Controls - Base
will support all functions. Radio) on page 7-32 or Bluetooth
See Bluetooth (Overview) on (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on
page 7-31 or Bluetooth page 7-37, or “Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls - Base (Overview)” in the infotainment
If equipped, some audio controls manual.
Connected Radio) on page 7-42 or can be adjusted at the steering
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base wheel. i : Press to reject an incoming
Connected Radio) on page 7-46 or call, or end a current call. Press to
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - mute or unmute the infotainment
Base Radio) on page 7-32 or system when not on a call.
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base
Radio) on page 7-37.
o or p : Press to go to the
previous or next menu option.
w or x : Press to go to the next
or previous selection.
@: Press to select a highlighted
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
menu option.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-25
Cruise Control SET−: Press briefly to set the

speed and activate cruise control.
If cruise control is already active,
use to decrease vehicle speed.
*: Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9-57.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The favorite and volume switches The DIC display is in the instrument
are on the back of the steering cluster. It shows the status of many
wheel. vehicle systems.
1. Favorite: When on a radio 5 : Press to turn the system on or
off. The indicator light is white when If the vehicle has the base level
source, press to select the next instrument cluster, the trip odometer
or previous favorite. When on a cruise control is on and turns off
when cruise control is off. reset stem is used to operate
media source, press to select the DIC.
the next or previous track. +RES: If there is a set speed in
memory, press briefly to resume to If the vehicle has the uplevel
2. Volume: Press to increase or instrument cluster, the right steering
decrease the volume. that speed or press and hold to
accelerate. If cruise control is wheel controls are used to operate
See Steering Wheel Controls on already active, use to increase the DIC.
page 5-3. vehicle speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-26 In Brief
Forward Collision Alert change to amber and flash. In

addition, the driver seat will pulse or
(FCA) System beeps will sound.
If equipped, FCA may help avoid or See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
reduce the harm caused by on page 9-66.
front-end crashes. FCA provides a
green indicator, V, when a vehicle Rear Vision
is detected ahead. This indicator
displays amber if you follow a
Camera (RVC)
vehicle much too closely. When If equipped, the RVC displays a
approaching a vehicle ahead too view of the area behind the vehicle,
quickly, FCA provides a flashing red on the center stack display, when
alert on the windshield and rapidly the vehicle is shifted into
w or x : Press to move up or beeps or pulses the driver seat. R (Reverse).
down in a list.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) See Assistance Systems for Parking
o or p : Press to move between System on page 9-63. or Backing on page 9-60.
the interactive display zones in the
cluster. Lane Departure Parking Assist
V: Press to open a menu or select Warning (LDW) If equipped, Rear Parking Assist
a menu item. Press and hold to (RPA) uses sensors on the rear
reset values on certain screens. If equipped, LDW may help avoid
unintentional lane departures at bumper to assist with parking and
See Driver Information Center (DIC) speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or avoiding objects while in
(Base Level) on page 5-30 or Driver greater. LDW uses a camera sensor R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) to detect the lane markings. The less than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may
on page 5-32. display a warning triangle on the
LDW light, @, is green if a lane
Rear Vision Camera screen and a
marking is detected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
Ifdethe
ovi dby:
vehicle graphic on the instrument cluster to
departs the lane, the light will
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-27
provide the object distance. In Vehicles with Bench Seats See Universal Remote System on
addition, multiple beeps or seat . One on the center stack below page 5-54.
pulses may occur if very close to an the climate control system.
object. Sunroof
. One or two in the storage area
The vehicle may also have the Front on the bench seat.
Parking Assist system.
Lift the cover to access and replace
See Assistance Systems for Parking when not in use.
or Backing on page 9-60.
See Power Outlets on page 5-6.
Power Outlets
Universal Remote System
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone, MP3
player, etc.
The vehicle may have up to four
accessory power outlets.
If equipped, the sunroof only
Vehicles with a Center Console operates when the ignition is in
. One or two in front of the If equipped with the Universal ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
cupholders on the center Remote system, these buttons will or when Retained Accessory Power
console. be in the front overhead console. (RAP) is active. See Retained
This system provides a way to Accessory Power (RAP) on
. One inside the center console.
replace up to three remote control page 9-28.
. One on the rear of the center transmitters used to activate Vent: From the closed position,
console. devices such as garage door press the rear of the TILT switch to
openers, security
I
nfor
mat
i
systems,
onPr
ovi
dedby:
and vent the sunroof.
home automation devices.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-28 In Brief
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To When the sunroof is opened, an air Performance and

open the sunroof, press and hold deflector will automatically raise.
the rear of the SLIDE switch until The air deflector will retract when Maintenance
the sunroof reaches the desired the sunroof is closed.
position. Press and hold the front of The sunroof also has a sunshade Traction Control/
the SLIDE switch to close it. that can be pulled forward to block Electronic Stability
Express-Open/Express-Close: To the rays of the sun. Open and close Control
express-open the sunroof, fully the sunshade manually.
press and release the rear of the The vehicle has a traction control
If an object is in the path of the
SLIDE switch until the sunroof system that limits wheel spin and
sunroof while it is closing, the
reaches the desired position. To the StabiliTrak system that assists
anti-pinch feature will detect the
express-close the sunroof, fully with directional control of the vehicle
object and stop the sunroof.
press and release the front of the in difficult driving conditions. Both
SLIDE switch. Press the switch See Sunroof on page 2-23. systems come on automatically
again to stop it. when the vehicle is started and
begins to move.
. To turn off traction control, press
and release g on the center
stack. The traction off light i
displays in the instrument
cluster. The appropriate Driver
Information Center (DIC)
message displays. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5-40.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-29
. To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and
The low tire pressure warning light Engine Oil Life System
alerts to a significant loss in
hold g until i and g illuminate pressure of one of the vehicle's The engine oil life system calculates
in the instrument cluster and the tires. If the warning light comes on, engine oil life based on vehicle use
appropriate DIC message stop as soon as possible and inflate and, on most vehicles, displays a
displays. See Ride Control the tires to the recommended DIC message when it is necessary
System Messages on page 5-40. pressure shown on the Tire and to change the engine oil and filter.
Loading Information label. See The oil life system should be reset
. Press and release g again to Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-15. to 100% only following an oil
turn on both systems. The warning light will remain on until change.
. StabiliTrak will automatically turn the tire pressure is corrected. Resetting the Oil Life System
on if the vehicle exceeds The low tire pressure warning light To reset the engine oil life system:
56 km/h (35 mph). Traction may come on in cool weather when
control will remain off. the vehicle is first started, and then 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This on the DIC. See Driver
See Traction Control/Electronic
may be an early indicator that the Information Center (DIC) (Base
Stability Control on page 9-54.
tire pressures are getting low and Level) on page 5-30 or Driver
the tires need to be inflated to the Information Center (DIC)
Tire Pressure Monitor (Uplevel) on page 5-32. If the
proper pressure.
This vehicle may have a Tire vehicle does not have DIC
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS does not replace normal buttons, the vehicle must be in
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain P (Park) to access this display.
the correct tire pressures.
2. Press and hold the V button on
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10-64. the DIC, or the trip odometer
reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
several seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-30 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
The oil life system can also be reset Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
as follows:
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with near the size.
the engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
slowly three times within possible.
five seconds. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING smoothly. Program
on the DIC. If the display shows
100%, the system is reset.
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
abrupt stops.
See Engine Oil Life System on TTY Users (U.S. Only):
page 10-14.
. Avoid idling the engine for long 1-888-889-2438
periods of time.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
E85 or FlexFuel . When road and weather
New Chevrolet owners are
conditions are appropriate, use
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can cruise control. automatically enrolled in the
use either unleaded gasoline or Roadside Assistance Program.
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% . Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program
ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel
conditions require. on page 13-5.
on page 9-69. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline . Keep vehicle tires properly
described under Fuel on page 9-67. inflated.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In Brief 1-31
OnStar®
This vehicle may be equipped with a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
services may require a paid
subscription. See OnStar Overview
on page 14-1.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1-32 In Brief
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks
Windows Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-14 Keys
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Keys and Locks Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-17 Leaving children in a vehicle with
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 the ignition key is dangerous and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 children or others could be
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 seriously injured or killed. They
Interior Mirrors could operate the power windows
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-19 or other controls or make the
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-19
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 vehicle move. The windows will
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 function with the keys in the
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Windows could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 closing window. Do not leave
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 children in a vehicle with the
Doors Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 ignition key.
Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle Security Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Roof
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . 2-11 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The combination and size of the

Warning (Continued) rings that came with your keys were
specifically selected for your
the engine will shut off, braking vehicle. The rings are connected to
and steering power assist may be the key like two links of a chain to
impacted, and airbags may not reduce the risk of unintentionally
deploy. To reduce the risk of moving the key out of the RUN
unintentional rotation of the position. Do not add any additional
ignition key, do not change the items to the ring attached to the
way the ignition key and Remote ignition key. Attach additional items
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, only to the second ring, and limit
if equipped, are connected to the added items to a few essential keys
provided key rings. or small, light items no larger than
{ Warning an RKE transmitter.
If the key is unintentionally The ignition key and key rings, and
RKE transmitter, if equipped, are
rotated while the vehicle is
designed to work together as a
running, the ignition could be
system to reduce the risk of
moved out of the RUN unintentionally moving the key out
position. This could be caused by of the RUN position. The ignition
heavy items hanging from the key key has a small hole to allow
ring, or by large or long items attachment of the provided key ring.
attached to the key ring that could It is important that any replacement
be contacted by the driver or ignition keys have a small hole. See
steering wheel. If the ignition your dealer if a replacement key is
moves out of the RUN position, required.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The key is used for the ignition and If a key is lost or damaged, see your 5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more
all door locks. dealer to have a new key made. times. After the third time, turn to
ON/RUN; the key is learned and
Programming Keys Programming without a all previously known keys will no
Recognized Key longer work with the vehicle.
Follow these procedures to program
up to eight keys to the vehicle. Program a new key to the vehicle Remaining keys can be learned by
when a recognized key is not following the procedure in
Programming with a available. Canadian regulations
Recognized Key “Programming with a
require that owners see their dealer. Recognized Key.”
To program a new key: If there are no currently recognized The key has a bar-coded key tag
1. Insert the original, already keys available, follow this procedure that the dealer or qualified locksmith
programmed key in the ignition to program the first key.
can use to make new keys. Store
and turn the key to the ON/RUN This procedure will take this information in a safe place, not
position. approximately 30 minutes to in the vehicle.
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and complete for the first key. The See your dealer if a replacement
remove the key. vehicle must be off and all of the
key or additional key is needed.
keys you wish to program must be
3. Insert the new key to be If it becomes difficult to turn a key,
with you.
programmed and turn it to the inspect the key blade for debris.
ON/RUN position within 1. Insert the new vehicle key into Periodically clean with a brush
five seconds. the ignition. or pick.
The security light will turn off 2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security
With an active OnStar subscription,
once the key has been light will come on.
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
programmed. 3. Wait 10 minutes until the unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additional security light turns off. Overview on page 14-1.
keys are to be programmed. 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start):

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation If equipped, / is used to start the
engine from outside the vehicle
See Radio Frequency Statement on The RKE transmitter functions may
using the RKE transmitter. See
page 13-12. work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-6.
If there is a decrease in the RKE the vehicle.
operating range: Other conditions can affect the
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
performance of the transmitter. See If enabled through the Driver
. Check the distance. The
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Information Center (DIC), the turn
transmitter may be too far from
System on page 2-4. signal lamps flash once to indicate
the vehicle.
locking has occurred. If enabled
. Check the location. Other through the DIC, the horn chirps
vehicles or objects may be when Q is pressed again within
blocking the signal. three seconds. See Vehicle
. Check the transmitter's battery. Personalization on page 5-47.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section. Pressing Q arms the alarm system.
See Vehicle Alarm System on
. If the transmitter is still not page 2-11.
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician If equipped with auto mirror folding,
for service. pressing and holding Q for
one second will fold the mirrors. The
With Remote Start (without auto mirror folding feature will not
Remote Start Similar) operate unless it is enabled. See
page 5-47.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock The auto mirror folding feature will Programming Transmitters to
only the driver door. If K is pressed not operate unless it is enabled. the Vehicle
See Vehicle Personalization on
again within three seconds, all Only RKE transmitters programmed
page 5-47.
remaining doors unlock. The interior to this vehicle will work. If a
lamps may come on and stay on for On some models, press, release transmitter is lost or stolen, a
20 seconds or until the ignition is and then press and hold K to open replacement can be purchased and
turned on. all of the windows. Pressing the programmed through your dealer.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn button again will stop the windows. Each vehicle can have up to
eight transmitters programmed to it.
signal lamps flash twice to indicate 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic See your dealer for transmitter
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle Alarm): Press and release one
Personalization on page 5-47. programming.
time to initiate vehicle locator. The
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash and the horn Battery Replacement
exterior lamps may turn on. See sounds three times.
Vehicle Personalization on Replace the battery in the
page 5-47. Press and hold 7 for at least transmitter soon if the REPLACE
three seconds to sound the panic BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
If equipped, memory seat positions message displays in the DIC.
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
may be recalled when unlocking the
and the horn sounds repeatedly for
vehicle if enabled. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47 and
30 seconds. The alarm turns off { Caution
when the ignition is moved to ON/
Memory Seats on page 3-7. When replacing the battery, do
RUN or 7 is pressed again. The
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for not touch any of the circuitry on
disarms the alarm system. See the panic alarm to work. the transmitter. Static from your
Vehicle Alarm System on page 2-11. body could damage the
transmitter.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding K for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
one second will unfold the mirrors.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To replace the battery: Remote Vehicle Start

If equipped with the remote start
feature, the climate control system
will come on when the vehicle is
started remotely, depending on the
outside temperature.
The rear defog and heated and
cooled seats, if equipped, may also
come on. See Heated and Cooled
Front Seats on page 3-9 and
2. Press and slide the battery down page 5-47.
toward the pocket of the Laws in some communities may
1. Separate and remove the back transmitter in the direction of the restrict the use of remote starters.
cover of the transmitter with a key ring. Do not use a metal Check local regulations for any
flat, thin object, such as a coin. object. requirements on remote starting of
3. Remove the battery. vehicles.
4. Insert the new battery, positive Do not use remote start if the
side facing up. Replace with a vehicle is low on fuel.
CR2032 or equivalent battery. The vehicle cannot be remote
5. Push together the transmitter started if:
back cover top side first, and . The key is in the ignition.
then the bottom toward the . The hood is not closed.
key ring.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. There is an emission control When the vehicle starts, the Canceling a Remote Start
system malfunction and the parking lamps will turn on. The
malfunction indicator lamp is on. To cancel a remote start, do one of
doors will be locked and the the following:
The engine will turn off during a climate control system may
remote vehicle start if: come on. . Press and hold / until the
The engine will continue to run parking lamps turn off.
. The coolant temperature gets
too high. for 10 minutes. Repeat the . Turn on the hazard warning
Steps for 1 and 2 for a flashers.
. The oil pressure gets low. 10-minute time extension. . Turn the ignition on and then off.
The RKE transmitter range may be Place the ignition in ON/RUN/
reduced while the vehicle is running. START to operate the vehicle. Door Locks
Other conditions can affect the
Extending Engine Run Time
performance of the transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The engine run time can be { Warning
System on page 2-4 or Vehicle extended by 10 minutes, for a total
Unlocked doors can be
Personalization on page 5-47. of 20 minutes, if during the first
dangerous.
10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are
Starting the Engine Using Remote repeated while the engine is still . Passengers, especially
Start running. children, can easily open the
1. Press and release Q. doors and fall out of a moving
A maximum of two remote starts,
vehicle. When a door is
or a single start with an extension,
2. Immediately press and hold / is allowed between ignition cycles.
locked, the handle will not
until the turn signal lamps flash open it. The chance of being
or for at least four seconds. The vehicle's ignition must be thrown out of the vehicle in a
turned on and then back off to use crash is increased if the
remote start again. doors are not locked. So, all
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
There are several ways to lock and Power Door Locks
unlock the vehicle.
passengers should wear From outside, use the Remote
safety belts properly and the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
doors should be locked the key in the driver door.
whenever the vehicle is From inside, use the power door
driven. locks or manual door locks. To lock
. Young children who get into or unlock the door with the manual
unlocked vehicles may be locks, push down or pull up on the
unable to get out. A child can manual lock knob.
be overcome by extreme heat From inside, pull the door handle
and can suffer permanent once to unlock the door. Pull the
injuries or even death from handle again to open the door.
heat stroke. Always lock the Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim
vehicle whenever leaving it. See Vehicle Alarm System on Shown, Other Models Similar
page 2-11.
. Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
the vehicle. Locking the doors
can help prevent this from
happening.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Pressing the power lock switch

. Remove the key from the
twice overrides the delayed locking ignition for a manual
feature and immediately locks all transmission.
doors. Automatic door unlocking can be
This feature will not operate if the programmed through the Driver
key is in the ignition. Information Center (DIC). See
Turn delayed locking on or off using page 5-47.
vehicle personalization. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
Lockout Protection
Automatic Door Locks When locking is requested with the
driver door open and the key in the
Base Trim The doors will lock automatically ignition, all the doors will lock and
If equipped with power door locks: when all doors are closed, the then the driver door will unlock.
ignition is on, and the shift lever is
Q: Press to lock the doors. moved out of P (Park) for automatic This can be manually overridden by
K: Press to unlock the doors. transmissions and vehicle speed is pressing and holding Q on the
above 13 km/h (8 mph) for manual power door lock switch.
Delayed Locking transmissions.
To unlock the doors: Safety Locks
If equipped, when locking the doors
with the power lock switch and a . Press K on a door. The rear door safety locks prevent
door open, the doors will lock passengers from opening the rear
five seconds after the last door is
. Shift the transmission into doors from inside the vehicle.
closed. Three chimes signal that P (Park) for an automatic
delayed locking is in use. transmission.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Doors To shut the tailgate, firmly push it

upward until it latches.
Tailgate After closing the tailgate, pull it back
to be sure it latches securely.
{ Warning Tailgate Removal
It is extremely dangerous to ride The tailgate can be removed to
on the tailgate, even when the allow for different loading situations.
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Assistance may be needed with the
People riding on the tailgate can removal to avoid damage to the
vehicle.
easily lose their balance and fall
Crew/Double Cab Premium in response to vehicle On vehicles with a Rear Vision
maneuvers. Falling from a moving Camera, it must be disconnected
Shown, Others Similar
vehicle may result in serious before removing the tailgate. See
Press { to activate the safety locks injuries or death. Do not allow Driver Assistance Systems on
people to ride on the tailgate. Be page 9-60.
on the rear doors. The indicator light
comes on when activated. The sure everyone in your vehicle is in
vehicle must be on, in ACC/ a seat and using a safety belt
ACCESSORY, or in Retained properly.
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
On vehicles with a lock on the
on page 9-28.
tailgate, use the key to lock or
If the indicator light flashes, the unlock the tailgate.
feature may not be working properly.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its
handle while pulling the
tailgate down.InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To remove the tailgate: 2. With the tailgate about halfway Vehicle Security
open, lift the right edge of the
tailgate from the lower pivot. This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
On vehicles with the tailgate
the vehicle impossible to steal.
assist feature, raise the tailgate
nearly all the way to the closed
position prior to removing the Vehicle Alarm System
left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right and
away to release the left edge.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall
the tailgate. Make sure the tailgate
is secure.
1. Raise the tailgate and support it
firmly. Pull out and hold the
cable retaining clip (1). Push the
cable (3) up and off of the If equipped with the anti-theft alarm
bolt (2). Repeat on the system, the indicator light, on the
other side. instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status of
the system.
Off: Alarm system is disarmed.
On Solid: Vehicle is secured
during the delay to arm the system.
Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A door or the hood is open.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Slow Flash: Alarm system is If the driver door is opened without To avoid setting off the alarm by
armed. first unlocking the RKE transmitter, accident:
the horn will chirp and the lights will . Lock the vehicle after all
Arming the Alarm System flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the occupants have left the vehicle
1. Turn off the vehicle. vehicle is not started, or the door is and all doors are closed.
2. Lock the vehicle with one of the not unlocked by pressing K on the
RKE transmitter during the
. Always unlock a door with the
following: RKE transmitter.
.
10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will
Use the Remote Keyless be activated. Unlocking the driver door with the
Entry (RKE) transmitter. key will not disarm the system or
If a door or the hood is opened
. With a door open, press Q without first disarming the system, turn off the alarm.
on the interior of the door. the turn signals will flash and the How to Detect a Tamper
3. After 30 seconds the alarm horn will sound for about Condition
system will arm, and the 30 seconds. The alarm system will
indicator light will begin to slowly then re-arm to monitor for the next If K is pressed on the RKE
flash indicating the alarm system unauthorized event. transmitter and the horn chirps three
times, an alarm occurred previously
is operating. Pressing Q on the Disarming the Alarm System while the alarm system was armed.
RKE transmitter a second time To disarm the alarm system or turn
will bypass the 30-second delay
and immediately arm the alarm
off the alarm if it has been activated: Immobilizer
system. . Press K on the RKE transmitter. See Radio Frequency Statement on
The theft-deterrent alarm system will page 13-12.
. Start the vehicle.
not arm if the doors are locked with
the key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Immobilizer Operation The security light, in the instrument It is possible for the immobilizer
cluster, comes on if there is a system to learn new or replacement
problem with arming or disarming keys. Up to eight keys can be
the theft-deterrent system. programmed for the vehicle. To
When trying to start the vehicle, the program additional keys, see Keys
security light comes on briefly when on page 2-1. To program additional
the ignition is turned on. transmitters, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
If the engine does not start and the page 2-4.
This vehicle has a passive security light stays on, there is a
theft-deterrent system. problem with the system. Turn the Do not leave the key or device that
ignition off and try again. disarms or deactivates the vehicle
The system does not have to be theft system in the vehicle.
manually armed or disarmed. If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged, See your dealer to get a new key
The vehicle is automatically blank cut exactly as the ignition key
immobilized when the vehicle is try another ignition key. It may be
necessary to check the fuse. See that operates the system.
turned off.
Fuses on page 10-44. If the engine
The system is automatically still does not start with the other key,
disarmed when the key is turned to the vehicle needs service. If the
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, vehicle does start, the first key may
or START from the LOCK/OFF be faulty. See your dealer.
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Exterior Mirrors Using hood-mounted air deflectors

and add-on convex mirror
The lower portion of the mirror is
convex. A convex mirror's surface is
attachments could decrease mirror curved to see more from the driver
Convex Mirrors performance. seat. The convex mirror can be
adjusted manually to the driver
{ Warning Trailer-Tow Mirrors preferred position for better vision.
A convex mirror can make things, The mirror may have a turn signal
like other vehicles, look farther arrow that flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane, If equipped, the mirror housing may
you could hit a vehicle on the have auxiliary cargo and clearance
right. Check the inside mirror or lamps. See Cargo Lamp on
glance over your shoulder before page 6-6 and Exterior Lamp
changing lanes. Controls on page 6-1.
The passenger side mirror is convex

shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat. If equipped, adjust trailer-tow
mirrors for a clear view of the area
Manual Mirrors behind you. Manually pull out the
mirror head to extend it for better
If equipped, adjust manual mirrors
visibility when towing a trailer.
by moving the mirror up and down
or left to right to see a little of the
side of the vehicle and to have a
clear view behind the vehicle. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Power Mirrors 4. Move the selector switch to the 3. Adjust each outside mirror so
center position when not that a little of the vehicle and the
adjusting either outside mirror. area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (1) or (2) again to
deselect the mirror.
If you do not deselect the mirror, the
feature will turn off after about
one minute.
If equipped, the mirrors may include
a memory function that works with
the memory seats. See Memory
Seats on page 3-7.
Base Power Mirrors
If equipped with power mirrors: Crew/Double Cab Premium
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the Shown, Other Models Similar
driver or passenger side mirror. 1. Press (1) or (2) to select the
2. Press one of the four arrows on driver or passenger side mirror.
the control pad to move the 2. Press one of the four arrows on
mirror in the desired direction. the control pad while the
3. Adjust each outside mirror so indicator light on button (1) or (2)
that a little of the vehicle and the is illuminated, to move the mirror
area behind it can be seen. in the desired direction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Folding Mirrors The mirrors may also include a Manual Folding

memory function that works with the
If equipped, push the mirror toward
memory seats. See Memory Seats
the vehicle to fold. Push the mirror
on page 3-7.
outward to return to its original
Resetting the Power Folding position.
Mirrors Manually fold the mirrors inward to
Reset the power folding mirrors if: prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
. The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding. Auto Mirror Folding
. They are accidentally manually If equipped, with the ignition off,
folded/unfolded.
press and hold Q on the RKE
. The mirrors will not stay in the transmitter for approximately
Crew/Double Cab Premium unfolded position. one second to automatically fold the
Shown, Other Models Similar . The mirrors vibrate at normal exterior mirrors. Press and hold K
Power Folding driving speeds. on the RKE transmitter for
approximately one second to unfold.
If equipped with power folding Fold and unfold the mirrors three
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
mirrors: times using the mirror controls to
System Operation on page 2-4.
reset them to their normal position.
1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors out This feature is turned on or off
A popping noise may be heard. This
to the driving position. through vehicle personalization. See
sound is normal after a manual
2. Press (2) again to fold the folding operation. Vehicle Personalization on
mirrors in to the folded position. page 5-47.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Turn Signal Indicator Automatic Dimming Driving with the Blind Spot
If equipped, indicator lights on the Mirror Mirror
mirror flash in the direction of the
If equipped, the driver outside mirror
turn or lane change.
automatically adjusts for the glare of
the headlamps from behind. This
Heated Mirrors feature comes on when the vehicle
1 (Rear Window Defogger): is started.
If equipped, the rear window
defogger also heats the side Blind Spot Mirrors
mirrors.
If equipped, there is a small convex
W (Heated Side Mirrors): mirror built into the upper and outer
If equipped, press to turn the heated corner of the driver outside rearview
mirrors on or off. mirror. It can show objects that may
If the vehicle has trailer-tow mirrors, be in the vehicle's blind zone.
only the upper glass of the mirror is
heated. The lower convex part of
the towing mirrors is not heated.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Climate Control Systems (with
Heater Only) on page 8-1 or Climate
Control Systems (with Air
Conditioning) on page 8-3 or Dual
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 8-5.
Actual Mirror View
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1. When the approaching vehicle is Using the Outside Mirror with Reverse Tilt Mirrors
a long distance away, the image the Blind Spot Mirror
If equipped with memory seats, the
in the main mirror is small and 1. Set the main mirror so that the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts
near the inboard edge of the side of the vehicle can just be to a preselected position when the
mirror. seen and the blind spot mirror vehicle is in R (Reverse). This
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the has an unobstructed view. allows the curb to be seen when
image in the main mirror gets 2. When checking for traffic or parallel parking.
larger and moves outboard. before changing a lane, look at The mirror(s) return to the original
3. As the vehicle enters the blind the main driver/passenger side position when:
zone, the image transitions from mirror to observe traffic in the . The vehicle is shifted out of
the main mirror to the blind spot adjacent lane, behind your
R (Reverse), or remains in
mirror. vehicle. Check the blind spot
R (Reverse) for about
mirror for a vehicle in the blind
4. When the vehicle is in the blind 30 seconds.
zone. Then, glance over your
zone, the image only appears in . The ignition is turned off.
shoulder to double check before
the blind spot mirror.
moving slowly into the . The vehicle is driven in
adjacent lane. R (Reverse) above a set speed.
To turn this feature on or off, see
page 5-47.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Windows

If equipped, push the tab forward for
Interior Rearview Mirrors daytime use and pull it rearward for { Warning
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear nighttime use to avoid glare from
the headlamps from behind. Never leave a child, a helpless
view of the area behind your
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
vehicle.
Automatic Dimming especially with the windows
If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle closed in warm or hot weather.
may have three control buttons at Rearview Mirror
They can be overcome by the
the bottom of the mirror. See your If equipped, the mirror will extreme heat and suffer
dealer for more information about automatically reduce the glare of the permanent injuries or even death
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. headlamps from behind. The from heat stroke.
See OnStar Overview on page 14-1. dimming feature comes on each
Do not spray glass cleaner directly time the vehicle is started.
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof, if equipped.
Manual Windows
If equipped, turn the hand crank on
each door to manually raise or lower
the manual windows. Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Regular Cab Uplevel Shown, Other
Shown, Other Models Similar Models Similar
Power Windows If equipped, the driver door has a
switch to control all windows. Each
{ Warning passenger door has a switch to
control that window.
Children could be seriously The power windows:
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
. Can be operated with the
leave keys in a vehicle with ignition in ON/RUN or ACC/
children. When there are children ACCESSORY.
in the rear seat, use the window . Can be operated in Retained
lockout button to prevent Accessory Power (RAP). See
operation of the windows. See Retained Accessory Power
Keys on page 2-1. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (RAP) on page 9-28.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Will stop operation when any Programming the Power Express Window Anti-Pinch
door is opened. Windows Feature
Press the switch down to lower the If the battery on the vehicle has If any object is in the path of the
window, and pull up the front of the been recharged or disconnected, window when express-up is active,
switch to raise the window. or is not working, the driver power the window stops at the obstacle
Express-Down Windows window will need to be and auto-reverses to a preset
reprogrammed for the express-up factory position. Weather conditions
If equipped, the express-down feature to work. such as severe icing also cause the
feature allows the window to be window to auto-reverse. The
lowered without holding the switch. To reprogram the power windows:
window returns to normal operation
Press the window switch down fully 1. Close all doors. once the obstacle or condition is
and release it to activate the removed.
express-down feature. The 2. Place the ignition in ACC/
express-down feature can be ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/ Express Window Anti-Pinch
canceled at any time by briefly START.
Override
pressing the switch. 3. From any open position, pull the
Express-Up Window
power window switch up until the
window is fully closed.
{ Warning
If equipped, the driver window 4. Hold the switch up for If express override is activated,
express-up feature allows the approximately two seconds after the window will not reverse
window to be raised without holding the window is fully closed. automatically. You or others could
the switch. Pull the window switch be injured and the window could
up fully and release it to activate the The window is now reprogrammed.
be damaged. Before you use
express-up feature. The express-up express override, make sure that
feature can be canceled at any time all people and obstructions are
by briefly pulling the switch.
clear of the window path.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The anti-pinch feature can be Window Lockout Rear Windows

overridden in a supervised mode.
Hold the window switch in the Power Sliding Rear Window
partially or fully pulled up position.
The window rises for as long as the
switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is
reactivated.
In this mode, the window can still
close on an object in its path. Use
care when using the override mode.
Crew/Double Cab Premium

Shown, Other Models Similar
Z (Window Lockout): The driver If equipped, the power sliding rear
door power window switch has a window works when the ignition has
lockout feature. This feature been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
prevents the rear windows from or ON/RUN, or when Retained
operating, except from the driver Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
position. Press the switch to engage See Retained Accessory Power
or disengage the lockout feature. An (RAP) on page 9-28.
indicator light on the switch will
come on when the lockout feature is
. Press the switch to open the
engaged, and will go off when window.
disengaged. . Pull the switch to close the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: window.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The power sliding rear window Roof Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To

cannot be operated manually. open the sunroof, press and hold
the rear of the SLIDE switch until
Sun Visors Sunroof the sunroof reaches the desired
position. Press and hold the front of
the SLIDE switch to close it
Express-Open/Express-Close: To
express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release the rear of the
SLIDE switch until the sunroof
reaches the desired position. To
express-close the sunroof, fully
press and release the front of the
SLIDE switch. Press the switch
Pull the sun visor down to block again to stop it.
glare. Detach the sun visor from the When the sunroof is opened, an air
center mount to pivot to the side deflector will automatically raise.
window or, if equipped, extend If equipped, the sunroof operates
The air deflector will retract when
along the rod. when the ignition is in ACC/
the sunroof is closed.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is The sunroof also has a sunshade,
active. See Retained Accessory which can be pulled forward to block
Power (RAP) on page 9-28. sun rays. The sunshade must be
opened and closed manually.
Vent: From the closed position,
press the rear of the TILT switch to If an object is in the path of the
vent the sunroof. sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
object and stop the sunroof.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof
tracks.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Head Restraints Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Child Restraints
Replacing Safety Belt System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Front Seats Infants and Young
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-43
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-22 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Heated and Cooled Front What Makes an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-57
How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 (Center Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Rear Seats (Double Cab Full
What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Rear Seats (Split Bench) . . . . . 3-11
Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-27 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-61
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicle’s front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
spinal injury in a crash. Do not top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
drive until the head restraints for height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
all occupants are installed and head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
adjusted properly.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
On some models, the head
restraints adjust forward and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: rearward. To adjust the head
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
restraint forward, grasp the head Front Seats To adjust a manual seat:
restraint and pull forward to the 1. Pull the handle at the front of
desired locking position. To adjust
the head restraint rearward, grasp Seat Adjustment the seat.
the head restraint and pull forward 2. Slide the seat to the desired
fully until the mechanism releases { Warning position and release the handle.
and allows the head restraint to 3. Try to move the seat back and
return to the full rear position. You can lose control of the
forth to be sure it is locked in
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver place.
The front seat outboard head
seat while the vehicle is moving.
restraints are not removable. To adjust the seatback, see
Adjust the driver seat only when
Rear Seats the vehicle is not moving. Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.
The rear seat has adjustable To adjust the lumbar support, see
headrests in the outboard seating Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.
positions.
Center Seat
The height of the headrest can be
adjusted. Pull the headrest up to If equipped, the center front
raise it. To lower the headrest, push seatback doubles as an armrest and
the headrest down. cupholder/storage area for the driver
and passenger when the center
If you are installing a child restraint front seat is not used. Do not use it
in the rear seat, see “Securing a as a seating position when the
Child Restraint Designed for the seatback is folded down.
LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-44.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

Power Seat Adjustment front part of the seat cushion by
Lumbar Adjustment
moving the front of the control Manual Lumbar
up or down.
seat by moving the rear of the
control up or down.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.
Some vehicles are equipped with a
feature that activates a vibrating
pulse alert in the driver seat to help
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
the driver avoid crashes. See Driver
. Move the seat forward or Assistance Systems on page 9-60. If equipped, move the lever up or
rearward by sliding the control down repeatedly to increase or
forward or rearward. decrease lumbar support.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Power Lumbar Press and hold the control down

to increase lower lumbar support Warning (Continued)
and decrease upper lumbar
support. For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
Reclining Seatbacks seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
To adjust the power lumbar support, The shoulder belt will not be
if equipped: against your body. Instead, it will
. Press and hold the control be in front of you. In a crash, you
forward to increase or rearward could go into it, receiving neck or
to decrease upper and lower other injuries.
lumbar support at the same time.
The lap belt could go up over
. If equipped, press and hold the your abdomen. The belt forces
control up to increase upper would be there, not at your pelvic Do not have a seatback reclined if
lumbar support and decrease bones. This could cause serious the vehicle is moving.
lower lumbar support. internal injuries.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Manual Reclining Seatbacks To adjust a manual seatback: Power Reclining Seatbacks

1. Lift the lever.
{ Warning The seatback will automatically
If either seatback is not locked, it fold forward.
could move forward in a sudden 2. To recline, move the seatback
stop or crash. That could cause rearward to the desired position,
injury to the person sitting there. then release the lever to lock the
Always push and pull on the seatback in place.
seatbacks to be sure they are 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
locked. make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without To recline a power seatback,
applying pressure to the if equipped:
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Memory Seats Storing Memory Positions Manually Recalling Memory

To save positions to the “1” and “2” Positions
buttons: If the vehicle is OFF or not in
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside P (Park), press and hold "1," "2," or
mirrors, and adjustable pedals (if B to manually recall the previously
equipped) to the desired driving stored memory positions. Releasing
positions. "1,” "2," or B before the stored
positions are reached stops the
2. Press and release SET. A beep recall.
will sound.
If the vehicle is ON and in P (Park),
3. Immediately press and hold “1”
until two beeps sound. press and release “1,” “2,” or B to
manually recall the previously
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a stored memory positions. Placing
Crew/Double Cab Shown, Other second driver using “2.” the ignition in OFF/LOCK before the
Models Similar stored positions are reached stops
To save positions to the B (Exit)
If memory equipped, the SET, "1," button and easy exit features: the recall.
"2," and B (Exit) buttons on the Automatically Recalling Memory
1. Adjust the driver seat, adjustable
driver door are used to manually pedals (if equipped), and the Positions (Auto Memory Recall)
save and recall memory settings for outside mirrors on some vehicles
the driver seat, outside mirrors, and The Auto (Automatic) Memory
to the desired positions for Recall feature automatically recalls
adjustable pedals (if equipped). getting out of the vehicle. the current driver’s previously stored
2. Press and release SET. A beep “1” or “2” position when entering the
will sound. vehicle.
3. Immediately press and hold B

until twoInfobeeps
r
mat
ionPr sound.
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the Auto Memory Recall feature Easy Exit Recall recall may stop. Remove the
is enabled in the vehicle If programmed on in the vehicle obstruction. Then do one of the
personalization menu, memory “1” personalization menu, the easy exit following:
or “2” positions are recalled in the feature automatically moves the . If manually recalling the position,
following ways: driver seat, adjustable pedals (if press and hold the appropriate
. Press K on the RKE transmitter equipped), and outside mirrors on manual control for the memory
and open the driver door. some vehicles to the memory item that is not recalling for
positions saved to the B (Exit) two seconds. Try recalling again
. Press K on the RKE transmitter button. See “Storing Memory by pressing the appropriate
when the driver door is Positions” listed previously. See memory button.
already open. also Vehicle Personalization on . If automatically recalling the
See Vehicle Personalization on page 5-47. position, press and hold the
page 5-47. Easy exit recall automatically appropriate manual control for
activates when one of the following the memory item that is not
To stop recall movement, press one
occurs: recalling for two seconds. Try
of the memory, power mirror or
power seat controls; or press the recalling again by opening the
. The vehicle is turned off and the
adjustable pedal control (if driver door and pressing K on
driver door is opened within a
equipped). short time. the RKE transmitter.
RKE Transmitters are not labeled . The vehicle is turned off with the
. If recalling the exit position,
with a number. If your memory seat driver door open. press and hold the appropriate
position is stored to "1" or "2" but manual control for the exit
this position is not automatically Obstructions feature not recalling for
recalling, then change the stored If something has blocked the driver two seconds. Then try recalling
position or switch RKE transmitters seat and/or adjustable pedals while the exit position again.
with the other driver. recalling a memory position, the If the memory position is still not
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Heated and Cooled Front The indicator light on the button

comes on when this feature is on.
Seats
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
{ Warning the button, the seat will change to
If you cannot feel temperature the next lower setting, and then to
change or pain to the skin, the the off setting. The indicator lights
seat heater may cause burns. To next to the buttons indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
reduce the risk of burns, people
lowest. If the heated seats are on
with such a condition should use
high for an extended time, their level
care when using the seat heater,
may automatically be lowered.
especially for long periods of Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
time. Do not place anything on Shown, Heated Seat Buttons Remote Start Auto Heated and
the seat that insulates against Cooled Seats
Similar
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, During a remote start, the heated or
cover, or similar item. This may If equipped, the buttons are on the cooled seats can be turned on
cause the seat heater to center stack. To operate, the engine automatically. When it is cold
overheat. An overheated seat must be running. outside, the heated seats turn on,
heater may cause a burn or may Press I to heat the driver or and when it is hot outside the
damage the seat. passenger seatback only. cooled seats turn on. The heated or
cooled seats are canceled when the
Press J to heat the driver or ignition is turned on. Press the
passenger seat cushion and heated or cooled seat button to use
seatback. the heated or cooled seats after the
vehicle is started.
Press A to cool the driver or
passenger Inseat.
for
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The heated or cooled seat indicator Rear Seats

lights do not turn on during a remote
start.
Rear Seats (Double Cab
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
Full Bench)
This is normal. Folding the Rear Seat
The heated or cooled seats will not
turn on during a remote start unless { Caution
they are enabled in the vehicle
personalization menu. See Remote Folding a rear seat with the safety
Vehicle Start on page 2-6 and belts still fastened may cause
Vehicle Personalization on damage to the seat or the safety
page 5-47. belts. Always unbuckle the safety To fold the seat:
belts and return them to their 1. Pull up on the front of the seat
normal stowed position before cushion while pulling down on
folding a rear seat. the release strap loop under the
seat cushion.
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it
latches with the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the seat cushion
to make sure it is locked in
place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To unfold the seat: Rear Seats (Split Bench)

1. Push the seat cushion rearward
while pulling the release strap
Folding Rear Seat
loop under the seat cushion. Pull Either side of the rear seat can be
the seat cushion down until it folded for added cargo space.
latches.
2. Pull up on the seat cushion to { Caution
make sure it is locked in place.
Folding a rear seat with the safety
Make sure the safety belts are belts still fastened may cause
not twisted or caught in the seat damage to the seat or the safety
cushion. belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat
{ Warning normal stowed position before cushion up.
folding a rear seat. To return the seat to the normal
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached, seating position, slowly pull the seat
Make sure that nothing is on the cushion down.
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The seat cushion. Make sure the safety belts are not
person wearing the belt could be twisted or caught in the seat
seriously injured. After raising the cushion.
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
{ Warning Safety Belts Warning (Continued)

This section of the manual
A safety belt that is improperly describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
routed, not properly attached, properly. It also describes some injured or killed. Do not allow
or twisted will not provide the things not to do with safety belts. passengers to ride in any area of
protection needed in a crash. The the vehicle that is not equipped
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
{ Warning with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
rear seatback, always check to be Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
sure that the safety belts are safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
properly routed and attached, and properly. In a crash, if you or your
are not twisted. passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much This vehicle has indicators as a
worse than if you are wearing reminder to buckle the safety belts.
safety belts. You can be seriously See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5-17.
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle may have the Safety
being ejected from the vehicle. In Belt Assurance System, which may
addition, anyone who is not prevent the vehicle from shifting out
buckled up can strike other of P (Park). See Safety Belt
passengers in the vehicle. Messages on page 5-42.
It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3-36 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 3-38.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
There are important things to know would apply force on your Lap-Shoulder Belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. If the vehicle is a regular cab, then
all seating positions in the vehicle
. Wear the shoulder belt over the have a lap-shoulder belt. If the
shoulder and across the chest. vehicle is a double or crew cab,
These parts of the body are best then all seating positions in the
able to take belt restraining vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt
forces. The shoulder belt locks if except for the center front
there is a sudden stop or crash. passenger position (if equipped),
which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt
{ Warning on page 3-18 for more information.
You can be seriously injured, The following instructions explain
or even killed, by not wearing how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
your safety belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
. Never allow the lap or
your feet on the floor in front adjustable, so you can sit up
of you. shoulder belt to become
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
loose or twisted.
. Always use the correct buckle in the Index.
for your seating position.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
. Never route the lap or
this applies force to the strong shoulder belt over an
pelvic bones and you would be armrest.
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. For the driver and front outboard 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go seating positions on light duty buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. vehicles and the center seating Pull up on the latch plate to
position (if equipped) on crew make sure it is secure. If the belt
Engaging the child restraint cab and double cab models,
locking feature may affect the is not long enough, see Safety
if the webbing locks in the latch Belt Extender on page 3-19.
passenger sensing system, plate before it reaches the
if equipped. See Passenger buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to Position the release button on
Sensing System on page 3-29 unlock. the buckle so that the safety belt
for more information. could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Adjust the height so the shoulder

height adjuster, move it to the portion of the belt is on the shoulder
height that is right for you. See and not falling off of it. The belt
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster” should be close to, but not
later in this section for contacting, the neck. Improper
instructions on use and shoulder belt height adjustment
important safety information. could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3-13.
To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
Push down on the release button to
height adjuster for the driver and
move the height adjuster to the
front outboard passenger.
desired position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Move the adjuster up by pushing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
After the adjuster is set to the Pretensioners work only once. If the
desired position, try to move it down pretensioners activate in a crash,
without pushing the release button they will need to be replaced, and
to make sure it has locked into the vehicle's safety belt system will
position. probably need other new parts. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
Safety Belt Pretensioners after a Crash on page 3-20.
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard Rear Safety Belt Comfort
occupants. Although the safety belt Guides
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly. { Warning
They can help tighten the safety
A safety belt that is not properly Rear safety belt comfort guides may
belts during the early stages of a
worn may not provide the provide added safety belt comfort
moderate to severe frontal, near
protection needed in a crash. The for older children who have
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
person wearing the belt could be outgrown booster seats and for
conditions for pretensioner
some adults. When installed on a
activation are met. And, if your seriously injured. The shoulder
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
vehicle has side impact airbags, belt should go over the shoulder
positions the shoulder belt away
safety belt pretensioners can help and across the chest. These parts from the neck and head.
tighten the safety belts in a side of the body are best able to take
crash. If the vehicle has rollover belt restraining forces. Adjustable comfort guides are
roof-rail airbags, safety belt available through your dealer for the
pretensioners can help tighten the rear outboard seating positions.
safety belts in a rollover event. Instructions are included with the
guide.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
page 3-14. plate and pull it along the belt.
The vehicle may have a center Buckle, position, and release it the
seating position with a lap safety same way as the lap part of a
belt. The lap safety belt does not lap-shoulder belt.
have a retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a

lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
But if a safety belt is not long crash. They can rip apart under
enough, your dealer will order you impact forces. If a belt is torn or
an extender. When you go in to frayed, get a new one right away.
order it, take the heaviest coat you Make sure the safety belt reminder
will wear, so the extender will be light is working. See Safety Belt
long enough for you. To help avoid Reminders on page 5-17.
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the Keep safety belts clean and dry.
seat it is made to fit. The extender See Safety Belt Care on page 3-19.
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To Safety Belt Care
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
Keep belts clean and dry.
belt. See the instruction sheet that
To make the belt shorter, pull its free comes with the extender.
end as shown until the belt is snug. { Warning
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety System Check Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender on page 3-19.
Now and then, check that the safety It may severely weaken them. In
Make sure the release button on the belt reminder light, safety belts, a crash, they might not be able to
buckle is positioned so you would buckles, latch plates, retractors, and provide adequate protection.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt anchorages are all working properly. Clean safety belts only with mild
quickly if necessary. Look for any other loose or soap and lukewarm water.
damaged safety belt system parts
Safety Belt Extender that might keep a safety belt system
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten from doing its job. See your dealer
around you, you should use it. to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ Warning See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. outboard passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be The vehicle may have the following
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbags:
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the driver.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners . A seat-mounted side impact
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the front outboard
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light passenger.
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5-18. and the passenger seated
possible. directly behind the driver.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
person seated directly behind
the front outboard passenger.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things
have the word AIRBAG on the trim to know about the airbag system: { Warning
or on a label near the deployment
Because airbags inflate with great
opening. { Warning force and faster than the blink of
For frontal airbags, the word an eye, anyone who is up
AIRBAG is on the center of the You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any
steering wheel for the driver and on airbag when it inflates can be
the instrument panel for the front wearing your safety belt, even
with airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not
outboard passenger.
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any
For seat-mounted side impact airbag, as you would be if sitting
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the on the edge of the seat or leaning
airbags are not designed to inflate
seatback closest to the door. forward. Safety belts help keep
in every crash. In some crashes
For roof-rail airbags, the word safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear a safety
Inflate? on page 3-24. belt, even with airbags. The driver
Airbags are designed to supplement
should sit as far back as possible
the protection provided by safety Wearing your safety belt during a
belts. Even though today's airbags while still maintaining control of
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle.
are also designed to help reduce
hitting things inside the vehicle or
the risk of injury from the force of an Occupants should not lean on or
being ejected from it. Airbags are
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate sleep against the door or side
very quickly to do their job. “supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly, whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Where Are the Airbags?

{ Warning
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Always secure children
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on
page 3-36 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3-38.
The front outboard passenger

frontal airbag is in the passenger
The driver frontal airbag is in the side instrument panel.
center of the steering wheel.
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-18 for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
more information.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Crew Cab Shown, airbag covering.
Side Similar Passenger Side Double and Do not use seat accessories that
If the vehicle has seat-mounted side Regular Cabs Similar block the inflation path of a
impact airbags for the driver and If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags seat-mounted side impact airbag.
front outboard passenger, they are for the driver, front outboard Never secure anything to the roof
in the side of the seatbacks closest passenger, and second row of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
to the door. outboard passengers, they are in by routing a rope or tie‐down
the ceiling above the side windows. through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
{ Warning inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr dedby:(Continued)
ovi
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the have a seat position sensor that
direction of the impact, and how enables the sensing system to
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down. monitor the position of the driver
This vehicle is equipped with Frontal airbags may inflate at seat. The seat position sensor
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on provides information that is used to
page 3-20. Airbags are designed to whether the vehicle hits an object adjust the deployment of the driver
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and frontal airbag.
specific airbag system's deployment whether the object is fixed or If the GVWR is at or below 4 536 kg
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow (10,000 lb), the vehicle has
are used to predict how severe a or wide. seat-mounted side impact airbags.
crash is likely to be in time for the Vehicles with a GVWR above
airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, in 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may not
the occupants. The vehicle has have seat-mounted side impact
electronic sensors which help the rear impacts, or in many side
impacts. airbags. Seat-mounted side impact
airbag system determine the airbags, if equipped, are designed
severity of the impact. Deployment In addition, if the GVWR (Gross to inflate in moderate to severe side
thresholds can vary with specific Vehicle Weight Rating) is at or crashes depending on the location
vehicle design. below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb), the of the impact. Seat-mounted side
Frontal airbags are designed to vehicle has advanced technology impact airbags are not designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal frontal airbags. You can find the inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal
or near frontal crashes to help GVWR on the Certification/Tire label impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
reduce the potential for severe on the center pillar of the vehicle. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
injuries, mainly to the driver's or See Vehicle Load Limits on is designed to inflate on the side of
front outboard passenger's head page 9-15 for more information. the vehicle that is struck.
and chest. Advanced technology frontal airbags Vehicles with a GVWR at or below
Whether the frontal airbags will or adjust the restraint according to 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) have roof-rail
should inflate is not based primarily crash severity. Vehicles with airbags. These roof-rail airbags are
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. advanced technology frontal airbags designed to inflate in moderate to
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
severe side crashes depending on roof-rail airbags are rollover capable. If the airbags are rollover
the location of the impact. In capable, both roof-rail airbags will capable, both roof-rail airbags will
addition, these roof-rail airbags are also inflate if the sensing system also inflate if the sensing system
designed to inflate during a rollover predicts that the vehicle is about to predicts that the vehicle is about to
or in a severe frontal impact. The roll over on its side. The roof-rail roll over on its side. The roof-rail
roof-rail airbags are not designed to airbags are not designed to inflate in airbags are not designed to inflate in
inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail rear impacts. rear impacts.
airbags will inflate when either side Vehicles with a GVWR above In any particular crash, no one can
of the vehicle is struck or if the 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may not say whether an airbag should have
sensing system predicts that the be equipped with roof-rail airbags. inflated simply because of the
vehicle is about to roll over on its These roof-rail airbags, if equipped, vehicle damage or repair costs.
side, or in a severe frontal impact. are designed to inflate in moderate
Vehicles with a GVWR above to severe side crashes depending What Makes an Airbag
3 855 kg (8,500 lb) up to and on the location of the impact. Both
including 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) also roof-rail airbags will inflate when
Inflate?
have roof-rail airbags. These either side of the vehicle is struck. In a deployment event, the sensing
roof-rail airbags are designed to In addition, these roof-rail airbags system sends an electrical signal
inflate in moderate to severe side are designed to inflate in a severe triggering a release of gas from the
crashes depending on the location frontal impact. If the vehicle has inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
of the impact. Both roof-rail airbags single rear wheels and has a airbag causing the bag to break out
will inflate when either side of the factory-installed pickup box and of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
vehicle is struck. In addition, these roof-rail airbags, the roof-rail airbags and related hardware are all part of
roof-rail airbags are designed to are rollover capable. If the vehicle the airbag module.
inflate in a severe frontal impact. has dual rear wheels, or is sold as For airbag locations, see Where Are
The roof-rail airbags are also an incomplete vehicle, as a chassis the Airbags? on page 3-22.
rollover capable except on models cab, or with the pickup box
sold as an incomplete vehicle with removed, and has roof-rail airbags,
the pickup box removed. If the the roof-railInfoairbags
r
mat
ionPr
ovi
deare
dby: not rollover
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many be some smoke and dust coming
types of collisions, primarily from the vents in the deflated
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is airbags. Airbag inflation does not
In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When prevent the driver from seeing out of
near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on the windshield or being able to steer
occupants can contact the steering page 3-24. the vehicle, nor does it prevent
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded people from leaving the vehicle.
moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
to safety belts. { Warning
When an airbag inflates, there
Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after may be dust in the air. This dust
provided by safety belts by an Airbag Inflates?
distributing the force of the impact could cause breathing problems
more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and for people with a history of
occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags asthma or other breathing trouble.
inflate, they quickly deflate, so To avoid this, everyone in the
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
quickly that some people may not vehicle should get out as soon as
are designed to help contain the
even realize an airbag inflated. it is safe to do so. If you have
head and chest of occupants in the
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least breathing problems but cannot
outboard seating positions in the
partially inflated for some time after get out of the vehicle after an
first and second rows. The rollover
they inflate. Some components of airbag inflates, then get fresh air
capable roof-rail airbags are
the airbag module may be hot for by opening a window or a door.
designed to help reduce the risk of
several minutes. For location of the If you experience breathing
full or partial ejection in rollover
airbags, see Where Are the problems following an airbag
events, although no system can
Airbags? on page 3-22. deployment, you should seek
prevent all such ejections.
The parts of the airbag that come medical attention.
into contact with you may be warm,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
but not too hot to touch. There may
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The vehicle has a feature that may other parts. The service manual
automatically unlock the doors, turn Warning (Continued) for the vehicle covers the need
on the interior lamps and hazard to replace other parts.
warning flashers, and shut off the concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
fuel system after the airbags inflate. and diagnostic module which
The feature may also activate, the vehicle.
records information after a
without airbag inflation, after an Use caution if you should attempt crash. See Vehicle Data
event that exceeds a predetermined to restart the engine after a crash Recording and Privacy on
threshold. You can lock the doors, has occurred. page 13-14 and Event Data
and turn off the interior lamps, and Recorders on page 13-14.
turn off the hazard warning flashers
by using the controls for those In many crashes severe enough to . Let only qualified technicians
features. inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
Additional windshield breakage may
{ Warning also occur from the front outboard
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
A crash severe enough to inflate passenger airbag. service.
the airbags may have also . Airbags are designed to inflate
damaged important functions in only once. After an airbag Airbag On-Off Switch
the vehicle, such as the fuel inflates, you will need some new If the passenger side instrument
system, brake and steering parts for the airbag system. panel endcap has the switch
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle If you do not get them, the pictured in the following illustration,
appears to be drivable after a airbag system will not be there the vehicle has an airbag on-off
moderate crash, there may be to help protect you in another switch that you can use to manually
crash. A new system will include turn on or off the front outboard
(Continued) airbag modules and possibly passenger frontal airbag. See
Instrument Panel on page 1-2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. The infant has a medical Medical Condition. A passenger
condition which, according to the has a medical condition which,
infant's physician, makes it according to his or her physician:
necessary for the infant to ride in
the front seat so that the driver
. Causes the passenger airbag to
can constantly monitor the pose a special risk for the
child's condition. passenger; and
. Makes the potential harm from
Child age 1 to 12. A child
the passenger airbag in a crash
age 1 to 12 must ride in the front
If the vehicle does not have an greater than the potential harm
seat because:
airbag on-off switch, it may have a from turning off the airbag and
passenger sensing system. See
. My vehicle has no rear seat; allowing the passenger, even if
Passenger Sensing System on . Although children ages 1 to 12 belted, to hit the instrument
page 3-29. ride in the rear seat(s) whenever panel or windshield in a crash.
possible, children ages 1 to 12
This switch should only be turned to
the off position if the person in the
sometimes must ride in the front { Warning
because no space is available in
front outboard passenger position is If the front outboard passenger
the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
a member of a passenger risk group frontal airbag is turned off for a
identified by the national . The child has a medical person who is not in a risk group
government as follows: condition which, according to the
identified by the national
child's physician, makes it
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year necessary for the child to ride in government, that person will not
old) must ride in the front seat the front seat so that the driver have the extra protection of an
because: can constantly monitor the airbag. In a crash, the airbag will
. My vehicle has no rear seat; child's condition. not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there.
. My vehicle has a rear seat too
small to accommodate a (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
rear-facing infant seat; or
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
frontal airbag is off, after the system

Warning (Continued) check is completed. The airbag off
light will come on and stay on to let
Do not turn off the front outboard you know that the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag unless passenger frontal airbag is off. See
the person sitting there is in a risk Airbag On-Off Light on page 5-18.
group.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever To turn the front outboard passenger
comes on and stays on, it means frontal airbag on again, insert the
that something may be wrong ignition key into the switch, push in,
with the airbag system. For and move the switch to the on
example, the front outboard position.
passenger frontal airbag could The front outboard passenger
inflate even though the airbag frontal airbag is now enabled
on-off switch is turned off. (may inflate). See Airbag On-Off
To turn off the front outboard To help avoid injury to yourself or Light on page 5-18.
passenger frontal airbag, insert the others, have the vehicle serviced
ignition key into the switch, push in, right away. See Airbag Readiness Passenger Sensing
and move the switch to the off Light on page 5-18 for more System
position. information, including important If the vehicle has one of the
The word OFF or the off symbol will safety information. following indicators, then the vehicle
come on in the passenger airbag has a passenger sensing system for
status indicator located in the the front outboard passenger
overhead console to let you know position, unless there is an airbag
that the front outboard passenger I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
on-off switch on the instrument
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
panel endcap. If there is an airbag word ON or OFF, or the symbol for Never put a rear-facing child seat in
on-off switch, the vehicle does not on or off, will be visible. See the front. This is because the risk to
have a passenger sensing system. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator the rear-facing child is so great,
See Airbag On-Off Switch on on page 5-20. if the airbag deploys.
page 3-27 for more information. The passenger sensing system
The passenger airbag status turns off the front outboard { Warning
indicator will light on the overhead passenger frontal airbag under
console when the vehicle is started. certain conditions. No other airbag A child in a rear-facing child
is affected by the passenger restraint can be seriously injured
sensing system. or killed if the passenger frontal
airbag inflates. This is because
The passenger sensing system the back of the rear-facing child
works with sensors that are part of
restraint would be very close to
the front outboard passenger seat
the inflating airbag. A child in a
and safety belt. The sensors are
designed to detect the presence of forward-facing child restraint can
United States be seriously injured or killed if the
a properly seated occupant and
determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates
passenger frontal airbag should be and the passenger seat is in a
allowed to inflate or not. forward position.
According to accident statistics, Even if the passenger sensing
children are safer when properly system has turned off the
secured in a rear seat in the correct passenger frontal airbag, no
Canada and Mexico child restraint for their weight system is fail-safe. No one can
The words ON and OFF, or the and size. guarantee that an airbag will not
symbol for on and off, will be visible Whenever possible, children age (Continued)
during the system check. When the 12 and under should be secured in
system check is complete, either the a rear seatingInposition.
f
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. The system determines an infant For some children, including
Warning (Continued) is present in a child restraint. children in child restraints, and for
. A front outboard passenger very small adults, the passenger
inflate under some unusual sensing system may or may not turn
takes his/her weight off of the
circumstance, even though the off the front outboard passenger
seat for a period of time.
airbag is off. frontal airbag, depending upon the
. There is a critical problem with person's seating posture and body
Secure rear-facing child restraints the airbag system or the
in a rear seat, even if the airbag build. Everyone in the vehicle who
passenger sensing system. has outgrown child restraints should
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in When the passenger sensing wear a safety belt
the front outboard passenger system has turned off the front properly — whether or not there is
seat, always move the seat as far outboard passenger frontal airbag, an airbag for that person.
back as it will go. It is better to the off indicator will light and stay lit
secure the child restraint in a
as a reminder that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
{ Warning
rear seat.
Indicator on page 5-20. If the airbag readiness light ever
The passenger sensing system is comes on and stays on, it means
If the vehicle does not have a rear designed to turn on the front that something may be wrong
seat that will accommodate a outboard passenger frontal airbag with the airbag system. To help
rear-facing child restraint, a anytime the system senses that a avoid injury to yourself or others,
rear-facing child restraint should not person of adult size is sitting have the vehicle serviced right
be installed in the vehicle, even if properly in the front outboard away. See Airbag Readiness
the airbag is off. passenger seat. Light on page 5-18 for more
The passenger sensing system is When the passenger sensing information, including important
designed to turn off the front system has allowed the airbag to be safety information.
outboard passenger frontal airbag if: enabled, the on indicator will light
. The front outboard passenger and stay litInas
f
or
aionreminder
mat Pr
ovi
dedby:
that the
seat is unoccupied. airbag is active.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Seat) on page 3-61. Even if the The passenger sensing system may
Child Restraint child restraint is equipped with a or may not turn off the airbag for a
safety belt lock-off, make sure child in a child restraint depending
The passenger sensing system is the safety belt retractor is locked upon the child’s size. It is better to
designed to turn off the front by pulling the shoulder belt all secure the child restraint in a
outboard passenger frontal airbag if the way out of the retractor rear seat.
the system determines that an infant before tightening the safety belt.
is present in a child restraint. If a When the retractor lock is set, If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
child restraint has been installed the belt can be tightened but not Adult-Sized Occupant
and the on indicator is lit: pulled out of the retractor.
1. Turn the vehicle off. 5. If, after reinstalling the child
2. Remove the child restraint from restraint and restarting the
the vehicle. vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
3. Remove any additional items
recline the vehicle seatback and
from the seat such as blankets,
adjust the seat cushion,
cushions, seat covers, seat
if adjustable, to make sure that
heaters, or seat massagers.
the vehicle seatback is not
4. Reinstall the child restraint pushing the child restraint into
following the directions provided the seat cushion.
by the child restraint
Also make sure the child
manufacturer and refer to
restraint is not trapped under the
Securing Child Restraints If a person of adult size is sitting in
vehicle head restraint. If this
(Center Front Seat) on the front outboard passenger seat,
happens, adjust the head
page 3-57 or Securing Child but the off indicator is lit, it could be
restraint. See Head Restraints
Restraints (Rear Seat) on because that person is not sitting
on page 3-2.
page 3-57 or Securing Child
Restraints (Front Passenger 6. Restart theInfovehicle.
rmat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
properly in the seat or that the child 5. If the shoulder portion of the belt
restraint locking feature is engaged. is pulled out all the way, the Warning (Continued)
If this happens, use the following child restraint locking feature will
steps to allow the system to detect be engaged. This may serious injury or even death. An
that person and enable the front unintentionally cause the adult-sized occupant should not
outboard passenger frontal airbag: passenger sensing system to ride in the front outboard
turn the airbag off for some passenger seat, if the passenger
1. Turn the vehicle off. airbag off indicator is lit.
adult-sized occupants. If this
2. Remove any additional material happens, unbuckle the belt, let
from the seat, such as blankets, the belt go back all the way, and
cushions, seat covers, seat
Additional Factors Affecting
then buckle the belt again
heaters, or seat massagers. System Operation
without pulling the belt out all
3. Place the seatback in the fully the way. Safety belts help keep the
upright position. passenger in position on the seat
6. Restart the vehicle and have the
during vehicle maneuvers and
4. Have the person sit upright in person remain in this position for
braking, which helps the passenger
the seat, centered on the seat two to three minutes after the on
sensing system maintain the
cushion, with legs comfortably indicator is lit.
passenger airbag status. See
extended. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
{ Warning in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
If the front outboard passenger proper restraint use.
airbag is turned off for an
adult-sized occupant, the airbag A thick layer of additional material,
will not be able to inflate and help such as a blanket or cushion,
protect that person in a crash, or aftermarket equipment such as
resulting in an increased risk of seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued) passenger sensing system
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
operates. We recommend that you Servicing the Warning (Continued)

not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
approved by GM for your specific Airbags affect how the vehicle proper service procedures, and
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to should be serviced. There are parts make sure the person performing
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on of the airbag system in several work for you is qualified to do so.
page 3-34 for more information places around the vehicle. Your
about modifications that can affect dealer and the service manual have Adding Equipment to the
how the system operates. information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase, purchase a service manual, see Adding accessories that change the
handbag, grocery bag, laptop, Service Publications Ordering vehicle's frame, bumper system,
or other electronic device, is put on Information on page 13-11. height, front end, or side sheet
an unoccupied seat. If this is not metal, may keep the airbag system
desired, remove the object from { Warning from working properly. The
the seat. operation of the airbag system can
For up to 10 seconds after the also be affected by changing or
vehicle is turned off and the
{ Warning battery is disconnected, an airbag
moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and
Stowing of articles under the can still inflate during improper diagnostic module, steering wheel,
passenger seat or between the service. You can be injured if you instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
passenger seat cushion and are close to an airbag when it modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
seatback may interfere with the inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. garnish trim, overhead console,
They are probably part of the front sensors, side impact sensors,
proper operation of the passenger
airbag system. Be sure to follow or airbag wiring.
sensing system.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Your dealer and the service manual turning off the passenger airbag(s). vehicle is modified for any other
have information about the location See Passenger Sensing System on reason, call Customer Assistance.
of the airbag sensors, sensing and page 3-29. See Customer Assistance Offices
diagnostic module, and airbag If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail on page 13-3.
wiring. airbags, see Different Size Tires
In addition, the vehicle may have a and Wheels on page 10-74 for Airbag System Check
passenger sensing system for the additional important information. The airbag system does not need
front outboard passenger position, If a snow plow is added to the regularly scheduled maintenance or
which includes sensors that are part vehicle, the airbags should still work replacement. Make sure the airbag
of the passenger seat. The properly. The airbag systems were readiness light is working. See
passenger sensing system may not designed to work properly under a Airbag Readiness Light on
operate properly if the original seat wide range of conditions, including page 5-18.
trim is replaced with non-GM snow plowing with vehicles that
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
GM covers, upholstery, or trim
have the optional snow plow prep { Caution
package (RPO VYU). Do not
designed for a different vehicle. Any change or defeat the snow plow's If an airbag covering is damaged,
object, such as an aftermarket seat “tripping mechanism.” If you do, it opened, or broken, the airbag
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad can damage the snow plow and the may not work properly. Do not
or device, installed under or on top vehicle, and may cause an airbag open or break the airbag
of the seat fabric, could also deployment. coverings. If there are any
interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This If you have to modify your vehicle opened or broken airbag
could either prevent proper because you have a disability and coverings, have the airbag
deployment of the passenger you have questions about whether covering and/or airbag module
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger the modifications will affect the replaced. For the location of the
sensing system from properly vehicle's airbag system, or if you airbags, see Where Are the
have questions about whether the Airbags? on page 3-22. See your
airbag system
Inf
or will
mat
ionPr
ovbe
i affected
dedby: if the dealer for service.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ Warning after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
not work properly and may not
page 5-18.
protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The manufacturer instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, page 3-14.
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,
lap-shoulder belt until the child If you have the choice, a child children are safer when properly
passes the fit test below: should sit in a position with a restrained in a rear seating position.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder In a crash, children who are not
Do the knees bend at the seat buckled up can strike other people
edge? If yes, continue. If no, belt can provide.
who are buckled up, or can be
return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to thrown out of the vehicle. Older
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. wear safety belts? children need to use safety belts
Does the shoulder belt rest on A: An older child should wear a properly.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. lap-shoulder belt and get the
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide, if available.
additional restraint a shoulder { Warning
belt can provide. The shoulder
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort belt should not cross the face or Never allow more than one child
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt neck. The lap belt should fit to wear the same safety belt. The
on page 3-14. If a comfort guide snugly below the hips, just safety belt cannot properly spread
is not available, or if the touching the top of the thighs. the impact forces. In a crash, they
shoulder belt still does not rest This applies belt force to the can be crushed together and
on the shoulder, then return to child's pelvic bones in a crash. seriously injured. A safety belt
the booster seat. It should never be worn over the must be used by only one person
. Does the lap belt fit low and abdomen, which could cause at a time.
snug on the hips, touching the severe or even fatal internal
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, injuries in a crash.
return to the booster seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
{ Warning restrained while in a vehicle.
Never allow a child to wear the

safety belt with the shoulder belt
{ Warning
behind their back. A child can be Children can be seriously injured
seriously injured by not wearing or strangled if a shoulder belt is
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a wrapped around their neck. The
crash, the child would not be shoulder belt can tighten but
restrained by the shoulder belt. cannot be loosened if it is locked.
The child could move too far The shoulder belt locks when it is
forward increasing the chance of pulled all the way out of the
head and neck injury. The child retractor. It unlocks when the
might also slide under the lap shoulder belt is allowed to go all
(Continued) (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued) { Warning

the way back into the retractor, Never hold an infant or a child
but it cannot do this if it is while riding in a vehicle. Due to
wrapped around a child’s neck. crash forces, an infant or a child
If the shoulder belt is locked and will become so heavy it is not
tightened around a child’s neck, possible to hold it during a crash.
the only way to loosen the belt is For example, in a crash at only
to cut it. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
Never leave children unattended infant will suddenly become a
in a vehicle and never allow 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
children to play with the safety arms. An infant should be
belts. secured in an appropriate { Warning
restraint.
Children who are up against,
Every time infants and young or very close to, any airbag when
children ride in vehicles, they should it inflates can be seriously injured
have the protection provided by or killed. Never put a rear-facing
appropriate child restraints. Neither child restraint in the front
the vehicle's safety belt system nor outboard seat. Secure a
its airbag system is designed rear-facing child restraint in a rear
for them. seat. It is also better to secure a
Children who are not restrained forward-facing child restraint in a
properly can strike other people, rear seat. If you must secure a
or can be thrown out of the vehicle. forward-facing child restraint in
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
weight, height, and age but also

Warning (Continued) whether or not the restraint will { Warning
be compatible with the motor
the front outboard seat, always vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and
move the front passenger seat as head injury during a crash, infants
far back as it will go. For most basic types of child need complete support. In a
restraints, there are many
crash, if an infant is in a
different models available. When
rear-facing child restraint, the
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in crash forces can be distributed
a motor vehicle. If it is, the across the strongest part of an
restraint will have a label saying infant's body, the back and
that it meets federal motor shoulders. Infants should always
vehicle safety standards. be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
The restraint manufacturer
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
{ Warning
are many kinds of restraints A young child's hip bones are still
available for children with so small that the vehicle's regular
Q: What are the different types of
special needs. safety belt may not remain low on
add-on child restraints?
the hip bones, as it should.
A: Add-on child restraints, which Instead, it may settle up around
are purchased by the vehicle the child's abdomen. In a crash,
owner, are available in four basic
the belt would apply force on a
types. Selection of a particular
body area that is unprotected by
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Forward-Facing Child Seat

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ Warning When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly
(LATCH System) on page 3-44. use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: Highway Traffic Safety
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children age

locate the nearest child safety seat 12 and under should be secured in { Warning
inspection station. For CPST a rear seating position.
availability in Canada, check with A child in a rear-facing child
If a child restraint is secured in the restraint can be seriously injured
Transport Canada or the Provincial front outboard passenger seat, and
Ministry of Transportation office. or killed if the front outboard
the vehicle has a switch on the passenger frontal airbag inflates.
Securing the Child Within the passenger side instrument panel This is because the back of the
Child Restraint endcap to manually turn off the front rear-facing child restraint would
outboard passenger airbag, see
be very close to the inflating
Airbag On-Off Switch on page 3-27
{ Warning and Securing Child Restraints
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
(Center Front Seat) on page 3-57 or child restraint can be seriously
A child can be seriously injured or injured or killed if the front
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
killed in a crash if the child is not outboard passenger frontal airbag
Seat) on page 3-57 or Securing
properly secured in the child inflates and the passenger seat is
Child Restraints (Front Passenger
restraint. Secure the child Seat) on page 3-61 for more in a forward position.
properly following the instructions information, including important
that came with that child restraint. Even if the passenger sensing
safety information. system or airbag switch has
Never put a rear-facing child seat in turned off the front outboard
Where to Put the the front. This is because the risk to passenger frontal airbag, no
Restraint the rear-facing child is so great, system is fail-safe. No one can
if the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not
According to accident statistics, deploy under some unusual
children and infants are safer when circumstance, even though it is
properly restrained in a child turned off.
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
position.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Do not use child restraints in the rear-facing child restraint should not
Warning (Continued) center front seat position. be installed in the vehicle, even if
When securing a child restraint in a the airbag is off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag rear seating position, study the Wherever a child restraint is
is off. If you secure a instructions that came with your installed, be sure to secure the child
forward-facing child restraint in child restraint to make sure it is restraint properly.
the front outboard passenger compatible with this vehicle. Keep in mind that an unsecured
seat, always move the front Child restraints and booster seats child restraint can move around in a
outboard passenger seat as far vary considerably in size, and some collision or sudden stop and injure
back as it will go. It is better to may fit in certain seating positions people in the vehicle. Be sure to
secure the child restraint in a better than others. Always make properly secure any child restraint in
rear seat. sure the child restraint is properly your vehicle — even when no child
secured. is in it.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the Lower Anchors and
{ Warning child restraint, you may not be able Tethers for Children
A child in a child restraint in the to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System)
center front seat can be badly assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child The LATCH system secures a child
injured or killed by the frontal restraint during driving or in a crash.
restraints. Adjacent seating
airbags if they inflate. Never LATCH attachments on the child
positions should not be used if the
secure a child restraint in the child restraint prevents access to or restraint are used to attach the child
center front seat. It is always interferes with the routing of the restraint to the anchors in the
better to secure a child restraint in safety belt. vehicle. The LATCH system is
a rear seat. designed to make installation of a
If the vehicle does not have a rear child restraint easier.
seat that will accommodate a
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
rear-facing child restraint, a
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In order to use the LATCH system in When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors
your vehicle, you need a child a top tether, you must also use
restraint that has LATCH either the lower anchors or the
attachments. LATCH-compatible safety belts to properly secure the
rear-facing and forward-facing child child restraint. A child restraint must
seats can be properly installed never be installed using only the top
using either the LATCH anchors or tether and anchor.
the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not The LATCH anchorage system can
use both the safety belts and the be used until the combined weight
LATCH anchorage system to secure of the child plus the child restraint is
a rear-facing or forward-facing 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
child seat. alone instead of the LATCH
Booster seats use the vehicle’s anchorage system once the
safety belts to secure the child in combined weight is more than
the booster seat. If the manufacturer 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
recommends that the booster seat The following explains how to attach built into the vehicle. There are two
be secured with the LATCH system, a child restraint with these lower anchors for each LATCH
this can be done as long as the attachments in the vehicle. seating position that will
booster seat can be positioned accommodate a child restraint with
properly and there is no interference Not all vehicle seating positions or lower attachments (2).
with the proper positioning of the child restraints have lower anchors
lap-shoulder belt on the child. and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Make sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint,
and also the instructions in this
manual.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for your child
Regular Cab — Two-Passenger
the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
Front Seat
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
attachment (2) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To assist in locating the lower

anchors on crew cab models, each
seating position with lower anchors
has two labels near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Regular Cab — Three-Passenger Crew and Double Cab Rear Seat For double cab models, the rear
Front Seat i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating outboard seating positions have
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. exposed metal lower anchors in the
positions with top tether anchors. crease between the seatback and
j (Lower Anchor): Seating the seat cushion.
Do not install a child restraint in the positions with two lower anchors.
center front seating position. See
Securing Child Restraints (Center
Front Seat) on page 3-57 or
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 3-57 or Securing
Child Restraints (Front Passenger
Seat) on page 3-61 for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
For regular cab models, there is an

anchor symbol on the cover to
assist you in locating the top tether
anchors.
Do not install a child restraint in the
center seating position. See
Securing Child Restraints (Center Regular Cab Crew Cab Shown, Double Cab
Front Seat) on page 3-57 or For regular cab models, the top Similar
Securing Child Restraints (Rear tether anchors are under covers on For crew and double cab models,
Seat) on page 3-57 or Securing the back panel behind the the top tether anchors are the loops
Child Restraints (Front Passenger passenger seat. Remove the trim near the top of the seatback for
Seat) on page 3-61 for more plug to access the anchor. Be sure each rear seating position. These
information. to use an anchor on the same side loops will be used to route the top
of the vehicle as the seating tether through, as well as to secure
position where the child restraint will the top tether to the vehicle. Be sure
be placed. to use the anchor (loop) on the
same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Be sure to read the following Securing a Child Restraint

instructions to properly install a child Designed for the LATCH { Warning
restraint using these loops. System Do not attach more than one child
Do not secure a child restraint in a restraint to a single anchor,
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
{ Warning except for the center top tether
anchors in the crew and double
that the top tether be attached, or if If a LATCH-type child restraint is cabs. Attaching more than one
the instructions that come with the not attached to anchors or with child restraint to a single anchor
child restraint say that the top tether the safety belt, the child restraint could cause the anchor or
must be attached. will not be able to protect the child attachment to come loose or even
According to accident statistics, correctly. In a crash, the child break during a crash. A child or
children and infants are safer when could be seriously injured or others could be injured. To reduce
properly restrained in a child killed. Install a LATCH-type child the risk of serious or fatal injuries
restraint system or infant restraint restraint properly using the during a crash, attach only one
system secured in a rear seating anchors, or use the vehicle safety child restraint per anchor.
position. See Where to Put the belts to secure the restraint,
Restraint on page 3-43 for following the instructions that
additional information. came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual. { Warning
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck. The
shoulder belt can tighten but
cannot be loosened if it is locked.
The shoulder belt locks when it is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
This system is designed to make

Warning (Continued) { Caution installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
pulled all the way out of the Do not let the LATCH use the vehicle's safety belts.
retractor. It unlocks when the attachments rub against the Instead use the vehicle's anchors
shoulder belt is allowed to go all vehicle’s safety belts. This may and child restraint attachments to
the way back into the retractor, damage these parts. If necessary, secure the restraints. Some
but it cannot do this if it is move buckled safety belts to restraints also use another vehicle
wrapped around a child’s neck. avoid rubbing the LATCH anchor to secure a top tether.
If the shoulder belt is locked and attachments.
tightened around a child’s neck, Regular Cab Models
Do not fold the empty rear seat
the only way to loosen the belt is with a safety belt buckled. This 1. For models without a rear seat,
to cut it. forward-facing child restraints
could damage the safety belt or
should only be installed in the
Buckle any unused safety belts the seat. Unbuckle and return the
right front seating position with
behind the child restraint so safety belt to its stowed position, safety belts and a top tether.
children cannot reach them. Pull before folding the seat. See Securing Child Restraints
the shoulder belt all the way out (Center Front Seat) on
of the retractor to set the lock, If you need to secure more than one page 3-57 or Securing Child
and tighten the belt behind the child restraint in the rear seat, see Restraints (Rear Seat) on
child restraint after the child Where to Put the Restraint on page 3-57 or Securing Child
restraint has been installed. page 3-43. Restraints (Front Passenger
Seat) on page 3-61.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the child restraint manufacturer 1.4. Route, attach, and tighten

recommends that the top tether the top tether according to
be attached, attach and tighten your child restraint
the top tether to the top tether instructions and the
anchor, if your vehicle has one. following instructions:
Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following
steps:
1.1. Fold the passenger
seatback forward to access If the position you are using
the top tether anchor. See has an adjustable head
Reclining Seatbacks on restraint and you are using
page 3-5. a single tether, raise the
head restraint and route the
1.2. Find the top tether anchor. tether under the head
1.3. Remove the cover to If the position you are using restraint and in between the
expose the anchor. has an adjustable head head restraint posts.
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether around the head
restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2. Secure the child restraint in the Crew Cab Models 2. For forward-facing child
right front seating position with 1. Attach and tighten the lower restraints, attach and tighten the
the vehicle safety belts. See attachments to the lower top tether to the top tether
Securing Child Restraints anchors. If the child restraint anchor (loop), if your vehicle has
(Center Front Seat) on does not have lower one. Follow the child restraint
page 3-57 or Securing Child attachments or the desired instructions the vehicle LATCH
Restraints (Rear Seat) on seating position does not have anchor weight limits described at
page 3-57 or Securing Child lower anchors, secure the child the beginning of this section,
Restraints (Front Passenger restraint with the top tether and and the following steps:
Seat) on page 3-61. the safety belts. Refer to your
3. Before placing a child in the child restraint manufacturer’s
child restraint, make sure it is instructions and the instructions
securely held in place. To check, in this manual.
grasp the child restraint at the 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
safety belt path and attempt to the desired seating
move it side to side and back position.
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of 1.2. Put the child restraint on
movement for proper installation. the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower Example — Rear Driver Side
anchors. Position
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2.1.3. Then attach the top through the loop on

tether (4) to the top the passenger side
tether and behind the
anchor (loop) (1) at inboard
the center rear headrest post.
seating position. 2.3.3. Then attach the top
2.2. For a top tether in the rear tether (4) to the top
center position: tether
2.2.1. Route the top anchor (loop) (1) at
tether (4) through the the center rear
center loop (1), and seating position.
behind the 3. Tighten the top tether per the
Example — Rear Driver Side
passenger side child restraint manufacturer's
Position headrest post. instructions.
2.1. For a top tether in the rear 2.2.2. Then attach the top When the top tether is properly
driver side position: tether (4) to the top tightened, the anchor (loop) may
2.1.1. Raise the headrest. tether anchor (loop) bend. This is normal and will not
at the rear damage the vehicle.
2.1.2. Route the top
passenger side If child restraints are installed in
tether (4) between
seating position. both outboard positions, both top
the headrest posts,
through the loop (3), 2.3. For a top tether in the rear tethers can be attached to the
behind the inboard passenger position: center loop. Top tethers can be
headrest post, and 2.3.1. Raise the headrest. attached for child restraints in all
under the center three rear seating positions at
shoulder belt (2). 2.3.2. Route the top the same time, following the
tether (4) between routing instructions above.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
theovidheadrest
edby:
posts,
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4. Before placing a child in the 2. Attach and tighten the lower 3. For forward-facing child
child restraint, make sure it is attachments to the lower restraints, attach and tighten the
securely held in place. To check, anchors. If the child restraint top tether to the top tether
grasp the child restraint at the does not have lower anchor (loop). Follow the child
LATCH path and attempt to attachments or the desired restraint instructions, the vehicle
move it side to side and back seating position does not have LATCH anchor weight limits
and forth. There should be no lower anchors, secure the child described at the beginning of
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of restraint with the top tether and this section, and the following
movement for proper installation. the safety belts. Refer to your steps:
child restraint manufacturer’s
Double Cab Models instructions and the instructions
1. Remove the headrest prior to in this manual.
installing a forward-facing child 2.1. Find the lower anchors for
restraint in an outboard rear the desired seating
seating position. See “Headrest position.
Removal and Reinstallation” at
the end of this section. 2.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors. Example — Rear Driver Side
Position
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
3.1.3. Then attach the 3.3.2. Route the top

top tether (4) to tether (4) through the
the top tether loop on the
anchor (loop) (1) at passenger side.
the center rear 3.3.3. Then attach the
seating position. top tether (4) to
3.2. For a top tether in the rear the top tether
center position: anchor (loop) (1) at
3.2.1. Route the top the center rear
tether (4) through the seating position.
center loop (1), and 4. Tighten the top tether per the
behind the child restraint manufacturer's
Example — Rear Driver Side
passenger side instructions.
Position headrest post. When the top tether is properly
3.1. For a top tether in the rear 3.2.2. Then attach the top tightened, the anchor (loop) may
driver side position: tether (4) to the top bend. This is normal and will not
3.1.1. Remove the tether anchor (loop) damage the vehicle.
headrest. at the rear If child restraints are installed in
passenger side both outboard positions, both top
3.1.2. Route the top
seating position. tethers can be attached to the
tether (4) through the
loop (3) on the driver 3.3. For a top tether in the rear center loop. Top tethers can be
side under the passenger position: attached for child restraints in all
center shoulder 3.3.1. Remove the three rear seating positions at
belt (2). headrest. the same time, following the
routing instructions above.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
5. Before placing a child in the To reinstall the headrest: To remove the headrest:
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Headrest Removal and
Reinstallation
Crew Cab Models
For outboard rear seating positions,
if the child restraint cannot be 1. Insert the headrest posts into the 1. Press both buttons on the
installed properly with the headrest holes in the top of the seatback headrest posts and pull up on
in place, the headrest may be with the longer chrome plated the headrest.
removed. See your dealer for post toward the driver side of the 2. Store the headrest in a secure
assistance with removal. vehicle. place.
Store the removed headrests in a 2. Push the headrest all the way 3. When the child restraint is
secure place. Reinstall the headrest down until it contacts the top of removed, reinstall the headrest
before the seating position is the seatback. before the seating position
moved. Double Cab Models is used.
The rear outboard headrests should
be removed when installing
forward-facing child restraints.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To reinstall the headrest: Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Center Front Seat)
{ Warning { Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH A child in a child restraint in the
system in the vehicle. A damaged center front seat can be badly
LATCH system may not properly injured or killed by the frontal
secure the child restraint, airbags if they inflate. Never
resulting in serious injury or even secure a child restraint in the
death in a crash. To help make center front seat. It is always
sure the LATCH system is better to secure a child restraint in
working properly after a crash, a rear seat.
1. Insert the headrest posts into the see your dealer to have the
holes in the top of the seatback system inspected and any Do not use child restraints in the
with the longer chrome plated necessary replacements made as center front seat position.
post toward the driver side of the soon as possible.
vehicle. Securing Child Restraints
2. Push the headrest all the way If the vehicle has the LATCH system (Rear Seat)
down until it contacts the top of and it was being used during a
the seatback. crash, new LATCH system parts When securing a child restraint in a
may be needed. rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
New parts and repairs may be restraint to make sure it is
necessary even if the LATCH compatible with this vehicle.
system was not being used at the
time of the Incrash.
for
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the child restraint has the LATCH this position. Be sure to follow the
system, see Lower Anchors and instructions that came with the child
Tethers for Children (LATCH restraint. Secure the child in the
System) on page 3-44 for how and child restraint when and as the
where to install the child restraint instructions say.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is If more than one child restraint
secured in the vehicle using a needs to be installed in the rear
safety belt and it uses a top tether, seat, be sure to read Where to Put
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for the Restraint on page 3-43.
page 3-44 for top tether anchor Double Cab
locations.
1. Remove the headrest prior to
Do not secure a child seat in a installing a forward-facing child 4. Push the latch plate into the
position without a top tether anchor restraint in an outboard rear buckle until it clicks.
if a national or local law requires seating position. See “Headrest
that the top tether be anchored, or if Position the release button on
Removal and Reinstallation”
the instructions that come with the the buckle so that the safety belt
under Lower Anchors and
child restraint say that the top strap could be quickly unbuckled if
Tethers for Children (LATCH
must be anchored. necessary.
System) on page 3-44.
In Canada, the law requires that 2. Put the child restraint on
forward-facing child restraints have the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
attached.
the lap and shoulder portions of
If the child restraint or vehicle seat the vehicle's safety belt through
position does not have the LATCH or around the restraint. The child
system, you will be using the safety restraint instructions will show
belt to secure the child restraint in you how. InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
7. For forward-facing child

restraints, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether
anchor (loop). Refer to the child
restraint instructions, the vehicle
LATCH anchor weight limits and
instructions listed in Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
page 3-44.
8. Before placing a child in the
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down securely held in place. To check,
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the grasp the child restraint at the
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to safety belt path and attempt to
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, move it side to side and back
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back and forth. When the child
into the retractor. When installing restraint is properly installed,
a forward-facing child restraint, it there should be no more than
may be helpful to use your knee 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
to push down on the child To remove the child restraint,
restraint as you tighten the belt. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt
Try to pull the belt out of the and let it return to the stowed
retractor to make sure the position. If the top tether is
retractor is locked. If the attached to a top tether anchor,
retractor is not locked, repeat disconnect it. Reinstall the headrest
Steps 4Infand 5.ovidedby: before the seating position is used.
or
mat
ionPr
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
See “Headrest Removal and

Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-44 for additional
information on installing the
headrest properly.
Crew Cab
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
the vehicle's safety belt through 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
or around the restraint. The child buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
restraint instructions will show lock. When the retractor lock is
Position the release button on
you how. set, the belt can be tightened but
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6. If the child restraint has a top For outboard rear seating positions,
tether, follow the child restraint if the child restraint cannot be
manufacturer's instructions installed properly with the headrest
regarding the use of the top in place, the headrest may be
tether. See Lower Anchors and removed. See your dealer for
Tethers for Children (LATCH assistance with removal, and store
System) on page 3-44 for more the removed headrest in a secure
information on using the top place. When the child restraint is
tether anchors. removed, reinstall the headrest
7. Before placing a child in the before the seating position is used.
child restraint, make sure it is For reinstallation instructions, see
securely held in place. To check, “Headrest Removal and
grasp the child restraint at the Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
5. To tighten the belt, push down and Tethers for Children (LATCH
on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back System) on page 3-44.
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed, Securing Child Restraints
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than (Front Passenger Seat)
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee With Passenger Sensing
To remove the child restraint, System
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position. This vehicle has airbags. A rear
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a top seat is a safer place to secure a
retractor to make sure the tether anchor, disconnect it. forward-facing child restraint. See
retractor is locked. If the Where to Put the Restraint on
retractor is not locked, repeat page 3-43.
Steps 4 and 5. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In addition, the vehicle may have a

passenger sensing system which is Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag injured or killed if the front the front outboard seat, always
under certain conditions. See outboard passenger airbag move the front passenger seat as
Passenger Sensing System on inflates and the passenger seat is far back as it will go. It is better to
page 3-29 and Passenger Airbag in a forward position. secure the child restraint in a
Status Indicator on page 5-20 for The vehicle may have a rear seat.
more information on this, including passenger sensing system which See Passenger Sensing System
important safety information. is designed to turn off the front on page 3-29 for additional
Never put a rear-facing child seat in outboard passenger frontal airbag information.
the front. This is because the risk to under certain conditions.
the rear-facing child is so great,
Even if the passenger sensing If the vehicle does not have a rear
if the airbag deploys.
system, if equipped, has turned seat that will accommodate a
off the front outboard passenger rear-facing child restraint, a
{ Warning frontal airbag, no system is rear-facing child restraint should not
fail-safe. No one can guarantee be installed in the vehicle, even if
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off.
restraint can be seriously injured that an airbag will not deploy
or killed if the front outboard under some unusual If a child restraint uses a top tether,
passenger airbag inflates. This is circumstance, even though it is see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
because the back of the turned off. Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-44 for top tether anchor
rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child restraints
locations.
be very close to the inflating in a rear seat, even if the airbag
airbag. A child in a forward-facing is off. If you secure a Do not secure a child seat in a
child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in position without a top tether anchor
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi (Continued)
dedby:
that the top tether be anchored, or if
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
the instructions that come with the 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
child restraint say that the top strap the lap and shoulder portions of
must be anchored. the vehicle's safety belt through
In Canada, the law requires that or around the restraint. The child
forward-facing child restraints have restraint instructions will show
a top tether, and that the tether be you how.
attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to
secure the child restraint in this
position, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the
following instructions:
4. Push the latch plate into the
1. Move the seat as far back as it buckle until it clicks.
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint. Position the release button so
that the safety belt could be
When the passenger sensing quickly unbuckled if necessary.
system, if equipped, has turned
off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag, the off indicator in Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
the passenger airbag status belt, if needed.
indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-20.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
7. If the vehicle does not have a

rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's
instructions regarding the use of
the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
page 3-44 for more information
on using the top tether anchors.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down securely held in place. To check,
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the grasp the child restraint at the
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to safety belt path and attempt to
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, move it side to side and back
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back and forth. When the child
into the retractor. When installing restraint is properly installed,
a forward-facing child restraint, it there should be no more than
may be helpful to use your knee 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
to push down on the child If the vehicle is equipped with a
restraint as you tighten the belt. passenger sensing system, and
Try to pull the belt out of the when the passenger sensing system
retractor to make sure the has turned off the front outboard
retractor is locked. If the passenger frontal airbag, the off
retractor is not locked, repeat indicator in the passenger airbag
Steps 5 and 6.ionProvidedby: status indicator should light and stay
Inf
ormat
lit when the vehicle is started.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If a child restraint has been installed Never put a rear-facing child seat in
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the the front. This is because the risk to Warning (Continued)
On Indicator Is Lit for a Child the rear-facing child is so great,
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
System on page 3-29 for more circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
information. { Warning
To remove the child restraint, Secure rear-facing child restraints
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag
let it return to the stowed position. restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a
If the top tether is attached to a top or killed if the front outboard forward-facing child restraint in
tether anchor, disconnect it. passenger airbag inflates. This is the front outboard seat, always
because the back of the move the front passenger seat as
With Airbag On-Off Switch rear-facing child restraint would far back as it will go. It is better to
This vehicle has airbags. A rear be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a
seat is a safer place to secure a airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat.
forward-facing child restraint. See child restraint can be seriously
Where to Put the Restraint on injured or killed if the front
page 3-43. outboard passenger airbag
There may be a switch on the inflates and the passenger seat is { Warning
instrument panel endcap that you in a forward position.
If the airbag readiness light ever
can use to turn off the front Even if the airbag switch has comes on and stays on, it means
outboard passenger frontal airbag. turned off the front outboard that something may be wrong
See Airbag On-Off Switch on passenger frontal airbag, no with the airbag system. For
page 3-27 for more information, system is fail-safe. No one can example, the front outboard
including important safety guarantee that an airbag will not
information. (Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
that the top tether be anchored, or if 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Warning (Continued) the instructions that come with the the lap and shoulder portions of
child restraint say that the top strap the vehicle's safety belt through
passenger frontal airbag could must be anchored. or around the restraint. The child
inflate even though the airbag restraint instructions will show
on-off switch is turned off. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have you how.
To help avoid injury to yourself or a top tether, and that the tether be
others, have the vehicle serviced attached.
right away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-18 for more
secure the child restraint in this
information, including important
position, follow the instructions that
safety information. came with the child restraint and the
following instructions:
If the vehicle does not have a rear 1. Move the seat as far back as it
seat that will accommodate a will go before securing the
rear-facing child restraint, a forward-facing child restraint.
rear-facing child restraint should not
be installed in the vehicle, even if When the airbag off switch (if
the airbag is off. equipped) has turned off the
front outboard passenger frontal Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
If a child restraint uses a top tether, airbag, the off indicator in the belt, if needed.
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for airbag off light should light and
Children (LATCH System) on stay lit when you start the
page 3-44 for top tether anchor vehicle. See Airbag On-Off Light
locations. on page 5-18.
Do not secure a child restraint in a 2. Put the child restraint on
position without a top tether anchor the seat. InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button so lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
that the safety belt could be set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
quickly unbuckled if necessary. not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Steps 5 and 6.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
7. If your vehicle does not have a If you turned the airbag off with the
rear seat and your child restraint switch (if equipped), turn on the { Warning
has a top tether, follow the child front outboard passenger airbag
restraint manufacturer's when you remove the child restraint A child in a rear-facing child
instructions regarding the use of from the vehicle unless the person restraint can be seriously injured
the top tether. See Lower who will be sitting there is a member or killed if the front outboard
Anchors and Tethers for of a passenger airbag risk group. passenger airbag inflates. This is
Children (LATCH System) on See Airbag On-Off Switch on because the back of the
page 3-44. page 3-27 for more information, rear-facing child restraint would
including important safety be very close to the inflating
information. airbag. Always secure a
securely held in place. To check, rear-facing child restraint in a
Heavy-Duty Crew Cab Only rear seat.
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to This vehicle has airbags. A rear
move it side to side and back seat is a safer place to secure a
If the vehicle does not have a rear
and forth. When the child forward-facing child restraint. See
seat that will accommodate a
restraint is properly installed, Where to Put the Restraint on
rear-facing child restraint, a
there should be no more than page 3-43.
rear-facing child restraint should not
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. Never put a rear-facing child seat in be installed in the vehicle, even if
To remove the child restraint, the front. This is because the risk to the airbag is off.
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and the rear-facing child is so great,
If a child restraint uses a top tether,
let it return to the stowed position. if the airbag deploys.
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
If the top tether is attached to a top Children (LATCH System) on
tether anchor, disconnect it. page 3-44 for top tether anchor
locations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Do not secure a child seat in a or around the restraint. The child

position without a top tether anchor restraint instructions will show
if a national or local law requires you how.
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
attached.
secure the child restraint in this 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
position, follow the instructions that out of the retractor to set the
came with the child restraint and the lock. When the retractor lock is
following instructions: set, the belt can be tightened but
4. Push the latch plate into the not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Move the seat as far back as it buckle until it clicks.
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able
2. Put the child restraint on to unbuckle the safety belt
the seat. quickly if necessary.
the vehicle's safety belt through
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
7. If your child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-44 for more
information on using the top
tether anchors.
securely held in place. To check,
6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee To remove the child restraint,
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a top
retractor to make sure the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 objects in storage compartments.
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 In a crash, these objects may
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3 cause the cover to open and
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-4 could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
To access, pull down on the handle.
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Instrument Panel Storage
If equipped, there is storage under Card Holder
the climate control system. If equipped, there is a card holder
on the front instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4-2 Storage
Glove Box Cupholders Rear

Front
Base
There may be cupholders on the
center front seat console armrest.
Uplevel
If equipped, the cupholder in the
center console is removable and
can be repositioned. Lift the
cupholder from the sides to
remove it.
Insert the cupholder between the If equipped, pull the rear seat
To access the upper glove box, guides on the console and push
unlock with the key and pull up on armrest down to access the
down to secure it. cupholders.
the handle.
If equipped, there is a USB port in
the upper glove box.
To access the lower glove box, pull
down on the handle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Storage 4-3
Sunglasses Storage Center Console Storage
Bucket Seat
Bench Seat If equipped, the center console may
If equipped, sunglasses storage is have the following features:
If equipped, pull the front center
on the overhead console. Press the
seat armrest down to access the 1. Tote Compartment
fixed button on the cover and
storage area with cupholders.
release to access. 2. Accessory Power Outlets
Press the button and lift to open.
3. Power Cord Openings
There is a removable divider.
4. Removable Cupholders
If equipped, there are dual USB
ports, an accessory power outlet, an 5. Device Holder
auxiliary jack, and an SD card 6. USB Ports
reader inside.
7. High Voltage Power Outlet
(HVPO) (if equipped)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: 8. SD Card Reader
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4-4 Storage
9. Auxiliary Input Jack Floor Console Storage Additional Storage

10. Latch
Features
11. Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Press the latch (10) and lift the Cargo Tie-Downs
armrest to access the main storage
compartment.
There is an open storage
compartment on the rear of the
center console.
See Cupholders on page 4-2, Power
Outlets on page 5-6, USB Port on
page 7-18, Auxiliary Jack on
page 7-21, and SD Card Reader on
page 7-20. If equipped with the If equipped with front seat floor
uplevel radio, see “Audio Players” in console storage, unlock with the
the infotainment manual. ignition key, press the button, and
lift to open.
The vehicle may be equipped with
cargo tie-downs.
Any of the nine holes inside the
truck bed can be used for tie-downs.
The maximum load is 113 kg
(250 lb) per tie-down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Storage 4-5
2. Turn the tie-down loop clockwise 5. Reinstall the tie-down loop

{ Caution to tighten. The tie-down will be through the backing plate into
hard to turn until the toggle the toggle nut for reuse.
The truck bed walls will collapse if moves past the installation point
the tie-downs are overloaded. on the toggle guide.
3. Fasten the tie-down firmly by
hand only. Do not use tools.
To remove:
1. Remove the tie-down loop
completely by turning
counterclockwise while holding
the backing plate against the
truck bed wall.
2. Pull the backing plate away from
the truck bed wall until a click is
heard. This locks the toggle into
position on the toggle guide.
To install: 3. Push the backing plate against
the truck bed wall. This allows
1. Insert a tie-down loop assembly the toggle nut to spin.
until it is flush with the truck
bed wall. 4. Remove the backing plate,
toggle guide, and toggle nut
from the truck bed wall
completely.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-17
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-29
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Controls Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-18
Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Passenger Airbag Status Information Displays

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Driver Information Center
Controls (DIC) (Base Level) . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-21
Malfunction Driver Information Center
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 (DIC) (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Brake System Warning Vehicle Messages
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Battery Voltage and Charging
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-25 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-36
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-26 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Hill Descent Control Light . . . . 5-26 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Indicators Lane Departure Warning Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-38
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-39
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-27 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-39
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Traction Control System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-39
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-27 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Object Detection System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Engine Oil Pressure Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Ride Control System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-42
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-42 Controls Tilt and Telescoping Steering

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Wheel
Steering System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Steering Wheel
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Adjustment
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-46
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System To adjust the tilt and telescoping
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 steering wheel, if equipped:
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 1. Push the lever (1) down to move
To adjust the steering wheel: the steering wheel forward or
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull rearward. Lift the lever up to lock
the lever. the wheel in place.
2. Move the steering wheel up The ignition may need to be set
or down. to the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position to disengage the
3. Release the lever to lock the
tilt and telescoping steering
wheel in place.
column and allow easier
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: adjustment.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2. Pull the lever (2) toward you to g (Talk): For vehicles with OnStar® @ (Select): Press to select a
move the steering wheel up or or a Bluetooth® system, press to highlighted menu option.
down, then release the lever to interact with those systems. See
lock the wheel in place. OnStar Overview on page 14-1,
Do not adjust the steering wheel Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-31
while driving. or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Base Connected Radio) on
Steering Wheel Controls page 7-42 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition - Base Connected
Radio) on page 7-46 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls - Base
(Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on
page 7-37, or “Bluetooth
(Overview)” in the infotainment
manual.
The favorite and volume switches
i (Phone/Mute): Press to reject are on the back of the steering
an incoming call or end a current wheel.
call. Press to mute or unmute the
infotainment system when not on 1. Favorite: When on a radio
a call. source, press to select the next
or previous favorite. When on a
If equipped, some audio controls o or p (Previous/Next Menu): media source, press to select
can be adjusted at the steering Press to go to the previous or next the next or previous track.
wheel. menu option.
2. Volume: Press to increase or
w or x (Next/Previous decrease the volume.
Selection): Press to go to the next
or previousInfselection.
or
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Heated Steering Wheel Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10-38.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. An internal circuit
breaker to the motor will stop the
The windshield wiper control is on
motor until it cools down.
the turn signal lever.
The windshield wipers are controlled Wiper Parking
by turning the band with z on it. If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are on w, 1, or 3 INT,
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
they will immediately stop.
( (Heated Steering Wheel, If w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
If the windshield wiper lever is then
Equipped): Press to turn it on or 3 INT (Adjustable Interval moved to OFF before the driver
off. A light next to the button Wipes): Turn the band up for more door is opened or within 10 minutes,
displays when the feature is frequent wipes or down for less the wipers will restart and move to
turned on. frequent wipes. the base of the windshield.
The steering wheel takes about OFF: Turns the windshield If the ignition is put in OFF while the
three minutes to start heating. wipers off. wipers are performing wipes due to
8 (Mist): For a single windshield washing, the wipers
Horn continue to run until they reach the
wipe, turn to 8, then release.
To sound the horn, press a on the base of the windshield.
For several wipes, hold the band
steering wheel. on 8 longer.InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Windshield Washer Compass Clock

The vehicle may have a compass Setting the Time and Date with
{ Warning display on the Driver Information Faceplate Controls
Center (DIC). The compass receives
In freezing weather, do not use To set the time or date:
its heading and other information
the washer until the windshield is
from the Global Positioning 1. Select SETTINGS from the
warmed. Otherwise the washer System (GPS) antenna,
fluid can form ice on the Home Page, then select Time
StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed and Date.
windshield, blocking your vision. information.
2. Select the desired function.
The compass system is designed to
L m (Washer Fluid): Push the operate for a certain number of 3. Turn the MENU knob to increase
paddle marked with the windshield miles or degrees of turn before or decrease the value.
washer symbol at the top of the turn needing a signal from the GPS 4. Press the MENU knob to go to
signal lever, to spray washer fluid satellites. When the compass the next value. After the last
and activate the wipers. The wipers display shows CAL, drive the value is selected, the system will
will continue until the paddle is vehicle for a short distance in an update and return to the Settings
released or the maximum wash time open area where it can receive a menu. Press o BACK to go to
is reached. When the paddle is GPS signal. The compass system
released, additional wipes may the last menu and save the
will automatically determine when a changes.
occur depending on how long the GPS signal is restored and provide
windshield washer had been a heading again. See Compass Auto Set requires an OnStar
activated. See Washer Fluid on Messages on page 5-37 for the subscription.
page 10-29 for information on filling messages that may be displayed for If auto timing is set, the time
the windshield washer fluid the compass. displayed on the clock may not
reservoir.
update immediately when driving
into a new time zone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To set the clock display: Auto Set requires an OnStar Power Outlets
1. Select SETTINGS from the subscription.
Accessory power outlets can be
Home Page, then select Time If auto timing is set, the time used to plug in electrical equipment,
and Date. displayed on the clock may not such as a cell phone, MP3
2. Select Clock Display. update immediately when driving player, etc.
into a new time zone.
3. Turn the MENU knob to Off The vehicle may have up to four
or On. To set the date: accessory power outlets.
4. Press the MENU knob to select. 1. Press the SETTINGS screen Vehicles with a Center Console
button from the Home Page,
Press o BACK to go to the last One or two in front of the
.
then press Time and Date.
menu and save the changes. cupholders on the center
2. Press Set Date and press « or console.
Setting the Time and Date with ª to increase or decrease . One inside the center console.
Touchscreen Controls month, day, or year.
. One on the rear of the center
To set the time: 3. Press the } screen button to go console.
1. Press the SETTINGS screen back to the previous menu.
Vehicles with Bench Seats
button from the Home Page, To set the clock display:
then press Time and Date. . One on the center stack below
1. Press the SETTINGS screen the climate control system.
2. Press Set Time and press « or button and press Time and Date.
ª to increase or decrease
. One or two in the storage area
2. Press Clock Display and press on the bench seat.
hours, minutes, and AM or PM. OFF or ON to turn the clock
Press 12–24 Hr for 12 or display off or on. Lift the cover to access and replace
24 hour clock. when not in use.
3. Press the } screen button to go
3. Press the } screen button to go back to the previous menu.
back to the previous menu. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The power outlets on the center

stack and in front of the cupholders Caution (Continued) Caution (Continued)
are powered at all times. The power
outlets inside the storage area and use and do not plug in equipment outlets are designed for
on the rear of the console are that exceeds the maximum accessory power plugs only, such
powered when the ignition is in ON/ 15 amp rating. as cell phone charge cords.
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when RAP is active. Certain power accessory plugs may Power Outlet 110 Volt
not be compatible with the Alternating Current
{ Warning accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
Power is always supplied to the If a problem is experienced, see
outlets. Do not leave electrical your dealer.
equipment plugged in when the When adding electrical equipment,
vehicle is not in use because the be sure to follow the proper
vehicle could catch fire and cause installation instructions included with
injury or death. the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9-100.
{ Caution { Caution
Leaving electrical equipment Hanging heavy equipment from Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
plugged in for an extended period the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the If equipped with this power outlet, it
of time while the vehicle is off will
vehicle warranty. The power can be used to plug in electrical
drain the battery. Always unplug
equipment that uses a maximum
electrical equipment when not in (Continued) limit of 150 watts.
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
For vehicles with a center console, The indicator light does not come on The power outlet is not designed for
the 110 volt power outlet is in front when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or the following, and may not work
of the cupholders in the center if the equipment is not fully seated properly if they are plugged in:
console. into the outlet. . Equipment with high initial peak
For vehicles with bench seats, the If equipment is connected using wattage, such as
110 volt power outlet is on the more than 150 watts or a system compressor-driven refrigerators
center stack. fault is detected, a protection circuit and electric power tools.
An indicator light on the outlet turns shuts off the power supply and the . Other equipment requiring an
on to show it is in use. The light indicator light turns off. To reset the extremely stable power supply,
comes on when the ignition is in circuit, unplug the item and plug it such as
ON/RUN, equipment requiring less back in or turn the Retained microcomputer-controlled
than 150 watts is plugged into the Accessory Power (RAP) off and electric blankets and touch
outlet, and no system fault is then back on. See Retained sensor lamps.
detected. Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-28. . Medical equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges
on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem,
Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Waiting to do repairs can be
signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle costly and even dangerous.
before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning
to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a
replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle.
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Instrument Cluster
Base Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Uplevel Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Cluster Menu (Uplevel Cluster) Press o to access the cluster Phone

There is an interactive display area applications. Use w or x to scroll Press V to select the Phone app,
in the center of the instrument through the list of available then press p to enter the Phone
cluster. applications. Not all applications will menu. In the Phone menu, if there is
be available on all vehicles. no active phone call, view recent
. Info App. This is where the calls, scroll through contacts, select
selected Driver Information from the favorites, or change the
Center (DIC) displays can be phone source. If there is an active
viewed. See “Driver Information call, mute the phone or switch to
Center (DIC) (Uplevel)” in the handset operation.
Index.
Navigation
. Audio
Press V to select the Navigation
. Phone
app, then press p to enter the
. Navigation Navigation menu. If there is no
. Settings active route, you can resume the
last route and turn the voice
Use the right steering wheel control Audio prompts on/off. If there is an active
to open and scroll through the
Press V to select the Audio app, route, you can cancel the route.
different items and displays.
then press p to enter the Audio Settings
menu. In the Audio menu browse for
Press V to select the Settings app.
music, select from the favorites,
or change the audio source. In the Use w or x to scroll through items
main view, use w or x to change in the Settings menu.
the station or go to the next or
previous track.InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Units: Press p while Units is by pressing V while viewing this Trip Odometer
displayed to enter the Units menu. page. If the selected speed limit is The trip odometer shows how far
Choose English or metric units by exceeded, a pop-up warning is the vehicle has been driven since
pressing V while the desired item is displayed with a chime. the trip odometer was last reset.
highlighted. A checkmark will be Software Information: Press p
displayed next to the selected item. The trip odometer is accessed and
while Software Information is reset through the Driver Information
Info Pages: Press p while Info highlighted to display open source Center (DIC). See Driver
Pages is displayed to enter the Info software information. Information Center (DIC) (Base
Pages menu and select the items to Level) on page 5-30 or Driver
be displayed in the Info app. See Speedometer Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
“Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 5-32.
The speedometer shows the
(Uplevel)” in the Index. vehicle's speed in either kilometers
Speed Warning: The Speed per hour (km/h) or miles per Tachometer
Warning display allows the driver to hour (mph). The tachometer displays the engine
set a speed that they do not want to speed in revolutions per
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, Odometer minute (rpm).
press p when Speed Warning is The odometer shows how far the
displayed, or press V on the main vehicle has been driven, in either { Caution
view to set the speed value. Press kilometers or miles.
If the engine is operated with the
w or x to adjust the value. Press rpm’s in the warning area at the
V to set the speed. Once the speed
is set, this feature can be turned off high end of the tachometer, the
vehicle could be damaged, and
the damage would not be covered
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Here are four things that some

Caution (Continued) owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the rpm’s
. At the service station, the fuel
in the warning area. pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
Fuel Gauge to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
English
half the tank's capacity to fill
When the ignition is on, the fuel the tank.
gauge indicates about how much . The gauge moves a little while
fuel is left in the tank.
turning a corner or speeding up.
There is an arrow near the fuel . The gauge takes a few seconds
gauge pointing to the side of the
to stabilize after the ignition is
vehicle the fuel door is on.
turned on, and goes back to
When the indicator nears empty, the empty when the ignition is
Metric low fuel light comes on. There still is turned off.
a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Engine Oil Pressure A reading outside the normal

operating range can be caused by a
Gauge dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil
pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as
soon as possible. See “OIL
PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE”
under Engine Oil Messages on
page 5-38 and Engine Oil on
page 10-11.
{ Caution
English
Lack of proper engine oil
The engine oil pressure gauge maintenance can damage the
shows the engine oil pressure engine. Driving with the engine
Metric
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds oil low can also damage the
per square inch) when the engine is
engine. The repairs would not be
running.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Oil pressure can vary with engine Check the oil level as soon as
speed, outside temperature and oil possible. Add oil if required, but if
viscosity. the oil level is within the operating
range and the oil pressure is still
low, have the vehicle serviced.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, Voltmeter Gauge

see the Duramax diesel
supplement.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
English
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine When the ignition is on, this gauge
coolant. indicates the battery voltage.
While driving under normal When the engine is running, this
operating conditions, if the needle gauge shows the condition of the
Metric moves into the red warning area, charging system. The gauge can
the engine is too hot. Pull off the transition from a higher to lower or a
road, stop the vehicle, and turn off lower to higher reading. This is
the engine as soon as possible. normal. If the vehicle is operating
outside the normal operating range,
the charging system light comes on.
See Charging System Light on
page 5-21 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The voltmeter gauge may also read Readings outside the normal times if the driver remains or
lower when in fuel economy mode. operating range indicate a possible becomes unbuckled while the
This is normal. problem in the electrical system. vehicle is moving.
Readings outside the normal Have the vehicle serviced as soon If the driver safety belt is buckled,
operating range can also occur as possible. neither the light nor the chime
when a large number of electrical comes on.
accessories are operating in the Safety Belt Reminders
vehicle and the engine is left idling Passenger Safety Belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Reminder Light
for an extended period. This
condition is normal since the
Light
There may be a passenger safety
charging system is not able to There is a driver safety belt belt reminder light near the
provide full power at engine idle. As reminder light on the instrument passenger airbag status indicator.
engine speeds are increased, this cluster. See Passenger Sensing System on
condition should correct itself as page 3-29.
higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum
power.
The vehicle can only be driven for a
short time with the readings outside
the normal operating range. If the
vehicle must be driven, turn off all When the vehicle is started, this
accessories, such as the radio and light flashes and a chime may come For vehicles equipped with the
air conditioner. on to remind the driver to fasten passenger safety belt reminder light,
their safety belt. Then the light stays when the vehicle is started this light
on solid until the belt is buckled. flashes and a chime may come on
This cycle may continue several to remind passengers to fasten their
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
safety belt. Then the light stays on
solid until the belt is buckled. This
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
cycle continues several times if the and diagnostic module. For more
passenger remains or becomes information on the airbag system, Warning (Continued)
unbuckled while the vehicle is see Airbag System on page 3-20.
moving. without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
If the passenger safety belt is right away.
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If there is a problem with the airbag
The front passenger safety belt system, a Driver Information Center
reminder light and chime may turn (DIC) message may also come on.
on if an object is put on the seat See Airbag System Messages on
The airbag readiness light comes on
such as a briefcase, handbag, page 5-42.
for several seconds when the
grocery bag, laptop, or other
vehicle is started. If the light does
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
not come on then, have it fixed Airbag On-Off Light
immediately.
the object from the seat or buckle If the vehicle has an airbag on-off
the safety belt. switch, it also has a passenger
{ Warning airbag status indicator located in the
Airbag Readiness Light If the airbag readiness light stays
overhead console.
This light shows if there is an on after the vehicle is started or
electrical problem with the airbag comes on while driving, it means
system. The system check includes the airbag system might not be
the airbag sensor(s), passenger working properly. The airbags in
sensing system (if equipped), the the vehicle might not inflate in a
pretensioners, the airbag modules, crash, or they could even inflate
the wiring, and the crash sensing
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
instrument panel endcap, the OFF

indicator light or the off symbol will Warning (Continued)
come on and stay on as a reminder
that the airbag has been turned off. have the extra protection of an
This light will go off when the airbag airbag. In a crash, the airbag will
has been turned on. See Airbag not be able to inflate and help
On-Off Switch on page 3-27 for protect the person sitting there.
United States Do not turn off the front outboard
more information, including
important safety information. passenger frontal airbag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk
group identified by the national
government. See Airbag On-Off
Switch on page 3-27 for more
information, including important
Canada and Mexico safety information.
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, will light for several
{ Warning
seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the
{ Warning If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
status indicator ON or OFF, or either If the front outboard passenger that something may be wrong
the on or off symbol, will light to let frontal airbag is turned off for a with the airbag system. For
you know the status of the front person who is not in a risk group example, the front outboard
outboard passenger frontal airbag. identified by the national
(Continued)
When the front outboard passenger government, that person will not
frontal airbag is manually turned off Inf
ormat
ovi
using the airbag on-off switch on the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
passenger frontal airbag could If the vehicle has one of the
inflate even though the airbag following indicators, then the vehicle
on-off switch is turned off. has a passenger sensing system for
To help avoid injury to yourself or the front outboard passenger United States
others, have the vehicle serviced position unless there is an airbag
right away. See Airbag Readiness on-off switch on the instrument
Light on page 5-18 for more panel endcap. If there is an airbag
information, including important on-off switch, the vehicle does not
safety information. have a passenger sensing system.
See Airbag On-Off Switch on
page 3-27.
If the word ON or the on symbol is Canada and Mexico
The passenger airbag status
lit, it means that the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag is enabled indicator is on the overhead When the vehicle is started, the
console. See Passenger Sensing passenger airbag status indicator
(may inflate). See Airbag On-Off
System on page 3-29 for important will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
Switch on page 3-27 for more
information, including important safety information. for on and off, for several seconds
safety information. as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
If, after several seconds, both status indicator will light either ON or OFF,
indicator lights remain on, or if there or either the on or off symbol to let
are no lights at all, there may be a you know the status of the front
problem with the lights or the airbag outboard passenger frontal airbag.
on-off switch. See your dealer for
service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the word ON or the on symbol is When this light comes on, or is

lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued) flashing, the Driver Information
indicator, it means that the front Center (DIC) also displays a
outboard passenger frontal airbag is Light on page 5-18 for more message.
enabled (may inflate). information, including important
safety information. See Battery Voltage and Charging
If the word OFF or the off symbol is Messages on page 5-36.
lit on the airbag status indicator, it If a short distance must be driven
means that the passenger sensing Charging System Light with the light on, be sure to turn off
system has turned off the front all accessories, such as the radio
outboard passenger frontal airbag. and air conditioner.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there Malfunction
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
Indicator Lamp
passenger sensing system. See A computer system called OBD II
your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
briefly when the ignition is turned Generation) monitors the operation
{ Warning on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, helping to
If the airbag readiness light ever It should go out when the engine is maintain a clean environment. The
comes on and stays on, it means started. malfunction indicator lamp comes
that something may be wrong on when the vehicle is placed in
If the light stays on, or comes on
with the airbag system. To help ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
while driving, there may be a
avoid injury to yourself or others, working. If it does not, have the
problem with the electrical charging
have the vehicle serviced right vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
system. Have it checked by your
away. See Airbag Readiness Ignition Positions on page 9-24.
dealer. Driving while this light is on
(Continued) could drainInthe
for
mat
ibattery.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Caution (Continued) Caution (Continued)

the vehicle fuel economy might to pass a required Emission
not be as good, and the engine Inspection/Maintenance test. See
might not run as smoothly. This Accessories and Modifications on
could lead to costly repairs that page 10-3.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
might not be covered by the
comes on while the engine is
vehicle warranty. This light comes on during a
running, this indicates that the
OBD II system has detected a malfunction in one of two ways:
problem and diagnosis and service Light Flashing: A misfire condition
might be required. { Caution has been detected. A misfire
Malfunctions often are indicated by increases vehicle emissions and
the system before any problem is Modifications made to the engine, could damage the emission control
apparent. Being aware of the light transmission, exhaust, intake, system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
can prevent more serious damage or fuel system of the vehicle or and service might be required.
to the vehicle. This system also the replacement of the original
To prevent more serious damage to
assists the service technician in tires with other than those of the
the vehicle:
correctly diagnosing any same Tire Performance Criteria
. Reduce vehicle speed.
malfunction. (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause . Avoid hard accelerations.
{ Caution this light to come on. . Avoid steep uphill grades.
Modifications to these systems
If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not . If towing a trailer, reduce the
with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty. amount of cargo being hauled as
controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure soon as it is possible.
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi (Continued)
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance
possible. hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will
Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data
control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
emission control system
malfunction: See Fuel on page 9-67.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully If none of the above have made the
installed. See Filling the Tank on light turn off, your dealer can check The DLC is under the instrument
page 9-70. The diagnostic the vehicle. The dealer has the panel to the left of the steering
system can determine if the fuel proper test equipment and wheel. See your dealer if assistance
cap has been left off or diagnostic tools to fix any is needed.
improperly installed. A loose or mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed. The vehicle may not pass
missing fuel cap allows fuel to inspection if:
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap . The malfunction indicator lamp is
properly installed should turn the on with the engine running, or if
light off. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: the light does not come on when
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Brake System Warning When the ignition is on, the brake
while the engine is off. See your system warning light also comes on
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light when the parking brake is set. The
proper operation of the The vehicle brake system consists light stays on if the parking brake
malfunction indicator lamp. of two hydraulic circuits. If one does not fully release. If it stays on
. The OBD II (On-Board circuit is not working, the remaining after the parking brake is fully
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the released, it means the vehicle has a
that critical emission control vehicle. For normal braking brake problem.
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to If the light comes on while driving,
completely diagnosed. The be working. pull off the road and stop carefully.
vehicle would be considered not If the warning light comes on, there The pedal might be harder to push,
ready for inspection. This can is a brake problem. Have the brake or the pedal can go closer to the
happen if the 12-volt battery has system inspected right away. floor. It may take longer to stop.
recently been replaced or run If the light is still on, have the
down. The diagnostic system is vehicle towed for service. See
designed to evaluate critical Towing the Vehicle on page 10-95.
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
{ Warning
If this has been done and the Metric English The brake system might not be
vehicle still does not pass the working properly if the brake
inspection for lack of OBD II This light should come on briefly system warning light is on.
system readiness, your dealer when the engine is started. If it does Driving with the brake system
can prepare the vehicle for not come on then, have it fixed so it warning light on can lead to a
inspection. will be ready to warn if there is a crash. If the light is still on after
problem.
the vehicle has been pulled off
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
If the light comes on while driving, Four-Wheel-Drive Light
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the road and carefully stopped, the engine again to reset the
have the vehicle towed for system. If the ABS light stays on,
service. or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. A chime may
Antilock Brake System also sound when the light comes on
steady.
(ABS) Warning Light The four-wheel-drive light comes on
If the ABS light is the only light on, when a vehicle with a manual
the vehicle has regular brakes, but transfer case is shifted into
the antilock brakes are not four-wheel drive and the front axle
functioning. engages.
If both the ABS and the brake Some delay between the shifting
system warning light are on, the and the light coming on is normal.
vehicle's antilock brakes are not
functioning and there is a problem See Four-Wheel Drive on page 9-42
This light comes on briefly when the for more information.
engine is started. with the regular brakes. See your
dealer for service.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if See Brake System Warning Light on
there is a problem. page 5-24 and Brake System
Messages on page 5-36.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Tow/Haul Mode Light See Hill Descent Control (HDC) on Vehicle Ahead Indicator
page 9-56.
Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) Light
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul If equipped, this indicator will

Mode feature, this light comes on display green when a vehicle is
when the Tow/Haul Mode has been detected ahead and amber when
activated. you are following a vehicle ahead
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-39. If equipped, this light comes on much too closely.
briefly while starting the vehicle. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Hill Descent Control Light If it does not come on, have the System on page 9-63.
vehicle serviced.
This light is green if LDW is on and
ready to operate.
This light changes to amber and
flashes to indicate that the lane
marking has been crossed without
using a turn signal in that direction.
If equipped, the Hill Descent Control
light comes on when the system is See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
ready for use. When the light on page 9-66.
flashes, the system is active.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Traction Off Light StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
This light comes on briefly while This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, starting the engine. If it does not, This light comes on briefly when the
have the vehicle serviced by your have the vehicle serviced by your engine is started.
dealer. If the system is working dealer.
normally, the indicator light then If the light does not come on, have
This light comes on when the the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
turns off. StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the system is working normally,
The traction off light comes on when If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the indicator light turns off.
the Traction Control System (TCS) Control System (TCS) is also off.
has been turned off by pressing and If the light is on and not flashing, the
If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off, TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak the system does not assist in
button. system have been disabled. A DIC
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the message may display. Check the
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF TCS and the StabiliTrak systems DIC messages to determine which
light come on when StabiliTrak is and the warning light turns off. feature(s) is no longer functioning
turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic and whether the vehicle requires
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not Stability Control on page 9-54. service.
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-54. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the indicator/warning light is on When the Light Is On Steady Low Fuel Warning Light
and flashing, the TCS and/or the This indicates that one or more of
StabiliTrak system is actively the tires are significantly
working. underinflated.
See Traction Control/Electronic A Driver Information Center (DIC)
Stability Control on page 9-54. tire pressure message may also
display. See Tire Messages on
Tire Pressure Light page 5-43. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the This light is near the fuel gauge and
pressure value shown on the Tire comes on briefly when the ignition is
and Loading Information label. See turned on as a check to show it is
Tire Pressure on page 10-62. working.
When the Light Flashes First and It also comes on when the fuel tank
Then Is On Steady is low on fuel. The light turns off
when fuel is added. If it does not,
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure If the light flashes for about a minute have the vehicle serviced.
Monitor System (TPMS), this light and then stays on, there may be a
comes on briefly when the engine is problem with the TPMS. If the
started. It provides information problem is not corrected, the light
about tire pressures and the TPMS. will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10-65.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Security Light High-Beam On Light The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6-5 for more
information.
Lamps On Reminder
The security light should come on This light comes on when the
briefly as the engine is started. If it high-beam headlamps are in use.
does not come on, have the vehicle See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
serviced by your dealer. If the Changer on page 6-2.
system is working normally, the
indicator light turns off. This light comes on when the
Front Fog Lamp Light exterior lamps are in use. See
If the light stays on and the engine
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 2-13.
For vehicles with fog lamps, this

light comes on when the fog lamps
are on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Hourmeter
Cruise Control Light Information Displays . Unit
Driver Information Center Digital Speedometer
(DIC) (Base Level) The speedometer shows how fast
The DIC displays are shown in the the vehicle is moving in either
center of the instrument cluster. The kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
displays show the status of many per hour (mph). The speedometer
vehicle systems. The trip odometer cannot be reset.
For vehicles with cruise control, the
cruise control light is white when the reset stem in the instrument cluster Trip
cruise control is on and ready, and is used to access the DIC menu
items. Turn the trip odometer reset stem
turns green when the cruise control
until TRIP displays. The current
is set and active.
DIC Menu Items distance traveled, in either
The light turns off when the cruise kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
Turn the trip odometer reset stem to
control is turned off. See Cruise the last reset for the trip odometer is
scroll through the following menu
Control on page 9-57. shown. The trip odometer can be
items:
reset to zero by pressing and
. Digital Speedometer holding the trip odometer reset stem
. Trip while the trip odometer is displayed.
. Fuel Range Fuel Range
. Average Fuel Economy This display shows the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
. Tire Pressure without refueling. The fuel range
. Remaining Oil Life estimate is based on an average of
. Transmission Fluid Temperature the vehicle's fuel economy over
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
. Trailer Brake
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
recent driving history and the See Tire Pressure Monitor System The Oil Life display must be reset
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel on page 10-64 and Tire Pressure after each oil change. It will not
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset. Monitor Operation on page 10-65. reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life
display at any time other than when
Average Fuel Economy Remaining Oil Life the oil has just been changed.
The Average Fuel Economy display Turn the trip odometer reset stem It cannot be reset accurately until
shows the approximate average until REMAINING OIL LIFE the next oil change. To reset the
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) displays. An estimate of the oil's engine oil life system, see Engine
or miles per gallon (mpg). This remaining useful life is shown. Oil Life System on page 10-14.
number reflects only the REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% means
approximate average fuel economy 99% of the current oil life remains. Transmission Fluid Temperature
that the vehicle has right now, and When the remaining oil life is low, The temperature of the automatic
will change as driving conditions the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON transmission fluid displays in either
change. This number is based on message will appear on the display. degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
the number of L/100 km (mpg) See Engine Oil Messages on Fahrenheit (°F).
recorded since the last time this page 5-38. The oil should be
menu item was reset. Reset this Trailer Brake
changed as soon as possible. See
display by pressing the trip Engine Oil on page 10-11. In On vehicles with the Integrated
odometer reset stem. addition to the engine oil life system Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
monitoring the oil life, additional turn the trip odometer reset stem
Tire Pressure until TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
maintenance is recommended in the
Turn the trip odometer reset stem Maintenance Schedule. See OUTPUT displays.
until a vehicle with the approximate Maintenance Schedule on TRAILER GAIN shows the Trailer
pressures of all four tires displays. page 11-3. Gain setting. This setting can be
Tire pressure is displayed in either adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per a trailer connected or disconnected.
square inch (psi).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
TRAILER OUTPUT shows the Compass

power output to the trailer anytime a
The vehicle may have a compass in
trailer with electric brakes is
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
connected. Output is displayed as a
See Compass on page 5-5.
bar graph. Dashes may appear in
the TRAILER OUTPUT display if a
trailer is not connected. Driver Information Center
Hourmeter
(DIC) (Uplevel)
The DIC displays are shown in the
This display shows the total number
center of the instrument cluster in
of hours the engine has run.
the Info app. See Instrument Cluster
Unit on page 5-10. The displays show
the status of many vehicle systems.
This will change the displays on the w or x : Press to move up or
The controls for the DIC are on the
instrument cluster and DIC to either down in a list. In the main view, you
right steering wheel control.
metric or English (US) can press up and down to move
measurements. To change the units, between different info app pages.
press the trip odometer reset stem
when UNITS is displayed to enter o or p : Press to move between
the Unit menu. Turn the trip the interactive display zones in the
odometer reset stem to switch cluster.
between English and metric. Press V (Set/Reset): Press to open a
the trip odometer reset stem when menu or select a menu item. Press
the desired setting is displayed. and hold to reset values on certain
screens.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
DIC Info Page Options DIC Info Pages that the vehicle has right now, and
will change as driving conditions
The info pages on the DIC can be The following is the list of all
change.
turned on or off through the possible DIC info page displays.
Settings menu. Some may not be available for your Press and hold V while this display
particular vehicle. Some items may is active to reset the trip odometer
1. Press o to access the cluster not be turned on by default but can and the average fuel economy. Trip
applications. be turned on through the Settings A and Trip B can also be reset by
2. Press w or x to scroll to the app. See “DIC Info Page Options” pressing p and choosing reset.
earlier in this section.
Settings application.
Fuel Range: Shows the
Speed: Shows the vehicle speed in
3. Press V to enter the either kilometers per hour (km/h) or
approximate distance the vehicle
Settings menu. can be driven without refueling.
miles per hour (mph).
LOW will be displayed when the
4. Scroll to Info Pages and Trip A or Trip B: Shows the vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel
press p. current distance traveled, in either range estimate is based on an
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since average of the vehicle's fuel
5. Press w or x to move through the trip odometer was last reset. economy over recent driving history
the list of possible information and the amount of fuel remaining in
displays. This also shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers the fuel tank.
6. Press V while an item is (L/100 km) or miles per Oil Life: Shows an estimate of the
highlighted to select or deselect gallon (mpg). This number is oil's remaining useful life.
that item. When an item is calculated based on the number of If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
selected, a checkmark will L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the displayed, that means 99% of the
appear next to it. last time this menu item was reset. current oil life remains.
This number reflects only the
approximate average fuel economy
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
When the remaining oil life is low, Tire Pressure: Shows the Press p to select the distance or
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON approximate pressures of all four
reset best value. Use w and x to
message will appear on the display. tires. Tire pressure is displayed in
See Engine Oil Messages on either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds choose the distance and press V.
page 5-38. The oil should be per square inch (psi). If the pressure Press w and x to select “Reset
changed as soon as possible. See is low, the value for that tire is Best Score.” Press V to reset the
Engine Oil on page 10-11. In shown in amber. See Tire Pressure
best average fuel economy. After
addition to the engine oil life system Monitor System on page 10-64 and
reset, the best value displays “-,-”
monitoring the oil life, additional Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
until the selected distance has been
maintenance is recommended in the page 10-65.
traveled.
Maintenance Schedule. See Fuel Economy: The center
Maintenance Schedule on The display provides information on
displays the approximate
page 11-3. how current driving behavior affects
instantaneous fuel economy as a
the running average and how well
The Oil Life display must be reset number and bar graph. Displayed
recent driving compares to the best
after each oil change. It will not above the bar graph is a running
that has been achieved for the
reset itself. Do not to reset the Oil average of fuel economy for the
selected distance.
Life display at any time other than most recently traveled selected
when the oil has just been changed. distance. Displayed below the bar Timer: This display can be used as
It cannot be reset accurately until graph is the best average fuel a timer. To start the timer, press V
the next oil change. To reset the economy that has been achieved for while this display is active. The
engine oil life system, press and the selected distance. The selected display will show the amount of
hold V for several seconds while distance is displayed at the top of time that has passed since the timer
the Oil Life display is active. See the page as “last xxx mi/km.” Next was last reset. To stop the timer,
to the odometer, the Active Fuel
Engine Oil Life System on press V briefly while this display
page 10-14. Management displays the number of
is active and the timer is running.
cylinders the vehicle is running on.
See Active Fuel Management® on
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To reset the timer to zero, press and TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer Vehicle Messages
hold V while this display is active, gain setting. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either Messages displayed on the DIC
or press p and select reset. indicate the status of the vehicle or
a trailer connected or disconnected.
Speed Limit (If Equipped): Shows some action that may be needed to
OUTPUT shows the power output to
sign information, which comes from correct a condition. Multiple
the trailer anytime a trailer with
a roadway database in the onboard messages may appear one after
electric brakes is connected. Output
navigation. another.
is displayed as a bar graph. Dashes
Engine Hours: Shows the total may appear in the OUTPUT display The messages that do not require
number of hours the engine has run. if a trailer is not connected. immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
Transmission Fluid Off Road: Displays vehicle pitch
Temperature: Shows the and roll information, road wheel pressing V or the trip odometer
temperature of the automatic angle, and four-wheel drive (4WD) reset stem on the base cluster.
transmission fluid in either degrees status. The messages that require
Celsius (°C) or degrees Blank Page: Shows no immediate action cannot be cleared
Fahrenheit (°F). information. until that action is performed.
Trailer Brake (If Equipped): On All messages should be taken
vehicles with the Integrated Trailer seriously and clearing the message
Brake Control (ITBC) system, the does not correct the problem.
trailer brake display appears in
the DIC. The following are the possible
messages and some information
about them.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
supplement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Battery Voltage and SERVICE BATTERY Brake System Messages

Charging Messages CHARGING SYSTEM
BRAKE FLUID LOW
On some vehicles, this message
BATTERY LOW START displays if there is a problem with This message is displayed when the
VEHICLE the battery charging system. Under brake fluid level is low. See Brake
When the vehicle’s battery is certain conditions, the charging Fluid on page 10-31.
severely discharged, this message system light may also turn on in the SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
will display and four chimes will instrument cluster. See Charging
sound. Start the vehicle System Light on page 5-21. Driving This message may be displayed
immediately. If the vehicle is not with this problem could drain the when there is a problem with the
started and the battery continues to battery. Turn off all unnecessary brake boost assist system. When
discharge, the climate controls, accessories. Have the electrical this message is displayed, the brake
heated seats, and audio systems system checked as soon as boost assist motor might be heard
will shut off and the vehicle may possible. See your dealer. operating and you might notice
require a jump start. These systems pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
TRANSPORT MODE ON normal under these conditions. Take
will function again after the vehicle
is started. This message is displayed when the the vehicle to your dealer for
vehicle is in transport mode. Some service.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE features can be disabled while in SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
This message displays when the this mode, including Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start,
SYSTEM
battery voltage drops below
expected levels and features are and the vehicle alarm system. Take On vehicles with the Integrated
disabled. Turn off all unnecessary the vehicle to your dealer for service Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
accessory features. to turn transport mode off. this message displays and a chime
may sound when there is a problem
with the ITBC system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
When this message displays, power Door Ajar Messages Engine Cooling System
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes. DOOR OPEN Messages
As soon as it is safe to do so, This message displays and a chime A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
carefully pull your vehicle over to may sound if a door is not fully ENGINE TEMP
the side of the road and turn the closed. Stop and turn off the This message displays when the
ignition off. Check the wiring vehicle, check the door for engine coolant becomes hotter than
connection to the trailer and turn the obstructions, and close the door the normal operating temperature.
ignition back on. If this message still again. Check to see if the message See Engine Coolant Temperature
displays, either your vehicle or the still appears on the DIC. Gauge on page 5-16. To avoid
trailer needs service. See your added strain on a hot engine, the air
dealer. HOOD OPEN
conditioning compressor
See “Integrated Trailer Brake This message displays and a chime automatically turns off. When the
Control System” under Towing may sound if the hood is not fully coolant temperature returns to
Equipment on page 9-90 for more closed. Stop and turn off the normal, the air conditioning
information. vehicle, check the hood for compressor turns back on. You can
obstructions, and close the hood continue to drive your vehicle.
again. Check to see if the message
Compass Messages still appears on the DIC. If this message continues to appear,
Dashes may be displayed if the have the system repaired by your
vehicle temporarily loses dealer as soon as possible to avoid
communication with the Global damage to the engine.
Positioning System (GPS).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
ENGINE OVERHEATING IDLE Engine Oil Messages ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE
ENGINE ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to engine oil needs to be changed. normal operating temperature. Stop
idle until it cools down. See Engine When you change the engine oil, be and allow the vehicle to idle until it
Coolant Temperature Gauge on sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE cools down. See Engine Coolant
page 5-16. OIL SOON message. See Engine Temperature Gauge on page 5-16.
Oil Life System on page 10-14 for
When towing, use Tow/Haul mode information on how to reset the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
to prevent damage to the engine or message. See Engine Oil on ENGINE
transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode page 10-11 and Maintenance
on page 9-39. This message displays if low oil
Schedule on page 11-3. pressure levels occur. Stop the
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL vehicle as soon as safely possible
ENGINE and do not operate it until the cause
On some vehicles, this message of the low oil pressure has been
This message displays and a chime displays when the engine oil level
may sound if the engine cooling corrected. Check the oil as soon as
may be too low. Check the oil level possible and have the vehicle
system reaches unsafe before filling to the recommended
temperatures for operation. Stop serviced by your dealer. See Engine
level. If the oil is not low and this Oil on page 10-11.
and turn off the vehicle as soon as it message remains on, take the
is safe to do so to avoid severe vehicle to your dealer for service.
damage. This message clears when See Engine Oil on page 10-11.
the engine has cooled to a safe
operating temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY
may sound when the cooling system may sound if the fuel level is low. This message displays if a Remote
temperature gets too hot and the Refuel as soon as possible. See Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
engine further enters the engine Fuel Gauge on page 5-14 and Fuel battery is low. The battery needs to
coolant protection mode. See on page 9-67. be replaced in the transmitter. See
Engine Overheating on page 10-25 “Battery Replacement” under
for more information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This message also displays when This message may display along System Operation on page 2-4.
the vehicle's engine power is with the malfunction indicator lamp
reduced. Reduced engine power on the instrument cluster if the Lamp Messages
can affect the vehicle's ability to vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened
accelerate. If this message is on, properly. See Malfunction Indicator TURN SIGNAL ON
but there is no reduction in Lamp on page 5-21. Reinstall the This message displays and a chime
performance, proceed to your fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank sounds if a turn signal is left on for
destination. The performance may on page 9-70. The diagnostic 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn
be reduced the next time the vehicle system can determine if the fuel cap signal lever to the off position.
is driven. The vehicle may be driven has been left off or improperly
at a reduced speed while this installed. A loose or missing fuel
message is on, but acceleration and cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
speed may be reduced. Anytime atmosphere. A few driving trips with
this message stays on, the vehicle the cap properly installed should
should be taken to your dealer for turn this light and message off.
service as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Object Detection System when it is temporarily unavailable. SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

The LDW system does not need
Messages service.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Parking Assist
FORWARD COLLISION This message could be due to the system. Do not use this system to
ALERT OFF camera being blocked. Cleaning the help you park. See your dealer for
This message displays when the outside of the windshield behind the service.
Forward Collision Alert has been rearview mirror may correct the
turned off. issue. Ride Control System
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED PARK ASSIST OFF Messages
CLEAN WINDSHIELD This message displays when the SERVICE STABILITRAK
Parking Assist system has been
This message displays when the If this message displays, it means
turned off or when there is a
camera is blocked. Cleaning the there may be a problem with the
temporary condition causing the
outside of the windshield behind the StabiliTrak system. If you see this
system to be disabled.
rearview mirror may correct the message, try to reset the system.
issue. The Lane Departure Warning SERVICE FRONT CAMERA Stop; turn off the engine for at least
(LDW) system and Forward 15 seconds; then start the engine
Collision Alert (FCA) will not If this message remains on after
again. If this message still comes
operate. continued driving, the vehicle needs
on, it means there is a problem. You
service. Do not use the Lane
should see your dealer for service.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING Departure Warning (LDW) and
The vehicle is safe to drive;
UNAVAILABLE Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
however, you do not have the
features. Take the vehicle to your
This message displays when benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
dealer.
attempting to activate the Lane your speed and drive accordingly.
Departure Warning (LDW) system
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
SERVICE TRACTION TRACTION CONTROL OFF STABILITRAK OFF may also

CONTROL display when the stability control
This message displays when the
has been automatically disabled.
This message displays when there traction control has been turned off.
The following conditions can cause
is a problem with the Traction See Traction Control/Electronic
this message to appear:
Control System (TCS). When this Stability Control on page 9-54.
message displays, the system will . The system is overheating,
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
TRACTION CONTROL ON which could occur if StabiliTrak
driving accordingly. See your dealer This message displays when the activates continuously for an
for service. See Traction Control/ traction control is active. See extended period of time.
Electronic Stability Control on Traction Control/Electronic Stability . The brake system warning light
page 9-54. Control on page 9-54. is on. See Brake System
STABILITRAK INITIALIZING STABILITRAK OFF Warning Light on page 5-24.
This message may come on if the This message displays when the
. The stability system takes longer
StabiliTrak system has not fully StabiliTrak system has been turned than usual to complete its
initialized because of road off. Adjust your driving accordingly. diagnostic checks due to driving
conditions or the incorrect tire size. To limit wheel spin and realize the conditions.
When the StabiliTrak system is fully full benefits of the stability . An engine or vehicle-related
initialized, the message will turn off. enhancement system, you should problem has been detected and
See Traction Control/Electronic normally leave StabiliTrak on. See the vehicle needs service. See
Stability Control on page 9-54. If this Traction Control/Electronic Stability your dealer.
message continues to be displayed Control on page 9-54. . The transfer case is in
for multiple ignition cycles and on Four-Wheel Drive Low.
different road surfaces, see your
dealer for service. The message turns off as soon as
the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
longer present.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Airbag System Messages If this happens, remove the object Security Messages
from the seat or buckle the
SERVICE AIRBAG safety belt. SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
This message displays if there is a If the driver or front outboard SYSTEM
problem with the airbag system. passenger unbuckles their safety This message displays when there
Take the vehicle to your dealer for belt while driving, the safety belt is a problem with the theft-deterrent
service. reminder chime and light(s) will system. The vehicle may or may not
come on. See Safety Belt restart, so you may want to take the
Safety Belt Messages Reminders on page 5-17. vehicle to your dealer before turning
off the engine. See Immobilizer
SHIFTER LOCKED. BUCKLE SHIFTER UNLOCKED. BRAKE Operation on page 2-13.
SEATBELT TO SHIFT
This message displays if the vehicle This message displays when the Steering System
is equipped with the Safety Belt Safety Belt Assurance System times Messages
Assurance System and the driver out and allows the vehicle to be
and front outboard passenger, shifted out of P (Park) after STEERING ASSIST IS
if present, safety belts are not 30 seconds following brake apply. REDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE
buckled. The vehicle will not shift See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for This message may display if a
out of P (Park). Buckle the safety problem occurs with the electric
belt(s) to unlock the shift lever. information about the importance of
proper restraint use. power steering system. If this
This system may not allow the message appears, steering effort
vehicle to shift out of P (Park) if an This system may not function may be slightly higher than normal.
object - such as a briefcase, properly if the airbag readiness light The vehicle is still safe to drive. Use
handbag, grocery bag, laptop, is on. See Airbag Readiness Light caution while in reduced assist
or other electronic device - is on the on page 5-18. mode. If this message is persistent
front outboard passenger seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
or appears repeatedly, take the If the warning comes on and stays TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
vehicle to your dealer for service. on, there may be a problem with the AIR TO TIRE
See Steering on page 9-4. TPMS. See your dealer.
If equipped with the Tire Pressure
SERVICE POWER STEERING TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
This message displays when there If equipped with the Tire Pressure
pressure in one or more of the
is a problem with electric power Monitor System (TPMS), this
vehicle's tires is low. This message
steering. Take the vehicle to your message displays when the system
also displays with a vehicle picture
dealer for service. See Steering on is relearning the tire positions on
to indicate the location of the low
page 9-4. your vehicle. The tire positions must
tire. The low tire pressure warning
be relearned after rotating the tires
light will also come on. See Tire
Tire Messages or after replacing a tire or sensor.
Pressure Light on page 5-28. You
See Tire Inspection on page 10-69,
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR can receive more than one tire
Tire Rotation on page 10-69, Tire
SYSTEM pressure message at a time. If a tire
Pressure Monitor System on
pressure message appears on the
If equipped with the Tire Pressure page 10-64, and Tire Pressure on
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
Monitor System (TPMS), this page 10-62.
the tire pressures checked and set
message displays if a part on the to those shown on the Tire and
system is not working properly. The Loading Information label. See Tires
tire pressure light also flashes and on page 10-53, Vehicle Load Limits
then remains on during the same on page 9-15, and Tire Pressure on
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure page 10-62. The DIC also shows
Light on page 5-28. Several the tire pressure values. See Driver
conditions may cause this message Information Center (DIC) (Base
to appear. See Tire Pressure Level) on page 5-30 or Driver
Monitor Operation on page 10-65. Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
on page 5-32.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Transmission Messages FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX GRADE BRAKING ON

4WD OFF If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n is This message displays when grade
requested, but the vehicle speed is braking has been enabled with the
If equipped with four-wheel drive, too high, this message will display Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of
this message displays when the until the correct vehicle speed is the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode
four-wheel-drive system is reached. on page 9-39, Automatic
temporarily disabled due to an Transmission on page 9-34, and
overheated condition. The vehicle GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE Cruise Control on page 9-57.
will run in two-wheel drive when this
This message displays when grade SERVICE 4WD
message is present. Once the
braking has been activated while
four-wheel-drive system cools down, If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
driving on downhill grades. This
the message turns off and the this message may display if a
message will only appear the first
four-wheel-drive system returns to problem occurs with the
time the feature is activated in an
normal operation. four-wheel-drive system. If this
ignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode
4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS on page 9-39, Automatic message appears, stop as soon as
Transmission on page 9-34, and possible and turn off the vehicle.
This message will display while the Cruise Control on page 9-57. Make sure the key is in the LOCK/
four-wheel-drive system is shifting. OFF position for at least
GRADE BRAKING OFF one minute, then restart the vehicle
FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TO and check for the message on the
NEUTRAL This message displays when grade
braking has been disabled with the DIC display. If the message is still
If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n is Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of displayed or appears again when
requested, and the vehicle speed is the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode you begin driving, the
correct, but the transmission is not on page 9-39, Automatic four-wheel-drive system needs
in N (Neutral), this message will Transmission on page 9-34, and service. See your dealer.
display until the transmission is Cruise Control on page 9-57.
shifted to N (Neutral). I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
SHIFT DENIED TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

This message displays when the ENGINE Messages
shift lever is in M (Manual Mode) This message displays and a chime
and a transmission range has been may sound if the transmission fluid CHECK TRAILER WIRING
selected that is unavailable at the in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with On vehicles with the Integrated
current vehicle speed. the transmission fluid temperature Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
high can cause damage to the this message may display and a
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TO vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it chime may sound when one of the
NEUTRAL idle to allow the transmission to following conditions exists:
If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n is cool. This message clears and the . A trailer with electric brakes
requested, and the vehicle speed is chime stops when the fluid
becomes disconnected from the
correct, but the transmission is not temperature reaches a safe level.
vehicle.
in N (Neutral), this message will When towing, use Tow/Haul Mode
display until the transmission is ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
to prevent damage to the engine or
shifted to N (Neutral). the vehicle is stopped, this
transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode
message clears itself after a
on page 9-39.
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOW short time.
TO XXX VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n is This message will display if the the vehicle is moving, this
vehicle is driven in 4 n for about message stays on until the
requested, but the vehicle speed is
ignition is turned off.
too high, this message will display 10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph).
until the correct vehicle speed is . There is a short in the wiring to
reached. the electric trailer brakes.
When this message displays, power
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
As soon as it is safe to do so, This message clears itself after Washer Fluid Messages
carefully pull the vehicle over to the several seconds. This message also
side of the road and turn the ignition clears if you acknowledge it. After WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
off. Check the wiring connection to this message clears, the TRAILER FLUID
the trailer and turn the ignition back GAIN and OUTPUT displays appear
This message displays when the
on. This message clears if the trailer in the DIC.
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
is reconnected. This message also See Driver Information Center (DIC) the windshield washer fluid reservoir
clears if you acknowledge it. If this (Base Level) on page 5-30 or Driver as soon as possible. See Engine
message still displays, either the Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) Compartment Overview on
vehicle or the trailer needs service. on page 5-32 and “Integrated Trailer page 10-6 for the location of the
See your dealer. Brake Control System” under windshield washer fluid reservoir.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Towing Equipment on page 9-90. Also, see Washer Fluid on
Control System” under Towing page 10-29 for more information.
Equipment on page 9-90. Vehicle Speed Messages
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE REDUCE SPEED FOR HILL
WITH CARE DESCENT CONTROL
This message displays when ice This message displays when
conditions are possible. attempting to enable Hill Descent
TRAILER CONNECTED Control (HDC) when the vehicle
speed is too high. See Hill Descent
On vehicles with the Integrated Control (HDC) on page 9-56.
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message displays briefly when
a trailer with electric or electric over
hydraulic brakes is first connected
to the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Return to Factory Settings
Vehicle 3. Press o BACK on the faceplate
or the 0 screen button to return
. Software Information
Personalization to the previous menu or exit. Detailed information for each menu
Use the audio system controls to follows.
access the personalization menus Turn the vehicle to ON/RUN to
for customizing vehicle features. access the Settings menu, then Time and Date
select SETTINGS from the Home
The following are all possible page on the infotainment system Manually set the time and date. See
personalization features. Depending display. Clock on page 5-5.
on the vehicle, some may not be
Personalization Menus Language (Language)
available.
The following list of menu items may Select Language, then select from
Base Radio Audio System the available language(s).
Controls be available:
. Time and Date The selected language will display
MENU: Press the center of the on the system, and voice
knob to enter menus and select . Language (Language) recognition will reflect the selected
menu items. Turn the knob to scroll . Valet Mode language.
through the menus.
. Teen Driver
o BACK: Press to return to the Valet Mode (If Equipped)
previous menu or exit. . Radio This will lock the infotainment
. Vehicle system and steering wheel controls.
Uplevel Radio Audio System
It may also limit top speed, power,
Controls . Bluetooth and access to vehicle storage
1. Press the desired feature to . Voice locations (if equipped).
display a list of available
options.
. Display
2. Press to select the desired

. Rear Camera
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
feature setting.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To enable valet mode: Manage Settings Change PIN

1. Enter a four-digit code on the Press and the following may This allows the Personal
keypad. display: Identification Number (PIN) to be
2. Press Enter to go to the . Audio Volume Limit changed. See Teen Driver on
confirmation screen. page 7-48.
. Teen Driver Speed Limiter
3. Re-enter the four-digit code. Key Registration
. Teen Driver Speed Warning
Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock or This allows the key to be registered.
unlock the system. Press Back to go Audio Volume Limit See “Register or Unregister a Key”
back to the previous menu. This allows a maximum radio in Teen Driver on page 7-48.
volume to be set. Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
Teen Driver (If Equipped)
Select Off or On. This allows all Teen Driver keys and
Press and the following may
display: Teen Driver Speed Limiter PIN to be cleared.
. View Report Card If equipped, this allows the Select Continue or Cancel.
maximum speed limit of the vehicle Radio
. Manage Settings to be set.
. Change PIN Press to display the Radio menu
Select Off or On. and the following may display:
. Key Registration
Teen Driver Speed Warning . Manage Favorites
. Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
This allows a warning to be set . Number of Favorites Shown
View Report Card when a certain speed is exceeded.
. Audible Touch Feedback
This allows the driver’s driving Select Off or On.
habits to be viewed. See Teen
. Auto Volume
Driver on page 7-48. . Maximum Startup Volume
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: . Audio Cue Volume
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Manage Favorites Maximum Startup Volume

. Power Door Locks
This allows favorites to be edited. This feature sets the maximum
. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
See “Manage Favorites” in “Radio startup volume. If the vehicle is Climate and Air Quality
Setup” under Home Page on started and the volume is greater
page 7-5 or “Manage Favorites” in than this level, the volume is Select and the following may
“Settings” under “Radio” in the adjusted to this level. To set the display:
infotainment manual. maximum startup volume, turn the . Auto Fan Max Speed
MENU knob or press + or − to
Number of Favorites Shown increase or decrease. Auto Fan Max Speed
Press to set the number of favorites This feature will set the maximum
to display. Audio Cue Volume
auto fan speed.
Select the desired number or select This feature sets the volume of
audio files played at system startup Select Low, Medium, or High.
Auto and the infotainment system
will automatically adjust the number and shutdown. Collision/Detection Systems
of favorites shown. Select On, then press + or − to Select and the following may
increase or decrease the volume. display:
Audible Touch Feedback
This allows Audible Touch Vehicle . Alert Type
Feedback to be turned on or off. Select and the following may . Park Assist
Select Off or On. display:
Alert Type
Auto Volume
. Climate and Air Quality
This feature will set crash alerts to
This feature adjusts the volume
. Collision/Detection Systems beeps or seat vibrations. This
based on vehicle speed and . Comfort and Convenience setting affects all crash alerts
ambient noise. including Forward Collision, Lane
. Lighting Departure Warning, and Park Assist
Select Off, Low, Medium-Low, alerts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Medium, Medium-High, or High.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat. Easy Exit Options Auto Mirror Folding
Park Assist This allows the feature to be turned When on, the outside rearview
on or off. See Memory Seats on mirrors will automatically fold or
If equipped, this feature can assist page 3-7. unfold when the Remote Keyless
in backing up and parking the Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or
vehicle. See Assistance Systems for Select On or Off.
unlock button is pressed and held.
Parking or Backing on page 9-60. Chime Volume Select Off or On.
Select Off, On, or On with Towbar. This allows the selection of the
chime volume level. Lighting
Comfort and Convenience
Turn the MENU knob or press + or Select and the following may
Select and the following may display:
display: − to adjust the volume.
. Vehicle Locator Lights
. Auto Memory Recall Reverse Tilt Mirror
. Exit Lighting
. Easy Exit Options When on, the driver and/or
. Chime Volume passenger mirrors will tilt downward Vehicle Locator Lights
when the vehicle is shifted to This feature will flash the exterior
. Reverse Tilt Mirror R (Reverse) to improve visibility of
the ground near the rear wheels. lamps when K on the Remote
. Auto Mirror Folding Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
Auto Memory Recall Select Off, On - Driver and pressed to locate the vehicle.
Passenger, On - Driver, or On -
This allows the feature to be turned Passenger. Select Off or On.
on or off. See Memory Seats on Exit Lighting
page 3-7.
This allows the selection of how
Select On or Off. long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: dark outside.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Select Off, 30 Seconds, Remote Lock, Unlock, Start Remote Door Unlock
60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds. Select and the following may This allows selection of which doors
Power Door Locks display: will unlock when pressing K on the
Select and the following may . Remote Unlock Light Feedback RKE transmitter.
display: . Remote Lock Feedback Select All Doors or Driver Door.
. Auto Door Unlock . Remote Door Unlock Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
. Delayed Door Lock . Remote Start Auto Cool Seats If equipped and turned on, this
Auto Door Unlock . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats feature will turn the cooled seats on
when using remote start on
This allows selection of which of the . Passive Door Unlock warm days.
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park)
. Passive Door Lock Select Off or On.
with an automatic transmission or . Remote Left in Vehicle Alert Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
when the vehicle is turned off with a
manual transmission. Remote Unlock Light Feedback If equipped and turned on, this
When on, the exterior lamps will feature will turn the heated seats on
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door. when using remote start on
flash when unlocking the vehicle
Delayed Door Lock with the RKE transmitter. cold days.
When on, this feature will delay the Select Off or Flash Lights. Select Off or On.
locking of the doors. To override the Passive Door Unlock
delay, press the power door lock Remote Lock Feedback
switch on the door. This allows selection of what type of This allows the selection of what
feedback is given when locking the doors will unlock when using the
Select Off or On. button on the driver door to unlock
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
the vehicle.
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Only, or Horn Only.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Select All Doors or Driver Pair New Device Voice Mail Numbers
Door Only. Select to pair a new device. See This feature displays the voice mail
Passive Door Lock “Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls” number for all connected phones.
under Bluetooth (Overview) on To change the voice mail number,
This feature can be turned on or off, page 7-31 or Bluetooth select EDIT or press the EDIT
or can be used to select feedback (Infotainment Controls - Base button. Type a new number, then
when using the button on the driver Connected Radio) on page 7-42 or select SAVE or press the SAVE
door to lock the vehicle. See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base button.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Connected Radio) on page 7-46 or
System Operation on page 2-4. Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Voice
Select Off, On with Horn Base Radio) on page 7-32 or Select and the following may
Chirp, or On. Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base display:
Radio) on page 7-37 or “Pairing” in
Remote Left in Vehicle Alert . Prompt Length
“Infotainment Controls” under
This feature sounds an alert when “Bluetooth” in the infotainment . Audio Feedback Speed
the RKE transmitter is left in the manual.
Prompt Length
vehicle.
Device Management This feature adjusts the voice
Select Off or On.
Select to connect to a different prompt length.
Bluetooth phone source, disconnect a phone, Select Short or Long.
or delete a phone.
Select and the following may Audio Feedback Speed
display: Ringtones
.
This feature adjusts the audio
Pair New Device Press to change the ring tone for feedback speed.
. Device Management the specific phone. The phone does
not need to be connected to change Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
. Ringtones the ring tones.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
. Voice Mail Numbers
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Display Guidance Lines Restore Vehicle Settings

Select and the following may Select to turn Off or On. See This allows selection of restoring
display: Assistance Systems for Parking or vehicle settings.
Backing on page 9-60. Select Restore or Cancel.
. Calibrate Touchscreen
. Turn Display Off Rear Park Assist Symbols Clear All Private Data
Select to turn Off or On. See This allows selection to clear all
Calibrate Touchscreen
Assistance Systems for Parking or private information from the vehicle.
Select to calibrate the touchscreen, Backing on page 9-60.
then follow the prompts. Select Delete or Cancel.
Return to Factory Settings
Turn Display Off Restore Radio Settings
Select and the following may
Select to turn the display off. Press display: This allows selection to restore
anywhere on the display area or any radio settings.
faceplate button to turn the
. Restore Vehicle Settings
Select Restore or Cancel.
display on. . Clear All Private Data
. Restore Radio Settings
Software Information
Rear Camera
Select to view the infotainment
Select and the following may system current software information.
display:
. Guidance Lines
. Rear Park Assist Symbols
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Remote Make sure the hand-held transmitter
system with any garage door opener has a new battery for quick and
System that does not have the stop and accurate transmission of the
reverse feature. This includes any radio-frequency signal.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
garage door opener model
page 13-12. Programming the Universal
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Remote System
Universal Remote System Read the instructions completely
For questions or help programming
before programming the Universal
Programming Remote system. It may help to have the Universal Remote system, call
another person assist with the 1-800-355-3515 or see
programming process. www.homelink.com.
Keep the original hand-held Programming involves
transmitter for use in other vehicles time-sensitive actions, and may time
as well as for future programming. out causing the procedure to be
Erase the programming when repeated.
vehicle ownership is terminated. To program up to three devices:
If equipped, these buttons are in the See “Erasing Universal Remote
overhead console. System Buttons” later in this 1. Hold the end of the hand-held
section. transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
This system can replace up to three 3 in) away from the Universal
remote control transmitters used to To program a garage door opener, Remote system buttons with the
activate devices such as garage park outside directly in line with and indicator light in view. The
door openers, security systems, and facing the garage door opener hand-held transmitter was
home automation devices. These receiver. Clear all people and supplied by the manufacturer of
instructions refer to a garage door objects near the garage door. the garage door opener receiver.
opener, but can be used for other
devices.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2. At the same time, press and programming is complete.

hold both the hand-held There is no need to
transmitter button and one of the complete Steps 4–6.
three Universal Remote system . If the indicator light does
buttons to be used to operate not come on or the garage
the garage door. Do not release door does not move, a
either button until the indicator second button press may
light goes from a slow to a rapid be required. For a second
flashing light. Then release both time, press and hold the
buttons. Learn or Smart Button
newly programmed button
Some garage door openers may for five seconds. If the light 4. After completing Steps 1–3,
require substitution of Step 2 stays on or the garage door locate the Learn or Smart button
with the procedure under “Radio moves, programming is inside the garage on the garage
Signals for Canada and Some complete. door opener receiver. The name
Gate Operators” later in this and color of the button may vary
. If the indicator light blinks
section. by manufacturer.
rapidly for two seconds,
3. Press and hold the newly then changes to a solid light 5. Press and release the Learn or
programmed Universal Remote and the garage door does Smart button. Step 6 must be
system button for five seconds not move, continue with completed within 30 seconds of
while watching the indicator light programming Steps 4–6. pressing this button.
and garage door activation. 6. Inside the vehicle, press and
. If the indicator light stays on hold the newly programmed
continuously or the garage Universal Remote system button
door moves when the for two seconds and then
button is pressed, then release it. If the garage door
does not move or the lamp on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: the garage door opener receiver
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
does not flash, press and hold enough for the Universal Remote Universal Remote System
the same button a second time system to pick up the signal during
for two seconds, then release it. programming.
Operation
Again, if the door does not move If the programming did not work, Using the Universal Remote
or the garage door lamp does replace Step 2 under “Programming System
not flash, press and hold the the Universal Remote System” with
same button a third time for Press and hold the appropriate
the following: Universal Remote system button for
two seconds, then release it.
Press and hold the Universal at least one-half second. The
The Universal Remote system Remote system button while indicator light will come on while the
should now activate the pressing and releasing the signal is being transmitted.
garage door. hand-held transmitter button every
Repeat the process for two seconds until the signal has Erasing Universal Remote
programming the two remaining been successfully accepted by the System Buttons
buttons. Universal Remote system. The Erase all programmed buttons when
Universal Remote system indicator vehicle ownership is terminated.
Radio Signals for Canada and light will flash slowly at first and then
Some Gate Operators rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under To erase:
For questions or programming help, “Programming the Universal Remote 1. Press and hold the two outside
call 1-800-355-3515 or see System” to complete. buttons until the indicator light
www.homelink.com. begins to flash. This should take
about 10 seconds.
Canadian radio-frequency laws and
some U.S. gate operators require 2. Release both buttons.
transmitter signals to time out or quit
after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Reprogramming a Single
Button
To reprogram any of the system
buttons:
1. Press and hold any one of the
buttons. Do not release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 under “Programming
the Universal Remote System.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Lighting Features

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lighting
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
The exterior lamp control is on the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the left of the
Turn and Lane-Change
steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Turns off the automatic
Auxiliary headlamps and Daytime Running
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
Interior Lighting turn the automatic headlamps or
Instrument Panel Illumination DRL back on.
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 For vehicles first sold in Canada, off
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 will only work when the vehicle is in
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 P (Park).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turned on while the vehicle is off, Headlamp High/
turns on the headlamps, parking the headlamps will stay on for
lamps, taillamps, instrument panel 10 minutes before turning off to
Low-Beam Changer
lights, roof marker lamps (if prevent the battery from being $ (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
equipped), front/rear sidemarker drained. Turn the headlamp control Changer): Push the turn signal
lamps, and license plate lamps. off and then back to the headlamp lever toward the instrument panel to
When the vehicle is turned off and on position to make the headlamps change the headlamps from low to
the headlamps are in AUTO, the stay on for an additional 10 minutes. high beam.
headlamps turn off. When the key is To keep the lamps on for more than
Pull the turn signal lever toward you
removed, they automatically turn on 10 minutes, the ignition must be in
and release it to return to low-beam
for a set time. The time of the delay the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
headlamps.
can be changed using the DIC. See position.
Driver Information Center (DIC) # (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):
(Base Level) on page 5-30 or Driver Turns on the fog lamps. See Fog
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) Lamps on page 6-5.
on page 5-32.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Exterior Lamps Off
parking lamps including all lamps, Reminder
except the headlamps. When the high-beam headlamps are
A reminder chime sounds when the on, this indicator light on the
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps or parking lamps are instrument cluster will also be on.
headlamps together with the parking manually turned on, the ignition is
lamps and instrument panel lights. off, and a door is open. To disable
When the headlamps are turned on the chime, turn the lamps off.
while the vehicle is on, the
headlamps turn off automatically
10 minutes after the ignition is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
turned off. When the headlamps are
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Lighting 6-3
Flash-to-Pass The DRL system comes on when Automatic Headlamp

the following conditions are met:
This feature lets you use the System
high-beam headlamps to signal a
. The ignition is on.
When the exterior lamp control is
driver in front of you that you want . The exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough
to pass. It works even if the in AUTO. outside, the headlamps come on
headlamps are in the automatic automatically.
. The transmission is not in
position.
P (Park).
To use it, pull the turn signal lever . The light sensor determines it is
toward you, then release it.
daytime.
If the headlamps are in the
When the DRL system is on, only
automatic position or on low beam,
the DRL are on. The taillamps,
the high-beam headlamps will turn
sidemarker lamps, instrument panel
on. They will stay on as long as you
lights, and other lamps will not
hold the lever toward you. The
be on.
high-beam indicator on the
instrument cluster will come on. When it begins to get dark, the
Release the lever to return to automatic headlamp system There is a light sensor on top of the
normal operation. switches from DRL to the instrument panel. Do not cover the
headlamps. sensor, otherwise the headlamps
will come on when they are not
Daytime Running To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior needed.
Lamps (DRL) lamp control to the off position and
then release. For vehicles first sold The system may also turn on the
DRL can make it easier for others to in Canada, off will only work when headlamps when driving through a
see the front of the vehicle during the vehicle is in P (Park). parking garage or tunnel.
the day. Fully functional DRL are
required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6-4 Lighting
When it is bright enough outside, Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Signals
Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
Lights On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are
activated in daylight with the engine
on, and the exterior lamp control is An arrow on the instrument cluster
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking flashes in the direction of the turn or
lamps, and other exterior lamps lane change.
come on. The transition time for the | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button to make the front Move the turn signal lever all the
lamps coming on varies based on way up or down to signal a turn.
wiper speed. When the wipers are and rear turn signal lamps flash on
not operating, these lamps turn off. and off. Press again to turn the Raise or lower the lever for less
Move the exterior lamp control to O flashers off. than one second until the arrow
When the hazard warning flashers starts to flash to signal a lane
or ; to disable this feature. change. This causes the turn
are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
not work. signals to automatically flash three
times. It will flash six times if Tow/
Haul Mode is active. Holding the
turn signal lever for more than
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Lighting 6-5
one second will cause the turn Fog Lamps When the headlamps are changed
signals to flash until the lever is to high beam, the fog lamps go off.
released. When the high-beam headlamps are
The lever returns to its starting turned off, the fog lamps will come
position whenever it is released. on again.
If after signaling a turn or a lane Some localities have laws that

change the arrows flash rapidly or require the headlamps to be on with
do not come on, a signal bulb could the fog lamps.
be burned out.
Auxiliary
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the Roof-Mounted Lamp
If equipped, the control is on the
fuse. See Fuses on page 10-44. center of the exterior lamp control, If equipped, this button includes
Turn Signal On Chime to the left of the steering column. wiring provisions for a dealer or a
qualified service center to install an
If the turn signal is left on for more The ignition must be in the ON/RUN auxiliary roof lamp.
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime position for the fog lamps to
sounds at each flash of the turn come on.
signal. The message TURN # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
SIGNAL ON will also appear in the fog lamps on or off. A light will come
Driver Information Center (DIC). To on in the instrument cluster.
turn the chime and message off,
When the fog lamps are turned on,
move the turn signal lever to the off
the parking lamps automatically
position.
turn on.
This button is on the overhead

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
console.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6-6 Lighting
When the wiring is connected to an Interior Lighting Cargo Lamp

auxiliary roof-mounted lamp,
pressing the bottom of the button
will activate the lamp and illuminate Instrument Panel
an indicator light at the bottom of Illumination Control
this button. Pressing the top of the
button will turn off the roof-mounted
lamp and indicator.
The emergency roof lamp circuit is
fused at 30 amps, so the total
current draw of the attached lamps
should be less than this value. The
attachment points for the roof lamp
circuits are two blunt cut wires
above the overhead console: a dark
This feature controls the brightness The cargo lamp provides more light
green with blue stripe switched
of the steering wheel and instrument in the cargo area or on the sides of
power wire and a black ground wire.
panel lights. The instrument panel the vehicle, if needed. The lights
For information on roof-mounted illumination control is next to the inside the pickup box and/or on the
emergency lamp installation, see exterior lamp control. outside rearview mirrors also turn
www.gmupfitter.com or contact your on, if equipped.
dealer. D (Instrument Panel
Illumination): Move the Press the switch down to turn the
If the vehicle has this button, the thumbwheel up or down to brighten cargo lamp on or off. An indicator
vehicle may have the snow plow or dim the lights. light will turn on when the lamp is
prep package. See Add-On turned on, if equipped. The shift
Electrical Equipment on page 9-100. lever must be in the P (Park)
position to operate the cargo lamp.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Lighting 6-7
The lights on the outside rearview DOOR: The lamps come on

mirrors turn on if the shift lever is in automatically when a door is
the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), opened.
or P (Park) position. ON: Turns all dome lamps on.
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps
Press m or n next to each reading

lamp to turn it on or off.
There are dome lamps in the There are reading lamps in the
overhead console and the headliner, overhead console and the headliner,
if equipped. if equipped. To operate, the ignition
To change the dome lamp settings, must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY
press the following: or ON/RUN position, or using
OFF: Turns the lamps off, even Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
when a door is open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6-8 Lighting
Lighting Features Exit Lighting When the battery's state of charge

is low, the voltage is raised slightly
The interior lamps, headlamps, to quickly bring the charge back up.
Entry Lighting parking lamps, back-up lamps, and When the state of charge is high,
The vehicle has an illuminated entry license plate lamps come on when the voltage is lowered slightly to
feature. the key is removed from the ignition. prevent overcharging. The voltmeter
The interior lamps turn off gauge or the voltage display on the
When a door is opened, the dome automatically in 20 seconds. The Driver Information Center (DIC),
lamps and puddle lamps come on if interior lamps do not come on if the if equipped, may show the voltage
the dome lamp control is in the dome lamp control is in the OFF moving up or down. This is normal.
DOOR position. If the dome lamp position. If there is a problem, an alert will be
control is in the OFF position, the displayed.
lamps do not come on. The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior The battery can be discharged at
The headlamps, parking lamps, lamps control off. idle if the electrical loads are very
taillamps, and back-up lamps turn high. This is true for all vehicles.
on briefly at night, or in areas with This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on This is because the generator
limited lighting, when K is pressed page 5-47. (alternator) may not be spinning fast
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) enough at idle to produce all the
transmitter. After about 30 seconds Battery Load power that is needed for very high
the exterior lamps turn off. Entry electrical loads.
lighting can be disabled manually by Management
A high electrical load occurs when
changing the ignition out of the OFF The vehicle has Electric Power several of the following are on, such
position, or by pressing the RKE Management (EPM), which as: headlamps, high beams, fog
transmitter Q button. estimates the battery's temperature lamps, rear window defogger,
and state of charge. It then adjusts climate control fan at high speed,
This feature can be changed. See
the voltage for best performance heated seats, engine cooling fans,
“Vehicle Locator Lights” under
and extended life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
Vehicle Personalization on I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
page 5-47. accessory power outlets.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Lighting 6-9
EPM works to prevent excessive Battery Power Protection

discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output This feature shuts off the dome and
and the vehicle's electrical needs. reading lamps, if they are left on for
It can increase engine idle speed to more than 10 minutes after the
generate more power, whenever ignition is turned off. The cargo
needed. It can temporarily reduce lamp shuts off after 20 minutes. This
the power demands of some prevents the battery from
accessories. running down.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a DIC message might
be displayed and it is recommended
that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible. See
Battery Voltage and Charging
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6-10 Lighting
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Voice Recognition

Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Introduction
System Phone Infotainment
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-31 Base radio information is included in
Bluetooth (Infotainment this manual. See the infotainment
Introduction Controls - Base Radio) . . . . . 7-32
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 manual for information on other
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - available infotainment systems.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Bluetooth (Infotainment Read the following pages to
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Controls - Base Connected become familiar with these features.
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Radio Bluetooth (Voice Recognition -
Base Connected Radio) . . . . 7-46
{ Warning
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Taking your eyes off the road for
Settings too long or too often while using
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-11 any infotainment feature can
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Trademarks and License cause a crash. You or others
Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . 7-11 Agreements could be injured or killed. Do not
Trademarks and License give extended attention to
Audio Players infotainment tasks while driving.
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Limit your glances at the vehicle
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 displays and focus your attention
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 on driving. Use voice commands
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 whenever possible.
OnStar System
OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the audio by presetting
The infotainment system has built-in
favorite stations, setting the
Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help avoid
distraction by disabling some tone, and adjusting the TheftLock® is designed to
functions when driving. These speakers. discourage theft of the vehicle's
functions may gray out when they radio by learning a portion of the
. Set up phone numbers in
are unavailable. Many infotainment Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
advance so they can be called
features are also available through The radio does not operate if it is
easily by pressing a single
the instrument cluster and steering stolen or moved to a different
button or by using a single voice
wheel controls. vehicle.
command if equipped with
Before driving: Bluetooth phone capability.
. Become familiar with the See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
operation, faceplate buttons, and To play the infotainment system with
screen buttons. the ignition off, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-28.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Overview
Infotainment System Overview
The infotainment system is
controlled by using the buttons on
the faceplate and steering wheel
controls, if equipped. See Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5-3.
Radio with CD
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
5. MEDIA
. Press to change the audio
source between CD, USB,
SD card, AUX, and
Bluetooth Audio,
if equipped.
6. RADIO
. Press to change the audio
source between AM, FM,
Radio with TONE or SiriusXM, if equipped.
7. g or l (Seek)
1. q (Favorite Pages) 3. r (Favorite Pages) . CD (If Equipped): Press
. Press to scroll down . Press to scroll up through g to seek the beginning of
through the favorite pages the favorite pages for each the current or previous
for each source. source. track. If the track has
2. Favorites/Soft Keys 4. O (Power/Volume) played for less than
five seconds, it seeks the
. Press to select favorite . Press to turn the audio on. previous track. If longer
stations. than five seconds, the
. Press and hold to turn it off.
. Press and hold to save current track will start from
favorite stations.
. When on, press to mute the
the beginning. Press l to
system. Press again to
. Press to select a screen unmute. seek the next track.
button when displayed. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
9. { (Home Page) Home Page
Equipped): Press g or l
to seek to the previous or
. Press to go to the Home Home Page Features
next strong station. Page from any point in the
system. See “Home Page” The infotainment system displays a
. CD (If Equipped): Press following. Home Page that makes it easy to
and hold g to quickly access all of the applications. Turn
reverse through a track. 10. o BACK the MENU knob to highlight feature
Release the button to return icons. Press the MENU knob to
. Press to return to the
to playing speed. Press and access the feature’s options.
previous screen in
hold l to fast forward a menu. Various functions are disabled when
through a track. Release the vehicle is moving.
11. CD Slot (If Equipped)
the button to return to AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen
playing speed. 12. MENU
icon to display the active source
. Press to access the menu page. The sources available are
8. X (Eject) (If Equipped) or for the current audio AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped),
TONE (If Equipped) source. CD (if equipped), USB/iPod, AUX
. Press X to eject the CD (if . Press to select the Input, SD card reader (if equipped),
equipped). highlighted menu option. and Bluetooth Audio (if equipped).
See AM-FM Radio on page 7-8,
. Press TONE to open the . Turn to scroll through Satellite Radio on page 7-10, CD
Tone Settings menu (if a list. Player on page 7-15, Auxiliary Jack
equipped). on page 7-21, and Bluetooth Audio
. Turn to manually select a
station. on page 7-21.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
PHONE: Select the PHONE screen Setting Radio Preferences 4. Enter the four-digit code to
icon to display the Phone main unlock the system.
Select the SETTINGS screen icon
page. See Bluetooth (Overview) on Select o BACK to go back to
to display the Settings menu and
page 7-31 or Bluetooth the previous menu.
the following may display:
(Infotainment Controls - Base
Connected Radio) on page 7-42 or Time and Date: See Clock on Radio: See “Radio Setup” later in
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base page 5-5. this section.
Connected Radio) on page 7-46 or Language (Current Language): Vehicle: See Vehicle
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - This will set the display language in Personalization on page 5-47.
Base Radio) on page 7-32 or the radio and instrument cluster.
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Display: Press the MENU knob to
Select to display a list of languages. turn the display on or off.
Radio) on page 7-37.
Select o BACK to go back to the Return to Factory Settings: See
NAV (Navigation, If Equipped): previous menu.
Select the NAV screen icon to “Return to Factory Settings” later in
display the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Valet Mode: this section.
Navigation. See OnStar Overview Using the circular numeric keypad, Software Information (If
on page 14-1, if equipped. enter a four-digit code: Equipped): Press the MENU knob
SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS to select Save Vehicle Info to USB.
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
screen icon to display the Settings Press the MENU knob again to start
a number.
main page. See “Setting Radio downloading the vehicle information
2. Press the MENU knob to select to the USB.
Preferences” following.
it. Do this for each one of the
Pandora (If Equipped) four digits. Select Enter to go to
the confirmation screen.
Select the PANDORA icon to begin
Pandora. See Pandora Internet 3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
Radio on page 7-11. Select LOCK to lock the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Radio Setup Number of Favorites Shown: Rear Camera (If Equipped)

Press the RADIO button and the Select Auto and the system will From the Rear Camera screen
following may display: automatically adjust the number of button, the following may display:
favorite pages when favorites are
Manage Favorites: added and removed, or select a Park Assist Symbols (If
. Turn the MENU knob and press number from 5–25 to manually Equipped): This feature will display
to select a favorite. adjust the number of favorites symbols where objects are detected
shown. by the Rear Parking Assist system.
. To delete a favorite, press Select Park Assist Symbols, then
the button just below the Audible Touch Feedback (If select Off or On.
DELETE screen button. Equipped): Select Audible Touch
Feedback to turn feedback off or on. See Assistance Systems for Parking
. To move a favorite, press or Backing on page 9-60.
the MOVE screen button. Auto Volume (If Equipped): This
Turn the MENU knob to feature adjusts the volume based on Return to Factory Settings
select a new location, then vehicle speed. The options are Off, Select Return to Factory Settings
press the DROP screen Low, Medium-Low, Medium, and the following may display:
button to select the new Medium-High, or High. Select the
location. desired volume. Restore Vehicle Settings: This
option will restore factory vehicle
Maximum Startup Volume: This
. Select o BACK to go back to personalization settings. Select
feature sets the maximum startup Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen
the previous menu. volume. If the vehicle is started and displays stating all vehicle
the volume is greater than this level, customization settings will be
the volume is adjusted to this level. restored to the factory settings.
To set the maximum startup volume, Select Cancel or Confirm.
Turn the MENU knob to increase or
decrease startup volume.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Clear All Private Data (If Software Updates Radio

Equipped): This option clears all
private information from the vehicle. See the website for more
Select Clear All Private Data. Select information. AM-FM Radio
Cancel or Confirm. Website Information Playing the Radio
Restore Radio Settings: This In the U.S., see www.chevrolet.com While on the audio main page,
option will restore factory radio press the RADIO button repeatedly
settings. Select Restore Radio In Canada, see
www.chevrolet.gm.ca to cycle through the available
Settings. A screen displays stating sources AM, FM, and SiriusXM® (if
all personalized radio settings will In Mexico, see equipped) or press the MEDIA
be restored back to the factory www.chevrolet.com.mx button repeatedly to cycle through
settings. Select Cancel or Confirm. the available sources Bluetooth®
English and Metric Unit Audio (if equipped), CD, USB, SD,
Conversion and AUX.
To change the display units between The steering wheel controls can
English and metric units, see Driver also be used to adjust the volume.
Information Center (DIC) (Base See Steering Wheel Controls on
Level) on page 5-30 or Driver page 5-3.
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If Equipped)
on page 5-32 or Instrument Cluster
on page 5-10. To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if
equipped), press the RADIO button
to toggle to the desired broadcast
source.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Press the MENU knob and the

. DSP: If equipped with a Bose Auto Volume: If equipped, this
following radio settings may display: Surround® sound system, it will feature adjusts the volume based on
have three DSP modes the vehicle speed. Select the level
Tone Settings: including: between Off, Low, Medium-Low,
. Bass, Midrange, and Treble: ‐ Normal: Adjusts the audio to Medium, Medium-High, and High.
Turn the MENU knob and provide the best sound for all Press o BACK to go to the
highlight. Press the MENU knob seating positions. previous menu.
to select. Turn the MENU knob
to adjust. ‐ Driver: Adjusts the audio to EQ (Equalizer) Settings: In certain
provide the best sound for the configurations, the available choices
. Balance: Turn the MENU knob driver. are Manual and Talk.
to highlight. Press the MENU
knob to select. Turn the MENU ‐ Centerpoint: Creates a Options for SiriusXM Only
knob left for more sound from surround sound from nearly
any audio source. XM View: XM view allows the
the left speakers or right for channel list to be viewed by channel
more sound from the right . EQ (Equalizer): If equipped name, artist playing on channel,
speakers. The middle position with a Bose sound system, turn or song playing on channel. Turn
balances the sound between the the MENU knob to highlight. the MENU knob to highlight and
left and right speakers. Turn the MENU knob to scroll press the MENU knob to select.
. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to through the options. Press the
Press o BACK to go to the
highlight. Press the MENU knob MENU knob to select. Press
previous menu.
to select. Turn the MENU knob the o BACK button to go to the
to the left for more sound from previous menu. Channel List: Select to display a
the front speakers and to the list of SiriusXM channels. Turn
Station List: Select to display the MENU knob to highlight and
right for more sound from the
a list of AM or FM stations. press the MENU knob to select.
rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound Press o BACK to go to the Press o BACK to go to the
between the front and rear previous menu. previous menu.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
speakers.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Also see the radio settings common Mixed-Audio Favorites See www.siriusxmradio.com or call
for all sources earlier in this section. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.); or see
Media (if equipped) and Broadcast
www.xmradio.ca or call
Finding a Station favorites can be stored.
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Seeking a Station To display the favorites page, press
When SiriusXM is active, the
q or r on the radio faceplate. channel name and number,
Press g or l to search for the
To manage favorites, see “Manage category name, song title, and artist
previous or next strongest station. Favorites” under Home Page on display on the screen.
Tuning a Station page 7-5.
Browsing SiriusXM Channels
Turn the MENU knob to manually
find a station. Satellite Radio To browse the SiriusXM channels:
®
SiriusXM Satellite Radio 1. Press the MENU knob.
Storing Radio Station Presets
Service 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Up to 25 preset stations from all XM Channel List.
bands can be stored in the favorite Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
lists in any order. Up to five stations radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
can be stored in each favorite page satellite radio subscription can the desired XM Channels.
and the number of favorites can receive SiriusXM programming.
be set. SiriusXM is a satellite radio service Radio Reception
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If based in the 48 contiguous United Frequency interference and static
Equipped): While on the active States and 10 Canadian provinces. can occur during normal radio
source main page, such as AM, FM, SiriusXM satellite radio has a reception if items such as phone
or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and wide variety of programming chargers, vehicle convenience
hold a favorites/soft key button on and commercial-free music, accessories, and external electronic
the faceplate. coast to coast, and in digital-quality devices are plugged into the
sound. A service fee is required accessory power outlet. If there is
to receive theInSiriusXM
f
ormat
ionPr dedservice.
ovi by:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
interference or static, unplug the SiriusXM Satellite Radio antenna becomes slightly bent,
item from the accessory power Service straighten it out by hand. If it is
outlet. badly bent, replace it.
If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite
FM Radio Service provides digital radio Occasionally check that the antenna
reception. Tall buildings or hills can is tight at the base. If tightening is
FM signals only reach about 16 to required, protect the paint from
interfere with satellite radio signals,
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the damage.
causing the sound to fade in and
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
out. In addition, traveling or standing
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
under heavy foliage, bridges, Multi-Band Antenna
garages, or tunnels may cause loss The roof antenna is for OnStar®,
especially around tall buildings or
of the SiriusXM signal for a period SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, and GPS
hills, causing the sound to fade in
of time. (Global Positioning System). Keep
and out.
Cell Phone Usage clear of obstructions for clear
AM reception. If the vehicle has a
Cell phone usage, such as making sunroof, and it is open, reception
The range for most AM stations is
or receiving phone calls, charging, can also be affected.
greater than for FM, especially at
or just having the phone on may
night. The longer range can cause
cause static interference in the
station frequencies to interfere with
radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
Pandora Internet Radio
each other. Static can also occur
if this happens. If equipped, Pandora® is a free
when things like storms and power
Internet radio service that streams
lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the Fixed Mast Antenna personalized radio stations based
on artists, tracks, genres, and
treble on the radio. The fixed mast antenna will go comedians. Create stations using
through most car washes as long as the Pandora website or Smartphone
it is securely attached. If the
application, then use - (thumbs up)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: or , (thumbs down) to personalize
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
stations. To set up an account, the stations before connecting to the Using an Android or BlackBerry
or for more information, go to vehicle. The Pandora icon will be Phone
www.pandora.com. Pandora may available on the Home Page. The BlackBerry phone must be
not be available in Canada or When Pandora is chosen, the unlocked to launch Pandora service.
Mexico. Pandora logo will populate on the 1. Pair the phone using Bluetooth.
A phone or tablet with Internet screen and the system will display
connection and the Pandora “Acquiring Pandora Radio Station.” 2. Launch Pandora by selecting
application installed is required. Launch times can be significant. Pandora on the Home Page.
Personal cell phone data plans are If nothing happens when the
used. Make sure the latest version Using the iPhone
available Pandora screen button is
is installed on the device. 1. Plug the device into the USB selected, download the latest
port. The phone screen must be Pandora application and retry.
Launching Pandora unlocked.
Connect the iPhone to the USB The login screen may display on the
2. Launch Pandora from the Home device.
port, or connect Android® or Page by selecting the
BlackBerry® through Bluetooth. See Pandora icon. Pandora Menus
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-31
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - If nothing happens when the Press the MENU knob.
Base Connected Radio) on available Pandora screen button is Pandora has a menu with the
page 7-42 or Bluetooth (Voice pressed, download the latest following:
Recognition - Base Connected Pandora application and retry.
Tone Settings: Select to adjust the
Radio) on page 7-46 or Bluetooth The login screen may display on the tone settings. See AM-FM Radio on
(Infotainment Controls - Base device. page 7-8.
(Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on Bookmark Artist: Select to
page 7-37. For first time use, set up bookmark the artist.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Bookmark Song: Select to - (Thumbs Up): When selected, Pandora Troubleshooting

bookmark the song. Pandora stores this information Unable to Connect Device to
Auto Volume: This feature sets the and - is highlighted for the Vehicle
auto volume based on the speed of remainder of the track. This helps
the vehicle and noise in the vehicle. Pandora choose which tracks If the device is unable to connect to
See AM-FM Radio on page 7-8. should play on this station. the USB or Bluetooth:
d (Next Track): When selected, 1. Turn the vehicle off.

Pandora Features
Pandora changes to the next track. 2. Take the Remote Keyless Entry
Pandora service has features to rate
r or j (Play/Pause): Select to play (RKE) transmitter at least 6 m
tracks, skip tracks, or change
or pause playback. (20 ft) away from the vehicle.
stations.
3. Wait about 30 seconds, and try
} (Bookmarks): When selected Pandora Skip Limit to connect the device again. See
during a track, a choice displays to
Pandora limits the number of skips Bluetooth (Overview) on
bookmark the artist or track. This
allowed on their service. When the page 7-31 or Bluetooth
sends the bookmark to the Pandora
skip limit is reached, , or next (Infotainment Controls - Base
account.
arrow will not skip the currently Connected Radio) on page 7-42
, (Thumbs Down): When or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition
selected, Pandora stores this playing track, but the , feedback
- Base Connected Radio) on
information, changes to the next will be recorded. page 7-46 or Bluetooth
track, and does not play this track Advertisement on Pandora (Infotainment Controls - Base
on this station again. This helps Radio) on page 7-32 or
Pandora choose which tracks Pandora may display Bluetooth (Voice Recognition -
should not play on this station. This advertisements. The artist name Base Radio) on page 7-37.
feature is only available on user and track title will not be displayed
created stations. and the skip track button will not be
available.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Unable to Start Pandora

. Close Pandora on the device . An iPhone is connected to both
and launch again. Devices that Bluetooth and the USB port.
If the device is unable to launch allow multitasking may require
Pandora: Playback can be resumed from
an extra step to quit the Pandora a loss of audio by double
. Check that the latest version of application. See the cell phone tapping on the iPhone home
Pandora is installed. manufacturer's user guide. button then scrolling through the
. Check that there is an active Thumbs Up or Thumbs Down icons to find an icon that allows
account logged into Pandora. Error a change of flow between
Bluetooth and USB cable.
. Have at least one station If there is an error trying to rate a
created. track with the , or - buttons, the Volume and song selection may
message “Thumbs Down Error” or be controlled using the
. For Android and BlackBerry
“Thumbs Up Error” will display. Infotainment controls or on the
devices, check that the device is
Press OK to dismiss. phone/device. If Pandora is
paired with the vehicle, and
selected and nothing is heard,
whether the device displays in
Loss of Audio check the volume setting on
the Connected phone sources
Loss of Pandora audio can happen both phone/device and the
list under the Phone icon from
in different ways: Infotainment system.
the Home Page.
. For an iPhone, check that the . Weak or lost data connection. Common Pandora Messages
USB cable is connected to the . Device needs to be charged. Pandora Error/Please Check
USB port and the screen is Device: Not signed in or Pandora
unlocked.
. Application needs to be is down for maintenance.
relaunched.
No Stations Available: No stations
. Connection between phone and are available on the Pandora server
radio lost. through the connected device.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Action Unavailable. Please Check Audio Players There can be increased skipping,
Device Connection: A few difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
conditions for loss of Internet difficulty in loading and ejecting.
connection are: CD Player If these problems occur, check the
. The connected device loses its If the vehicle is equipped with a CD disc for damage or try a known
cellular connection. player, it can be used for CD and good disc.
MP3 audio. To avoid damage to the CD player:
. The device does not support
Internet connectivity. With the vehicle on, insert a disc . Do not use scratched or
into the slot, label side up. Press the damaged discs.
. The device is not in the vehicle. MEDIA button to select CD as a
. The Bluetooth signal is lost. source.
. Do not apply labels to discs. The
labels could get caught in the
No skips remaining for this The system is capable of player.
station or permitted during playing most:
advertisements:
. Insert only one disc at a time.
. Audio CDs
. The maximum Pandora skip limit
. Keep the loading slot free of
. CD-R foreign materials, liquids, and
has been reached according to
the plan that was obtained.
. CD-RW debris.
. Skipping an advertisement was
. MP3 or unprotected WMA . Use a marking pen to label the
tried. formats top of the disc.
See www.pandora.com/help. If the When playing any compatible Loading and Ejecting Discs
service will not work, see a dealer recordable disc, the sound quality
To load a disc:
for assistance. can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the quality 1. Turn the vehicle on.
of the music that has been 2. Insert a disc into the slot, label
recorded, or the way the disc has side up. The player pulls it in the
been handled.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: rest of the way. If the disc is
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
damaged or improperly loaded,

. Press and hold to fast reverse CD Menu
there is an error and the disc through a track. Release the
button to return to playing While on the CD main page, press
ejects. the MENU knob to display the CD
speed. Elapsed time displays.
Playing an Audio CD menu and the following may display:
u (Seek Next/Fast Forward):
Press the MEDIA button on the While on the CD main page: Browse: Select to display the files
faceplate until CD is selected. or songs on the CD.
. Press to seek to the next track.
On the CD main page, either a track Tone Settings: Select to adjust
. Press and hold to fast forward Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
number displays at the beginning of
through a track. Release the Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
each track, or Song, Artist, and
button to return to playing “Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio
Album information displays when
speed. Elapsed time displays. on page 7-8.
available.
Use the following screen controls to
j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD Auto Volume: If equipped, this
main page, press to pause. Press feature adjusts the volume based on
play the disc:
again to resume. the vehicle speed. Select the level
t (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse): Z (Shuffle): Press Z to play the between Off, Low, Medium-Low,
While on the CD main page: Medium, Medium-High, and High.
songs in random order. Press again
. Press to seek to the beginning of to turn off. Press BACK to go to the
the current or previous track. previous menu.
If a Blu-ray Disc® or DVD disc is
If the track has been playing for DSP: If equipped, this feature
loaded into the disc player and the
less than five seconds, it seeks adjusts the pre-defined settings.
CD screen button is selected, a
to the previous track. If longer See “DSP” in AM-FM Radio on
message comes on the screen to
than five seconds, the current page 7-8.
use the Video application. The
track starts from the beginning.
Video application is only available EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this
on vehicles with Rear Seat feature adjusts the equalizer
Entertainment (RSE). settings. See “EQ (Equalizer)” in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
AM-FM Radio on page 7-8.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Error Messages If Disc Player Error displays, it could

. Maximum number of folders:
be for one of the following reasons: eight folders with 255 files per
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc folder.
comes out, it could be for one of the . The player temperature is
following reasons: too high.
. Maximum of 1,000 files on
.
a disc.
. The disc has an invalid or There are load or eject errors.
unknown format.
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.
If the CD is not playing correctly for
. The disc is very hot. Try the disc any other reason, try a known Root Directory
again when the temperature good CD. The root directory is treated as a
returns to normal. If any error continues, contact your folder. All files contained directly
. The road is very rough. Try the dealer. under the root directory are
disc again when the road is accessed prior to any root directory
smoother.
Playing an MP3 CD folders.
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, To play an MP3 CD, follow the same Empty Folders
or upside down. instructions as “Playing an
Audio CD.” If a root directory or folder is empty
. The air is very humid. Try the or contains only folders, the player
disc again later. The following guidelines must be advances to the next folder in the
met when creating an MP3 disc, file structure that contains a
. There was a problem while otherwise the CD might not play: compressed audio file. The empty
burning the disc. . Sampling rate: 16 kHz, folder(s) are not displayed or
. The label is caught in the CD 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, numbered.
player. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
No Folder
. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
When the CD only contains
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
compressed audio files without any
128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
folders, all files are under the root
and 320Infokbps.
r
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
folder.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
USB Port While the USB source is active, “Tone Settings” under “Playing an
press the corresponding faceplate Audio CD” in CD Player on
Playing from a USB button for the icons on the screen to page 7-15.
A USB mass storage device or operate USB function: Auto Volume: If equipped, see
Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) . t (Seek Previous/Fast “Playing an Audio CD” in CD Player
device can be connected to the Reverse) on page 7-15.
USB port.
EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this
The vehicle may have USB ports in
. u (Seek Next/Fast Forward) feature adjusts the equalizer
the center console, armrest, or one . j /r (Play/Pause) settings. See “EQ (Equalizer)
in the upper glove box. See Center Settings” in AM-FM Radio on
Console Storage on page 4-3 and . Z (Shuffle) page 7-8.
Glove Box on page 4-2.
For information on how to use the Playing from an iPod®/iPad®/
USB MP3 Player and USB Drives screen icons, see “Playing an iPhone®
Audio CD.”
. The USB MP3 players and USB This feature supports the following
drives connected must comply USB Menu devices:
with the USB Mass Storage
Class specification (USB MSC).
Press the MENU knob to display the . iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
USB menu and the following may 4th generation)
. Hard disk drives are not display:
supported.
. iPod with video (5.0 and
Browse: Select to display the files 5.5 generation)
. Supported file system is FAT32. and folders on the USB device. . iPod classic® (6th generation)
To play a USB device: Tone Settings: Select to adjust
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
. iPod touch® (1st and 2nd
. Connect the USB. generation)
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
. Press the MEDIA button on the . iPad
faceplate until the connected I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
device is shown.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS, The music information displays on Tone Settings: Select to adjust
iPhone 4 the radio’s display and begins Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
There may be problems with playing through the vehicle’s audio Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
operation and function in the system. “Tone Settings” under “Playing an
following situations: The device battery recharges Audio CD” in CD Player on
automatically while the vehicle is on. page 7-15.
. When connecting a device with
a more recent version of the When the vehicle is off while a Auto Volume: If equipped, see
firmware installed than is device is connected using the USB “Playing an Audio CD” in CD Player
supported by the infotainment cable, the device battery stops on page 7-15.
system. charging and the device will EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this
automatically turn off. feature adjusts the Equalizer
. When connecting a device on
which firmware from other If the device is an unsupported settings. See “EQ (Equalizer)” in
providers is installed. model, it can still be listened to in AM-FM Radio on page 7-8.
the vehicle by connecting to the
To connect and control a device: auxiliary input jack using a standard Browse Device Media
1. Connect one end of the standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. Use the following to browse:
USB cable to the device's dock Playlists:
Menu
connector.
Press the MENU knob to display the 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
2. Connect the other end to a USB and press to view the playlists
device Menu and the following may
port in the center console. See stored on the device.
display:
Center Console Storage on
page 4-3. Browse: Select to display the files 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
or songs on the device. See and press to select a playlist
3. Press the MEDIA button to name to view a list of all songs
“Browse Device Media” later in this
select the source. in the playlist.
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Songs:
and press to select the song and press to select an album 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
from the list to begin playback. name to view a list of all songs and press to view a list of all
Artists: on the album. songs stored on the device.
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to view the artists and press to select the song and press to select the song
stored on the device. from the list to begin playback. from the list to begin playback.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Genres:
and press to select an artist 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight SD Card Reader
name to view a list of all albums and press to view the genres This vehicle may have an SD card
by the artist. stored on the device. reader in the center console or
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight armrest. See Center Console
and press to select an album and press to select a genre Storage on page 4-3.
name to view a list of all songs name to view a list of artists of 1. Plug the SD card into the reader.
on the album. that genre.
2. Press the MEDIA button to
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight select the SD device.
and press to select the song and press to select to view
from the list to begin playback. albums by that artist. If an SD card has already been
connected, but a different source is
Albums: 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight currently active, press the MEDIA
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select an album to screen button repeatedly to cycle
and press to view the albums view songs. through all of the available audio
stored on the device. 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight source screens, until the SD card
and press to select the song screen is shown.
from the list to begin playback.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Playing Music from the SD Card If an auxiliary device has already DSP: If equipped, this feature
An SD card is played the same way been connected, but a different adjusts the pre-defined settings.
a USB device is played. See USB source is currently active, press the See “DSP” in AM-FM Radio on
Port on page 7-18. MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly page 7-8.
to scroll through all of the available EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this
audio source screens, until the AUX
Auxiliary Jack source screen is shown.
feature adjusts the pre-defined
equalizer settings. See “EQ
This vehicle may have an AUX jack (Equalizer)” in AM-FM Radio on
Playing from the AUX Jack
in the center console or armrest. page 7-8.
See Center Console Storage on An auxiliary device is played
page 4-3. through the audio system and
controlled through the device itself. Bluetooth Audio
Possible auxiliary audio sources
include: If equipped, music may be played
AUX Menu
from a paired Bluetooth device. See
. Laptop computer Press the MENU knob to display the “Pairing” in “Information Controls”
. Audio music player AUX menu and the following may under “Bluetooth” for help pairing a
display: device.
This jack is not an audio output. Do
not plug headphones into the Tone Settings: Select to adjust Volume and song selection may be
auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, controlled by using the infotainment
devices should be set up while the Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See controls or the phone/device.
vehicle is in P (Park). “Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio If Bluetooth Audio is selected and
on page 7-8. nothing is heard, check the volume
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable setting on both the phone/device
from the auxiliary device to the Auto Volume: If equipped, see
“Playing an Audio CD.” and the infotainment system.
auxiliary input jack.
Launch music by pressing the
MEDIA screen button on the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Home Page.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To play music via Bluetooth: Manage Bluetooth Devices: Select OnStar System
1. Power on the device, and pair to to go to the Bluetooth page to add
or delete devices. An OnStar® subscriber has the
connect the device.
ability to connect to the OnStar
2. Once paired, go into the audio When selecting Bluetooth Audio, the
system (if equipped) and ask an
application from the Home Page radio may not be able to launch the
OnStar Advisor to download a
or via the application tray. Select audio player on the connected
destination into the vehicle. OnStar
MEDIA until Bluetooth displays. device to start playing. When the
will send address information and
vehicle is not moving, use the
location coordinates of the
Bluetooth Audio Menu phone to begin playback.
destination into the vehicle.
Press the MENU screen button to All devices launch audio differently.
To access from the Home Page,
display the Bluetooth Audio menu. When selecting Bluetooth Audio as
turn the MENU knob to highlight the
The following may be available: a source, the radio may show as
OnStar icon. Press the MENU knob
Tone: Turn the MENU knob to paused on the screen. Press play
to access.
adjust the tone settings. on the device or press r to begin
playback.
Press o BACK to go back to the
previous menu. Some phones support sending
Bluetooth music information to
display on the radio. When the radio
receives this information, it will
check to see if any is available and
display it. For more information
about supported Bluetooth features,
see www.gm.com/bluetooth.
Press the button below the MUTE
screen button to mute the
navigation directions. The
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
previous audio selection will play.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The MUTE screen button will

. My Destination Route Preview
change to UNMUTE. Press the . Route Preview
button below UNMUTE to enable .
the navigation directions again. Repeat
When the system is downloading a
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
route, the only option available is
Press the MENU knob to go to the Cancel Route. Once the route is
Turn-by-Turn menu. downloaded, the additional list items
display.
My Destination
. If Route Preview is selected, a
If My Destination is selected, a
special version of the Maneuver special version of the Maneuver
View displays. The Destination View displays.
Address is shown in the Street . Press the button below the
Name field and the total distance to NEXT screen button to display
the destination is shown in the the next maneuver information,
Distance to Maneuver View. Press including distance between it
The following options are available: the button below the DONE screen and the previous maneuver.
button to return to the
. Update Route: only shows if the Maneuver View.
. Press the button below the
vehicle is off the route PREV screen button to display
. Cancel Route the previous maneuver
information, including distance
between it and the previous
maneuver.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
While on the current maneuver, Voice Recognition audio features that are easily
the PREV screen button is performed by pressing one or two
hidden. If on the last maneuver, If equipped, voice recognition allows buttons, and are not supported by
the NEXT screen button is for hands-free operation within the voice commands.
hidden. audio and phone applications. This
In general there are flexible ways to
feature can be started by pressing
. Press the button below the speak commands for completing the
DONE screen button to return to either the g button on the steering tasks. Most of them, except
the Maneuver View. wheel or by selecting the g on the destination entry and voice keypad,
screen display. can be completed in a single
Repeat command. If the task takes more
Press the button below the REPEAT However, not all features within
than one command to complete, the
these areas are supported by voice
screen button to go back to the first command would be to indicate
commands. Generally, only complex
Maneuver View. The audible the kind of task that is to be
tasks that require multiple manual
maneuver prompt is repeated. performed. The system replies with
interactions to complete are
prompts that lead through a dialog
Canceling a Turn-by-Turn Route supported by voice commands.
to enter the necessary information.
Press the button below the Cancel For example, tasks that take more
Voice recognition can be used when
Route screen button on the than one or two button presses such
the ignition is on or when Retained
Turn-by-Turn menu. A screen as selecting a song or artist to play
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
displays to confirm the cancellation. from a media device would be
See Retained Accessory Power
supported by voice commands.
(RAP) on page 9-28.
Other tasks, like adjusting the
volume or seeking up or down are
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Using Voice Recognition 2. The audio system mutes and the If a command is not spoken, the
system plays a prompt followed voice recognition system says a
Voice recognition becomes available
by a beep. help prompt.
once the system has been
initialized. This begins when the 3. Wait until after the beep Prompts and Screen Displays
ignition is turned on. Initialization completes, then clearly speak
one of the commands described While a voice recognition session is
may take a few moments.
in this section. active, there will be corresponding
1. Press g on the steering wheel buttons on screens displayed.
control to activate voice Press g to interrupt any voice Manual interaction in the voice
recognition system prompt. For recognition session is permitted.
recognition, or select g on the
example, if the prompt seems to Interaction during a voice session
infotainment screen on the may be completed entirely using
center stack. be taking too long to finish,
press g again and the beep voice commands, or some
. If voice recognition is selections may expedite a session.
should happen right away.
started from the steering If a selection is made using a
wheel control, the There are two voice prompt modes manual control, the dialog will
instrument cluster displays supported: progress in the same way as if the
the selections and visual . Long verbal prompts: The longer selection was made through a voice
dialog content. prompts provide more command. Once the system is able
. If voice recognition is information regarding the to complete the task, or the session
started from the supported actions. is terminated, the voice recognition
infotainment screen, the dialog stops.
. Short prompts: The short
selections and visual dialog prompts provide simple An example of this type of manual
content are displayed on instructions about what can be intervention is pressing on an entry
both the center stack stated. of a displayed number list instead of
display and the instrument speaking the number associated
cluster display. with the entry desired.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Canceling Voice Recognition For languages that do not support

. Usually Phone and Audio
natural language commands in commands can be spoken in a
. Press the Home screen button single command.
sentence form, use the direct
to terminate the voice
commands shown as examples on For example, “Call Dave Smith
recognition session which was
the display screen. at work,” “Play” followed by the
initiated by pressing g on the artist or song name, or “Tune”
infotainment screen on the For best results:
followed by the radio station
center stack. . Listen for the prompt and wait number.
. Press or say “Cancel” or “Exit” to for the beep before saying a
command or reply. There is no need to memorize
terminate the voice recognition specific command words. Direct
session and display the screen . Say “Help” or look at the screen commands might be more clearly
from which voice recognition display for commands. understood by the system. An
was initiated. example of a direct command would
. Voice recognition system prompt
. Press i on the steering wheel can be interrupted during a be “Call 555-1212.” Examples of
controls to terminate the voice prompt by pressing g again. these direct commands are
session and display the screen displayed on most of the screens
For example, if the prompt while a voice session is active.
from which voice recognition seems to be taking too long to
was initiated. If “Phone” or “Phone Commands,” is
finish, or if what is being stated, the system understands that
Helpful Hints for Speaking prompted causes a need for an a phone call is requested and will
Commands immediate reply, press g again respond with questions until enough
and wait for the beep. details are gathered.
Voice recognition can understand
commands that are either naturally . Speak the command naturally, If the phone number has been
stated in sentence form (English not too fast, not too slow. Use saved with a name and a place, the
only), or direct commands that state direct commands without a lot of direct command should include
the application and the task. extra words. both, for example “Call Dave Smith
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
at work.”
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Using Voice Recognition for The screen returns back to the Pressing g while the help prompt is
List Options screen where voice recognition was playing will terminate the prompt
initiated. and a beep will be heard. Doing this
When a list is displayed, a voice
prompt will ask to confirm or select The Back Command will stop the help prompt so that a
an option from that list. A selection voice command can be used.
Say “Back” or press the Back button
can be made by manually selecting to go to the previous screen. Voice Recognition for the
the item, or by speaking the line Radio
number for the item to select. If in voice recognition, and “Back” is
stated all the way through to the Select the g screen button to
When a screen contains a list, initial screen, then “Back” is stated
options may be available but not launch audio voice recognition.
one more time, the voice recognition If the voice button is pressed in a
displayed. The list on a voice session will cancel.
recognition screen functions the radio screen, the voice commands
same as a list on other screens. Help for radio and media features are
Scrolling can be used to help available.
Say “Help” on any voice recognition
display other entries from the list. screen and the help prompt for the “Switch to AM”: Switch bands to
Manually scrolling or paging the list screen is played. Additionally, a AM and tune to the last AM radio
on a screen during a voice pop-up displays a text version of the station.
recognition session suspends the help prompt. Depending on how “Switch to FM”: Switch bands to
current voice recognition event and voice recognition was initiated, the FM and tune to the last FM radio
plays the prompt “Make your Help pop-up will either display on station.
selection from the list using the the instrument cluster or the
manual controls or press the Back infotainment screen. Press the “Switch to XM”: Switch bands to
button to try again.” Dismiss button to make the pop-up SiriusXM and tune to the last
go away. SiriusXM channel.
If manual selection takes more than
15 seconds, the session terminates
and prompts that it has timed out. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
“Tune to <AM frequency> AM”: “Play Artist <artist name>”: “Play <device name>”: Play
Tune to the radio station whose Begin playback of the media music from a specific device
frequency is identified in the selection identified in the command. identified by name. The device
command (like “nine fifty”). “Play Album”: Begin a dialog to name is the name displayed on the
“Tune to <FM frequency> FM”: enter a specific album name. screen when the device is first
Tune to the radio station whose selected as an audio source.
“Play Album <album name>”:
frequency is identified in the Begin playback of the identified “Play Chapter”: Begin a dialog to
command (like “one o one album name in the command. enter a specific name.
point one”). “Play Chapter <chapter name>”:
“Play Song”: Begin a dialog to
“Tune to XM <XM channel enter a specific song name. Begin playback of the media
number>”: Tune to the SiriusXM selection identified in the command.
radio station whose channel number “Play Song <song name>”: Begin
playback of the identified song “Play Audiobook”: Begin a dialog
is identified in the command. to enter a specific name.
name in the command.
“Tune to XM <XM channel “Play Audiobook <audiobook
name>”: Tune to the SiriusXM “Play Genre”: Begin a dialog to
enter a specific genre. name>”: Begin playback of the
radio station whose channel name media selection identified in the
is identified in the command. “Play Genre <genre name>”: command.
Voice Recognition for Audio Begin playback of the media
selection identified in the command. “Play CD Track <track
My Media number>”: Begin playback of the
“Play Playlist”: Begin a dialog to CD at the track identified in the
If browsing My Media when the
enter a specific playlist name. command.
voice button is selected, the voice
recognition commands for My Media “Play Playlist <playlist name>”: “Play Episode”: Begin a dialog to
features are available. Begin playback of the identified enter a specific name.
playlist in the command.
“Play Artist”: Begin a dialog to
enter a specific Artist name. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
“Play Episode <episode content in a different way than The restriction is that the command
name>”: Begin playback of the smaller amounts of media. The “Play Song” must be spoken first;
media selection identified in the system may limit the options of the system will then ask for the song
command. voice recognition by not allowing name. The reply command would be
“Play Podcast”: Begin a dialog to selection of song titles by voice at to say the name of the song to play.
enter a specific name. the highest level if the number of Similar limits exist for album
songs exceeds the maximum limit. content. If there are more than
“Play Podcast <podcast
name>”: Begin playback of the Voice command option changes 4,000 albums, but less than 8,000,
media selection identified in the through media content limits are: the content cannot be accessed
command. . Song files including other directly with one command like,
individual files of all media types “Play <album name>.” The
“Play Video”: Begin a dialog to command “Play Album” must first be
enter a specific name. such as audiobook chapters,
podcast episodes, and videos. spoken; the system will then ask for
“Play Video <video name>”: the album name. The reply would
Begin playback of the media
. Album type folders including be to say the name of the album
selection identified in the command. types such as albums and to play.
audiobooks.
“My Media”: Begin a dialog to Once the number of songs has
enter the desired media content. There are no restrictions if the exceeded approximately 8,000,
number of song files and albums is there is no support for accessing the
Handling Large Amounts of Media less than 4,000. When the number songs directly through voice
Content of song files connected to the commands. There will still be
It is expected that large amounts of system is between 4,000 and 8,000, access to the media content by
media content will be brought into the content cannot be accessed using commands for playlists,
the vehicle. It may be necessary to directly with one command like artists, and genres.
handle large amounts of media “Play <song name>.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The access commands for playlists, “Pair Phone”: Begins the Bluetooth Speech Recognition
artists, and genres are prohibited Bluetooth pairing process. Follow (If Equipped)
after the number of this type of instructions on the radio display.
media exceeds 4,000. Voice Pass-Thru allows access to
“Switch Phone”: Select a different the speech recognition commands
The system will provide feedback phone for outgoing calls. on the cell phone. See your cell
the first time voice recognition is “Voice Keypad”: Begins a dialog phone manufacturer’s user guide to
initiated if it has become apparent to enter special numbers like see if the cell phone supports this
that any of these limits are reached international numbers. The numbers feature.
during a device initializing process. can be entered in groups of digits Activating this function will start the
Voice Recognition for the with each group of digits being Bluetooth Speech Recognition on a
Phone repeated back by the system. If the connected phone.
group of digits is not correct, the
“Call <contact name>”: Initiate a command “Delete” will remove the The steering wheel controls are
call to an entered contact. The last group of digits and allow them used to operate this function.
command may include location if to be re-entered. Once the entire Press and hold g to activate.
the contact has location numbers number has been entered, the
stored. A voice session begins so that voice
command “Call” will start dialing the commands can be given to Siri® or
“Call <contact name> At Home,” number. many other controls provided by the
“At Work,” “On Mobile,” or “On “Voice Mail”: Initiate a call to voice cell phone.
Other”: Initiate a call to an entered mail numbers.
contact and location at home, at Press @ to exit or press i to
work, on mobile device, or on Voice Recognition for OnStar close and return to the previous
another phone. (If Equipped) application prior to the start of Voice
Pass-Thru.
“Call <phone number>”: Initiate a “OnStar”: Begin OnStar Voice
call to a standard phone number Recognition.
seven or 10 digits in length, and
also 911, 411, or 611. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Phone duplicate or rarely used entries.

If possible, program speed dial Warning (Continued)
or other shortcuts.
Bluetooth (Overview) Taking your eyes off the road too
. Review the controls and long or too often could cause a
Instructions for using the cell phone operation of the infotainment
may differ between infotainment crash resulting in injury or death.
system. Focus your attention on driving.
systems. The base radio and base
radio with connectivity instructions
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
are included in this manual. See the The system may not work with Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
infotainment manual for instructions all cell phones. See “Pairing” in can use a Bluetooth-capable cell
on the uplevel radios. this section. phone with a Hands-Free Profile to
Bluetooth-capable systems can
. If the cell phone has voice make and receive phone calls. The
interact with many cell phones, dialing capability, learn to use infotainment system and voice
allowing: that feature to access the recognition are used to control the
address book or contact list. See system. The system can be used
. Placement and receipt of calls in “Voice Pass-Thru” in this while in ON/RUN or ACC/
a hands-free mode. section. ACCESSORY. The range of the
. Sharing of the cell phone’s . See “Storing and Deleting Phone Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section. (30 ft). Not all phones support all
the vehicle. functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See
To minimize driver distraction, { Warning www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
before driving, and with the vehicle information about compatible
parked: When using a cell phone, it can phones.
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment system.
contact lists clearly and delete I
nfor
mat
ovi
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Bluetooth Controls PHONE: Select to enter the phone How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
main menu. See Bluetooth calm and natural voice.
Use the buttons on the instrument
(Overview) on page 7-31 or
panel, faceplate, and the steering Audio System
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
wheel to operate the Bluetooth
Base Connected Radio) on When using the Bluetooth system,
system.
page 7-42 or Bluetooth (Voice sound comes through the vehicle's
Steering Wheel Controls Recognition - Base Connected front audio system speakers and
Radio) on page 7-46 or Bluetooth overrides the audio system. Use the
g (Press to Talk): Press to answer (Infotainment Controls - Base O knob during a call to change the
incoming calls, confirm system
Radio) on page 7-32 or Bluetooth volume level. The system maintains
information, and start voice
(Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on a minimum volume level.
recognition.
page 7-37.
i (End Call): Press to end a call, Bluetooth Audio Quality
reject a call, or cancel an operation. Voice Recognition
Turn off the Echo and Noise
Press to mute or unmute the The voice recognition system uses cancellation feature on your phone,
infotainment system. commands to control the system if supported, for the best hands-free
Infotainment System Controls and dial phone numbers. performance.
For information about how to Noise: The system may not See www.gm.com/bluetooth.
navigate the menu system using the recognize voice commands if there
infotainment controls, see Overview is too much background noise, such Bluetooth (Infotainment
as noise from open windows or loud
on page 7-3.
talking inside the vehicle. Controls - Base Radio)
MENU: Turn to scroll through a list. For information about how to
Press to select the highlighted list When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for navigate the menu system using the
option. infotainment controls, see Overview
a voice command. Wait for the tone
{ (Home Page): Press to go to the and then speak. on page 7-3.
Home Page. See Home Page on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
page 7-5.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Switching to Handset or the cell phone changes or the 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
Hands-Free Mode cell phone is deleted from the to select Manage Phones.
system. 3. Press the button just below the
To switch between handset mode
and hands-free mode, use the . Only one paired cell phone can PAIR screen button. A four-digit
OnStar command, “transfer call.” be connected to the Bluetooth Personal Identification Number
system at a time. (PIN) appears on the display.
Pairing The PIN is used in Step 5.
. If multiple paired cell phones are
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone within range of the system, the 4. Start the pairing process on the
must be paired to the Bluetooth system connects to the first cell phone to be paired to the
system and then connected to the available paired cell phone in the vehicle. See the cell phone
vehicle before it can be used. See order that they were newly manufacturer's user guide for
your cell phone manufacturer's user paired to the system. To connect information on this process.
guide for Bluetooth functions before to a different paired phone, see
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth 5. Locate the device named “Your
“Connecting to a Different Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone is not connected, calls can Phone” later in this section.
be made using OnStar Hands-Free phone. Follow the instructions
Calling, if available. See OnStar Pairing a Phone or Device on the cell phone to enter the
Overview on page 14-1, if equipped. PIN provided in Step 3. If a six
1. From the Home Page, turn the digit code is shown on the phone
Pairing Information MENU knob to access the and the vehicle screen, confirm
PHONE screen button, then the codes are the same. The
. Up to five cell phones can be press the MENU knob to select
paired to the Bluetooth system. system recognizes the new
the PHONE screen button. If a connected phone after the
. The pairing process is disabled device has been previously pairing process is complete.
when the vehicle is moving. paired, the main Phone menu
will be shown. If no devices
. Pairing only needs to be have been paired, Step 2 can be
completed once per phone, skipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
unless the pairing information on
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
6. If the phone prompts to accept 4. Press the button below the Phone Menu
connection or allow phone book DELETE screen button to delete
Once a phone is connected and
download, select Always Accept the highlighted device.
selected, the following may display:
and Allow. The phone book may 5. A confirmation screen is
not be available if not accepted. Recent Calls: Turn the MENU
displayed. Press the button just
knob to highlight Recent Calls and
7. Repeat steps 1–6 to pair below the DELETE screen
press to select.
additional phones or devices. button to confirm deletion.
Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to
Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone highlight Contacts and press to
Phones 1. From the Home Page, turn the select.
1. To list all paired devices, from MENU knob, then press to Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to
the Home Page turn the MENU select the PHONE screen highlight Keypad and press to
knob, then press to select the button. select.
PHONE screen button. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press Active Call: Turn the MENU knob
2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones. to highlight Active Call and press to
to select Manage Phones. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight select and display the active call
Deleting a Paired Phone the phone to be connected. screen.
1. From the Home Page, turn the 4. Press the button just below the Manage Phones: Turn the MENU
MENU knob, then press to CONNECT screen button to knob to highlight Manage Phones
select the PHONE screen connect to the highlighted and press to select.
button. device.
Making a Call Using Contacts
2. Turn the MENU knob and press and Recent Calls
to select Manage Phones.
For cell phones that support the
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Contacts and Recent Calls feature,
the phone to be deleted. the Bluetooth system can use the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
contacts stored on your cell phone
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
to make calls. See your cell phone To make a call using the 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
manufacturer’s user guide or Contacts menu: Recent Calls and press to
contact your wireless provider to 1. From the Home Page, turn the select.
find out if this feature is supported MENU knob, then press to If necessary, select between
by your phone. select the PHONE screen Missed, Recent, and Sent calls
If the phone prompts to allow phone button. by pressing the button below the
book download during the pairing 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight appropriate screen button.
process, select Always Accept and Contacts and press to select. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Allow. The phone book may not be the contact or the phone
available if not accepted. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the letter group and press to number.
When a cell phone supports the select. 4. Press the MENU knob to call the
phone book feature, the Contacts contact.
and Recent Calls menus are 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
automatically available. the contact and press to select. Making a Call Using the
The Contacts menu allows you to 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Keypad
access the phone book stored in the the desired number, then press To make a call:
cell phone to make a call. the MENU knob to call the
contact. 1. From the Home Page, turn the
The Recent Calls menu allows you MENU knob, then press to
to access the phone numbers from To make a call using the Recent select the PHONE screen
the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, Calls menu: button.
and Missed Calls menus on the cell 1. From the Home Page, turn the
phone to make a call. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
MENU knob, then press to to select Keypad.
select the PHONE screen
button. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the first digit and press to select.
Continue this process through
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
the number. To call, press the Call Waiting Ending a Call

button just below the CALL
Call waiting must be supported on To end a call, do one of the
screen button.
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by following:
Accepting or Declining a Call the wireless service carrier to work. . Press the button just below the
When an incoming call is received, Accepting a Call Waiting Call END screen button.
the infotainment system mutes and To accept a call waiting call, do one . Press i on the steering wheel
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. of the following: controls.
Accepting a Call . Press the button just below the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
To accept a call, do one of the SWITCH screen button.
(DTMF) Tones
following: . Press g on the steering wheel The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
. Press the button just below the controls. send numbers during a call. This is
ANSWER screen button. used when calling a menu-driven
Declining a Call Waiting Call
. Press g on the steering wheel phone system.
To decline a call waiting call, do one
controls. of the following: 1. When a call is active, press the
button just below the KEYPAD
Declining a Call . Press the button just below the screen button.
To decline a call, do one of the IGNORE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
following: . Press i on the steering wheel the first digit and press to select.
. Press the button just below the controls. If not initially in the phone
IGNORE screen button. . Do nothing. application, from the Home Page,
. Press i on the steering wheel turn the MENU knob, then press to
controls. select the PHONE screen button.
. Do nothing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
From the PHONE main menu, turn 4. Start the pairing process on the 6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair
the MENU knob to highlight Active cell phone that you want to pair. additional phones.
Call and press to select. For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
Bluetooth (Voice user guide.
The system can list all cell phones
Recognition - Base 5. Locate the device named “Your
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
Radio) Vehicle” in the list on the cell
also connected to the vehicle, the
phone. Follow the instructions
system responds with “is connected”
Using Voice Recognition on the cell phone to enter the
after that phone name.
PIN provided in Step 3. The
To use voice recognition, press g system may respond with a six 1. Press g. The system responds
on the steering wheel. Use the digit code to be confirmed on the “Ready,” followed by a tone.
commands below for the various cell phone (instead of entering a
voice features. For additional four digit code), check that the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
information, say “Help” while you same digits are shown on the 3. Say “List.”
are in a voice recognition menu. cell phone and say "Yes" to
confirm. Select Confirm on the Deleting a Paired Phone
Pairing
cell phone as well. After the PIN If the phone name to delete is
Pairing a Phone is successfully entered, the unknown, see “Listing All Paired
system prompts you to provide a and Connected Phones.”
1. Press g. The system responds name for the paired cell phone.
“Ready,” followed by a tone. This name will be used to 1. Press g. The system responds
2. Say “Bluetooth.” indicate which phones are “Ready,” followed by a tone.
paired and connected to the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds vehicle. The system responds
with instructions and a four-digit with “<Phone name> has been 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
Personal Identification Number successfully paired” after the for which phone to delete.
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. pairing Iprocess
nf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dis complete.
edby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4. Say the name of the phone to Storing and Deleting Phone 3. Say the entire phone number or
delete. Numbers a group of digits all at once with
no pauses, then follow the
Connecting to a Different Phone The following commands are used directions given by the system to
To connect to a different cell phone, to delete and store phone numbers. save a name tag for this number.
the Bluetooth system looks for the Store: This command will store a
next available cell phone in the Using the “Digit Store” Command
phone number, or a group of
order in which all available cell numbers as a name tag. If an unwanted number is
phones were paired. This may need recognized by the system, say
Digit Store: This command allows
to be repeated depending on how “Correction” at any time to clear the
a phone number to be stored as a
many cell phones have been last number.
name tag by entering the digits one
connected. To hear all of the digits recognized
at a time.
1. Press g. The system responds Delete: This command is used to
by the system, say “Verify” at
“Ready,” followed by a tone. any time.
delete individual name tags.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press g. The system responds
3. Say “Change phone.” command deletes all stored name “Ready,” followed by a tone.
.
tags in the Hands-Free Calling 2. Say “Digit Store.”
If another cell phone is Directory and the Destinations
found, the response will be Directory. 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
“<Phone name> is now After each digit is entered, the
connected.” Using the “Store” Command system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone. After
This can be repeated to 1. Press g. The system responds the last digit has been entered,
connect any of the up to “Ready,” followed by a tone.
five paired phones. say “Store,” and then follow the
2. Say “Store.” directions given by the system to
. If another cell phone is not save a name tag for this number.
found, the original phone
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
remains connected.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Using the “Delete” Command 2. Say “Directory.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
1. Press g. The system responds 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
speakers.
“Ready,” followed by a tone. 4. Say “List.”
Calling 911 Emergency (U.S. and
2. Say “Delete.” Making a Call Canada)
3. Say the name tag you want to Calls can be made using the
delete. 1. Press g. The system responds
following commands. “Ready,” followed by a tone.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Dial or Call: The dial or call
Command 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
command can be used
This command deletes all stored interchangeably to dial a phone 3. Say “911.”
name tags in the Hands-Free number or a stored name tag. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
Calling Directory and the Digit Dial: This command allows a
Destinations Directory. Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico)
phone number to be dialed by
To delete all name tags: entering the digits one at a time. 1. Press g. The system responds
Re-dial: This command is used to “Ready,” followed by a tone.
1. Press g. The system responds
dial the last number used on the cell 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
“Ready,” followed by a tone.
phone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” 3. Say “066.”
Using the “Dial” or “Call” 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
Listing Stored Numbers Command
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
The list command will list all the 1. Press g. The system responds
stored numbers and name tags. “Ready,” followed by a tone. The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
Using the “List” Command 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press g. The system responds 3. Say the entire number without
“Ready,” followed by a tone. pausingInfoor
r say
mat
ionPr
ovthe
i name tag.
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
After each digit is entered, the Using the “Re-dial” Command Call Waiting
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone. 1. Press g. The system responds Call waiting must be supported on
“Ready,” followed by a tone. the cell phone and enabled by the
If an unwanted number is wireless service carrier.
recognized by the system, say 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
“Correction” at any time to clear the system dials the last number . Press g to answer an incoming
last number. called from the connected cell call when another call is active.
phone. The original call is placed
To hear all of the numbers on hold.
recognized by the system, say Once connected, the person called
“Verify” at any time. will be heard through the audio . Press g again to return to the
speakers. original call.
“Ready,” followed by a tone. Receiving a Call . To ignore the incoming call, no
When an incoming call is received, action is required.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
the audio system mutes and a ring . Press i to disconnect the
3. Say each digit, one at a time. tone is heard in the vehicle.
After each digit is entered, the current call and switch to the call
system repeats back the digit it . Press g to answer the call. on hold.
heard followed by a tone. After Three-Way Calling
the last digit has been entered,
. Press i to ignore a call.
say “Dial.” Three-way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
Once connected, the person called enabled by the wireless service
will be heard through the audio carrier.
speakers.
1. While on a call, press g.
2. Say “Three-way call.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
3. Use the “Dial” or “Call” command To Transfer Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell
to dial the number of the third Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone:
party to be called. During a call with the audio in the 1. Press g. The system responds
4. Once the call is connected, vehicle: “Ready,” followed by a tone.
press g to link all callers 1. Press g. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
together.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” 3. Say “Voice.” The system
Ending a Call responds “OK, accessing
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
<phone name>.”
Press i to end a call. System from a Cell Phone
The cell phone's normal prompt
Transferring a Call During a call with the audio on the
messages will go through their cycle
Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press g. The audio according to the phone's operating
the Bluetooth system and the cell transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions.
phone. does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
The cell phone must be paired and phone. See your cell phone (DTMF) Tones
connected with the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for more
system before a call can be The Bluetooth system can send
information. numbers and the numbers stored as
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. use this feature when calling a
Voice pass-thru allows access to the menu-driven phone system.
voice recognition commands on the Account numbers can also be
cell phone. See your cell phone stored for use.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Sending a Number or Name Tag Switching to Handset or Pairing

During a Call Hands-Free Mode A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
1. Press g. The system responds To switch between handset or must be paired to the Bluetooth
“Ready,” followed by a tone. hands-free mode, from the Home system and then connected to the
Page select the PHONE to display vehicle before it can be used. See
2. Say “Dial.” your cell phone manufacturer's user
Call View.
3. Say the number or name tag guide for Bluetooth functions before
. While the active call is
to send. pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
hands-free, press the Handset
phone is not connected, calls can
Clearing the System screen button to switch to the
be made using OnStar Hands-Free
handset mode. The screen
Unless information is deleted out of Calling, if available. See OnStar
button changes to Hands-Free
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it Overview on page 14-1.
once the Bluetooth device
will be retained indefinitely. This confirms it is operating as Pairing Information
includes all phone pairing handset.
information. For information on how . Up to 10 cell phones can be
to delete this information, see . While the active call is handset, paired to the Bluetooth system.
“Deleting a Paired Phone.” select the Hands-Free screen . The pairing process is disabled
button to switch to the
when the vehicle is moving.
Bluetooth (Infotainment hands-free mode. The screen
button changes to Handset once . Pairing only needs to be
Controls - Base the Bluetooth device confirms it completed once per phone,
Connected Radio) is operating as hands-free. unless the pairing information on
the cell phone changes or the
For information about how to cell phone is deleted from the
navigate the menu system using the system.
infotainment controls, see Overview
on page 7-3. . Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
system at a time.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. If multiple paired cell phones are 4. Start the pairing process on the 8. Repeat Steps 1−7 to pair
within range of the system, the cell phone to be paired to the additional phones.
system connects to the most vehicle. See the cell phone
recently connected device. To manufacturer's user guide for Listing All Paired and Connected
connect to a different paired Phones
information on this process.
phone, see “Connecting to a 1. To list all paired devices, from
Different Phone” after in this 5. Locate “Chevrolet MyLink” on
the Home Page turn the MENU
section. the display. Follow the
knob, then press to select the
instructions on the cell phone to
Pairing a Phone or Device PHONE screen button.
enter the PIN provided in Step 3
1. From the Home Page, turn the or confirm the six-digit code 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
MENU knob to access the shown on the display. After the to select Manage Phones.
PHONE screen button, then PIN is successfully entered or
Deleting a Paired Phone
press the MENU knob to select the code is confirmed, the
the PHONE screen button. If a system responds with “<Device 1. From the Home Page, turn the
device has been previously name> has been successfully MENU knob, then press to
paired, the main Phone menu paired” when the pairing process select the PHONE screen
will be shown. If no devices is complete. button.
have been paired, Step 2 can be 6. If “Chevrolet MyLink” does not 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
skipped. appear, turn the phone off or to select Manage Phones.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press remove the phone battery and 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
to select Manage Phones. retry. the phone to be deleted.
3. Press the button just below the 7. If the phone prompts to accept 4. Press the button below the
PAIR/screen button. A four-digit connection or allow phone book DROP screen button to
Personal Identification Number download, select always accept disconnect the highlighted
(PIN) appears on the display. and allow. The phone book may device.
The PIN may be used in Step 5. not be available if not accepted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
5. Press the button below the Phone Menu to make calls. See your cell phone
DELETE screen button to delete manufacturer’s user guide or
Once a phone is connected and
the highlighted device. contact your wireless provider to
selected, the following may display:
6. A confirmation screen is find out if this feature is supported
Recent Calls: Turn the MENU by your phone.
displayed. Press the button just
knob to highlight Recent Calls and
below the DELETE screen If the phone prompts to allow phone
press to select.
button to confirm deletion. book download during the pairing
Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to process, select Always Accept and
Connecting to a Different Phone highlight Contacts and press to Allow. The phone book may not be
1. From the Home Page, turn the select. available if not accepted.
MENU knob, then press to Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to When a cell phone supports the
select the PHONE screen highlight Keypad and press to phone book feature, the Contacts
button. select. and Recent Calls menus are
2. Turn the MENU knob and press Active Call: Turn the MENU knob automatically available.
to select Manage Phones. to highlight Active Call and press to The Contacts menu allows you to
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight select and display the active call access the phone book stored in the
the phone to be connected. screen. cell phone to make a call.
4. Press the button just below the Manage Phones: Turn the MENU The Recent Calls menu allows you
CONNECT screen button to knob to highlight Manage Phones to access the phone numbers from
connect to the highlighted and press to select. the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls,
device. and Missed Calls menus on the cell
Making a Call Using Contacts phone to make a call.
and Recent Calls
For cell phones that support the
Contacts and Recent Calls feature,
the Bluetooth system can use the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
contacts stored on your cell phone
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To make a call using the If necessary, select between Accepting or Declining a Call
Contacts menu: Missed, Recent, and Sent calls
When an incoming call is received,
1. From the Home Page, turn the by pressing the button below the
the infotainment system mutes and
MENU knob, then press to appropriate screen button.
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
select the PHONE screen 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
button. the contact or the phone Accepting a Call
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight number. To accept a call, do one of the
Contacts and press to select. 4. Press the MENU knob to call the following:
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight contact. . Press the button just below the
the contact and press to select. ANSWER screen button.
Making a Call Using the
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Keypad . Press g on the steering wheel
the desired number, then press To make a call: controls.
the MENU knob to call the
1. From the Home Page, turn the Declining a Call
contact.
MENU knob, then press to To decline a call, do one of the
To make a call using the Recent select the PHONE screen following:
Calls menu: button. . Press the button just below the
1. From the Home Page, turn the 2. Turn the MENU knob and press IGNORE screen button.
MENU knob, then press to to select Keypad.
select the PHONE screen . Press i on the steering wheel
button. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
controls.
the first digit and press to select.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Continue this process through . Do nothing.
Recent Calls and press to the number. To call, press the
select. button just below the CALL
screen button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Call Waiting Ending a Call If not initially in the phone

application, from the Home Page,
Call waiting must be supported on To end a call, do one of the
turn the MENU knob, then press to
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by following:
select the PHONE screen button.
the wireless service carrier to work. . Press the button just below the From the PHONE main menu, turn
Accepting a Call Waiting Call END screen button. the MENU knob to highlight Active
Call and press to select.
To accept a call waiting call, do one . Press i on the steering wheel
of the following: controls.
.
Bluetooth (Voice
Press the button just below the
SWITCH screen button.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Recognition - Base
(DTMF) Tones Connected Radio)
. Press g on the steering wheel The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
controls. send numbers during a call. This is Using Bluetooth Voice
used when calling a menu-driven Recognition
Declining a Call Waiting Call
phone system. To use voice recognition, press the
To decline a call waiting call, do one g button on the steering wheel. Use
of the following: 1. When a call is active, press the
button just below the KEYPAD the commands below for the various
. Press the button just below the screen button. voice features. For additional
IGNORE screen button. information, say “Help” while in a
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight voice recognition menu. See Voice
. Press i on the steering wheel the first digit and press to select. Recognition on page 7-24 for help
controls. using voice recognition commands.
. Do nothing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Making a Call 2. Say “Dial” or “Call” and then say Once connected, the person called
the contact name. For example will be heard through the audio
Calls can be made using the
“Call Dave Smith at Work.” speakers.
following commands.
Once connected, the person called Using the “Switch Phone”
Using the “Dial” or “Call” will be heard through the audio Command
Command speakers.
To call a number: 1. Press g. The system responds
Calling 911 Emergency (U.S. and “Say a command or say help,”
1. Press g. The system responds Canada) followed by a tone.
“Say a command or say help,” 1. Press g. The system responds 2. After the tone, say “Switch
followed by a tone.
“Say a command or say help,” Phone.” The system displays a
2. Say “Dial” or “Call” followed by followed by a tone. list of phones to select.
the complete phone number.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” Using the “Voice Keypad”
Use the “Voice Keypad” command Command
3. Say “911.”
for international numbers or special
numbers which include * or #. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” 1. Press g. The system responds
“Say a command or say help,”
Once connected, the person called Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico) followed by a tone.
will be heard through the audio
speakers. 1. Press g. The system responds 2. After the tone, say “Voice
“Say a command or say help,” Keypad.” The system allows
To call using a contact from your followed by a tone. entry of special numbers and
phone book:
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” characters.
3. Say “066.”
“Say a command or say help,”
followed by a tone. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Using the “Voice mail” Command

. Access or delete Report Card
Settings data or Teen Driver settings.
“Say a command or say help,” Teen Driver Register or Unregister a Key
followed by a tone. If equipped, Teen Driver allows keys Any of the vehicle keys can be
2. After the tone, say “Voice mail.” to be programmed with registered as a Teen Driver key.
The system dials the voice mail customizable vehicle settings. Label the key to tell it apart from the
number of the connected phone. It limits some vehicle features and other keys. A maximum of eight
prevents some systems, such as keys can be registered. There is
Clearing the System Park Assist, if equipped, from being one Report Card per vehicle.
Unless information is deleted out of turned off. It also displays a report After creating the PIN, to register or
the vehicle Bluetooth system, it will card of the driving behavior when a unregister the key(s):
be retained. This includes phone Teen Driver key is used. 1. Have the vehicle running.
pairing information. For directions To activate or change the settings,
on how to delete this information, 2. For automatic transmissions, the
select Teen Driver from the Settings vehicle must be in P (Park). For
see “Deleting a Paired Phone.” menu. See Vehicle Personalization
manual transmissions, the
on page 5-47. If no keys are vehicle must be stopped with the
activated, the Teen Driver feature parking brake set.
will not record any Report
Card data. 3. Select Teen Driver from the
Settings menu.
A Personal Identification Number
(PIN) must be created using the 4. Enter the PIN.
keypad. The PIN is required to: 5. Select Key Registration.
. Register Keys. The system will display instructions
. Change settings. for registering or unregistering
a key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
For Ignition keyed system:

. If the transmitter key is in the In vehicles with a Pushbutton start
pocket in the transmitter pocket, system, if a Teen Driver transmitter
. If the key is not registered, it will identify whether the
select Register and follow the key and a non-Teen Driver
transmitter key is registered or transmitter key are both present at
instructions. A message displays unregistered.
to confirm successful start up, the vehicle will recognize
registration.
. If the transmitter key is not the non-Teen Driver transmitter key
registered, a message to start the vehicle. The Teen Driver
. If the key is already registered, displays requesting settings will not be active.
the option to unregister displays. confirmation to register.
If Unregister is selected, the key Manage Settings
Select Register and follow
is no longer registered and a the instructions. A message The PIN can be used to change
confirmation displays. displays to confirm these settings:
For Pushbutton start system: successful registration. Audio Volume Limit: Allows a
Once Key Registration is selected, . If the transmitter key is maximum radio volume to be set.
the system detects whether there is already registered, the Teen Driver Speed Warning:
a transmitter key in the transmitter option to unregister Allows a warning to be set when a
pocket, which is in the center displays. If Unregister is selected speed is exceeded.
console storage area or on the side selected, the transmitter
of the steering wheel column. See key is no longer registered Teen Driver Speed Limiter:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a confirmation displays. If equipped, this allows the
System Operation on page 2-4. maximum speed limit of the vehicle
to be set.
. If no transmitter key is detected,
a message displays indicating to
place the transmitter key in the
transmitter pocket.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The following cannot be changed: Trademarks and iPod shuffle®, and iPod touch® are
. The radio will mute when the trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
driver safety belt is not fastened,
License Agreements in the U.S. and other countries.
and in some vehicles, when the FCC Information
safety belt of a front outboard
passenger is not fastened. See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
. Other vehicle features, such as
Park Assist, if equipped, cannot
be turned off when the Teen
Driver setting is in use.
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,
Delete Report Card Data taxes, one time activation fee, and
The Report Card continues to save other fees may apply. Subscription
data for all trips until the data is fee is consumer only. All fees and
deleted using the PIN. "Made for iPod" and "Made for programming subject to change.
iPhone" mean that an electronic Subscriptions subject to Customer
To delete Report Card data: accessory has been designed to Agreement available at
. Select Reset from the Report connect specifically to iPod or www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®
Card screen. iPhone and has been certified by service only available in the
the developer to meet Apple 48 contiguous United States and
. Select Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
performance standards. Apple is not Canada.
from the Teen Driver menu.
responsible for the operation of this In Canada: Some deterioration of
Forgotten PIN device or its compliance with safety service may occur in extreme
See your dealer to reset the PIN. and regulatory standards. Please northern latitudes. This is beyond
note that the use of this accessory the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
with iPod or iPhone may affect Radio.
wireless performance. iPhone®,
iPod®, iPod classic
I
nfor
mat
i ®
onPr
,oviPod
idedby:
nano®,
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Explicit Language Notice: Channels patent rights, copyrights, and trade Schedule I: Gracenote EULA
with frequent explicit language are secrets of Digital Voice
indicated with an “XL” preceding the Systems, Inc.
channel name. Channel blocking is General Requirements:
available for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio receivers by notifying 1. A License Agreement from
SiriusXM: SiriusXM® is required for any
product that incorporates
. USA Customers — See SiriusXM Technology and/or for
www.siriusxm.com or call use of any of the SiriusXM Music recognition technology and
1-866-635–2349. marks to be manufactured, related data are provided by
. Canadian Customers — See distributed, or marketed in the Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
www.xmradio.ca or call SiriusXM Service Area. industry standard in music
1-877-209-0079. recognition technology and
2. For products to be distributed,
related content delivery. For
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, marketed, and/or sold in
more information visit
disassemble, reverse engineer, Canada, a separate agreement
www.gracenote.com.
hack, manipulate, or otherwise is required with Canadian
make available any technology or Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as Music-related data from Gracenote,
software incorporated in receivers SiriusXM Canada). Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
compatible with the SiriusXM® Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
Satellite Radio System or that Other Information copyright © 2000 to present
support the SiriusXM website, the The Bluetooth® word mark and Gracenote. One or more patents
Online Service or any of its content. logos are owned by the Bluetooth® owned by Gracenote may apply to
Furthermore, the AMBER voice SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks this product and service. See the
compression software included in by General Motors is under license. Gracenote website for a
this product is protected by Other trademarks and trade names non-exhaustive list of applicable
intellectual property rights including are those of their respective owners. Gracenote patents. Gracenote,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the restrictions set forth herein with Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
the "Powered by Gracenote" logo respect to Gracenote Data shall Software, and Gracenote Servers.
are either registered trademarks or also apply to such content and such Gracenote reserves all rights in
trademarks of Gracenote in the content providers shall be entitled to Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
United States and/or other all of the benefits and protections Software, and the Gracenote
countries. set forth herein that are available to Servers, including all ownership
Gracenote. rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote Terms of Use Gracenote become liable for any
You agree that you will use
This application or device contains Gracenote Data, the Gracenote payment to you for any information
software from Gracenote, Inc. of Software, and Gracenote Servers that you provide. You agree that
Emeryville, California ("Gracenote"). for your own personal Gracenote may enforce its rights
The software from Gracenote (the non-commercial use only. You agree under this Agreement against you
"Gracenote Software") enables this not to assign, copy, transfer or directly in its own name.
application to do disc or file transmit the Gracenote Software or The Gracenote service uses a
identification and obtain any Gracenote Data to any third unique identifier to track queries for
music-related information, including party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE statistical purposes. The purpose of
name, artist, track, and title OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, a randomly assigned numeric
information ("Gracenote Data") from THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, identifier is to allow the Gracenote
online servers or embedded OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, service to count queries without
databases (collectively, "Gracenote EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY knowing anything about who you
Servers") and to perform other PERMITTED HEREIN. are. For more information, see the
functions. You may use Gracenote web page for the Gracenote Privacy
Data only by means of the intended You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data, Policy for the Gracenote service.
End-User functions of this
application or device. the Gracenote Software, and The Gracenote Software and each
Gracenote Servers will terminate if item of Gracenote Data are licensed
This application or device may you violate these restrictions. If your to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no
contain content belonging to license terminates, you agree to representations or warranties,
Gracenote’s providers. If so, all of I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
cease any and all use of the express or implied, regarding the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
accuracy of any Gracenote Data. USE OF THE GRACENOTE Free Type Project
Gracenote reserves the right to SOFTWARE OR ANY Portions of this software are
delete data from the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO copyright © 2013 The FreeType
Servers or to change data CASE WILL GRACENOTE Project (http://www.freetype.org). All
categories for any cause that BE LIABLE FOR ANY rights reserved.
Gracenote deems sufficient. No CONSEQUENTIAL OR
warranty is made that the Gracenote INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR iType
Software or Gracenote Servers are ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST iType is a trademark of Monotype
error-free or that functioning of REVENUES. Imaging Inc. registered in the U.S.
Gracenote Software or Gracenote © 2013. Gracenote, Inc. All Rights Patent & Trademark Office and may
Servers will be uninterrupted. Reserved. be registered in certain other
Gracenote is not obligated to jurisdictions.
provide you with new enhanced or PANDORA
additional data types or categories PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, Open Source SW
that Gracenote may provide in the and the Pandora trade dress are The open source code used in this
future and is free to discontinue its trademarks or registered trademarks device can be downloaded at the
services at any time. of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with webpage shown in the information
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL permission. at the center stack display. Further
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR information concerning the OSS
Unicode licenses is shown in the center
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED Copyright © 1991-2013 Unicode, stack display.
WARRANTIES OF Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed
under the Terms of Use in http:// QNX
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Portions of this software are
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. copyright © 2008-2013, QNX
GRACENOTE DOES NOT Software Systems. All rights
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT reserved.
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Part C – EULA expressly granted herein, and retain INCLUDING, WITHOUT

Copyright 2013, Software Systems all right, title and interest in and to LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES
GmbH & Co. KG. All Rights all copies of the Software, including OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE,
Reserved. all intellectual property rights NON-INFRINGEMENT,
therein. Unless required by MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
The product you have purchased applicable law you may not FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
("Product") contains Software reproduce, distribute or transfer, ANY WARRANTIES OR OTHER
(Runtime Configuration No. 505962; or de-compile, disassemble or PROVISIONS OFFERED BY THE
"Software") which is distributed by otherwise attempt to unbundle, MANUFACTURER OR ITS
or on behalf of the Product reverse engineer, modify or create DISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFER
manufacturer "Manufacturer") under derivative works of, the Software. FROM THIS LICENSE ARE
license from Software Systems Co. You agree: (1) not to remove, cover OFFERED BY THE
("QSSC"). You may only use the or alter any proprietary notices, MANUFACTURER OR ITS
Software in the Product and in labels or marks in or on the DISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND
compliance with the license terms Software, and to ensure that all NOT BY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES
below. copies bear any notice contained on OR THEIR LICENSORS. YOU
Subject to the terms and conditions the original; and (2) not to export the ASSUME ANY RISKS
of this License, QSSC hereby Product or the Software in ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE
grants you a limited, non-exclusive, contravention of applicable export OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS
non-transferable license to use the control laws. LICENSE.
Software in the Product for the EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
purpose intended by the OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY
Manufacturer. If permitted by the APPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITS APPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN
Manufacturer, or by applicable law, LICENSORS PROVIDE THE THE CASE OF DELIBERATE OR
you may make one backup copy of SOFTWARE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, GROSSLY NEGLIGENT ACTS), IN
the Software as part of the Product WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR NO EVENT SHALL QSSC, ITS
software. QSSC and its licensors CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, AFFILIATES OR THEIR
reserve all license+C31 rights not EITHER EXPRESS
I
nfor
mat
ionPOR
r
ovi IMPLIED
dedby: LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY, WMA END USER NOTICE

WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING This product is protected by certain The marks of companies displayed
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR intellectual property rights of by this product to indicate business
OTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES, Microsoft. Use or distribution of locations are the marks of their
INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, such technology outside of this respective owners. The use of such
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, product is prohibited without a marks in this product does not imply
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES license from Microsoft. any sponsorship, approval,
OF ANY CHARACTER ARISING AS or endorsement by such companies
A RESULT OF THIS LICENSE OR For more information on the
Software, including any open source of this product.
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY
TO USE THE PRODUCT software license terms (and
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED available source code) as well as
TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF copyright attributions applicable to
GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, the Runtime Configuration indicated
PRODUCT FAILURE OR above, please contact the
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL Manufacturer or contact QSSC at
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES 175 Terence Matthews Crescent,
OR LOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITS Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2M 1W8
AFFILIATES OR THEIR (licensing@qnx.com).
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only)

Climate Control Systems (with With this system, the heating and ventilation can be controlled.
Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems (with
Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
1. Fan Control TEMP (Temperature Control):

2. Air Recirculation Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the
3. Air Delivery Mode Control temperature inside the vehicle.
4. Defrost
5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
8-2 Climate Controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise [ (Floor): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the
or counterclockwise to increase or floor outlets, with some air directed windows are clear.
decrease the fan speed. Turn the to the windshield, side window, and See Air Vents on page 8-8.
knob all the way counterclockwise second row floor outlets.
to turn the fan off. @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
- (Defog): This mode clears the on recirculation. An indicator light
Air Delivery Mode Control: windows of fog or moisture. Air is comes on. Air is recirculated to
Press Y, \, [ , or - to change directed to the windshield, floor quickly cool the inside of the
the direction of the airflow. An outlets, and side window vents. vehicle. It can also be used to help
indicator light comes on in the 0 (Defrost): Press to clear the reduce outside air and odors that
selected mode button. windshield of fog or frost more enter the vehicle.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the quickly. Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets. windshield and the side window
vents. The system automatically
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided forces outside air into the vehicle.
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning) 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled. decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the fan off.
Air Delivery Mode Control:
Press Y, \, [ , or - to change
the direction of the airflow. An
indicator light comes on in the
selected mode button.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets.
1. Fan Control 7. K Rear Window Defogger (If [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) Equipped) floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield and side window
3. Air Delivery Mode Control f Outside Heated Mirror (If outlets.
4. Defrost Equipped)
- (Defog): This mode clears the
5. TEMP (Temperature Control) 8 Outside Air (If Equipped) windows of fog or moisture. Air is
6. Air Recirculation TEMP (Temperature Control): directed to the windshield, floor
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise outlets, and side window vents.
to increase or decrease the
temperatureI
nf inside
ormat
ionPr the
ovi
d vehicle.
edby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the vehicle. The recirculation mode The rear window defogger only
windshield of fog or frost more cannot be used with the outside works when the ignition is in ON/
quickly. Air is directed to the air mode. RUN. The defogger turns off if the
windshield and the side window f (Outside Heated Mirror, If ignition is turned to ACC/
vents. The system automatically Equipped): Press to turn the ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
forces outside air into the vehicle heated mirrors on or off. See If equipped with heated outside
and the air conditioning compressor Heated Mirrors on page 2-17. mirrors, they turn on when the rear
will run, unless the outside window defogger button is on. They
temperature is close to freezing. A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on help to clear fog or frost from the
Do not drive the vehicle until all the or off. An indicator light comes on to surface of the mirrors.
windows are clear. show that the air conditioning is
See Air Vents on page 8-8. enabled. If the fan is turned off, the { Caution
air conditioner will not run. The A/C
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn light will stay on even if the outside Using a razor blade or sharp
on recirculation. An indicator light temperatures are below freezing. object to clear the inside rear
comes on. Air is recirculated to window can damage the rear
quickly cool the inside of the Rear Window Defogger window defogger. Repairs would
vehicle. It can also be used to help K (Rear Window Defogger, If not be covered by the vehicle
reduce outside air and odors that Equipped): Press to turn the rear warranty. Do not clear the inside
enter the vehicle. window defogger on or off. An rear window with sharp objects.
8 (Outside Air, If Equipped): indicator light on the button comes
Press to turn the outside air mode on to show that the rear window
on. An indicator light on the button defogger is on.
comes on to show that outside is
on. When selected, air from outside
the vehicle circulates throughout the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Operation
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be The system automatically controls
controlled. the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the
system is in full automatic operation.
If the air delivery mode or fan
setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
To place the system in
automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the driver and passenger
1. Driver Temperature Control 7. AUTO (Automatic Operation) temperature.
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 8. Air Recirculation To find your comfort setting, start
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 9. Power Button with 22°C (72°F) and allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
4. Fan Control 10. Rear Window Defogger adjust the temperature as
5. Defrost 11. SYNC (Synchronized needed for best comfort.
6. Passenger Temperature Control Temperature) To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
may be automatically selected in
warm weather.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The recirculation light will not come Driver and Passenger Changing the mode cancels the
on when automatically controlled. Temperature Control: The automatic operation and the system
Press @ to manually select temperature can be adjusted goes into manual mode. Press
recirculation; press it again to select separately for the driver and AUTO to return to automatic
outside air. passenger. operation.
Do not cover the solar sensor on the Turn the knob clockwise or Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
top of the instrument panel near the counterclockwise to increase or instrument panel outlets.
windshield. This sensor regulates decrease the driver or passenger \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
air temperature based on sun load. temperature setting. between the instrument panel and
See “Sensors” later in this section. SYNC (Synchronized floor outlets. Some air is directed
Temperature): Press to link the toward the windshield and side
Manual Operation passenger temperature setting to window outlets.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the the driver setting. The SYNC [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
climate control system on or off. indicator light will turn on. When the floor outlets, with some to the
Outside air still enters the vehicle, passenger setting is adjusted, the windshield, side window outlets, and
and is directed to the floor. This SYNC indicator light is off. second row floor outlets.
direction can be changed by
The driver side or passenger side - (Defog): This mode clears the
pressing the air delivery mode.
temperature display shows the windows of fog or moisture. Air is
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise temperature setting increasing or directed to the windshield, floor
or counterclockwise to increase or decreasing. outlets, and side window vents. The
decrease the fan speed. Press the
Air Delivery Mode Control: system automatically forces outside
knob to turn the fan off.
Press Y, \, [ , or - to change air into the vehicle and the air
Press AUTO to return to automatic the direction of the airflow. An conditioning compressor will run,
operation. indicator light comes on in the unless the outside temperature is
selected mode button. close to freezing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the vehicle. It can also be used to help

windshield of fog or frost more reduce outside air and odors that { Caution
quickly. Air is directed to the enter the vehicle. The air
conditioning compressor also comes Using a razor blade or sharp
windshield and the side window object to clear the inside rear
vents. The air conditioning on when this mode is activated.
window can damage the rear
compressor also comes on, unless Rear Window Defogger window defogger. Repairs would
the outside temperature is below
freezing. The rear window defogger uses a not be covered by the vehicle
warming grid to remove fog from the warranty. Do not clear the inside
Do not drive the vehicle until all rear window. rear window with sharp objects.
windows are clear.
See Air Vents on page 8-8.
K (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window Heated Mirror: If equipped with
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to defogger on or off. An indicator light heated outside rearview mirrors, the
turn the air conditioning system on on the button comes on to show that mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost
or off. An indicator light comes on to the rear window defogger is on. from the surface of the mirror when
show that the air conditioning is the rear window defog button is
The rear window defogger only
enabled. If the fan is turned off, the pressed. See Heated Mirrors on
works when the ignition is in ON/
air conditioner will not run. The A/C page 2-17.
RUN. The defogger turns off if the
light will stay on even if the outside ignition is turned to ACC/
temperatures are below freezing. ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated to
quickly cool the inside of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Sensors There is also an exterior Air Vents

temperature sensor behind the front
grille. This sensor reads the outside Use the air vents in the center
air temperature and helps maintain and on the side of the instrument
the temperature inside the vehicle. panel to direct airflow. Use the
Any cover on the front of the vehicle thumbwheels near the air vents to
including a snow plow, could cause open or close off the airflow.
a false reading in the displayed Air vents blow warm air on the side
temperature. windows in cold weather. If Floor,
The climate control system uses the Defog, or Defrost modes are
information from these sensors to selected, a small amount of air will
The solar sensor, located in the maintain comfort settings by come from the vents close to the
defrost grille in the middle of the adjusting the outlet temperature, fan window. If the airflow is shut off
instrument panel, monitors the solar speed, and the air delivery mode. using the thumbwheels, warm air
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor The system may also supply cooler will be directed to the other
or the system will not work properly. air to the side of the vehicle facing instrument panel vents. This is
the sun. The recirculation mode will normal operation.
also be used as needed to maintain Use the thumbwheels to turn vent
cool outlet temperatures. airflow on or off based on the mode
selected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Operation Tips Maintenance

. Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the Passenger Compartment
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
Air Filter
vehicle. The filter reduces the dust, pollen,
. Keep the path under the front and other airborne irritants from
seats clear of objects to help outside air that is pulled into the
circulate the air inside of the vehicle.
vehicle more effectively. The filter should be replaced as part
. Use of non-GM approved hood of routine scheduled maintenance.
deflectors can adversely affect See Maintenance Schedule on 1. Open the lower glove box door
the performance of the system. page 11-3. To find out what type of completely.
Check with your dealer before filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11-15. 2. Remove the four screws from
adding equipment to the outside
around the lower glove box. The
of the vehicle.
door does not need to be
removed to access the screws.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Service
All vehicles have a label underhood
that identifies the refrigerant used in
the vehicle. The refrigerant system
should only be serviced by trained
and certified technicians. The air
conditioning evaporator should
never be repaired or replaced by
one from a salvage vehicle.
It should only be replaced by a new
evaporator to ensure proper and
safe operation.
3. Close the lower glove box door 4. Release the two tabs holding the
and pull it from its frame to service door. Open the service During service, all refrigerants
remove the entire unit. door and remove the old filter. should be reclaimed with proper
equipment. Venting refrigerants
5. Install the new air filter. directly to the atmosphere is harmful
6. Close the service door and to the environment and may also
secure the tabs. create unsafe conditions based on
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the inhalation, combustion, frostbite,
glove box. or other health-based concerns.
See your dealer if additional

assistance is needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Retained Accessory
9-27 Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
9-28
9-29
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-50
9-51
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Driving Information Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-53
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking (Manual
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Ride Control Systems
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Traction Control/Electronic
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Hill Descent
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-33
Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Running the Vehicle While Cruise Control
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11 Automatic Transmission Driver Assistance Systems
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-34 Driver Assistance
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-14 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Assistance Systems for
Truck-Camper Loading Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Manual Transmission Assistance Systems for
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-40 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Starting and Operating Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-23 Drive Systems System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Lane Departure
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
California Fuel distractions.
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-69 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Filling a Portable Fuel activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
governments have enacted laws driving.
Trailer Towing
regarding driver distraction. Become
General Towing . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
Driving Characteristics and to the floor.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76 keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Trailer Sway . Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100 carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Conversions and Add-Ons Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Add-On Electrical place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
Adding a Snow Plow or . Watch the road. Do not read,
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 9-101 take notes, or look up
Pickup Conversion to information on phones or other
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104 electronic devices.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the infotainment section for drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
more information on using that tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
system and the navigation system, time. Actually doing it is
if equipped, including pairing and { Warning reaction time.
using a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive Driving that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected.” The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3-12. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the engine ever stops while the If the steering wheel is turned until it If power steering assist is lost
vehicle is being driven, brake reaches the end of its travel, and is because the engine stops or a
normally but do not pump the held in that position for an extended system malfunctions, the vehicle
brakes. Doing so could make the period of time, power steering assist can be steered but may require
pedal harder to push down. If the may be reduced. increased effort.
engine stops, there will be some If the steering assist is used for an See your dealer if there is a
power brake assist but it will be extended period of time, power problem.
used when the brake is applied. assist may be reduced.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the Normal use of the power steering { Caution
brake pedal will be harder to push. assist should return when the
system cools down. If the steering wheel is turned
until it reaches the end of its
Steering See specific vehicle steering travel, and is held in that position
messages under Steering System for more than 15 seconds,
Electric Power Steering Messages on page 5-42.
(1500 Series) damage may occur to the power
Hydraulic Power Steering steering system and there may be
If the vehicle has electric power loss of power steering assist.
steering, it does not have power (2500/3500 Series)
steering fluid. Regular maintenance If the vehicle has hydraulic
is not required. power steering, it may require Curve Tips
If power steering assist is lost due maintenance. See Power Steering . Take curves at a reasonable
to a system malfunction, the vehicle Fluid (1500 Series) on page 10-28 speed.
can be steered, but may require or Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500
Series) on page 10-28. . Reduce speed before entering a
increased effort. See your dealer if curve.
there is a problem.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve.
Off-Road Recovery 3. Turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating Loss of Control
gently into the straightaway.
Skidding
Steering in Emergencies There are three types of skids that
. There are some situations when correspond to the vehicle's three
steering around a problem may control systems:
be more effective than braking. . Braking Skid — wheels are not
. Holding both sides of the rolling.
steering wheel allows you to turn . Steering or Cornering Skid —
180 degrees without removing too much speed or steering in a
a hand.
curve causes tires to slip and
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) The vehicle's right wheels can drop lose cornering force.
allows steering while braking. off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Acceleration Skid — too much
these tips: throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the Defensive drivers avoid most skids
way, steer the vehicle so that it by taking reasonable care suited to
straddles the edge of the existing conditions, and by not
pavement. overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
pavement edge.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help Before Driving Off-Road
these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. . Have all necessary maintenance
. Ease your foot off the and service work completed.
accelerator pedal and steer the Off-Road Driving . Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,
way you want the vehicle to go. Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be and check inflation pressure in
The vehicle may straighten out. used for off-road driving. Vehicles all tires, including the spare,
Be ready for a second skid if it without four-wheel drive and if equipped.
occurs. vehicles not equipped with All
Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)
. Read all the information about
. Slow down and adjust your
tires must not be driven off-road four-wheel-drive vehicles in this
driving according to weather
except on a level, solid surface. For manual.
conditions. Stopping distance
can be longer and vehicle contact information about the . Remove any underbody air
control can be affected when original equipment tires, see the deflector, if equipped. Re-attach
traction is reduced by water, warranty manual. the air deflector after off-road
snow, ice, gravel, or other One of the best ways for successful driving.
material on the road. Learn to off-road driving is to control the . See Hill Descent Control (HDC)
recognize warning clues — such speed. on page 9-56
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a . Know the local laws that apply to
mirrored surface — and slow { Warning off-road driving.
down when you have any doubt. When driving off-road, bouncing To gain more ground clearance if
. Try to avoid sudden steering, and quick changes in direction needed, it may be necessary to
acceleration, or braking, can easily throw you out of remove the front fascia lower air
including reducing vehicle speed position. This could cause you to dam. However, driving without the
by shifting to a lower gear. Any lose control and crash. You and air dam reduces fuel economy.
sudden changes could cause your passengers should always
the tires to slide. wear safety belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,
{ Caution Warning (Continued) trees, or grasses or disturb
wildlife.
Operating the vehicle for . Keep cargo in the cargo area
as far forward and as low as
. Do not park over things that
extended periods without the front
possible. The heaviest things burn. See Parking over Things
fascia lower air dam installed can
should be on the floor, That Burn on page 9-32.
cause improper air flow to the
engine. Re-attach the front fascia forward of the rear axle. Driving on Hills
air dam after off-road driving. . Heavy loads on the roof raise Driving safely on hills requires good
the vehicle's center of gravity, judgment and an understanding of
Loading the Vehicle for making it more likely to roll what the vehicle can and cannot do.
over. You can be seriously or
Off-Road Driving fatally injured if the vehicle
rolls over. Put heavy loads { Warning
{ Warning inside the cargo area, not on Many hills are simply too steep
the roof. for any vehicle. Driving up hills
. Unsecured cargo on the load
floor can be tossed about can cause the vehicle to stall.
when driving over rough For more information about loading Driving down hills can cause loss
terrain. You or your the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits of control. Driving across hills can
passengers can be struck by on page 9-15 and Tires on cause a rollover. You could be
flying objects. Secure the page 10-53. injured or killed. Do not drive on
cargo properly. steep hills.
Environmental Concerns
(Continued) . Always use established trails,
roads, and areas that have been Before driving on a hill, assess the
set aside for public off-road steepness, traction, and
recreational driving and obey all obstructions. If the terrain ahead
posted Iregulations.
nf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
cannot be seen, get out of the

. Never go downhill forward or brakes to slow the vehicle and
vehicle and walk the hill before backward with either the help keep the vehicle under
driving further. transmission or transfer case in control.
N (Neutral). The brakes could
When driving on hills: overheat and you could lose
. Use a low gear and keep a firm control. { Warning
grip on the steering wheel. Heavy braking when going down
. Maintain a slow speed. { Warning a hill can cause your brakes to
overheat and fade. This could
. When possible, drive straight up If the vehicle has the two‐speed cause loss of control and you or
or down the hill. automatic transfer case, shifting others could be injured or killed.
. Slow down when approaching the transfer case to N (Neutral) Apply the brakes lightly when
the top of the hill. can cause your vehicle to roll descending a hill and use a low
even if the transmission is in gear to keep vehicle speed under
. Use headlamps even during the
day to make the vehicle more P (Park). This is because the control.
visible. N (Neutral) position on the
transfer case overrides the
transmission. You or someone If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
{ Warning else could be injured. If leaving 1. Apply the brakes to stop the
Driving to the top of a hill at high the vehicle, set the parking brake vehicle, and then apply the
speed can cause an accident. and shift the transmission to parking brake.
There could be a drop-off, P (Park). Shift the transfer case to
embankment, cliff, or even any position but N (Neutral).
another vehicle. You could be
seriously injured or killed. As you . When driving down a hill, keep
near the top of a hill, slow down the vehicle headed straight
and stay alert. down. UseInfa
or
low
mati
onPr
gear
ovi
dedby:
because
the engine will work with the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2. Shift into P (Park) and then 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted

. Hidden obstacles can make the
restart the engine. after stalling, set the parking steepness of the incline more
brake, shift into P (Park), and severe. If a rock is driven across
. If driving uphill when the with the uphill wheels, or if the
vehicle stalls, shift to turn the vehicle off.
downhill wheels drop into a rut
R (Reverse), release the 3.1. Leave the vehicle and or depression, the vehicle can tilt
parking brake, and back seek help. even more.
straight down. 3.2. Stay clear of the path the . If an incline must be driven
. Never try to turn the vehicle vehicle would take if it across, and the vehicle starts to
around. If the hill is steep rolled downhill. slide, turn downhill. This should
enough to stall the vehicle, . Avoid turns that take the vehicle help straighten out the vehicle
it is steep enough to cause across the incline of the hill. and prevent the side slipping.
it to roll over. A hill that can be driven straight
. If you cannot make it up the
hill, back straight down
up or down might be too steep to
drive across. Driving across an
{ Warning
the hill. incline puts more weight on the Getting out of the vehicle on the
. Never back down a hill in downhill wheels, which could downhill side when stopped
N (Neutral) using only the cause a downhill slide or a across an incline is dangerous.
brake. The vehicle can roll rollover. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
backward quickly and you . Surface conditions can be a be crushed or killed. Always get
could lose control. problem. Loose gravel, muddy out on the uphill side of the
spots, or even wet grass can vehicle and stay well clear of the
. If driving downhill when the
cause the tires to slip sideways, rollover path.
vehicle stalls, shift to a
lower gear, release the downhill. If the vehicle slips
parking brake, and drive sideways, it can hit something
straight down the hill. that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
etc. — and roll over.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,

or Ice Warning (Continued) { Caution
Use a low gear when driving in vehicle could fall through the ice; Do not drive through standing
mud — the deeper the mud, the you and your passengers could water if it is deep enough to cover
lower the gear. Keep the vehicle drown. Drive your vehicle on safe the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
moving to avoid getting stuck. surfaces only. pipe. Deep water can damage the
Traction changes when driving on axle and other vehicle parts.
sand. On loose sand, such as on Driving in Water
beaches or sand dunes, the tires If the standing water is not too deep,
tend to sink into the sand. This
affects steering, accelerating, and { Warning drive slowly through it. At faster
speeds, water splashes and the
braking. Drive at a reduced speed Driving through rushing water can vehicle can stall. When going
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt be dangerous. Deep water can through water, the brakes get wet
maneuvers. and it may take longer to stop. See
sweep your vehicle downstream
Traction is reduced on hard packed and you and your passengers “Driving on Wet Roads” later in this
snow and ice and it is easy to lose could drown. If it is only shallow section.
control. Reduce vehicle speed when water, it can still wash away the After Off-Road Driving
driving on hard packed snow ground from under your tires.
and ice. Traction could be lost, and the Remove any brush or debris that
vehicle could roll over. Do not has collected on the underbody or
{ Warning drive through rushing water.
chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, After operation in mud or sand,
or rivers can be dangerous. Ice have the brake linings cleaned and
conditions vary greatly and the checked. These substances can
(Continued) cause glazing and uneven braking.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check the body structure, steering,
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
suspension, wheels, tires, and There is no hard and fast rule about
exhaust system for damage and Warning (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to
check the fuel lines and cooling slow down when the road is wet.
system for any leakage. After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle Other Rainy Weather Tips
More frequent maintenance service wash, lightly apply the brake
is required. See the Maintenance Besides slowing down, other wet
pedal until the brakes work weather driving tips include:
Schedule on page 11-3. normally.
. Allow extra following distance.
Driving on Wet Roads Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
. Pass with caution.
Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the . Keep windshield wiping
vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this equipment in good shape.
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
Always drive slower in these types
. Keep the windshield washer fluid
occupants could drown. Do not reservoir filled.
of driving conditions and avoid
ignore police warnings and be
driving through large puddles and . Have good tires with proper
deep‐standing or flowing water. very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water. tread depth. See Tires on
page 10-53.
{ Warning . Turn off cruise control.
Hydroplaning
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Hill and Mountain Roads
can build up under the vehicle's
quick stop and could cause tires so they actually ride on the Driving on steep hills or through
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is mountains is different than driving
lose control of the vehicle. wet enough and you are going fast on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
(Continued) enough. When the vehicle is driving in these conditions include:
hydroplaning, it has little or no . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
I
nformat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
contact with the road. good shape.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Check all fluid levels and brakes, Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°
tires, cooling system, and Warning (Continued) F) when freezing rain begins to fall,
transmission. resulting in even less traction. Avoid
loss of steering. Always have the driving on wet ice or in freezing rain
. Shift to a lower gear when going
engine running and the vehicle until roads can be treated with salt
down steep or long hills.
in gear. or sand.
{ Warning . Stay in your own lane. Do not
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
Using the brakes to slow the swing wide or cut across the traction is not lost. Accelerating too
vehicle on a long downhill slope center of the road. Drive at quickly causes the wheels to spin
can cause brake overheating, can speeds that let you stay in your and makes the surface under the
reduce brake performance, and own lane. tires slick, so there is even less
could result in a loss of braking. . Be alert on top of hills; traction.
Shift the transmission to a lower something could be in your lane Traction Control should be turned
gear to let the engine assist the (stalled car, accident). on. See Traction Control/Electronic
brakes on a steep downhill slope. . Pay attention to special road Stability Control on page 9-54.
signs (falling rocks area, winding The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
roads, long grades, passing or improves vehicle stability during
{ Warning no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
hard stops on slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) on dry pavement. See Antilock
or with the ignition off is Winter Driving Brake System (ABS) on page 9-50.
dangerous. This can cause Allow greater following distance on
overheating of the brakes and
Driving on Snow or Ice
any slippery road and watch for
(Continued) Drive carefully when there is snow slippery spots. Icy patches can
or ice between the tires and the occur on otherwise clear roads in
road, creatingInless
for
mat
iontraction
Pr dedby: or grip.
ovi
shaded areas. The surface of a
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
curve or an overpass can remain icy

when the surrounding roads are { Warning Warning (Continued)
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
on ice. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
cause exhaust gases to get panel.
Turn off cruise control on slippery inside. Engine exhaust contains
surfaces.
. Adjust the climate control
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
Being stuck in snow can be a death. to the highest setting. See
serious situation. Stay with the
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems”.
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use Roadside . Clear away snow from around For more information about
Assistance. See Roadside the base of your vehicle, carbon monoxide, see Engine
Assistance Program on page 13-5. especially any that is blocking Exhaust on page 9-33.
To get help and keep everyone in the exhaust pipe.
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to To save fuel, run the engine for only
. Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does short periods as needed to warm
flashers. not collect there. the vehicle and then shut the engine
. Tie a red cloth to an outside off and close the window most of
. Open a window about 5 cm the way to save heat. Repeat this
mirror. (2 in) on the side of the until help arrives but only when you
vehicle that is away from the feel really uncomfortable from the
wind to bring in fresh air. cold. Moving about to keep warm
(Continued) also helps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If it takes some time for help to gears. Slowly spinning the wheels in
arrive, now and then when you run { Warning the forward and reverse directions
the engine, push the accelerator causes a rocking motion that could
pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high free the vehicle. If that does not get
faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you the vehicle out after a few tries, it
keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The might need to be towed out. See
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an Towing the Vehicle on page 10-95.
with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other Recovery hooks can be used, if the
as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little vehicle has them.
as possible and avoid going
If the Vehicle Is Stuck above 56 km/h (35 mph). Recovery Hooks
Slowly and cautiously spin the

wheels to free the vehicle when For information about using tire { Warning
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. chains on the vehicle, see Tire Never pull on recovery hooks
See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Chains on page 10-78. from the side. The hooks could
Out” later in this section. break and you and others could
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
The Traction Control System (TCS) It Out be injured. When using recovery
can often help to free a stuck hooks, always pull the vehicle
vehicle. See Traction Control/ Turn the steering wheel left and from the front.
Electronic Stability Control on right to clear the area around the
page 9-54. If TCS cannot free the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicle, see “Rocking the Vehicle to vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel Drive
Get it Out” following. High. Turn the TCS off. Shift back
and forth between R (Reverse) and
a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
wheels stop spinning before shifting
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Load Limits Warning (Continued)

It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
carry. This weight is called the cause loss of control and a
vehicle capacity weight and crash. Overloading can also
includes the weight of all shorten the life of the vehicle.
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information
Two labels on the vehicle show Label
how much weight it was
designed to carry: the Tire and
{ Caution Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
Do not drive through standing
water if it is deep enough to cover { Warning
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
pipe. Deep water can damage the Do not load the vehicle any
axle and other vehicle parts. heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
There are recovery hooks at the (GVWR), or either the
front of the vehicle. Use them if the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example
vehicle is stuck off-road and needs
to be pulled some place to continue This can cause systems to A vehicle-specific Tire and
driving. break and change the way the Loading Information label is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued) attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
open, you will find the label the front and rear axles. See there will be five 150 lb
attached below the door lock “Certification/Tire Label” later in passengers in your vehicle,
post (striker). The Tire and this section. the amount of available cargo
Loading Information label shows “Steps for Determining Correct
and luggage load capacity is
the number of occupant seating Load Limit– 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
positions (1), and the maximum = 650 lbs.)
vehicle capacity weight (2) in 1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
kilograms and pounds. weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should
The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
Information label also shows the XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s That weight may not safely
size of the original equipment placard. exceed the available cargo
tires (3) and the recommended and luggage load capacity
cold tire inflation pressures (4). 2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4.
For more information on tires weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing
and inflation see Tires on a trailer, load from your trailer
page 10-53 and Tire Pressure in your vehicle.
will be transferred to your
on page 10-62. 3. Subtract the combined vehicle. Consult this manual
There is also important loading weight of the driver and to determine how this
information on the vehicle passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo
Certification/Tire label. It tells XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of
you the Gross Vehicle Weight 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.”
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing on page 9-76
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for and luggage load capacity. for important information on
For example, if the "XXX" towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals
Inf
ormat
i 1400
onPr
o dedby: lbs. and
vi
rules, and trailering tips.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = (453 kg) Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lb) Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
(1,000 lb) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lb) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lb) × 5 = 453 kg
68 kg (150 lb) × 2 = 136 kg (750 lb) (1,000 lb)
(300 lb) 3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight =
3. Available Occupant and 113 kg (250 lb) 0 kg (0 lb)
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lb)
Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information label for specific
information about the vehicle's
capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
of the driver, passengers, and Rating (GVWR). The GVWR

cargo should never exceed the includes the weight of the { Warning
vehicle's capacity weight. vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and In the case of a sudden stop
Certification/Tire Label
cargo. or collision, things carried in
The Certification/Tire label also the bed of your truck could
tells you the maximum weights shift forward and come into
for the front and rear axles, the passenger area, injuring
called Gross Axle Weight you and others. If you put
Rating (GAWR). To find out the things in the bed of your truck,
actual loads on the front and you should make sure they
rear axles, you need to go to a are properly secured.
weigh station and weigh the
vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread { Warning
out the load equally on both
sides of the centerline. Do not load the vehicle any
A vehicle-specific Certification/ Never exceed the GVWR for the heavier than the Gross
Tire label is label is attached to vehicle, or the GAWR for either Vehicle Weight Rating
the center pillar (B-pillar). The the front or rear axle. (GVWR), or either the
label shows the size of the maximum front or rear Gross
vehicle's original tires and the The Certification/Tire label also Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
inflation pressures needed to contains important information This can cause systems to
obtain the gross weight capacity about the Front Axle Reserve break and change the way the
of the vehicle. This is called Capacity. See Adding a Snow vehicle handles. This could
Gross Vehicle Weight Plow or Similar Equipment on
(Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
vehicle goes. If you have to stop

Warning (Continued) or turn quickly, or if there is a Warning (Continued)
cause loss of control and a crash, they will keep going. . When you carry something
crash. Overloading can also inside the vehicle, secure
shorten the life of the vehicle. { Warning it whenever you can.
Things you put inside the . Do not leave a seat folded
vehicle can strike and injure down unless you need to.
{ Caution people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash. There is also important loading
Overloading the vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
. Put things in the cargo information for off-road driving in
be covered by the vehicle area of the vehicle. Try to this manual. See “Loading the
warranty. Do not overload the spread the weight evenly. Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“
vehicle. under Off-Road Driving on
. Never stack heavier
page 9-6.
things, like suitcases,
Using heavier suspension inside the vehicle so that Two-Tiered Loading
components to get added some of them are above Depending on the model of the
durability might not change the the tops of the seats. pickup, an upper load platform
weight ratings. Ask your dealer . Do not leave an can be created by positioning
to help load the vehicle the unsecured child restraint three or four 5 cm (2 in) by
right way. in the vehicle. 15 cm (6 in) wooden planks
If you put things inside the (Continued) across the width of the pickup
vehicle — like suitcases, tools, box. The planks must be
packages, or anything inserted in the pickup box
else — they go as fast as the I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
depressions.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
When using this upper load Add-On Equipment Maximum

platform, be sure the load is When carrying removable items, * Equipment Weight
securely tied down to prevent it a limit on how many people
from shifting. The load's center Ladder Rack 340 kg (750 lb)
carried inside the vehicle may and Cargo
of gravity should be positioned be necessary. Be sure to weigh
in a zone over the rear axle. The the vehicle before buying and Cross Toolbox 181 kg (400 lb)
zone is located in the area installing the new equipment. and Cargo
between the front of each wheel
well and the rear of each wheel Side Boxes 113 kg per
well. The center of gravity height
{ Caution and Cargo side (250 lb
must not extend above the top Overloading the vehicle may
per side)
of the pickup box flareboard. cause damage. Repairs would not * The combined weight for all
Any load that extends beyond be covered by the vehicle rail-mounted equipment should
the vehicle's taillamp area must warranty. Do not overload the not exceed 454 kg (1,000 lb).
vehicle.
be properly marked according to
local laws and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the
Remember not to exceed the
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or
Rating (GAWR) of the front or
rear axle.
rear axle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Loading Points equipment. See www.gmupfitter.com When carrying a slide-in

for additional pickup box load camper, the total cargo load of
bearing structural information. the vehicle is the weight of the
camper plus:
Truck-Camper Loading . Everything added to the
Information camper after it left the
A vehicle-specific Truck-Camper factory.
Loading Information label is . Everything in the camper.
attached to the inside of the
vehicle's glove box. This label . All the people inside.
indicates if a slide-in camper The CWR is the maximum
can be carried, how much of a weight of the load the vehicle
load the vehicle can carry, and can carry. It does not include the
1. Primary Load Points how to correctly spread out the weight of the people inside. But,
2. Secondary Load Areas load. It will help to match the use about 68 kg (150 lb) for
3. GM Approved Accessory right slide-in camper to the each seat.
Mounting Points vehicle.
The total cargo load must not be
Structural members (1) and (2) are Your dealer can help make a more than the vehicle's CWR.
included in the pickup box design. good vehicle-camper match and
Additional accessories should use help determine the Cargo Refer to the Truck-Camper
these load points. Depending on the Loading Information label in the
accessory design, use a spacer
Weight Rating (CWR).
glove box for dimensions A and
under the accessory at the load When installing and loading a B as shown in the following
points to remove gap. The holes for slide-in camper, check the illustration.
GM approved accessories (3) are manufacturer's instructions.
not intended for aftermarket I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
exceed the truck's cargo weight

rating, and the camper's center
of gravity (1) should fall within
the truck's recommended center
of gravity zone (2) when
installed.
Any accessories or other
equipment that are added to the
Use the rear edge of the load vehicle must be weighed. Then,
floor for measurement purposes. subtract this extra weight from
The recommended location for the CWR. This extra weight may
the cargo center of gravity is at 1. Camper Center of Gravity shorten the center of gravity
point C for the CWR. It is the 2. Recommended Center of zone of the vehicle.
point where the mass of a Gravity Location Zone If the slide-in camper and its
body is concentrated and, load weighs less than the CWR,
if suspended at that point, would When the truck is used to carry
a slide-in camper, the total cargo the center of gravity zone for the
balance the front and rear. vehicle may be larger.
load of the truck consists of the
Here is an example of proper manufacturer's camper weight Secure loose items to prevent
truck and camper match: figure, the weight of installed weight shifts that could affect the
additional camper equipment not balance of the vehicle. When the
included in the manufacturer's truck-camper is loaded, drive to
camper weight figure, the weight a scale and weigh on the front
of camper cargo, and the weight and on the rear wheels
of passengers in the camper. separately to determine axle
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The total cargo load should not loads. Individual axle loads
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
should not exceed either of the Starting and

gross axle weight ratings Caution (Continued)
(GAWR). The total axle loads Operating broken in. Hard stops with
should not exceed the vehicle's new linings can mean
gross vehicle weight rating New Vehicle Break-In premature wear and earlier
(GVWR). These ratings are replacement. Follow this
given on the Certification/Tire { Caution breaking-in guideline every
label attached to the B-pillar. time you get new brake
The vehicle does not need an linings.
See “Certification/Tire Label”
elaborate break-in. But it will
under Vehicle Load Limits on perform better in the long run if
. Do not tow a trailer during
page 9-15. If weight ratings are break-in. See Trailer Towing
you follow these guidelines:
exceeded, move or remove on page 9-76 for the trailer
items to bring all weights below
. Keep the vehicle speed at towing capabilities of the
the ratings. 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for vehicle and more information.
the first 805 km (500 mi).
See your dealer for more Following break-in, engine speed
. Do not drive at any one and load can be gradually
information on curb weights, constant speed, fast or slow, increased.
cargo weights, Cargo Weight for the first 805 km (500 mi).
Rating, and the correct center of Do not make full-throttle
gravity zone. starts. Avoid downshifting to Adjustable Throttle and
brake or slow the vehicle. Brake Pedal
. Avoid making hard stops for If equipped, the position of the
the first 322 km (200 mi) or throttle and brake pedals can be
so. During this time the new changed.
brake linings are not yet
I
nfor
mat
ovi
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
No adjustment to the pedals can be Before you start driving, fully press To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
made when the vehicle is in the brake pedal to confirm the must be in ON/RUN or ACC/
R (Reverse) or while using cruise adjustment is right for you. While ACCESSORY and the regular brake
control. driving, make only small pedal must be applied.
adjustments. 1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/
The vehicle may have a memory OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,
function, which lets pedal settings turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
be saved and recalled. See Memory OFF to turn the engine off. Retained
Seats on page 3-7. Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Ignition Positions Power (RAP) on page 9-28.
This position locks the ignition and
steering wheel. It also locks the
transmission on automatic
transmission vehicles. The key can
be removed in LOCK/OFF.
The switch used to adjust the The steering can bind with the
pedals is on the center stack, below wheels turned off center. If this
the climate controls. happens, move the steering wheel
from right to left while turning the
Lift the switch up to move the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
pedals closer to your body. Press does not work, then the vehicle
the switch down to move the needs service.
pedals away.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Do not turn the engine off when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause a { Warning Caution (Continued)
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable Turning off the vehicle while only with your hand. If the key
the airbags. moving may cause loss of power cannot be turned by hand, see
assist in the brake and steering your dealer.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an systems and disable the airbags.
emergency: While driving, only shut the 2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
1. Brake using a firm and steady vehicle off in an emergency. position lets things like the radio
pressure. Do not pump the and the windshield wipers operate
brakes repeatedly. This may while the engine is off. It also
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
deplete power assist, requiring unlocks the steering wheel. Use this
and must be shut off while driving,
increased brake pedal force. position if the vehicle must be
turn the ignition to ACC/
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This ACCESSORY. pushed or towed.
can be done while the vehicle is 3 (ON/RUN): This position can be
On vehicles with an automatic
moving. After shifting to neutral, used to operate the electrical
transmission, the shift lever must be
continue to firmly apply the accessories and to display some
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
brakes and steer the vehicle to a instrument cluster warning and
to LOCK/OFF.
safe location. indicator lights. This position can
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
to P (Park) with an automatic
{ Caution also be used for service and
diagnostics, and to verify the proper
transmission, or Neutral with a Using a tool to force the key to operation of the malfunction
manual transmission. Turn the turn in the ignition could cause indicator lamp as may be required
ignition to LOCK/OFF. damage to the switch or break the for emission inspection purposes.
key. Use the correct key, make The switch stays in this position
4. Set the parking brake. See
when the engine is running.
Parking Brake on page 9-51. sure it is all the way in, and turn it
Inf
ormat
ovi
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The transmission is also unlocked in Automatic Transmission

this position on automatic { Caution Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
transmission vehicles.
If you add electrical parts or N (Neutral). To restart the engine
If the key is left in the ACC/ accessories, you could change when the vehicle is already moving,
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position the way the engine operates. Any use N (Neutral) only.
with the engine off, the battery could resulting damage would not be
be drained. The vehicle may not
start if the battery is allowed to drain
covered by the vehicle warranty. { Caution
See Add-On Electrical Equipment
for an extended period of time. Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
on page 9-100.
4 (START): This is the position that vehicle is moving. If you do, you
starts the engine. When the engine could damage the transmission.
starts, release the key. The ignition Shift to P (Park) only when the
switch returns to ON/RUN for { Caution vehicle is stopped.
driving.
If the steering wheel is turned
A warning tone will sound when the until it reaches the end of its Manual Transmission
driver door is opened, the ignition is travel, and is held in that position
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ The shift lever should be in Neutral
while starting the vehicle, damage and the parking brake engaged.
OFF, and the key is in the ignition. may occur to the hydraulic power Hold the clutch pedal down to the
steering system and there may be floor and start the engine.
Starting the Engine loss of power steering assist.
see the Duramax diesel Place the transmission in the
supplement. proper gear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Starting Procedure it. Operate the engine and

Caution (Continued) transmission gently until the oil
1. With your foot off the accelerator
warms up and lubricates all
pedal, turn the ignition key to ended, can overheat and damage moving parts.
START. When the engine starts, the cranking motor, and drain the
let go of the key. The idle speed battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
will go down as the engine gets Fast Idle System
between each try, to let the
warm. Do not race the engine cranking motor cool down. If equipped, this feature is available
immediately after starting it. only with cruise control. The manual
Operate the engine and fast idle switch is operated using the
transmission gently to allow the 2. If the engine does not start after cruise control buttons on the left
oil to warm up and lubricate all five to 10 seconds, especially in side of the steering wheel.
moving parts. very cold weather (below −18°
C or 0°F), it could be flooded This system can be used to
When the low fuel warning light with too much gasoline. Try increase engine idle speed
is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW pushing the accelerator pedal all whenever the following conditions
message is displayed in the the way to the floor and holding are met:
Driver Information Center (DIC), it there while holding the key in . The parking brake is set.
hold the ignition switch in the START for up to 15 seconds.
START position to continue Wait at least 15 seconds
. The brake pedal is not pressed.
engine cranking. between each try, to allow the . The vehicle must not be moving
cranking motor to cool down. and the accelerator must not be
{ Caution When the engine starts, let go of pressed.
the key and accelerator. If the
Cranking the engine for long vehicle starts briefly but then
periods of time, by returning the stops again, do the same thing.
ignition to the START position This clears the extra gasoline
immediately after cranking has from the engine. Do not race the
(Continued) engine Iimmediately
nf
ormat
ionPr dedby:after starting
ovi
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To control the fast idle:

. Pressing the accelerator more Accessory Power Outlets (APOs)
than one-quarter of the
. To enable the Fast Idle System, way down. The vehicle may have APOs in
press and release the cruise several locations. See Power
control on/off button and ensure
. Turning the ignition switch to the Outlets on page 5-6.
that the switch indicator light LOCK/OFF position.
The APOs in the console or center
is lit. seat position are powered by RAP.
. Press and release the cruise
Retained Accessory They will continue to work for up to
control SET- button. Engine Power (RAP) 10 minutes after the key is turned
speed will be held at The following vehicle accessories from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, or until
approximately 1200 rpm. can be used for up to 10 minutes the driver door is opened.
One of the following actions will turn after the engine is turned off: The APOs on the center stack come
off the fast idle: . Audio System from the factory powered directly
. Pressing the brake. from the vehicle battery, and supply
. Power Windows accessory power at all times,
. Selecting the cruise control . OnStar System (if equipped) regardless of ignition key position.
cancel button.
. Sunroof (if equipped) If electronic items are left plugged
. Releasing the parking brake. into these APOs for long periods of
These features work when the key time with the vehicle off, the vehicle
. Moving the transmission shift is in ON/RUN or ACC/
lever out of P (Park) or battery could be drained. The
ACCESSORY. Once the key is vehicle may not start if the battery is
N (Neutral). turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, allowed to drain for an extended
. Selecting the cruise control on/ the windows and sunroof continue period of time.
off button when it was to work up to 10 minutes or until any
previously on. door is opened. The radio continues
to work for up to 10 minutes or until
. Pressing the cruise control SET- the driver door is opened.
button a second time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Engine Coolant Heater To Use the Engine Coolant

Heater { Warning
The engine heater can provide
easier starting and better fuel 1. Turn off the engine. Improper use of the heater cord
economy during engine warm-up in 2. Open the hood and unwrap the or an extension cord can damage
cold weather conditions at or below electrical cord. The cord is the cord and may result in
−18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an secured to the driver side fender overheating and fire.
engine heater should be plugged in with a clip, next to the engine . Plug the cord into a
at least four hours before starting. compartment fuse block. three-prong electrical utility
An internal thermostat in the Carefully remove the wire tie receptacle that is protected
plug-end of the cord may exist, that bundles the electrical plug. by a ground fault detection
which will prevent engine coolant Do not cut the electrical cord. function. An ungrounded
heater operation at temperatures
Check the heater cord for outlet could cause an electric
above −18°C (0°F).
damage. If it is damaged, do not shock.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, use it. See your dealer for a . Use a weatherproof,
see the Duramax diesel replacement. Inspect the cord for heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated
supplement. damage yearly. extension cord if needed.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, Failure to use the
grounded 110-volt AC outlet. recommended extension cord
in good operating condition,
or using a damaged heater or
extension cord, could make it
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
away from moving engine parts.

Warning (Continued) If you do not, it could be Warning (Continued)
damaged.
overheat and cause a fire, free to roll, even if the shift lever
property damage, electric The length of time the heater should is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
shock, and injury. remain plugged in depends on case is in a drive gear. If towing a
several factors. Ask a dealer in the trailer, see Driving Characteristics
. Do not operate the vehicle area where you will be parking the
with the heater cord and Towing Tips on page 9-73.
vehicle for the best advice on this.
permanently attached to the
vehicle. Possible heater cord 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
and thermostat damage could Shifting Into Park
set the parking brake.
occur.
. While in use, do not let the { Warning See Parking Brake on
page 9-51.
heater cord touch vehicle It can be dangerous to get out of
parts or sharp edges. Never 2. Move the shift lever into the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not P (Park) position by pulling the
close the hood on the fully in P (Park) with the parking
heater cord. shift lever toward you and
brake firmly set. The vehicle can moving it up as far as it will go.
. Before starting the vehicle, roll. If you have left the engine
unplug the cord, reattach the running, the vehicle can move 3. Be sure the transfer case (if
cover to the plug, and equipped) is in a drive
suddenly. You or others could be
securely fasten the cord. gear — not in N (Neutral).
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
Keep the cord away from any not move, even when you are on 4. Turn the ignition key to
moving parts. fairly level ground, use the steps LOCK/OFF.
that follow. With four-wheel drive, 5. Remove the key and take it with
4. Before starting the engine, be if the transfer case is in you. If you can leave the vehicle
sure to unplug and store the N (Neutral), the vehicle will be with the ignition key in your
cord as it was before to keep it I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued) hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Leaving the Vehicle with the If you have to leave the vehicle with When you are ready to drive, move
Engine Running the engine running, be sure the the shift lever out of P (Park) before
vehicle is in P (Park) and the you release the parking brake.
parking brake is firmly set before
{ Warning you leave it. After you move the shift
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
It can be dangerous to leave the lever into P (Park), hold the regular yours a little uphill to take some of
vehicle with the engine running. brake pedal down. Then, see if you the pressure from the parking pawl
The vehicle could move suddenly can move the shift lever away from in the transmission. You will then be
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) without first pulling it toward able to pull the shift lever out of
you. If you can, it means that the P (Park).
P (Park) with the parking brake
shift lever was not fully locked into
firmly set.
P (Park).
If you have four-wheel drive and
Shifting out of Park
the transfer case is in N (Neutral), Torque Lock This vehicle is equipped with an
the vehicle will be free to roll, If you are parking on a hill and you electronic shift lock release system.
even if the shift lever is in do not shift the transmission into The shift lock release is
P (Park). So be sure the transfer P (Park) properly, the weight of the designed to:
case is in a drive gear — not in vehicle may put too much force on . Prevent ignition key removal
N (Neutral). the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in
transmission. You may find it difficult P (Park).
And, if you leave the vehicle with to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
the engine running, it could This is called torque lock. To . Prevent movement of the shift
overheat and even catch fire. You prevent torque lock, set the parking lever out of P (Park), unless the
or others could be injured. Do not brake and then shift into P (Park) ignition is in ON/RUN and the
leave the vehicle with the engine properly before you leave the driver regular brake pedal is applied.
running unless you have to. seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park on page 9-30.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The shift lock release is always If you are still having a problem If you are parking on a hill, or if the
functional except in the case of an shifting, then have the vehicle vehicle is pulling a trailer, see
uncharged or low voltage (less than serviced soon. Driving Characteristics and Towing
9 volt) battery. This vehicle may have the Safety Tips on page 9-73.
If the vehicle has an uncharged Belt Assurance System, which may
battery or a battery with low voltage, prevent the vehicle from shifting out Parking over Things
try charging or jump starting the of P (Park). See Safety Belt That Burn
battery. See Jump Starting on Messages on page 5-42.
page 10-91.
Parking (Manual
{ Warning
To shift out of P (Park):
Transmission) Things that can burn could touch
1. Apply the brake pedal. hot exhaust parts under the
2. Move the shift lever to the If the vehicle has a manual vehicle and ignite. Do not park
desired position. transmission, before you get out of over papers, leaves, dry grass,
the vehicle, move the shift lever into or other things that can burn.
If you still are unable to shift out of R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
P (Park): parking brake. Once the shift lever
1. Ease the pressure on the shift has been placed into R (Reverse)
lever. with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
2. While holding down the brake remove the key and release the
pedal, press the shift lever all clutch.
the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Active Fuel Management® Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

Vehicles with a V8 or V6 gasoline
engine may have Active Fuel { Warning . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
Management. This system allows
the engine to operate on either all of Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
its cylinders, or in V4 mode, monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
depending on the driving conditions. seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
When less power is required, such can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
as cruising at a constant vehicle even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
speed, the system will operate in Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
the V4 mode, allowing the vehicle to . Drive it only with the windows
achieve better fuel economy. When
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
a stop, passing, or merging onto a that may block underbody immediately.
freeway, the system will maintain airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
full-cylinder operation. . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
Management indicator, see Driver . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
Information Center (DIC) (Base due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
Level) on page 5-30 or Driver . The vehicle exhaust system
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) has been modified, damaged,
on page 5-32 for more information or improperly repaired.
on using this display.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Running the Vehicle Automatic especially when the vehicle has a

heavy load, you might notice an
While Parked Transmission increase in the effort to shift out of
It is better not to park with the P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under
If equipped, there is an electronic
engine running. Shifting Into Park on page 9-30.
shift lever position indicator within
If the vehicle is left with the engine the instrument cluster. This display
running, follow the proper steps to comes on when the ignition key is { Warning
be sure the vehicle will not move. turned to the ON/RUN position.
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-30 It is dangerous to get out of the
There are several different positions vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-33. for the shift lever.
If the vehicle has a manual in P (Park) with the parking brake
transmission, see Parking (Manual firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Transmission) on page 9-32. Do not leave the vehicle when the
If parking on a hill and pulling a engine is running. If you have left
trailer, see Driving Characteristics the engine running, the vehicle
and Towing Tips on page 9-73. can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
Heavy-Duty 6-Speed Automatic vehicle will not move, even when
Transmission Shown, Others you are on fairly level ground,
Similar always set the parking brake and
See “Range Selection Mode” under move the shift lever to P (Park).
Manual Mode on page 9-37. See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9-30 and Driving
rear wheels. It is the best position to Characteristics and Towing Tips
use when starting the engine on page 9-73.
because the vehicle cannot move
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
easily. When parked on a hill,
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To rock the vehicle back and forth to

{ Warning get out of snow, ice, or sand without { Caution
damaging the transmission, see If
If you have four-wheel drive, the the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-14. Shifting out of P (Park) or
vehicle will be free to roll — even N (Neutral) with the engine
if the shift lever is in P (Park) — if N (Neutral): In this position, the running at high speed may
the transfer case is in N (Neutral). engine does not connect with the damage the transmission. The
So, be sure the transfer case is in wheels. To restart when you are repairs would not be covered by
a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive already moving, use N (Neutral) the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the
High or Four-Wheel Drive High or engine is not running at high
vehicle is being towed.
Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in speed when shifting the vehicle.
N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park
on page 9-30. { Warning D (Drive): This position is for
Shifting into a drive gear while the normal driving. It provides the best
R (Reverse): Use this gear to engine is running at high speed is fuel economy. If you need more
back up. dangerous. Unless your foot is power for passing, and you are:
firmly on the brake pedal, the . Going less than about 55 km/h
{ Caution vehicle could move very rapidly. (35 mph), push the accelerator
You could lose control and hit pedal about halfway down.
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the people or objects. Do not shift
vehicle is moving forward could
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
into a drive gear while the engine more, push the accelerator all
damage the transmission. The is running at high speed. the way down.
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Shift to By doing this, the vehicle shifts
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle down to the next gear and has
is stopped. more power.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Mode In some cases, this could appear to M (Manual Mode): This position
when towing a trailer, carrying a be a delayed shift, however the allows selection of a range of gears
heavy load, driving on steep hills, transmission is operating normally. appropriate for current driving
or driving off-road. Shift the The transmission uses adaptive conditions. If equipped, see “Range
transmission to a lower gear shift controls. The adaptive shift Selection Mode” under Manual
selection if the transmission shifts control process continually Mode on page 9-37.
too often. compares key shift parameters to
Downshifting the transmission in pre-programmed ideal shifts stored { Caution
slippery road conditions could result in the transmission’s computer. The
in skidding. See “Skidding” under transmission constantly makes Spinning the tires or holding the
Loss of Control on page 9-5. adjustments to improve vehicle vehicle in one place on a hill
performance according to how the using only the accelerator pedal
The vehicle has a shift stabilization may damage the transmission.
feature that adjusts the transmission vehicle is being used, such as with
a heavy load or when the The repair will not be covered by
shifting to the current driving
temperature changes. During this the vehicle warranty. If you are
conditions in order to reduce rapid
adaptive shift control process, stuck, do not spin the tires. When
upshifts and downshifts. This shift
stabilization feature is designed to shifting might feel different as the stopping on a hill, use the brakes
determine, before making an transmission determines the best to hold the vehicle in place.
upshift, if the engine is able to settings.
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing When temperatures are very cold, Normal Mode Grade Braking
things such as vehicle speed, the transmission's gear shifting
throttle position, and vehicle load. could be delayed providing more If equipped with a gasoline engine
If the shift stabilization feature stable shifts until the engine warms and an automatic transmission,
determines that a current vehicle up. Shifts could be more noticeable Normal Mode Grade Braking is
speed cannot be maintained, the with a cold transmission. This enabled when the vehicle is started,
transmission does not upshift and difference in shifting is normal. but is not enabled in Range
instead holds the current gear. Selection Mode. It assists in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: maintaining desired vehicle speeds
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
when driving on downhill grades by Manual Mode With an 8–speed automatic

using the engine and transmission transmission, hold the plus/minus
to slow the vehicle. The first time Range Selection Mode buttons on the shift lever to select
the system engages for each the highest or lowest range
ignition key cycle, a DIC message available for the current vehicle
will be displayed. See Transmission speed.
Messages on page 5-44. When the shift lever is moved from
To disable or enable Normal Mode D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a
Grade Braking within the current number displays next to the M,
ignition key cycle, press and hold indicating the current transmission
the Tow/Haul button for If equipped, Range Selection Mode range.
five seconds. When the button is helps control the vehicle's This number is the highest gear that
released, the requested mode transmission and vehicle speed the transmission will command while
change is made. A DIC message while driving downhill or towing a operating in M (Manual Mode). All
displays. See Transmission trailer by letting you select a desired gears below that number are
Messages on page 5-44. range of gears. available. As driving conditions
For other forms of grade braking, To use this feature: change, the transmission can
see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-39 automatically shift to lower gears.
and Cruise Control on page 9-57. 1. Move the shift lever to For example, when M5 is selected,
M (Manual Mode). 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
Kickdown Mode 2. Tap the plus/minus buttons on automatically shifted by the
The accelerator pedal provides an the shift lever to select the transmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot
additional downshift after pressing desired range of gears for be used until the plus/minus button
through the kickdown feature. current driving conditions. on the shift lever is used to change
to the range.
It requires extra pedal pressure near
the end of its travel to engage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In vehicles with gasoline engines, 6–Speed Automatic Transmission

when the shift lever is moved from
D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a Gear before shifting from D
6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
downshift may occur. The gear that (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
the transmission is operating in Range after shifting from D
when the shift lever is moved from M4 M4 M3 M2 M2 M1
(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
determines if a downshift occurs.
See the following chart. 8–Speed Automatic Transmission
Gear before
shifting from D
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
(Drive) to M
(Manual Mode)
Range after
shifting from
D (Drive) to
M6 M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M2 M1
M (Manual Mode)
– Tow/Haul not
engaged
Range after
shifting from
D (Drive) to
M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M3 M2 M1
M (Manual Mode)
– Tow/Haul
engaged
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Grade Braking is not available when Low Traction Mode the transmission shift pattern to
Range Selection Mode is active. reduce shift cycling. This provides
If equipped, Low Traction Mode
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-39. increased performance, vehicle
assists in vehicle acceleration when
While using Range Selection Mode, control, and enhanced transmission
road conditions are slippery, such
cruise control and the Tow/Haul and engine cooling when driving
as with ice or snow. While the
Mode can be used. down steep hills or mountain
vehicle is at a stop, select M2 using
grades, towing, or hauling heavy
If the vehicle has an exhaust brake, Range Selection Mode. This will
loads.
it can also be used, but will not limit torque to the wheels and help
automatically downshift the to prevent the tires from spinning. The selector button is on the end of
transmission. See “Exhaust Brake” the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul
in the Duramax diesel supplement. Tow/Haul Mode Mode on and off by pressing the
button. When the Tow/Haul Mode is
enabled, a light on the instrument
{ Caution cluster will come on.
Spinning the tires or holding the See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
vehicle in one place on a hill page 5-26 and Hill and Mountain
using only the accelerator pedal Roads on page 9-11.
may damage the transmission. Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
The repair will not be covered by Towing Equipment on page 9-90.
the vehicle warranty. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes
to hold the vehicle in place.
Vehicles with an automatic

transmission have a Tow/Haul
Mode. TheInTow/Haul
f
ormat
ionPr dedMode
ovi by: adjusts
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking On vehicles with a diesel engine, Manual Transmission
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking can
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is
be enabled or disabled by pressing
only enabled while the Tow/Haul
the Tow/Haul Mode button. Use the
Mode is selected and the vehicle is
exhaust brake and Tow/Haul Mode
not in the Range Selection Mode.
for maximum grade braking.
See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed
previously and Manual Mode on See Towing Equipment on
page 9-37. Tow/Haul Mode Grade page 9-90.
Braking assists in maintaining For other forms of grade braking,
desired vehicle speeds when driving see Automatic Transmission on
on downhill grades by using the page 9-34 and Cruise Control on
engine and transmission to slow the page 9-57.
vehicle.
On vehicles with a gasoline engine,
to disable or enable Tow/Haul If equipped with a manual
Grade Braking within the current transmission, this is the shift
ignition key cycle, press and hold pattern.
the Tow/Haul button for
five seconds. When the button is To operate the manual transmission:
released, the requested mode 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
change is made. A DIC message is and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly
displayed. See Transmission let up on the clutch pedal as you
Messages on page 5-44. slowly press down on the
accelerator pedal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
You can shift into 1 (First) when you Neutral: Use this position when Use R (Reverse), along with the
are going less than 30 km/h you start or idle the engine. parking brake, for parking the
(20 mph). If you have come to a R (Reverse): To back up, press the vehicle.
complete stop and it is hard to shift clutch pedal. After the vehicle stops,
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in Shift Speeds
shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let up
Neutral and let up on the clutch. on the clutch pedal as you press the
Then press the clutch pedal back accelerator pedal. If it is hard to { Warning
down and shift into 1 (First). shift, let the shift lever return to If you skip a gear when
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal Neutral and release the clutch downshifting, you could lose
as you let up on the accelerator pedal. Then press the clutch again control of the vehicle. You could
pedal and shift into 2 (Second). and shift into R (Reverse). Do not
injure yourself or others. Do not
Then, slowly let up on the clutch attempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior to
shift down more than one gear at
pedal as you press the accelerator shifting into R (Reverse). The
pedal. transmission has a lock out feature, a time when downshifting.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth): which prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear to

Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and R (Reverse) gear shift.
5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the { Caution
clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal. Shifting to R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is moving forward could
To stop, let up on the accelerator damage the transmission. The
pedal and press the brake pedal. repairs would not be covered by
Just before the vehicle stops, press the vehicle warranty. Shift to
the clutch pedal and the brake
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
is stopped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Drive Systems Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction

{ Warning Control and StabiliTrak® off. See
Four-Wheel Drive Shifting the transfer case to Traction Control/Electronic Stability
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Control on page 9-54.
If equipped, four-wheel drive
engages the front axle for extra to roll even if the transmission is Manual Transfer Case
traction. Read the appropriate in P (Park). You or someone else
section for transfer case operation could be seriously injured. Be
before using. sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
{ Caution page 9-51.
Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended
period of time may cause
premature wear on the system.
{ Caution
The damage would not be Extended high-speed operation in
covered by the vehicle warranty. 4 n may damage or shorten the
life of the drivetrain.
Driving on clean, dry pavement in Move the lever to shift into and out
four-wheel drive may: of four-wheel drive.
Engagement noise and bump when
. Cause a vibration to be felt in shifting between 4 n and 4 m or from
the steering system. N (Neutral), with the engine running,
. Cause tires to wear faster. is normal.
. Make the transfer case harder to
shift, and cause it to run noisier. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
An indicator light comes on when 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use Shifting from 2 m to 4 m
four-wheel drive is engaged. See this setting when extra traction is
Four-Wheel-Drive Light on
. Shifts can be made at any
needed. The front axle engages and vehicle speed.
page 5-25. helps when driving on snowy or icy
N (Neutral): Use only when the roads, when off-roading, or when . Shift in one continuous motion.
vehicle needs to be towed. See plowing snow. . Shifting while the vehicle is in
Recreational Vehicle Towing on The vehicle can be shifted between motion may require that
page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle moderate force be applied to the
2 m and 4 m while the vehicle is
on page 10-95. shift lever before 4 m can be
moving. In extremely cold weather,
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Use it may be necessary to stop or slow engaged, especially in cold
this setting for driving on most the vehicle to shift into 4 m. weather.
streets and highways. The front axle . In extremely cold weather, it may
is not engaged. This setting Using the Manual Transfer Case be necessary to slow or stop the
provides the best fuel economy. . Use quick motions to shift into or vehicle to shift.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This out of 4 n or N (Neutral). . While in 4 m, the vehicle can be
setting also engages the front axle . Shifting may be harder when the driven at any posted legal speed
and delivers extra torque. Choose 4 vehicle is cold, but will return to limit.
n if driving off-road in deep sand, normal once warmed up.
deep mud, or deep snow, and while
climbing or descending steep hills.
. Four-wheel drive reduces fuel
When engaged, keep vehicle speed economy.
below 72 km/h (45 mph).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Shifting In or Out of 4 n will remain in N (Neutral). This is Electronic Transfer Case

normal. To complete the shift,
with the engine running, shift the
{ Caution transmission to D (Drive) and
back to N (Neutral), and
Shifting the transfer case into 4 n reattempt the transfer case shift.
while moving at speeds faster
than 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause Shifting In or Out of Neutral
premature wear to the transfer 1. Have the engine running.
case, and may cause the gears to
2. Set the parking brake. Press and
grind.
hold the brake pedal. See
Parking Brake on page 9-51.
1. If possible, shift with the vehicle 3. Place the transmission into
moving 5 km/h (3 mph) or less. N (Neutral).
2. Shift the transmission into Use the transfer case knob, next to
4. Shift the transfer case lever in
N (Neutral). the steering wheel, to shift into and
one continuous motion into or
out of four-wheel drive for extra
3. Shift the transfer case shift lever out of N (Neutral).
traction.
in one continuous motion.
Indicator lights on the knob show
4. Shifting with the vehicle at a stop which setting the transfer case is in.
may be more difficult. It is The N (Neutral) indicator is on the
possible that the shift will not face of the knob. The indicator lights
complete and the transfer case display briefly when the ignition is
turned on, and one will stay on.
If the lights display momentarily
when the ignition is in ON/RUN, but
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: none stay on, the knob may have
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
been turned while the vehicle was The settings are: 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
off. To see the indicator, turn the N (Neutral): Use only when the when extra traction is needed. The
knob to another position so that it vehicle needs to be towed. See front axle engages and helps when
matches the actual transfer case Recreational Vehicle Towing on driving on snowy or icy roads, when
setting. If no lights display, take the page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle off-roading, or when plowing snow.
vehicle to your dealer for service. on page 10-95. The vehicle can be shifted from 2 m
An indicator light flashes while
shifting and until the shift is 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Use to 4 m while the vehicle is moving.
complete. for driving on most streets and
highways. The front axle is not
Shifting Into 4 m
If the transfer case cannot complete
a requested shift, it will return to the engaged. This setting provides the Turn the knob to 4 m at any speed
last chosen setting. Turn the control best fuel economy. up to 121 km/h (75 mph), except
back to the previous setting to see 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This from 4 n. The indicator light will flash
the indicator light. while shifting and will remain on the
setting engages the front axle and
delivers extra torque. Choose 4 n if selected setting.
{ Caution driving off-road in deep sand, deep Shifting Into 2 m
Shifting the transmission into gear mud, or deep snow, and while
before the requested mode climbing or descending steep hills. Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,
indicator light has stopped When engaged, keep vehicle speed except when shifting from 4 n.
below 72 km/h (45 mph).
flashing could damage the
transfer case. Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
Control and StabiliTrak off. See
Traction Control/Electronic Stability
Control on page 9-54.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Shifting Into 4 n Shifting Out of 4 n 2. Set the parking brake and press
and hold the brake pedal. See
When 4 n is engaged, vehicle speed 1. To shift out of 4 n the vehicle Parking Brake on page 9-51.
should be kept below 72 km/h must be stopped or moving less 3. Start the vehicle or turn the
(45 mph). than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the ignition to ON/RUN.
1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN transmission in N (Neutral) and
the ignition in ON/RUN. It is best 4. Shift the transmission to
and the vehicle must be stopped N (Neutral).
or moving less than 5 km/h for the vehicle to be moving
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
(3 mph) with the transmission in 5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.
N (Neutral). It is best for the 2. Turn the knob to 4 m or 2 m. Wait
vehicle to be moving 6. Turn the transfer case knob
for the 4 m or 2 m indicator light to clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
stop flashing before shifting the stops and hold it there until the
2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the transmission into gear. N (Neutral) light starts blinking.
4 n indicator light to stop flashing This will take at least
If the transmission is in gear and/or
10 seconds. Then slowly release
before shifting the transmission moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
into gear. the dial to the 4 n position. The
the 4 m or 2 m indicator light will flash
N (Neutral) light will come on
If the transmission is in gear and/or for 30 seconds, but will not complete
when the transfer case shift to
moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the shift. With the vehicle moving
N (Neutral) is complete.
the 4 n indicator light will flash for less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the
transmission in N (Neutral), attempt 7. With the engine running, verify
30 seconds and not complete the
the shift again. that the transfer case is in
shift. After 30 seconds the transfer
N (Neutral) by shifting the
case will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob Shifting Into N (Neutral) transmission to R (Reverse),
to 4 m to see the indicator. With the To shift: then to D (Drive). There should
vehicle moving less than 5 km/h be no movement of the vehicle
1. Park the vehicle on a level
(3 mph), and the transmission in while shifting the transmission.
surface. InformationProvidedby:
N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
8. Turn the engine off, and the 4. Turn the transfer case knob Automatic Transfer Case
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. to 2 m.
9. Place the transmission shift After the transfer case has
lever in P (Park). See shifted out of N (Neutral), the
Recreational Vehicle Towing on N (Neutral) light will go out.
page 10-95.
5. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral) { Caution
To shift: Shifting the transmission into gear
1. Set the parking brake and apply before the requested mode
the brake pedal. indicator light has stopped
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with flashing could damage the
the engine off. transfer case. Use the transfer case knob next to
3. Shift the transmission to the steering wheel to shift into and
N (Neutral). 6. Start the engine and shift the out of four-wheel drive.
transmission to the desired gear. Indicator lights display which setting
the transfer case is in. N (Neutral) is
indicated on the knob. The indicator
lights will display briefly when the
ignition is turned on and one will
stay on. If the lights display
momentarily when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, but none stay on, the
knob may have been turned while
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: the vehicle was off. To see the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
indicator, turn the knob to another AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel when driving off-road in deep sand,
position so that it matches the Drive): Use when road surface deep mud, or deep snow, and while
actual transfer case setting. If no traction conditions are variable. climbing or descending steep hills.
lights display, take the vehicle to When driving in AUTO, the front
your dealer for service. An indicator axle is engaged, and the vehicle's Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
light flashes while shifting the power is sent to the front and rear Control and StabiliTrak off. See
transfer case and remains wheels automatically based on Traction Control/Electronic Stability
illuminated when the shift is driving conditions. This setting Control on page 9-54.
complete. provides slightly lower fuel economy
Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO
If the transfer case cannot make a than 2 m.
requested shift, it will return to the Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTO
Do not use AUTO mode to park on
last chosen setting. Turn the knob a steep grade with poor traction position at any speed, except from
back to the previous transfer case such as ice, snow, mud, or gravel. 4 n. The indicator light will flash
setting to see the indicator. In AUTO mode only the rear wheels while shifting and will remain on
The settings are: will hold the vehicle from sliding when the shift is completed.
when parked. If parking on a steep
N (Neutral): Use only when the
grade, use 4 m to keep all four
Shifting Into 2 m
vehicle needs to be towed. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on wheels engaged. Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,
page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use except when shifting from 4 n. The
on page 10-95. indicator light will flash while shifting
this position when extra traction is
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Use needed, such as when driving on and will remain on when the shift is
snowy or icy roads, when completed.
for driving on most streets and
highways. The front axle is not off-roading, or when plowing snow.
Shifting Into 4 n
engaged. This setting provides the 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
best fuel economy. When 4 n is engaged, keep vehicle
setting engages the front axle and
speed below 72 km/h (45 mph).
delivers extra Intorque.
f
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Choose 4n
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To shift: 30 seconds and not complete the

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN shift. After 30 seconds the transfer { Caution
and the vehicle must be stopped case will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob Shifting the transmission into gear
or moving less than 5 km/h to 4 m to display the indicator. With before the requested mode
(3 mph) with the transmission in the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h indicator light has stopped
N (Neutral). It is best for the (3 mph), and the transmission in flashing could damage the
vehicle to be moving N (Neutral), attempt the shift again. transfer case.
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
Shifting Out of 4 n
2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the If the transmission is in gear and/or
To shift:
4 n indicator light to stop flashing moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
before shifting the transmission 1. The vehicle must be stopped or the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light
into gear. moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) will flash for 30 seconds but will not
with the transmission in complete the shift. With the vehicle
{ Caution N (Neutral) and the ignition in
ON/RUN. It is best for the
moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),
and the transmission in N (Neutral),
Shifting the transmission into gear vehicle to be moving attempt the shift again.
before the requested mode 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
indicator light has stopped 2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO,
flashing could damage the To shift into N (Neutral):
or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO,
transfer case. 1. Park the vehicle on a level
or 2 m indicator light to stop
surface.
flashing before shifting the
If the transmission is in gear and/or transmission into gear. 2. Set the parking brake and press
moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), and hold the brake pedal. See
the 4 n indicator light will flash for Parking Brake on page 9-51.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Start the vehicle or turn the
ignition to ON/RUN.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
4. Shift the transmission to 9. Place the transmission shift Brakes

N (Neutral). lever in P (Park). See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m. page 10-95. Antilock Brake
6. Turn the transfer case knob 10. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
System (ABS)
clockwise to N (Neutral) until it This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
stops and hold it there until the Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
electronic braking system that helps
N (Neutral) light starts blinking. To shift out of N (Neutral): prevent a braking skid.
This will take at least
10 seconds. Then slowly release 1. Set the parking brake and apply When the vehicle begins to drive
the brake pedal. away, ABS checks itself.
the dial to the 4 n position. The
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with A momentary motor or clicking noise
N (Neutral) light will come on might be heard while this test is
when the transfer case shift to the engine off.
going on, and it might even be
N (Neutral) is complete. 3. Shift the transmission to noticed that the brake pedal moves
7. With the engine running, verify N (Neutral). a little. This is normal.
that the transfer case is in 4. Turn the transfer case knob to
N (Neutral) by shifting the the desired setting.
transmission to R (Reverse),
then shift the transmission to After the transfer case has
D (Drive). There should be no shifted out of N (Neutral), the
movement of the vehicle while N (Neutral) light will go out.
shifting the transmission. 5. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the engine off, and the 6. Start the engine and shift the If there is a problem with ABS, this
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. transmission to the desired gear. warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5-25.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses the wheels are Using ABS
slowing down. If one of the wheels Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
is about to stop rolling, the computer the brake pedal down firmly and let
will separately work the brakes at ABS work. You may hear the ABS
each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate. This is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard. ABS allows you to steer and brake
at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help For vehicles without a release
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best handle, set the parking brake by
on wheel speed and controls braking. holding the regular brake pedal
braking pressure accordingly. down, then pushing down the
Remember: ABS does not change parking brake pedal.
the time needed to get a foot up to If the ignition is on, the brake
the brake pedal or always decrease system warning light will come on.
stopping distance. If you get too See Brake System Warning Light on
close to the vehicle in front of you, page 5-24.
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To release the parking brake, hold

{ Caution the regular brake pedal down. Then
pull the bottom edge of the lever
Driving with the parking brake on with the parking brake symbol,
can overheat the brake system located to the right of the steering
and cause premature wear or column.
damage to brake system parts.
Make sure that the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking
is fully released and the brake brake is released, the brake system
warning light goes off.
warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold

{ Caution
the regular brake pedal down, then For vehicles with a release handle, Driving with the parking brake on
push down momentarily on the set the parking brake by holding the can overheat the brake system
parking brake pedal until you feel regular brake pedal down, then and cause premature wear or
the pedal release. Slowly pull your pushing down the parking brake damage to brake system parts.
foot up off the parking brake pedal. pedal. Make sure that the parking brake
If the parking brake is not released is fully released and the brake
when you begin to drive, the brake If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on. warning light is off before driving.
system warning light will flash and a
chime will sound warning you that See Brake System Warning Light on
the parking brake is still on. page 5-24. If you are towing a trailer and are
A chime sounds and the warning parking on any hill, see Driving
If you are towing a trailer and are
light flashes when the parking brake Characteristics and Towing Tips on
parking on a hill, see Driving
is applied and the vehicle is moving page 9-73.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9-73. at least 8 km/h (5 mph).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Brake Assist Brake Assist feature will is no rolling. The brakes will
automatically disengage when the automatically release when the
The Brake Assist feature is brake pedal is released or brake accelerator pedal is applied within
designed to assist the driver in pedal pressure is quickly the two-second window. If the
stopping or decreasing vehicle decreased. vehicle is equipped with the
speed in emergency driving Integrated Trailer Brake Control
conditions. This feature uses the Hill Start Assist (HSA) (ITBC) system, HSA may also apply
stability system hydraulic brake the trailer brakes. It will not activate
control module to supplement the This vehicle has an HSA feature, if the vehicle is in a drive gear and
power brake system under which may be useful when the facing downhill or if the vehicle is
conditions where the driver has vehicle is stopped on a grade. This facing uphill and in R (Reverse).
quickly and forcefully applied the feature is designed to prevent the There may be situations on minor
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly vehicle from rolling, either forward or hills (less than 5% grade) with a
stop or slow down the vehicle. The rearward, during vehicle drive off. loaded vehicle or while pulling a
stability system hydraulic brake After you completely stop and hold trailer where HSA may activate.
control module increases brake the vehicle in a complete standstill
pressure at each corner of the on a grade, HSA will automatically If you release the brake pedal and
vehicle until the ABS activates. activate. During the transition period then reapply the brake pedal while
Minor brake pedal pulsation or between when you release the HSA is activated, the brake pedal
pedal movement during this time is brake pedal and start to accelerate typically feels firmer with less pedal
normal and the driver should to drive off on a grade, HSA holds travel.
continue to apply the brake pedal as the braking pressure for a maximum
the driving situation dictates The of two seconds to ensure that there
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Ride Control Systems StabiliTrak selectively applies

braking pressure to any one of the
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
page 9-14 and “Turning the
vehicle wheel brakes to assist the Systems Off and On” later in this
Traction Control/ driver in keeping the vehicle on the section.
Electronic Stability intended path. Trailer Sway Control When the transfer case (if equipped)
Control (TSC) is also on automatically when is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, the
the vehicle is started. See Trailer stability system is automatically
System Operation Sway Control (TSC) on page 9-100.
disabled, g comes on, and the
The vehicle has a Traction Control If cruise control is being used and appropriate message will appear on
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an traction control or StabiliTrak begins the DIC. Both traction control and
electronic stability control system. to limit wheel spin, cruise control will StabiliTrak are automatically
These systems help limit wheel spin disengage. Cruise control may be disabled in this condition.
and assist the driver in maintaining turned back on when road
control, especially on slippery road conditions allow.
conditions. Both systems come on
TCS activates if it senses any of the automatically when the vehicle is
drive wheels are spinning or started and begins to move. The
beginning to lose traction. When this systems may be heard or felt while
happens, TCS applies the brakes to they are operating or while
the spinning wheels and reduces performing diagnostic checks. This The indicator light for both systems
engine power to limit wheel spin. is normal and does not mean there is in the instrument cluster. This
is a problem with the vehicle. light will:
StabiliTrak activates when the
vehicle senses a difference between It is recommended to leave both . Flash when TCS is limiting
the intended path and the direction systems on for normal driving wheel spin.
the vehicle is actually traveling. conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
. Flash when StabiliTrak is
stuck in sand,Inmud,
f
ormat
ionPice,
rovi or
dedby: snow.
activated.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Turn on and stay on when either Turning the Systems Off press and release the g button. The
system is not working. and On traction off light i displayed in the
If either system fails to turn on or to instrument cluster will turn off.
activate, a message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
and d comes on and stays on to the g button is pressed, the system
indicate that the system is inactive will not turn off until the wheels stop
and is not assisting the driver in spinning.
maintaining control. The vehicle is To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
safe to drive, but driving should be The button for TCS and StabiliTrak press and hold the g button until
adjusted accordingly. is on the center stack.
the traction off light i and the
If d comes on and stays on: StabiliTrak OFF light g come on
1. Stop the vehicle.
{ Caution and stay on in the instrument
2. Turn the engine off and wait Do not repeatedly brake or cluster, then release. The
15 seconds. accelerate heavily when TCS is appropriate message will display in
off. The vehicle driveline could be the DIC. See Ride Control System
3. Start the engine. damaged. Messages on page 5-40.
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on
and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off only TCS, press and again, press and release the g
more time to diagnose the problem. release the g button. The traction button. The traction off light i and
If the condition persists, see your
dealer. off light i displays in the instrument the StabiliTrak OFF light g in the
cluster. The appropriate message instrument cluster turn off.
will display in the DIC. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5-40.InTo
for
turn
mati
onPr
TCS
ovi
dedby:
on again,
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
StabiliTrak will automatically turn on Press 5 to enable or disable HDC. HDC will remain enabled between
if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h Vehicle speed must be below 22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph);
(35 mph). Traction control will 50 km/h (31 mph). however vehicle speed cannot be
remain off. set or maintained in this range.
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway It will automatically disable if the
Control (TSC) feature and a Hill vehicle speed is above 80 km/h
Start Assist (HSA) feature. See (50 mph) or above 60 km/h
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on (37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. 5
page 9-100 or Hill Start Assist must be pressed again to
(HSA) on page 9-53. re-enable HDC.
Adding accessories can affect the The HDC light displays on the When enabled, if the vehicle is at a
vehicle performance. See instrument cluster when enabled. speed above 22 km/h (14 mph) and
Accessories and Modifications on HDC can maintain vehicle speeds less than 60 km/h (37 mph), a DIC
page 10-3. between 3 and 22 km/h (2 and message will display. See Vehicle
14 mph) on an incline greater than Speed Messages on page 5-46.
Hill Descent or equal to a 10% grade. A blinking
Control (HDC) HDC light indicates the system is Locking Rear Axle
actively applying the brakes to Vehicles with a locking rear axle can
If equipped, HDC can be used when maintain vehicle speed. give more traction on snow, mud,
driving downhill. It sets and
When HDC is activated, the initial ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a
maintains vehicle speed while
descending a very steep incline in a HDC speed is set to the current standard axle most of the time, but
forward or reverse gear. driving speed. It can be increased or when traction is low, this feature will
decreased by applying the allow the rear wheel with the most
The HDC switch is on the center accelerator or brake pedal. This traction to move the vehicle.
stack, below the climate controls. adjusted speed becomes the new
set speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Cruise Control If equipped with an Allison or

Hydra-Matic 6-speed automatic
transmission, see “Tow/Haul Mode
{ Warning Grade Braking” under Tow/Haul
Mode on page 9-39 for an
Cruise control can be dangerous explanation of how cruise control
where you cannot drive safely at interacts with the Range Selection
a steady speed. Do not use Mode, Tow/Haul Mode, and Grade
cruise control on winding roads or Braking systems.
in heavy traffic.
If the cruise control is being used
Cruise control can be dangerous and the Traction Control system
on slippery roads. On such roads, (TCS) or StabiliTrak begins to limit
fast changes in tire traction can wheel spin, the cruise control will
cause excessive wheel slip, and automatically disengage. See 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the
you could lose control. Do not use Traction Control/Electronic Stability system on or off. The indicator light
cruise control on slippery roads. Control on page 9-54. When road is white when cruise control is on
conditions allow you to safely use it and turns off when cruise control
again, cruise control can be turned is off.
With cruise control a speed of about back on.
40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be +RES (Resume/Accelerate): If
maintained without keeping your If the brakes are applied, cruise there is a set speed in memory,
foot on the accelerator. Cruise control disengages. press briefly to resume to that
control does not work at speeds speed or press and hold to
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). accelerate. If cruise control is
already active, use to increase
vehicle speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
SET− (Set/Coast): Press briefly to Resuming a Set Speed The speedometer reading can be
set the speed and activate cruise If the cruise control is set at a displayed in either English or metric
control. If cruise control is already desired speed and then the brakes units. See Instrument Cluster on
active, use to decrease vehicle page 5-10. The increment value
speed. are applied or * is pressed, the used depends on the units
cruise control is disengaged without displayed.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage erasing the set speed from memory.
cruise control without erasing the Reducing Speed While Using
set speed from memory. Once the vehicle speed reaches Cruise Control
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
Setting Cruise Control briefly press the +RES button. The If the cruise control system is
vehicle returns to the previous set already activated:
If 5 is on when not in use, SET− or
speed. . Press and hold the SET– until
+RES could get pressed and go into
the desired lower speed is
cruise when not desired. Keep 5 Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control reached, then release it.
off when cruise is not being used.
. To slow down in small
If the cruise control system is
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise increments, briefly press the
already activated:
system on. SET– button. For each press,
. Press and hold the +RES button the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
2. Get up to the desired speed. until the desired speed is (1 mph) slower.
3. Press and release SET−. reached, then release it.
The speedometer reading can be
4. Remove foot from the . To increase vehicle speed in displayed in either English or metric
accelerator. small increments, briefly press units. See Instrument Cluster on
the +RES button. For each page 5-10. The increment value
The cruise control indicator on the
press, the vehicle goes about used depends on the units
instrument cluster turns green after
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. displayed.
cruise control has been set to the
desired speed. See Instrument
Cluster on page 5-10. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Passing Another Vehicle While While going downhill: For other forms of Grade Braking,
Using Cruise Control . Vehicles with a 6-speed see Automatic Transmission on
Use the accelerator pedal to automatic transmission and a page 9-34 ,Tow/Haul Mode on
increase the vehicle speed. When gasoline engine have Cruise page 9-39, and Hill Descent Control
you take your foot off the pedal, the Grade Braking to help maintain (HDC) on page 9-56.
vehicle will slow down to the driver selected speed. Ending Cruise Control
previous set cruise speed. While Cruise Grade Braking is enabled
pressing the accelerator pedal or There are four ways to end cruise
when the vehicle is started and control:
shortly following the release to cruise control is active. It is not
override cruise control, briefly enabled in Range Selection
. Step lightly on the brake pedal.
pressing the SET– button will result
in cruise control set to the current
Mode. It assists in maintaining . Press *.
driver selected speed when
vehicle speed. driving on downhill grades by
. Shift the transmission to
Using Cruise Control on Hills using the engine and N (Neutral).
transmission to slow the vehicle. . To turn off cruise control,
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends on the vehicle To disable and enable Cruise press 5.
speed, the load, and the steepness Grade Braking for the current
ignition key cycle, press and Erasing Speed Memory
of the hills. When going up steep
hills, pressing the accelerator pedal hold the Tow/Haul button for The cruise control set speed is
may be necessary to maintain five seconds. A DIC message erased from memory if 5 is pressed
vehicle speed. displays. See Transmission or the ignition is turned off.
. Vehicles with a diesel engine
have Cruise Grade Braking
enabled when Tow/Haul Mode is
on, the exhaust brake is on,
or both Inare
for
mat
ionPr
on.ovidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Driver Assistance Warning (Continued)

Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Some driver assistance features
Systems alert the driver of obstacles by
Under many conditions, these
This vehicle may have features that systems will not: beeping. To change the volume of
work together to help avoid crashes the warning chime, see “Comfort
or reduce crash damage while
. Detect children, pedestrians, and Convenience” under Vehicle
driving, backing, and parking. Read bicyclists, or animals. Personalization on page 5-47.
this entire section before using . Detect vehicles or objects If equipped with the Safety Alert
these systems. outside the area monitored by Seat, the driver seat cushion may
the system. provide a vibrating pulse alert
{ Warning . Work at all driving speeds. instead of beeping. To change this,
see “Collision/Detection Systems”
Do not rely on the Driver . Warn you or provide you with
under Vehicle Personalization on
Assistance Systems. These enough time to avoid a crash.
page 5-47.
systems do not replace the need . Work under poor visibility or
for paying attention and driving bad weather conditions. Assistance Systems for
safely. You may not hear or feel
alerts or warnings provided by
. Work if the detection sensor Parking or Backing
is not cleaned or is covered
these systems. Failure to use by ice, snow, mud, or dirt. If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera
proper care when driving may (RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),
result in injury, death, or vehicle Complete attention is always and Front Park Assist (FPA) may
damage. See Defensive Driving required while driving, and you help the driver park or avoid objects.
on page 9-3. should be ready to take action Always check around the vehicle
and apply the brakes and/or steer when parking or backing.
(Continued)
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The RVC and RPA will not work Displayed images may be farther or
properly if the tailgate is down. If the closer than they appear. The area
tailgate is down, do not use these displayed is limited and objects that
systems. are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper do not
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) display.
When the vehicle is shifted into A warning triangle may display on
R (Reverse), the RVC displays an the RVC screen to show where the
image of the area behind the vehicle RPA has detected an object. This
in the center stack display. The triangle changes from amber to red
previous screen displays when the and increases in size the closer the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) object.
after a short delay. To return to the
previous screen sooner, press a 1. View Displayed by the
button on the infotainment system, Camera { Warning
shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle
The RVC system does not display
speed of 8 km/h (5 mph).
children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
crossing traffic, animals, or any
other object located outside the
camera's field of view, below the
bumper, or under the vehicle.
Perceived distances may be
different from actual distances.
Do not back the vehicle using
1. View Displayed by the only the RVC screen. Failure to
Camera use proper care before backing
2. Corners
Inf
ormat
iof
onPr
othe
vi Rear
dedby: Bumper (Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued) { Warning

may result in injury, death, The parking assist system does
or vehicle damage. Always check not detect children, pedestrians,
behind and around the vehicle bicyclists, animals, or objects
before backing. located below the bumper or that
are too close or too far from the
Parking Assist vehicle. It is not available at
speeds greater than 8 km/h
With RPA, and if equipped with FPA, (5 mph). To prevent injury, death,
as the vehicle moves at speeds of or vehicle damage, even with
less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the parking assist, always check the
sensors on the bumpers may detect The instrument cluster may have a
area around the vehicle and
objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and parking assist display with bars that
check all mirrors before moving show “distance to object” and object
1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle
forward or backing. location information for RPA, and on
within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off
the ground and below bumper level. some vehicles, for FPA. As the
These detection distances may be object gets closer, more bars light
shorter during warmer or humid up and the bars change color from
weather. Blocked sensors will not yellow to amber to red.
detect objects and can also cause When an object is first detected in
false detections. Keep the sensors the rear, one beep will be heard
clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and from the rear, or both sides of the
slush; and clean sensors after a car Safety Alert Seat will pulse two
wash in freezing temperatures. times. When an object is very close
(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),
a continuous beep will sound from
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
the front or rear, or both sides of the be disabled. To turn the parking Assistance Systems for
Safety Alert Seat will pulse five assist on again, select On in the
times. Beeps for FPA are higher vehicle personalization menu. The
Driving
pitched than for RPA. On with Towbar setting allows for If equipped, when driving the
the parking assist to work properly vehicle, Forward Collision Alert
Turning the Features On or Off with a small item attached to the (FCA) and Lane Departure Warning
trailer hitch. Turn off parking assist (LDW) can help to avoid a crash or
when towing a trailer. reduce crash damage.
To turn the rear parking assist
symbols or guidance lines, see Forward Collision Alert
“Rear Camera” under Vehicle (FCA) System
Personalization on page 5-47.
If equipped, the FCA system may
The X button on the center stack Disconnecting the Rear Vision help to avoid or reduce the harm
is used to turn on or off the Front Camera (RVC) caused by front-end crashes. When
and Rear Parking Assist. The approaching a vehicle ahead too
The RVC must be disconnected if quickly, FCA provides a red flashing
indicator light in the button comes the tailgate needs to be removed.
on when the features are on and alert on the windshield and rapidly
turns off when the features have The RVC is disconnected by beeps or pulses the driver seat.
been disabled. removing the connector from the FCA also lights an amber visual
electrical junction block mounted on alert if following another vehicle
Front and Rear Parking Assist can the left side of the cross member of much too closely.
be turned off, on, or on with towbar the vehicle frame. After
through vehicle personalization. See FCA detects vehicles within a
disconnecting, the cap mounted distance of approximately 60 m
“Park Assist” under Vehicle next to the camera connector must
Personalization on page 5-47. If the (197 ft) and operates at speeds
be relocated so that the open above 40 km/h (25 mph).
parking assist is turned off through terminals on the junction block are
vehicle personalization, the parking covered. InformationProvidedby:
assist button on the center stack will
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

{ Warning { Warning
FCA is a warning system and FCA does not provide a warning
does not apply the brakes. When to help avoid a crash, unless it
approaching a slower-moving or detects a vehicle. FCA may not
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
or when following a vehicle too sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
closely, FCA may not provide a or ice, or if the windshield is
warning with enough time to help FCA warnings will not occur unless damaged. It may also not detect a
the FCA system detects a vehicle
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
ahead. When a vehicle is detected,
of pedestrians, animals, signs, or in conditions that can limit
the vehicle-ahead indicator will
guardrails, bridges, construction display green. Vehicles may not be visibility such as fog, rain,
barrels, or other objects. Be ready detected on curves, highway exit or snow, or if the headlamps or
to take action and apply the ramps, or hills; or due to poor windshield are not cleaned or in
brakes. For more information, see visibility. FCA will not detect another proper condition. Keep the
Defensive Driving on page 9-3. vehicle ahead until it is completely windshield, headlamps, and FCA
in the driving lane. sensors clean and in good repair.
FCA can be disabled with the FCA
steering wheel control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Collision Alert When this Collision Alert occurs, the Selecting the Alert Timing
brake system may prepare for driver
braking to occur more rapidly which
can cause a brief, mild deceleration.
Continue to apply the brake pedal
as needed. Cruise control may be
disengaged when the Collision Alert
occurs.
Tailgating Alert
When your vehicle approaches The Collision Alert control is on the

another detected vehicle too rapidly,
the red FCA display will flash on the steering wheel. Press [ to set the
The vehicle ahead indicator will FCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,
windshield. Also, eight rapid display amber when you are
high-pitched beeps will sound from or Off. The first button press shows
following a detected vehicle ahead the current setting on the DIC.
the front, or both sides of the Safety much too closely.
Alert Seat will pulse five times. Additional button presses will
change this setting. The chosen
setting will remain until it is changed
and will affect the timing of both the
Collision Alert and the Tailgating
Alert features. The timing of both
alerts will vary based on vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
speed. The faster the vehicle speed,
the farther away the alert will occur.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Consider traffic and weather Lane Departure Warning (Continued)

conditions when selecting the alert
timing. The range of selectable alert
Warning (LDW)
timing may not be appropriate for all proper condition; or if the sun
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
drivers and driving conditions. shines directly into the
crashes due to unintentional lane
camera.
departures. It may provide an alert if
Unnecessary Alerts the vehicle is crossing a lane . Detect road edges.
FCA may provide unnecessary marking without using a turn signal . Detect lanes on winding or
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in that direction. LDW uses a hilly roads.
in other lanes, objects that are not camera sensor to detect the lane
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts markings at speeds of 56 km/h If LDW only detects lane
are normal operation and the (35 mph) or greater. markings on one side of the road,
vehicle does not need service. it will only warn you when
Cleaning the System { Warning departing the lane on the side
where it has detected a lane
If the FCA system does not seem to The LDW system does not steer marking. Always keep your
operate properly, cleaning the the vehicle. The LDW system attention on the road and
outside of the windshield in front of may not: maintain proper vehicle position
the rearview mirror, and cleaning the within the lane, or vehicle
. Provide enough time to avoid
front of the vehicle where radar damage, injury, or death could
a crash.
sensors are located, may correct occur. Always keep the
the issue. . Detect lane markings under windshield, headlamps, and
poor weather or visibility camera sensors clean and in
conditions. This can occur if good repair. Do not use LDW in
the windshield or headlamps
bad weather conditions.
are blocked by dirt, snow,
or ice; if they are not in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi (Continued)
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
How the System Works When the System Does Not Fuel
The LDW camera sensor is on the Seem to Work Properly
For diesel engine vehicles, see
windshield ahead of the rearview The system may not detect lanes as “Fuel for Diesel Engines” in the
mirror. well when there are: Duramax diesel supplement.
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on . Close vehicles ahead. Use of the recommended fuel is an
the center stack. The control . Sudden lighting changes, such important part of the proper
indicator will light when LDW is on. as when driving through tunnels. maintenance of this vehicle. When
driving in the U.S. and Canada, to
. Banked roads.
help keep the engine clean and
If the LDW system is not functioning maintain optimum vehicle
properly when lane markings are performance, we recommend using
clearly visible, cleaning the TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
windshield may help. See www.toptiergas.com for a list of
LDW alerts may occur due to tar TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
When LDW is on, @ is green if marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
LDW is available to warn of a lane temporary or construction lane
departure. If the vehicle crosses a markings, or other road
detected lane marking without using imperfections. This is normal system
the turn signal in that direction, @ operation; the vehicle does not need
service. Turn LDW off if these
changes to amber and flashes.
Additionally, there will be three conditions continue.
beeps, or the driver seat will pulse
three times on the right or left,
depending on the lane departure
direction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, knocking is heard when using
E85 or FlexFuel can be used in the gasoline with a 91 octane rating or { Caution
vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on higher, the engine needs service.
page 9-69. Do not use fuel containing
Use of Seasonal Fuels methanol. It can corrode metal
For all vehicles except those with parts in the fuel system and also
the 6.2L V8 engine, use regular Use summer and winter fuels in the
appropriate season. The fuels damage plastic and rubber parts.
unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM That damage would not be
specification D4814 with a posted industry automatically modifies the
fuel for the appropriate season. covered under the vehicle
octane rating of 87 or higher. Do not
If fuel is left in the vehicle tank for warranty.
use gasoline with an octane rating
below 87, as it may cause engine long periods of time, driving or
damage and will lower fuel starting could be affected. Drive the Some gasolines, mainly high octane
economy. vehicle until the fuel is at one-half racing gasolines, can contain an
tank or less, then refuel with the octane-enhancing additive called
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine current seasonal fuel.
(VIN Code J), use premium methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM Prohibited Fuels tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use
specification D4814 with a posted gasolines and/or fuel additives with
Gasolines containing oxygenates MMT as they can reduce spark plug
octane rating of 91 or higher. such as ethers and ethanol, as well
Regular unleaded gasoline rated at life and affect emission control
as reformulated gasolines, are system performance. The
87 octane or higher can be used, available in some cities. If these
but acceleration and fuel economy malfunction indicator lamp may turn
gasolines comply with the on. If this occurs, see your dealer
will be reduced, and an audible previously described specification,
knocking noise may be heard. If this for service.
then they are acceptable to use.
occurs, use a gasoline rated at However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
91 octane or higher as soon as other fuels containing more than
possible. Otherwise, the engine 15% ethanol must be used only in
could be damaged. If heavy FlexFuel vehicles.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Treatment PLUS is the only

gasoline additive recommended by
Requirements Countries General Motors. It is available at
If the vehicle is certified to meet If planning to drive in countries your dealer.
California Emissions Standards, it is outside the U.S. or Canada, the Do not use additives with E85 or
designed to operate on fuels that proper fuel might be hard to find. FlexFuel.
meet California specifications. See Check regional auto club or fuel
the underhood emission control retail brand websites for availability
label. If this fuel is not available in in the country where driving. Never
E85 or FlexFuel
states adopting California Emissions use leaded gasoline, fuel containing Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can
Standards, the vehicle will operate methanol, manganese, or any other use either unleaded gasoline or fuel
satisfactorily on fuels meeting fuel not recommended. Costly containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
federal specifications, but emission repairs caused by use of improper All other vehicles should use only
control system performance might fuel would not be covered by the the unleaded gasoline as described
be affected. The malfunction vehicle warranty. in Fuel on page 9-67.
indicator lamp could turn on and the The use of E85 or FlexFuel is
vehicle may not pass a smog-check Fuel Additives encouraged when the vehicle is
test. See Malfunction Indicator designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel
Lamp on page 5-21. If this occurs, To keep fuel systems clean, TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is is made from renewable sources.
return to your authorized dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the recommended. See Fuel on To help locate fuel stations that
condition is caused by the type of page 9-67. carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.
fuel used, repairs may not be If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is Department of Energy has an
covered by the vehicle warranty. not available, one bottle of Fuel alternative fuels website. See
System Treatment PLUS added to www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/
the fuel tank at every engine oil stations.
change can help. Fuel System
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM

Specification D 5798 or CAN/ { Caution { Warning
CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use
the fuel if the ethanol content is Some additives are not Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that compatible with E85 or FlexFuel violently and can cause injury or
do not meet ASTM or CGSB and can harm the vehicle's fuel death.
specifications can affect driveability system. Do not add anything to . To help avoid injuries to you
and could cause the malfunction E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused and others, read and follow
indicator lamp to come on. by additives would not be covered all the instructions on the fuel
by the vehicle warranty. pump island.
For the 6.0L V8 engine, after
refueling, the vehicle calculates the . Turn off the engine when
composition of the fuel. It is not refueling.
recommended to repeatedly switch
between fuels. If fuels are switched
{ Caution . Keep sparks, flames, and
frequently, add as much fuel as smoking materials away
Do not use fuel containing
possible and do not add less than from fuel.
methanol. It can corrode metal
11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Drive at parts in the fuel system and also . Do not leave the fuel pump
least 11 km (7 mi) immediately after damage plastic and rubber parts. unattended.
refueling to allow the vehicle to That damage would not be . Do not reenter the vehicle
adapt to the change in ethanol covered under the vehicle while pumping fuel.
concentration. warranty. . Keep children away from the
Because E85 or FlexFuel has less fuel pump and never let
energy per liter (gallon) than children pump fuel.
gasoline, the vehicle will need to be Filling the Tank
refilled more often. See Filling the (Continued)
Tank on page 9-70. see the Duramax diesel supplement
for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
Warning (Continued) door on the driver side of the clockwise until it clicks. It will require
vehicle. Vehicles that have a more effort to turn the fuel cap on
. Fuel can spray out if the fuel FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel the last turn as you tighten it. Make
cap is opened too quickly. cap can use either unleaded sure the cap is fully installed. The
This spray can happen if the gasoline or ethanol fuel containing diagnostic system can determine if
tank is nearly full, and is up to 85% ethanol (E85). See E85 the fuel cap has been left off or
more likely in hot weather. or FlexFuel on page 9-69. improperly installed. This would
Open the fuel cap slowly and allow fuel to evaporate into the
wait for any hiss noise to stop To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. atmosphere. See Malfunction
then unscrew the cap all Indicator Lamp on page 5-21.
the way. If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank
chassis cab model, and it runs out The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first displays on the Driver Information
to ensure a quick restart. Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See Fuel System
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Messages on page 5-39 for more
top off or overfill the tank and wait a information.
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10-100.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Filling a Portable Fuel

{ Warning Container
Warning (Continued)
If a fire starts while you are keep it in contact with the fill
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
{ Warning opening until filling is
complete.
shutting off the pump or by Filling a portable fuel container . Fill the container no more
notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle can cause than 95% full to allow for
Leave the area immediately. fuel vapors that can ignite either expansion.
by static electricity or other . Do not smoke, light matches,
means. You or others could be
or use lighters while
badly burned and the vehicle
{ Caution could be damaged. Always:
pumping fuel.
. Avoid using cell phones or
If a new fuel cap is needed, be . Use approved fuel other electronic devices.
sure to get the right type of cap containers.
from your dealer. The wrong type . Remove the container from
of fuel cap may not fit properly, the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
may cause the malfunction bed before filling.
indicator lamp to light, and could
damage the fuel tank and
. Place the container on the
ground.
emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on . Place the nozzle inside the fill
page 5-21. opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Trailer Towing Driving Characteristics

and Towing Tips
{ Warning
General Towing When towing a trailer, exhaust
Driving with a Trailer gases may collect at the rear of
Information
When towing a trailer: the vehicle and enter if the
Only use towing equipment that has liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
been designed for the vehicle.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to window is open.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing trailer towing. When towing a trailer:
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read . Do not tow a trailer during the . Do not drive with the liftgate,
the entire section before towing a first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent trunk/hatch, or rear-most
trailer. damage to the engine, axle, window open.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see or other parts. . Fully open the air outlets on
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-95. . Then during the first 800 km or under the instrument
For towing the vehicle behind (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not panel.
another vehicle such as a motor drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
home, see Recreational Vehicle do not make starts at full throttle.
. Also adjust the climate
Towing on page 10-95. control system to a setting
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). that brings in only outside air.
Shift the transmission to a lower See “Climate Control
gear if the transmission shifts Systems” in the Index.
too often under heavy loads and/
or hilly conditions. For more information about
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
. Turn off Park Assist when Exhaust on page 9-33.
towing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Towing a trailer requires a certain Passing

amount of experience. The Caution (Continued)
More passing distance is needed
combination you are driving is
when towing a trailer. The The vehicle could be damaged.
longer and not as responsive as the
combination will not accelerate as Avoid making very sharp turns
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
quickly and is longer so it is while trailering.
the handling and braking of the rig
necessary to go much farther
before setting out for the open road.
beyond the passed vehicle before
Before starting, check all trailer hitch returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, make
parts and attachments, safety wider turns than normal. Do this so
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, Backing Up the trailer will not strike soft
tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has Hold the bottom of the steering shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
electric brakes, start the wheel with one hand. To move the or other objects. Avoid jerky or
combination moving and then apply trailer to the left, move that hand to sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
the trailer brake controller by hand the left. To move the trailer to the advance.
to be sure the brakes work. right, move your hand to the right. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
During the trip, check occasionally Always back up slowly and, out, the arrows on the instrument
to be sure that the load is secure if possible, have someone cluster will still flash for turns. It is
and the lamps and any trailer guide you. important to check occasionally to
brakes still work. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
Making Turns working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the { Caution Driving on Grades
vehicle ahead as you would when Reduce speed and shift to a lower
Making very sharp turns while gear before starting down a long or
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
trailering could cause the trailer to steep downgrade. If the
This can help to avoid heavy
come in contact with the vehicle. transmission is not shifted down, the
braking and sudden turns.
(Continued) brakes might get hot and no longer
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
work well.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
the transmission to a lower gear if apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
{ Warning into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
conditions. Parking the vehicle on a hill with
The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill
the transmission shifts too often. dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-39. wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both 2. Start the engine.
When towing at high altitude on
the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear.
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at damaged. When possible, always 4. Release the parking brake.
a lower temperature than at normal park the rig on a flat surface.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high If parking the rig on a hill: 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
altitude on steep uphill grades, the clear of the chocks.
vehicle may show signs similar to 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 7. Stop and have someone pick up
engine overheating. To avoid this, and store the chocks.
let the engine run while parked, the wheels into the curb if facing
preferably on level ground, with the downhill or into traffic if facing Maintenance when Trailer
transmission in P (Park) for a few uphill. Towing
minutes before turning the engine 2. Have someone place chocks The vehicle needs service more
off. If the overheat warning comes under the trailer wheels. often when pulling a trailer. See
on, see Engine Overheating on Maintenance Schedule on
3. When the wheel chocks are in
page 10-25. page 11-3. Things that are
place, release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load. especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and

brake system. It is a good idea to { Warning { Caution
inspect these before and during
the trip. The driver can lose control when Pulling a trailer improperly can
pulling a trailer if the correct damage the vehicle and result in
Check periodically to see that all equipment is not used or the costly repairs not covered by the
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. vehicle is not driven properly. For vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer
example, if the trailer is too correctly, follow the advice in this
Trailer Towing heavy, the brakes may not work section and see your dealer for
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, well or even at all. The driver and important information about
see the Duramax diesel passengers could be seriously towing a trailer with the vehicle.
supplement. injured. The vehicle may also be
If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see the damaged; the resulting repairs See Vehicle Load Limits on
bi-fuel supplement. would not be covered by the page 9-15 for more information
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer about the vehicle's maximum load
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. only if all the steps in this section capacity.
See New Vehicle Break-In on have been followed. Ask your
page 9-23. dealer for advice and information To identify the trailering capacity of
the vehicle, read the information in
about towing a trailer with the
“Weight of the Trailer” later in this
vehicle.
section.
Trailering is different than just
driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability, and fuel economy.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Successful, safe trailering takes Trailer weight rating (TWR) for 1500 For kingpin weight and trailer
correct equipment, and it has to be series trucks is calculated assuming tongue weight information, see
used properly. the tow vehicle has the driver, a “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
The following information has many front seat passenger, and all in this section.
time-tested, important trailering tips required trailering equipment. Use the following chart to determine
and safety rules. Many of these are Weight of additional optional how much the vehicle can weigh,
important for your safety and that of equipment, passengers, and cargo based upon the vehicle model and
your passengers. Read this section in the tow vehicle must be options.
carefully before pulling a trailer. subtracted from the trailer weight
rating. Weights listed apply for
Weight of the Trailer conventional trailers and fifth-wheel
Trailer weight rating (TWR) for trailers unless otherwise noted.
How heavy can a trailer safely be? 2500 and 3500 series trucks is
calculated assuming the tow vehicle
It depends on how the rig is used.
has only the driver but all required
Speed, altitude, road grades,
trailering equipment. Weight of
outside temperature, and how much
additional optional equipment,
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer
passengers, and cargo in the tow
are all important. It can depend on
vehicle must be subtracted from the
any special equipment on the
trailer weight rating.
vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
in this section for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
Vehicle Axle Ratio Weight (c) GCWR (a)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 767 kg (6,100 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 4.10 2 087 kg (4,600 lb) 4 309 kg (9,500 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 082 kg (9,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Double Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 540 kg (5,600 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 948 kg (6,500 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 080 kg (11,200 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.23 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 495 kg (5,500 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
5.3L V8 3.73 4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.23 4 219 kg (9,300 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 5 398 kg (11,900 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.3L V6 3.23 2 540 kg (5,600 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 035 kg (11,100 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.23 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 676 kg (5,900 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 085 kg (6,800 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 447 kg (7,600 lb) 5 806 kg (12,800 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
5.3L V8 3.08 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 3 946 kg (8,700 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lb) 5 806 kg (12,800 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.23 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 5 398 kg (11,900 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) 5 806 kg (12,800 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 4 899 kg (10,800 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.23 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 5 307 kg (11,700 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.3L V6 3.42 3 221 kg (7,100 lb) 5 806 kg (12,800 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 4 944 kg (10,900 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.23 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 5 353 kg (11,800 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lb) 5 806 kg (12,800 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 948 kg (6,500 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 – Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
6.0L V8 – Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 577 kg (14,500 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
6.0L V8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 672 kg (10,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
2500 Series 2WD Double Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
6.0L V8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
Conventional Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 3.73 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 396 kg (14,100 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series Chassis Cab 2WD/4WD
6.0L V8 3.73 (d) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 4.10 (d) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Trailer
(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
(c) For chassis cab and pickup box delete vehicles, choose an appropriate hitch and load the truck and trailer
within the limits of GCWR, GVWR, and RGAWR.
(d) Maximum Trailer Weight cannot be provided because total vehicle weight is unknown.
Ask your dealer for trailering the vehicle can carry, which will also Trailer tongue weight (1) should be
information or advice. reduce the trailer weight the vehicle 10–15% and fifth-wheel or
can tow. gooseneck kingpin weight should be
Weight of the Trailer Tongue 15–25% of the loaded trailer
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is weight (2) up to the maximums for
very important because it is also vehicle series and hitch type.
part of the vehicle weight. The
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
the people who will be riding in the
vehicle as well as trailer tongue
weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehicle
reduce the amount of tongue weight
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maximum Tongue Axle Weight Rating). See “Total

Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later
in this section.
1500 Weight-Carrying 363 kg (800 lb)
After loading the trailer, weigh the
1500 Weight-Distributing 544 kg (1,200 lb) trailer and then the tongue,
2500/3500 Weight-Carrying or 680 kg (1,500 lb) separately, to see if the weights are
Standard Box Weight-Distributing proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
2500/ Weight-Carrying or 907 kg (2,000 lb) items around in the trailer.
3500 Long Box Weight-Distributing
If a cargo carrier is used in the
2500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 361 kg (3,000 lb) trailer hitch receiver, choose a
carrier that positions the load as
3500 Single Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 814 kg (4,000 lb)
close to the vehicle as possible.
Wheels
Make sure the total weight,
3500 Dual Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 2 495 kg (5,500 lb) including the carrier, is no more than
Wheels half of the maximum allowable
tongue weight for the vehicle or
227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.
Do not exceed the maximum Trailer rating may be limited by the
allowable tongue weight for the vehicle's ability to carry tongue
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch weight. Tongue or kingpin weight
extension that will position the hitch cannot cause the vehicle to exceed
ball closest to the vehicle. This will the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
help reduce the effect of trailer Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
tongue weight on the rear axle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Total Weight on the Vehicle's not exceeding any of these ratings If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
Tires is to weigh the tow vehicle and the bumper could be damaged in
trailer combination, fully loaded for sharp turns. Make sure there
Be sure the vehicle's tires are the trip, getting individual weights is ample room when turning to avoid
inflated to the inflation pressures for each of these items. contact between the trailer and the
found on the Certification/Tire label bumper.
on the center pillar or see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9-15. Make
Towing Equipment Consider using sway controls with
sure not to exceed the GVWR limit Hitches any trailer. Ask a trailering
for the vehicle, or the RGAWR, with professional about sway controls or
the tow vehicle and trailer fully The correct hitch equipment helps refer to the trailer manufacturer's
loaded for the trip including the maintain combination control. Many recommendations and instructions.
weight of the trailer tongue. If using trailers can be towed with a
weight-carrying hitch which simply Weight-Distributing Hitch and
a weight-distributing hitch, make
sure not to exceed the RGAWR features a coupler latched to the Adjustment
before applying the weight hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a A weight distributing hitch may be
distribution spring bars. pintle hook. Other trailers may useful with some trailers. Use the
require a weight-distributing hitch following guidelines to determine if a
Weight of the Trailering that uses spring bars to distribute weight distributing hitch should
Combination the trailer tongue weight among the be used.
two vehicle and trailer axles.
It is important that the combination
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitches
of the tow vehicle and trailer
may also be used. See “Weight of
does not exceed any of its weight
the Trailer Tongue” under Trailer
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Towing on page 9-76 for rating limits
Trailer Weight Rating, or Tongue
with various hitch types.
Weight. The only way to be sure it is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Weight Distributing Hitch

Vehicle Series Trailer Weight Usage Hitch Distribution
1500 Up to 3175 kg (7,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailer
manufacturer’s
recommendation
1500 Over 3175 kg (7,000 lb) Required 50%
2500/3500 Up to 8165 kg (18,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailer
manufacturer’s
recommendation
When using a weight-distributing (kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle

hitch, measure distance (1) before than conventional trailers. Make
coupling the trailer to the hitch ball. sure this weight does not cause the
Measure the height again after the vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
trailer is coupled and adjust the Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin
spring bars so the distance (1) is as weight should be 15 to 25% of the
close as possible to halfway trailer weight up to the maximum
between the two measurements. amount specified in the trailering
Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck chart for the vehicle. See “Weight of
Trailering the Trailer” under Trailer Towing on
page 9-76.
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers
can be used with many pickup The hitch should be located in the
models. These trailers place a pickup bed so that its centerline is
1. Body to Ground Distance
larger percentage oof the
by: weight
over or slightly in front of the rear
2. Front of Vehicle I
nfor
mat
ionPrvi
ded
axle. Take care that it is not so far
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
forward that it will contact the back manufacturer or by the trailer Auxiliary Battery
of the cab in sharp turns. This is manufacturer. If the trailer being
The auxiliary battery provision can
especially important for short box towed weighs up to 2 271 kg
be used to supply electrical power
pickups. Trailer pin box extensions (5,000 lb) with a factory-installed
to additional equipment that may be
and sliding fifth-wheel hitch step bumper, safety chains may be
added, such as a slide-in camper.
assemblies can help this condition. attached to the attaching points on
If equipped, this relay will be on the
There should be at least 15 cm (6 in) the bumper; otherwise, safety
driver side of the vehicle, next to the
of clearance between the top of the chains should be attached to holes
underhood electrical center.
pickup box and the bottom of the on the trailer hitch platform. Always
trailer shelf that extends over leave just enough slack so the Be sure to follow the proper
the box. combination can turn. Never allow installation instructions included with
safety chains to drag on the ground. any electrical equipment that is
Make sure the hitch is attached to
installed.
the tow vehicle frame rails. Do not Trailer Brakes
use the pickup box for support.
Safety Chains
A loaded trailer that weighs more { Caution
than 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to have
its own brake system that is Leaving electrical equipment on
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the adequate for the weight of the for extended periods will drain the
safety chains under the tongue of trailer. Be sure to read and follow battery. Always turn off electrical
the trailer to help prevent the tongue the instructions for the trailer brakes equipment when not in use and
from contacting the road if it so they are installed, adjusted, and do not use equipment that
becomes separated from the hitch. maintained properly. exceeds the maximum amperage
Instructions about safety chains Do not tap into the vehicle's rating of 30 amps for the auxiliary
may be provided by the hitch hydraulic brake system. battery provision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Trailer Wiring Harness Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness

. White: Ground
Package . White/Green: Back-up Lamps
The vehicle is equipped with one of
the following wiring harnesses for . Red/Green: Battery Feed
towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
camper.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle)
Basic Trailer Wiring battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode
All regular, double cab, and crew button, if equipped, at the end of the
cab pickups have a seven-wire shift lever. This will boost the
trailer towing harness. vehicle system voltage and properly
charge the battery. If the trailer is
For vehicles not equipped with
too light for Tow/Haul Mode, or the
heavy-duty trailering, the harness is
vehicle is not equipped with Tow/
secured to the vehicle's frame
Haul, turn on the headlamps as a
behind the spare tire mount. The
second way to boost the vehicle
harness requires the installation of a For vehicles equipped with system and charge the battery.
trailer connector, which is available heavy-duty trailering, the harness
through your dealer. connector is mounted in the bumper. Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring
The seven-wire harness contains Package
the following trailer circuits: The seven-wire camper harness is
. Green/Violet: Left Stop/Turn under the rear bumper, attached to
Signal the frame near the rear
crossmember. A connector must be
. Yellow/Gray: Right Stop/Turn added to the wiring harness that
Signal connects to the camper.
. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/Parking
Lamps
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The harness contains the following When the camper-wiring harness is Tow/Haul Mode
camper/trailer circuits: ordered without the heavy-duty
. Green/Violet: Left Stop/Turn trailering package, a seven-wire
Signal harness with a seven-pin connector
is at the rear of the vehicle and is
. Yellow/Gray: Right Stop/Turn tied to the vehicle's frame.
Signal
Electric Brake Control Wiring
. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/Parking
Provisions
Lamps
These wiring provisions are
. White: Ground
included with the vehicle as part of
. White/Green: Back-up Lamps the trailer wiring package. These
. Red/Green: Battery Feed provisions are for an electric brake
controller.
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
The harness should be installed by Pressing this button at the end of
If the vehicle is equipped with the your dealer or a qualified service the shift lever turns on and off the
heavy-duty trailering option, see center. Tow/Haul Mode.
“Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Package” earlier in this section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. When pulling a heavy trailer or a Integrated Trailer Brake
large or heavy load in Control System
stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle may have an Integrated
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system
large or heavy load in busy for use with electric trailer brakes or
parking lots where improved low most electric over hydraulic trailer
This indicator light on the instrument speed control of the vehicle is brakes.
cluster comes on when the Tow/ desired.
Haul Mode is on. Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when lightly loaded or with no trailer
when pulling a heavy trailer or a at all will not cause damage.
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul However, there is no benefit to the
Mode on page 9-39. selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a
Tow/Haul is designed to be most selection when unloaded may result This symbol is on the Trailer Brake
effective when the vehicle and in unpleasant engine and Control Panel on vehicles with an
trailer combined weight is at least transmission driving characteristics ITBC system. The power output to
75% of the vehicle's Gross and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ the trailer brakes is based on the
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Haul is recommended only when amount of brake pressure being
See “Weight of the Trailer” under pulling a heavy trailer or a large or applied by the vehicle’s brake
Trailer Towing on page 9-76. Tow/ heavy load. system, and on the type of trailer
Haul is most useful under the
brakes detected. This available
following driving conditions:
power output to the trailer brakes
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a can be adjusted to a wide range of
large or heavy load through trailering situations.
rolling terrain.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The ITBC system is integrated with Trailer Brake Control Panel

the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake, { Warning
and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering
conditions that cause the vehicle’s Connecting a trailer that has an
antilock brake or StabiliTrak air brake system may result in
systems to activate, power sent to reduced or complete loss of trailer
the trailer's brakes will be braking. There may be an
automatically adjusted to minimize increase in stopping distance or
trailer wheel lock-up. This does not trailer instability which could
imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak. result in personal injury or
damage to the vehicle, trailer,
If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,
or StabiliTrak systems are not or other property. Use the ITBC
functioning properly, the ITBC system only with electric or
system may not be fully functional electric over hydraulic trailer
or may not function at all. Make sure brakes.
1. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
all of these systems are fully Lever
operational to ensure full 2. Trailer Gain Adjustment
functionality of the ITBC system. Buttons
The ITBC system is powered The ITBC system has a control
through the vehicle's electrical panel on the instrument panel to the
system. Turning the ignition off will left of the steering column. See
also turn off the ITBC system. The Instrument Panel on page 1-2. The
ITBC system is fully functional only control panel allows adjustment to
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. the amount of output, referred to as
Trailer Gain, available to the trailer
brakes and allows manual
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: application of the trailer brakes.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The Trailer Brake Control Panel is

. Activate the Manual Trailer . A trailer without electric brakes
used along with the Trailer Brake Brake Apply Lever. is connected (no DIC message
Display Page on the Driver TRAILER GAIN: This setting can be will display).
Information Center (DIC) to adjust adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either . A trailer with electric brakes has
and display power output to the a trailer connected or disconnected. become disconnected (a
trailer brakes. To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one CHECK TRAILER WIRING
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page of the Trailer Gain Adjustment message will also display on
buttons. Press and hold a gain the DIC).
The ITBC system displays button to continuously adjust the
messages in the DIC.
. There is a fault present in the
Trailer Gain. To turn the output to wiring to the trailer brakes (a
The display page indicates Trailer the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain CHECK TRAILER WIRING
Gain setting, power output to the setting to 0.0 (zero). message will also display on
trailer brakes, trailer connection, and TRAILER OUTPUT: This displays the DIC).
system operational status. anytime a trailer with electric brakes . The ITBC system is not working
To display the Trailer Brake Display is connected. Output to the trailer due to a fault (a SERVICE
Page, do any of the following: brakes is based on the amount of TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
vehicle braking present and relative message will also display in
. Scroll through the DIC menu to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is
pages. the DIC).
displayed from 0 to 100% for each
. Press a Trailer Gain button. gain setting. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
If the Trailer Brake Display Page The Trailer Output will indicate The Manual Trailer Brake Apply
is not currently displayed, press “- - - - - -” on the Trailer Brake Lever is used to apply the trailer’s
a Trailer Gain button to recall the Display Page whenever the electric brakes independent of the
current Trailer Gain setting. following occur: vehicle’s brakes. Sliding the lever to
Each press and release of the the left will apply only the trailer
gain buttons will then change the
. No trailer is connected.
brakes. Use this lever to adjust
Trailer Gain setting. Trailer Gain to properly adjust the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
power output to the trailer brakes.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
The trailer's and the vehicle's brake Use the following to adjust Trailer 3. Readjust Trailer Gain anytime
lamps will come on when either Gain for each towing condition: vehicle loading, trailer loading,
vehicle brakes or manual trailer 1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer or road surface conditions
brakes are applied. attached on a level road surface change or if trailer wheel lock-up
representative of the towing is noticed at any time while
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure towing.
condition and free of traffic at
Trailer Gain should be set for a about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
specific trailering condition and must Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages
25 mph) and fully apply the
be adjusted anytime vehicle loading, Manual Trailer Brake Apply In addition to displaying TRAILER
trailer loading, or road surface Lever. GAIN and OUTPUT through the
conditions change. DIC, trailer connection and ITBC
Adjusting Trailer Gain at speeds system status are displayed on
{ Warning lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
25 mph) may result in an
the DIC.
incorrect gain setting. TRAILER CONNECTED: This

Trailer brakes that are message will briefly display when a
over-gained or under-gained may 2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using the trailer with electric brakes is first
not stop the vehicle and the trailer Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons, connected to the vehicle. This
as intended and can result in a to just below the point of trailer message will automatically turn off
crash. Always follow the wheel lock-up, indicated by in about 10 seconds. This message
instructions to set the Trailer Gain trailer wheel squeal or tire can be acknowledged before it
for the proper trailer stopping smoke when a trailer wheel automatically turns off.
performance. locks.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not
occur if towing a heavily loaded
trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest
allowable setting for the towing
condition. InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This the trailer wiring. This message continues over multiple ignition
message will display if: will also turn off if it is cycles, there is a problem with the
. The ITBC system first acknowledged. ITBC system. Have the vehicle
determines connection to a To determine if the electrical fault is serviced.
trailer with electric brakes and on the vehicle side or trailer side of If either the CHECK TRAILER
then the trailer harness becomes the trailer wiring harness WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER
disconnected from the vehicle. connection: BRAKE SYSTEM message displays
If the disconnect occurs while 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring while driving, the ITBC system may
the vehicle is stationary, this harness from the vehicle. not be fully functional or may not
message will automatically turn function at all. When traffic
2. Turn the ignition off. conditions allow, carefully pull the
off in about 30 seconds. This
message will also turn off if it is 3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the vehicle over to the side of the road
acknowledged or if the trailer ignition back to RUN. and turn the ignition off. Check the
harness is reconnected. wiring connection to the trailer and
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING turn the ignition back on. If either of
If the disconnect occurs while message reappears, the these messages continues, either
the vehicle is moving, this electrical fault is on the the vehicle or trailer needs service.
message will continue until the vehicle side.
ignition is turned off. This A GM dealer may be able to
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING diagnose and repair problems with
message will also turn off if it is message only reappears when
acknowledged or if the trailer the trailer. However, any diagnosis
connecting the trailer wiring and repair of the trailer is not
harness is reconnected. harness to the vehicle, the covered under the vehicle warranty.
. There is an electrical fault in the electrical fault is on the Contact your trailer dealer for
wiring to the trailer brakes. This trailer side. assistance with trailer repairs and
message will continue as long SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE trailer warranty information.
as there is an electrical fault in SYSTEM: This message will display
when thereInfis
or
aionproblem
mat Pr
ovi
dedby:
with the
ITBC system. If this message
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Trailer Sway Conversions and

Control (TSC)
{ Warning
Even if the vehicle is equipped
Add-Ons
Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a
with TSC, trailer sway could result
TSC feature. Trailer sway is
in loss of control and the vehicle
Add-On Electrical
unintended side-to-side motion of a
trailer while being towed. If the could crash. If excessive trailer Equipment
vehicle is towing a trailer and the sway is detected, slow down to a
TSC detects that sway is increasing, safe speed. Check the trailer and { Caution
the vehicle brakes are selectively vehicle to help correct possible
applied at each wheel, to help causes. These could include an Some electrical equipment can
reduce excessive trailer sway. If the improperly or overloaded trailer, damage the vehicle or cause
vehicle is equipped with the unrestrained cargo, improper components to not work and
Integrated Trailer Brake Control trailer hitch configuration, would not be covered by the
(ITBC) system, and the trailer has excessive vehicle-trailer speed, warranty. Always check with your
the electric actuated brake system, or improperly inflated or incorrect dealer before adding electrical
StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing equipment.
brakes. Equipment on page 9-90 for
If TSC is enabled, the Traction trailer ratings and hitch setup Add-on equipment can drain the
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak recommendations. vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
warning light will flash on the vehicle is not operating.
instrument cluster. Vehicle speed Adding non-dealer accessories can The vehicle has an airbag system.
must be reduced. If trailer sway affect the vehicle performance. See Before attempting to add anything
continues, StabiliTrak can reduce Accessories and Modifications on electrical to the vehicle, see
engine torque to help slow the page 10-3. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
vehicle. See Traction Control/ Vehicle on page 3-34 and Adding
Electronic Stability Control on Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
page 9-54. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle on page 3-34.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
For information on wiring auxiliary The plow the vehicle can carry
switches, see www.gmupfitter.com Caution (Continued) depends on many things, such as:
or contact your dealer. . The options the vehicle came
vehicle was built to carry a snow
plow, do not add one to the with, and the weight of those
Adding a Snow Plow or vehicle. If the vehicle has the options.
Similar Equipment snow plow prep package, called . The weight and number of
RPO VYU, then the payload the passengers intended to be
{ Caution vehicle can carry will be reduced carried.
when a snow plow is installed. . The weight of items added to the
Do not exceed 64 km/h (40 mph) The vehicle can be damaged if
with a snow plow mounted to the vehicle, like a tool box or
either the front or rear axle ratings truck cap.
vehicle. The vehicle could or the Gross Vehicle Weight
overheat and be damaged. Rating (GVWR) are exceeded.
. The total weight of any
additional cargo intended to be
carried.
Before installing a snow plow on the Some vehicles are built with a
vehicle, here are some things you Say, for example, you have a 318 kg
special snow plow prep package,
need to know: (700 lb) snow plow. The total weight
called RPO VYU. If the vehicle has
of all occupants and cargo inside
this option, you can add a plow to it,
{ Caution provided certain weights, such as
the cab should not exceed 135 kg
(300 lb). This means that you may
the weights on the vehicle's axles
If the vehicle does not have the only be able to carry one passenger.
and the Gross Vehicle Weight
snow plow prep package, adding But, even this may be too much if
Rating (GVWR), are not exceeded.
a plow can damage the vehicle, there is other equipment already
and the repairs would not be adding to the weight of the vehicle.
covered by warranty. Unless the
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Here are some guidelines for safely the GVW rating, the front and
carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: rear axle ratings, and the front
. Make sure the weight on the and rear weight distribution ratio.
front and rear axles does not . The total vehicle must not
exceed the axle rating for each. exceed the GVW rating.
. For the front axle, if more cargo Front axle reserve capacity is the
or passengers must be carried, difference between the Gross Axle
appropriate counter ballast must Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front
be installed rear of the rear axle. axle weight of the vehicle with full
Counter ballast must be properly fuel and passengers. Basically, it is
secured so it will not move the amount of weight that can be
during driving. added to the front axle before
Canada
. Follow the snow plow reaching the front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for
manufacturer's
the vehicle can be found in the
recommendations regarding rear
lower right corner of the
ballast. Rear ballast may be
Certification/Tire label, as shown.
required to ensure a proper front
and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual weight at
the front axle may be less than
the front axle rating.
. The snow plow manufacturer or
installer can assist you in
determining the amount of rear
ballast required, to help make
sure the snow plow/vehicle United States
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
combination does not exceed
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
In order to calculate the amount of For example, adding a 318 kg

weight any front accessory, such as (700 lb) snow plow actually adds { Warning
a snow plow, is adding to the front more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the
axle, use the following formula: front axle. Using the formula, if the On some vehicles that have
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of certain front mounted equipment,
the front axle and the wheel base is such as a snow plow, it may be
305 cm (10 ft), then: possible to load the front axle to
W = 318 kg (700 lb) the front gross axle weight rating
A = 122 cm (4 ft) (GAWR) but not have enough
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft) weight on the rear axle to have
proper braking performance. If the
(W x (A + W.B.)/W.B. =
(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg brakes cannot work properly, you
(980 lb) could have a crash. To help the
brakes work properly when a
So, if the front axle reserve capacity snow plow is installed, always
is more than 445 kg (980 lb), the follow the snow plow
snow plow could be added without manufacturer or installer's
exceeding the front GAWR. recommendation for rear ballast
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the
accessory is adding to the Heavier equipment can be added on to ensure a proper front and rear
front axle. the front of the vehicle if it is weight distribution ratio, even
compensated for by carrying fewer though the actual front weight
Where: passengers or less cargo, or by may be less than the front
W = Weight of added accessory positioning cargo toward the rear. GAWR, and the total vehicle
A = Distance that the accessory This has the effect of reducing the
is in front of the front axle weight is less than the gross
load on the front. However, the front vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase GAWR, rear GAWR, and Gross Maintaining a proper front and
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must
never be exceeded.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Warning (Continued)
The total vehicle reserve capacity Pickup Conversion to
for the vehicle can be found in the
lower right corner of the
Chassis Cab
rear weight distribution ratio is Certification/Tire label as shown We are aware that some vehicle
necessary to provide proper previously. owners might consider having the
braking performance. pickup box removed and a
See your dealer for additional
advice and information about using commercial or recreational body
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the a snow plow on the vehicle. Also, installed. Owners should be aware
difference between the GVWR and see Vehicle Load Limits on that, as manufactured, there are
the weight of the truck with full fuel page 9-15. differences between a chassis cab
and passengers. It is the amount of and a pickup with the box removed
weight that can be added to the Emergency Roof Lamp which could affect vehicle safety.
vehicle before reaching the GVWR. Provisions The components necessary to adapt
Keep in mind that reserve capacity a pickup to permit its safe use with
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow a specialized body should be
numbers are intended as a guide plow prep package also have an
when selecting the amount of installed by the body builder.
emergency roof lamp provision
equipment or cargo the truck can package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front, emergency roof lamp is provided
rear, or total weight, go to a weigh above the overhead console. See
station and weigh the vehicle. Your Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on
dealer can also help with this. page 6-5 for switch location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-1
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Park Brake and P (Park)

Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-19 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-38
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Wiper Blade
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
General Information Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-25 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-39
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Overheated Engine
California Proposition Protection Headlamp Aiming
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
California Perchlorate Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Bulb Replacement
Power Steering Fluid Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Accessories and (1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Power Steering Fluid Headlamps, Front Turn
Vehicle Checks (2500/3500 Series) . . . . . . . . 10-28 Signal, Sidemarker, and
Doing Your Own Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Taillamps (Chassis Cab
Engine Compartment Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Automatic Transmission Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-36 Center High-Mounted
Fluid (6 Speed Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-37 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Automatic Transmission Shift Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Automatic Transmission Lock Control Function Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Fluid (8 Speed Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Ignition Transmission Lock
Manual Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-2 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Tire Pressure Monitor Towing the Vehicle

Electrical System System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Tire Pressure Monitor Recreational Vehicle
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Engine Compartment Fuse Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Appearance Care
Instrument Panel Fuse Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Block (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 When It Is Time for New Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Different Size Tires and
Wheels and Tires Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Uniform Tire Quality
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-77
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-56 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Tire Terminology and Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-90
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Jump Starting
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-3
General Information cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. Engine
handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
For service and parts needs, visit exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
your dealer. You will receive many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability
genuine GM parts and GM-trained wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or
and supported service people. emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
Genuine GM parts have one of malfunction or damage not covered
these marks: California Perchlorate by the vehicle warranty.
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or the
Certain types of automotive
installation or use of non‐GM
applications, such as airbag
certified parts, including control
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
module or software modifications, is
and lithium batteries contained in
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to
perchlorate. complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. See your
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories
California Proposition Modifications installed by a dealer technician.
65 Warning Adding non‐dealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Most motor vehicles, including this making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
one, contain and/or emit chemicals can affect vehicle performance and page 3-34.
known to the State of California to safety, including
I
nfor
mat
i
such
onPr
ovi
things as
dedby:
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Keep a record with all parts receipts
work, use the proper service and list the mileage and the date of
manual. It tells you much more any service work performed. See
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle Maintenance Records on
Service Work than this manual can. To order the page 11-16.
proper service manual, see Service
{ Warning Publications Ordering Information
on page 13-11.
{ Caution
It can be dangerous to work on This vehicle has an airbag system. Even small amounts of
your vehicle if you do not have Before attempting to do your own contamination can cause damage
the proper knowledge, service service work, see Servicing the to vehicle systems. Do not allow
manual, tools, or parts. Always Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on contaminants to contact the fluids,
follow owner manual procedures page 3-34. reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood Before closing the hood, be sure all

the filler caps are on properly. Then
To open the hood: bring the hood from full open to
within 15 cm (6 in) from the closed
position, pause, and push the front
center of the hood with a swift, firm
motion to fully close the hood.
1. Pull the handle with this symbol

on it. It is inside the vehicle
under the steering wheel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
find the secondary hood release.
The handle is under the front
edge of the hood near the
center. Push the handle to the
right and at the same time raise
the hood.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
4.3L V6 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 6. Remote Negative (–) Location. 11. Windshield Washer Fluid
Starting on page 10-91. See Jump Starting on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
2. Battery on page 10-32. page 10-91. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of page 10-29.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling View). See Cooling System on 12. Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If
System on page 10-21. page 10-21. Equipped). See Hydraulic
8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Clutch on page 10-19.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10-19. to Add Engine Oil” under Engine 13. Engine Compartment Fuse
Oil on page 10-11. Block on page 10-45.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped). See “How to 9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Check Automatic Transmission “Checking Engine Oil” under
Fluid” under Automatic Engine Oil on page 10-11.
Transmission Fluid (6 Speed 10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Transmission) on page 10-15 or Brake Fluid on page 10-31.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (8
Speed Transmission) on
page 10-18.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-8 Vehicle Care
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2L V8 Engine Similar
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 6. Remote Negative (–) Location 10. Windshield Washer Fluid
Starting on page 10-91. (Out of View). See Jump Starting Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
2. Battery on page 10-32. on page 10-91. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of page 10-29.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling View). See Cooling System on 11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
System on page 10-21. page 10-21. Brake Fluid on page 10-31.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When 12. Engine Compartment Fuse
page 10-19. to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Block on page 10-45.
Oil on page 10-11.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped). See “How to 9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Check Automatic Transmission “Checking Engine Oil” under
Fluid” under Automatic Engine Oil on page 10-11.
Transmission Fluid (6 Speed
Transmission) on page 10-15 or
Automatic Transmission Fluid (8
Speed Transmission) on
page 10-18.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-10 Vehicle Care
6.0L V8 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-11
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 9. Remote Negative (–) Location. Engine Oil
Starting on page 10-91. See Jump Starting on
page 10-91. For diesel engine vehicles, see
2. Battery on page 10-32. “Engine Oil” in the Duramax diesel
3. Coolant Surge Tank and 10. Power Steering Fluid supplement.
Pressure Cap. See Cooling Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid (1500 Series) on To ensure proper engine
System on page 10-21. performance and long life, careful
page 10-28 or Power Steering
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Fluid (2500/3500 Series) on attention must be paid to engine oil.
page 10-19. page 10-28. Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick 11. Windshield Washer Fluid your investment:
(If Equipped). See “How to Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
. Always use engine oil approved
Check Automatic Transmission Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
Fluid” under Automatic page 10-29. to the proper specification and of
Transmission Fluid (6 Speed the proper viscosity grade. See
Transmission) on page 10-15 or 12. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
Automatic Transmission Fluid (8 Brake Fluid on page 10-31. in this section.
Speed Transmission) on 13. Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped). . Check the engine oil level
page 10-18. See Battery on page 10-32. regularly and maintain the
6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See 14. Engine Compartment Fuse proper oil level. See “Checking
“Checking Engine Oil” under Block on page 10-45. Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil on page 10-11. Engine Oil” in this section.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine
7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When and/or an Allison Transmission, see . Change the engine oil at the
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine the Duramax diesel supplement. appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Oil on page 10-11. Life System on page 10-14.
8. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of . Always dispose of engine oil
View). See Cooling System on I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
properly. See “What to Do with
page 10-21. Used Oil” in this section.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-12 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil what kind of oil to use. For engine

It is a good idea to check the engine
{ Warning oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to The engine oil dipstick handle page 12-2.
get an accurate reading, the vehicle may be hot; it could burn you.
must be on level ground. The Use a towel or glove to touch the
engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. dipstick handle. { Caution
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-6 for the location of the Do not add too much oil. Oil
engine oil dipstick. 2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it levels above or below the
with a clean paper towel or cloth, acceptable operating range
If a low oil message displays on the then push it back in all the way. shown on the dipstick are harmful
DIC, it is important to park on level Remove it again, keeping the tip to the engine. If you find that you
ground to accurately measure the down, and check the level. have an oil level above the
oil level on the dipstick. Idling the operating range, i.e., the engine
vehicle on steep grades for a long When to Add Engine Oil
has so much oil that the oil level
time can influence the level sensing
gets above the cross-hatched
accuracy.
area that shows the proper
Obtaining an accurate oil level operating range, the engine could
reading is essential: be damaged. You should drain
1. If the engine has been running out the excess oil or limit driving
recently, turn off the engine and of the vehicle and seek a service
allow several minutes for the oil professional to remove the
to drain back into the oil pan. If the oil is below the cross-hatched excess amount of oil.
Checking the oil level too soon area at the tip of the dipstick, add
after engine shutoff will not 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See See Engine Compartment Overview
provide an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in on page 10-6 for the location of the
reading.
this section forInfoan
r
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
explanation of engine oil fill cap.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-13
Add enough oil to put the level An oil of this viscosity grade will
somewhere in the proper operating provide easier cold starting for the
range. Push the dipstick all the way engine at extremely low
back in when through. temperatures.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil When selecting an oil of the
appropriate viscosity grade, always
Selecting the right engine oil select an oil of the correct
depends on both the proper oil { Caution specification. See “Specification”
specification and viscosity grade. earlier in this section for more
See Recommended Fluids and Failure to use the recommended information.
Lubricants on page 11-12. engine oil can result in engine
damage not covered by the Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Specification
vehicle warranty. Check with your Oil Flushes
Use and ask for licensed engine oils dealer or service provider on Do not add anything to the oil. The
with the dexos1® approved whether the oil is approved to the recommended oils with the dexos
certification mark. Engine oils dexos1 specification. specification and displaying the
meeting the requirements for the
dexos certification mark are all that
vehicle should have the dexos1
Viscosity Grade is needed for good performance and
approved certification mark. This
engine protection.
certification mark indicates that the Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade for
oil has been approved to the dexos1 the 5.3L and 6.2L V8 engines. Use Engine oil system flushes are not
specification. See SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade for the recommended and could cause
www.gmdexos.com. 4.3L V6, and 6.0L V8 engines. engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used in theInf4.3L
or
mat
ionPr
orovid6.0L
edby:
engine.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-14 Vehicle Care
What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and,
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil at this time, the system must be
elements that can be unhealthy for
This vehicle has a computer system reset. For vehicles without the
your skin and could even cause
that indicates when to change the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
engine oil and filter. This is based message, an oil change is needed
your skin for very long. Clean your
on a combination of factors which when the OIL LIFE REMAINING
skin and nails with soap and water,
include engine revolutions, engine percentage is near 0%. Your dealer
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
temperature, and miles driven. has trained service people who will
properly dispose of clothing or rags
Based on driving conditions, the perform this work and reset the
containing used engine oil. See the
mileage at which an oil change is system. It is also important to check
manufacturer's warnings about the
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil regularly over the course of
use and disposal of oil products.
the oil life system to work properly, an oil drain interval and keep it at
Used oil can be a threat to the the proper level.
the system must be reset every time
environment. If you change your the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
On some vehicles, when the system accidentally, the oil must be
from the filter before disposal. Never
has calculated that oil life has been changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
dispose of oil by putting it in the
diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE since the last oil change.
trash or pouring it on the ground,
OIL SOON message comes on to Remember to reset the oil life
into sewers, or into streams or
indicate that an oil change is system whenever the oil is changed.
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. necessary. See Engine Oil
Messages on page 5-38. Change
the oil as soon as possible within
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
not necessary for up to a year. The
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Reset the Engine Oil The oil life system can also be reset Automatic Transmission
Life System as follows:
Fluid (6 Speed
Reset the system whenever the 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with Transmission)
engine oil is changed so that the the engine off.
system can calculate the next 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal When to Check and Change
engine oil change. Always reset the slowly three times within Automatic Transmission Fluid
engine oil life to 100% after every oil five seconds. It is usually not necessary to check
change. It will not reset itself. To
3. Display the OIL LIFE the transmission fluid level. The only
reset the engine oil life system:
REMAINING on the DIC. If the reason for fluid loss is a
1. Display the OIL LIFE display shows 100%, the system transmission leak or overheated
REMAINING on the DIC. If the is reset. transmission. If a small leak is
vehicle does not have DIC suspected, then use the following
buttons, the vehicle must be in If the vehicle has a CHANGE checking procedures to check the
P (Park) to access this display. ENGINE OIL SOON message and it fluid level. However, if there is a
See Driver Information Center comes back on when the vehicle is large leak, then it may be necessary
(DIC) (Base Level) on page 5-30 started and/or the OIL LIFE to have the vehicle towed to a
or Driver Information Center REMAINING is near 0%, the engine dealer service department and have
(DIC) (Uplevel) on page 5-32. oil life system has not been reset. it repaired before driving the vehicle
Repeat the procedure. further.
2. Press and hold V, or the trip
odometer reset stem if the
vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, for several seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-16 Vehicle Care
How to Check Automatic pausing for about three seconds

{ Caution Transmission Fluid in each range. Then, move the
shift lever back to P (Park).
Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage { Caution 4. Allow the engine to idle (500–
the vehicle, and the damage may 800 rpm) for at least one minute.
Too much or too little fluid can Slowly release the brake pedal.
not be covered by the vehicle
damage the transmission. Too
warranty. Always use the 5. Keep the engine running and
much can mean that some of the
automatic transmission fluid listed check the transmission fluid
fluid could come out and fall on temperature on the Driver
in Recommended Fluids and
hot engine parts or exhaust Information Center (DIC). See
Lubricants on page 11-12.
system parts, starting a fire. Too Driver Information Center (DIC)
little fluid could cause the (Base Level) on page 5-30 or
Change the fluid and filter at the transmission to overheat. Be sure Driver Information Center (DIC)
scheduled maintenance intervals to get an accurate reading if (Uplevel) on page 5-32.
listed in Maintenance Schedule on checking the transmission fluid.
page 11-3. Be sure to use the 6. Using the transmission fluid
transmission fluid listed in temperature reading, determine
Recommended Fluids and Before checking the fluid level, and perform the appropriate
Lubricants on page 11-12. prepare the vehicle: check procedure. If the
1. Start the engine and park the transmission fluid temperature
vehicle on a level surface. Keep reading is not within the required
the engine running. temperature ranges, allow the
vehicle to cool, or operate the
2. Apply the parking brake and vehicle until the appropriate
place the shift lever in P (Park). transmission fluid temperature is
3. With your foot on the brake reached.
pedal, move the shift lever
through each
I
nfor gear
mat
ionPr drange,
oviedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-17
Cold Check Procedure 2. Flip the handle up, then pull out 6. Perform a hot check at the
Use this procedure only as a the dipstick and wipe it with a first opportunity after the
reference to determine if the clean rag or paper towel. transmission reaches a normal
transmission has enough fluid to be 3. Install the dipstick by pushing it operating temperature between
operated safely until a hot check back in all the way; wait 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
procedure can be made. The hot three seconds, and then pull it 7. If the fluid level is in the
check procedure is the most back out again. acceptable range, push the
accurate method to check the fluid 4. Check both sides of the dipstick dipstick back in all the way, then
level. Perform the hot check and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the
procedure at the first opportunity. the check procedure to verify the dipstick in place.
Use this cold check procedure to reading.
check fluid level when the Hot Check Procedure
transmission temperature is Use this procedure to check the
between 27°C and 32°C (80°F and transmission fluid level when the
90°F). transmission fluid temperature is
between 71°C and 93°C (160°F and
200°F).
The hot check is the most accurate
method to check the fluid level. The
5. If the fluid level is below the hot check should be performed at
COLD check band, add only the first opportunity in order to verify
enough fluid as necessary to the cold check. The fluid level rises
1. Locate the transmission dipstick bring the level into the COLD as fluid temperature increases,
at the rear of the engine band. It does not take much so it is important to ensure the
compartment, on the passenger fluid, generally less than 0.5 L transmission temperature is within
side of the vehicle. (1 pt). Do not overfill. range.
See Engine Compartment I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overview on page 10-6.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-18 Vehicle Care
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least
twice using the procedure described
previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If readings are still
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
5. Safe operating level is within the inconsistent, contact the dealer.
at the rear of the engine
compartment, on the passenger HOT cross hatch band on the
side of the vehicle. dipstick. If the fluid level is not Automatic Transmission
within the HOT band, and the Fluid (8 Speed
See Engine Compartment transmission temperature is
Overview on page 10-6. between 71°C and 93°C (160°F Transmission)
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out and 200°F), add or drain fluid as When to Check and Change
the dipstick and wipe it with a necessary to bring the level into
the HOT band. If the fluid level is
Automatic Transmission Fluid
clean rag or paper towel.
low, add only enough fluid to It is usually not necessary to check
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it bring the level into the HOT the transmission fluid level. The only
back in all the way; wait band. It does not take much reason for fluid loss is a
three seconds, and then pull it fluid, generally less than 0.5 L transmission leak or overheated
back out again. (1 pt). Do not overfill. transmission. This vehicle is not
4. Check both sides of the dipstick equipped with a transmission fluid
6. If the fluid level is in the
and read the lower level. Repeat level dipstick. There is a special
acceptable range, push the
the check procedure to verify the procedure for checking and
dipstick back in all the way, then
reading. changing the transmission fluid in
flip the handle down to lock the
these vehicles. Because this
dipstick in place.
procedure is difficult, this should be
done at the dealer. Contact the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
dealer for additional information or
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-19
the procedure can be found in the Manual Transmission When to Check and What
service manual. See Service to Use
Publications Ordering Information
Fluid
on page 13-11. It is not necessary to check the The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir
manual transmission fluid level. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
{ Caution A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak Engine Compartment Overview on
occurs, take the vehicle to your page 10-6 for reservoir location.
Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage dealer service department and have How to Check and Add Fluid
the vehicle, and the damage may it repaired as soon as possible. See
Recommended Fluids and Visually check the clutch fluid
Lubricants on page 11-12 for the reservoir to make sure the fluid level
warranty. Always use the is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
automatic transmission fluid listed proper fluid to use.
side of the reservoir. The hydraulic
in Recommended Fluids and clutch fluid system should be closed
Lubricants on page 11-12. Hydraulic Clutch and sealed.
For vehicles with a manual
Do not remove the cap to check the
Change the fluid and filter at the transmission, it is not necessary to
fluid level or to top-off the fluid level.
scheduled maintenance intervals regularly check clutch fluid unless
Remove the cap only when
listed in Maintenance Schedule on you suspect there is a leak in the
necessary to add the proper fluid
page 11-3. Be sure to use the system. Adding fluid will not correct until the level reaches the MIN line.
transmission fluid listed in a leak. A fluid loss in this system
Recommended Fluids and could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
see “Pickup Models” under “Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramax
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-20 Vehicle Care
diesel supplement for the correct remains covered with dirt, a new 2. Disconnect the outlet duct by
inspection and replacement filter is required. Never use loosening the air duct clamp (3).
procedures. compressed air to clean the filter. 3. Disconnect the electrical
See Engine Compartment Overview Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/ connectors (2) and the
on page 10-6 for the location of the Filter connector harness from the
engine air cleaner/filter. cover.
When to Inspect the Engine Air 4. Remove the four screws (1) on
Cleaner/Filter top of the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals 5. Remove the engine air cleaner/
and replace it at the first oil change filter from the housing. Take care
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) to dislodge as little dirt as
interval. See Maintenance Schedule possible.
on page 11-3. If driving in dusty/dirty 6. Clean the engine air cleaner/
conditions, inspect the filter at each filter sealing surfaces and the
engine oil change. housing.
How to Inspect the Engine Air 7. Inspect or replace the engine air
Cleaner/Filter 1. Screws cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 2. Electrical Connectors 8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstall
remove the engine air cleaner/filter 3. Air Duct Clamp the filter cover housing.
from the vehicle by following 1. Locate the air cleaner/filter
Steps 1−8. When the engine air assembly. See Engine
cleaner/filter is removed, lightly Compartment Overview on
shake it to release loose dust and page 10-6.
dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-21
The cooling system allows the

{ Warning engine to maintain the correct { Warning
working temperature.
Operating the engine with the air An electric engine cooling fan can
cleaner/filter off can cause you or start even when the engine is not
others to be burned. The air running. To avoid injury, always
cleaner not only cleans the air; it keep hands, clothing, and tools
helps to stop flames if the engine away from any engine
backfires. Use caution when cooling fan.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
{ Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt 5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 4.3L
can easily get into the engine, V6 Engine and 6.2L V8 Engine
which could damage it. Always Similar
have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving. 1. Coolant Surge Tank
2. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap
Cooling System 3. Engine Electric Cooling Fans 6.0L V8 Engine
If the vehicle has the Duramax
1. Coolant Surge Tank
diesel engine, see the Duramax
diesel supplement. 2. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-22 Vehicle Care
3. Engine Belt-Driven What to Use

Cooling Fan Caution (Continued)
would not be covered by the { Warning
{ Warning vehicle warranty. Always use
Adding only plain water or some
Heater and radiator hoses, and DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
other liquid to the cooling system
other engine parts, can be very in the vehicle.
can be dangerous. Plain water
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, and other liquids, can boil before
you can be burned. Engine Coolant the proper coolant mixture will.
Do not run the engine if there is a The coolant warning system is set
The cooling system in the vehicle is
leak. If you run the engine, it for the proper coolant mixture.
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
could lose all coolant. That could With plain water or the wrong
coolant. This coolant is designed to
cause an engine fire, and you remain in the vehicle for 5 years or mixture, the engine could get too
could be burned. Get any leak 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever hot but you would not get the
fixed before you drive the vehicle. occurs first. overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others
The following explains the cooling could be burned. Use a 50/
system and how to check and add 50 mixture of clean, drinkable
{ Caution coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Using coolant other than see Engine Overheating on
DEX-COOL® can cause page 10-25.
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner. Any repairs
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-23
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL Caution (Continued)
The coolant surge tank is located in
coolant. If using this mixture,
mixture can freeze and crack the engine compartment on the
nothing else needs to be added.
engine cooling parts. The repairs passenger side of the vehicle. See
This mixture:
would not be covered by the Engine Compartment Overview on
. Gives freezing protection down vehicle warranty. Use only the page 10-6.
to −37°C (−34°F), outside proper mixture of engine coolant The vehicle must be on a level
temperature. for the cooling system. See surface when checking the coolant
. Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and level.
129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11-12. Check to see if coolant is visible in
temperature.
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
. Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by inside the coolant surge tank is
corrosion. putting it in the trash, or by pouring boiling, wait until it cools down. The
. Will not damage aluminum parts. it on the ground, or into sewers, coolant level should be at or above
streams, or bodies of water. Have the FULL COLD mark. If it is not,
. Helps keep the proper engine the coolant changed by an there may be a leak in the cooling
temperature. authorized service center, familiar system.
with legal requirements regarding If coolant is visible but the coolant
{ Caution used coolant disposal. This will help level is not at or above the FULL
protect the environment and your COLD mark, see “How to Add
If improper coolant mixture, health. Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank
inhibitors, or additives are used in
for Gasoline Engines,” following.
the vehicle cooling system, the
engine could overheat and be
damaged. Too much water in the
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-24 Vehicle Care
{ Warning Warning (Continued)

You can be burned if you spill the cap when the cooling system,
coolant on hot engine parts. including the surge tank pressure
Coolant contains ethylene glycol cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
and it will burn if the engine parts system and surge tank pressure
are hot enough. Do not spill cap to cool.
coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge
tank, add coolant.
5.3L V8 Shown, 4.3L V6, 6.0L V8,

{ Caution
and 6.2L V8 Similar This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
How to Add Coolant to the follow this procedure could cause
Coolant Surge Tank for the engine to overheat and be
Gasoline Engines severely damaged. Light-Duty Heavy-Duty
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, Coolant Surge Coolant Surge
see “Cooling System” in the Tank Tank
Duramax diesel supplement for the Pressure Cap Pressure Cap
proper coolant fill procedure. { Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-25
1. Remove the coolant surge tank mixture to the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling until the level reaches the FULL { Caution
system, including the coolant COLD mark.
surge tank pressure cap and Running the engine without
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. coolant may cause damage or a
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. 6. Verify coolant level after the fire. Vehicle damage would not be
engine is shut off and the covered by the vehicle warranty.
Turn the pressure cap slowly coolant is cold. If necessary,
counterclockwise about one full repeat coolant fill procedure
turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for The vehicle has several indicators
Steps 1–6. to warn of engine overheating.
that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
{ Caution There is a coolant temperature
gauge in the vehicle's instrument
slowly, and remove it. If the pressure cap is not tightly cluster. See Engine Coolant
installed, coolant loss and Temperature Gauge on page 5-16.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture to the FULL possible engine damage may In addition, there are ENGINE
COLD mark. occur. Be sure the cap is properly OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
and tightly secured. ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
4. With the coolant surge tank ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS
pressure cap off, start the REDUCED messages in the Driver
engine and let it run until the Engine Overheating Information Center (DIC). See
engine coolant temperature Engine Cooling System Messages
gauge indicates approximately If the vehicle has the Duramax
diesel engine, see the Duramax on page 5-37 and Engine Power
90°C (195°F). Messages on page 5-39.
diesel supplement.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-26 Vehicle Care
If the decision is made not to lift the If there is an engine overheat

hood when this warning appears, Warning (Continued) warning, but no steam is seen or
get service help right away. See heard, the problem may not be too
Roadside Assistance Program on from the engine if you see or hear serious. Sometimes the engine can
page 13-5. steam coming from it. Just turn it get a little too hot when the vehicle:
off and get everyone away from
If the decision is made to lift the the vehicle until it cools down.
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
hood, make sure the vehicle is Wait until there is no sign of . Stops after high-speed driving.
parked on a level surface. steam or coolant before you open . Idles for long periods in traffic.
4.3L V6, 5.3L V8, and 6.2L the hood.
V8 Engines
. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing
If you keep driving when the on page 9-76.
Check to see if the engine cooling engine is overheated, the liquids
fans are running. If the engine is in it can catch fire. You or others If the ENGINE OVERHEATED
overheating, the fans should be could be badly burned. Stop the STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE
running. If they are not, do not engine if it overheats, and get out OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
continue to run the engine and have message appears with no sign of
of the vehicle until the engine
the vehicle serviced. steam, try this for a minute or so:
is cool.
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
If Steam is Coming from the
Engine Compartment If No Steam is Coming from 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
the Engine Compartment temperature and to the highest
{ Warning The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
ENGINE or the ENGINE
Steam from an overheated engine 3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
can burn you badly, even if you the road, shift to P (Park) or
message, along with a low coolant
just open the hood. Stay away condition, can indicate a serious N (Neutral) and let the
(Continued) problem. engine idle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-27
If the temperature overheat gauge is If there is no sign of steam, idle the

no longer in the overheat zone or an engine for five minutes while { Caution
overheat warning no longer parked. If the warning is still
displays, the vehicle can be driven. displayed, turn off the engine until it After driving in the overheated
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly cools down. engine protection operating
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe mode, the engine oil will be
vehicle distance from the vehicle in Overheated Engine severely degraded. Any repairs
front. If the warning does not come performed before the engine is
back on, continue to drive normally
Protection cool may cause engine damage.
and have the cooling system Operating Mode Allow the engine to cool before
checked for proper fill and function. If an overheated engine condition attempting any repair. Repair the
If the warning continues, pull over, exists and the ENGINE POWER IS cause of coolant loss, change the
stop, and park the vehicle REDUCED message displays, an oil, and reset the oil life system.
right away. overheat protection mode which See Engine Oil on page 10-11.
alternates firing groups of cylinders
If there is still no sign of steam and helps to prevent engine damage. In
the vehicle is equipped with an this mode, a loss in power and Engine Fan
engine driven cooling fan, push engine performance will be noticed. If the vehicle has a clutched engine
down the accelerator until the This operating mode allows the cooling fan, when the clutch is
engine speed is about twice as fast vehicle to be driven to a safe place engaged, the fan spins faster to
as normal idle speed for at least in an emergency. Driving extended provide more air to cool the engine.
five minutes while the vehicle is distances and/or towing a trailer in In most everyday driving conditions,
parked. If the warning is still there, the overheat protection mode the fan is spinning slower and the
turn off the engine and get everyone should be avoided. clutch is not fully engaged. This
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
improves fuel economy and reduces
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: outside temperatures, the fan speed
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-28 Vehicle Care
increases as the clutch more fully fans will change to low speed when When to Check Power Steering
engages, so an increase in fan additional cooling is no longer Fluid
noise may be heard. This is normal required.
and should not be mistaken as the It is not necessary to regularly
The electric engine cooling fans check power steering fluid unless
transmission slipping or making may run after the engine has been
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling there is a leak suspected in the
turned. off. This is normal and no system or an unusual noise is
system functioning properly. The fan service is required.
will slow down when additional heard. A fluid loss in this system
cooling is not required and the could indicate a problem. Have the
clutch disengages. Power Steering Fluid system inspected and repaired.
This fan noise may also be heard
(1500 Series) Wait for the power steering system
when starting the engine. It will go The vehicle has electric power to cool, with the engine off, before
away as the fan clutch partially steering and does not use power checking the fluid.
disengages. steering fluid. How to Check Power Steering
If the vehicle has electric cooling Fluid
fans, the fans may be heard Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
spinning at low speed during most (2500/3500 Series)
everyday driving. The fans may turn 1. Turn the key off and let the
off if no cooling is required. Under engine compartment cool down.
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
high outside temperatures, reservoir clean.
or operation of the air conditioning
system, the fans may change to 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
high speed and an increase in fan dipstick with a clean rag.
noise may be heard. This is normal See Engine Compartment Overview 4. Replace the cap and completely
and indicates that the cooling on page 10-6 for reservoir location. tighten it.
system is functioning properly. The
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-29
5. Remove the cap again and look Washer Fluid

at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the
What to Use
ADD and FULL marks. If necessary, When windshield washer fluid needs
add only enough fluid to bring the to be added, be sure to read the
level up to the hashed area between manufacturer's instructions before
the ADD and FULL marks. use. Use a fluid that has sufficient Open the cap with the washer
protection against freezing in an symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
What to Use area where the temperature may fall the tank is full. See Engine
To determine what kind of fluid to below freezing. Compartment Overview on
use, see Recommended Fluids and page 10-6 for reservoir location.
Lubricants on page 11-12. Always
Adding Washer Fluid
use the proper fluid. The vehicle has a low washer fluid { Caution
message on the DIC that comes on
{ Caution when the washer fluid is low. The
message is displayed for
. Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
Use of the incorrect fluid may 15 seconds at the start of each washer. It can damage the
damage the vehicle and the ignition cycle. When the WASHER windshield washer system
damages may not be covered by FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message and paint.
the vehicle warranty. Always use displays, washer fluid will need to . Do not mix water with
the correct fluid listed in be added to the windshield washer ready-to-use washer fluid.
Recommended Fluids and fluid reservoir. Water can cause the solution
Lubricants on page 11-12. to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-30 Vehicle Care
proper sequence to torque

Caution (Continued) { Warning specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12-2.
. When using concentrated The brake wear warning sound
washer fluid, follow the means that soon the brakes will Brake linings should always be
manufacturer instructions for not work well. That could lead to replaced as complete axle sets.
adding water. a crash. When the brake wear Brake Pedal Travel
. Fill the washer fluid tank only warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced. See your dealer if the brake pedal
three-quarters full when it is
does not return to normal height,
very cold. This allows for fluid
or if there is a rapid increase in
expansion if freezing occurs,
pedal travel. This could be a sign
which could damage the tank
if it is completely full. { Caution that brake service might be
required.
Continuing to drive with worn-out
Brake Adjustment
Brakes brake pads could result in costly
brake repair. Every time the brakes are applied,
This vehicle has front and rear disc with or without the vehicle moving,
brakes. the brakes adjust for wear.
Some driving conditions or climates
Disc brake pads have built-in wear can cause a brake squeal when the
indicators that make a high-pitched Replacing Brake System Parts
brakes are first applied or lightly
warning sound when the brake pads applied. This does not mean The braking system on a vehicle is
are worn and new pads are needed. something is wrong with the brakes. complex. Its many parts have to be
The sound can come and go or be of top quality and work well together
heard all the time the vehicle is Properly torqued wheel nuts are if the vehicle is to have really good
moving, except when applying the necessary to help prevent brake braking. The vehicle was designed
brake pedal firmly. pulsation. When tires are rotated, and tested with top-quality brake
inspect brake pads for wear and parts. When parts of the braking
evenly tightenInfwheel
or
mat
i onuts
onPr dedby:in the
vi
system are replaced, be sure to get
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-31
new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the
If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir { Warning
not work properly. For example, might go down:
installing disc brake pads that are If too much brake fluid is added, it
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn,
wrong for the vehicle, can change because of normal brake lining
the balance between the front and if the engine is hot enough. You
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and
rear brakes — for the worse. The installed, the fluid level goes
braking performance expected can the vehicle could be damaged.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are . A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic
installed. hydraulic system can also cause system. See “Checking Brake
a low fluid level. Have the brake Fluid” in this section.
Brake Fluid hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well. When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
Do not top off the brake fluid. on. See Brake System Warning
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Light on page 5-24.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
when new brake linings are to determine when to check the
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, brake fluid. See Maintenance
The brake master cylinder reservoir Schedule on page 11-3.
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See as necessary, only when work is
Engine Compartment Overview on done on the brake hydraulic system. Checking Brake Fluid
page 10-6 for the location of the Check brake fluid by looking at the
reservoir. brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
page 10-6.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-32 Vehicle Care
Always clean the brake fluid

reservoir cap and the area around Caution (Continued)
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the be replaced. Do not let
reservoir. someone put in the wrong
kind of fluid.
{ Warning . If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
With the wrong kind of fluid in the the paint finish can be
brake hydraulic system, the damaged. Be careful not to
brakes might not work well. This spill brake fluid on the
could cause a crash. Always use vehicle. If you do, wash it off
the proper brake fluid. immediately.
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have the brake
hydraulic system checked to see if Battery
there is a leak.
{ Caution Refer to the replacement number
After work is done on the brake shown on the original battery label
hydraulic system, make sure the . Using the wrong fluid can when a new battery is needed. See
level is above MIN but not over the badly damage brake Engine Compartment Overview on
MAX mark. hydraulic system parts. For page 10-6 for battery location.
example, just a few drops of
What to Add mineral-based oil, such as
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can damage
Recommended Fluids and brake hydraulic system parts
Lubricants on page 11-12. so badly that they will have to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi (Continued)
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-33
Extended Storage: Remove the To get an accurate reading, the

{ Warning black, negative (−) cable from the vehicle should be on a level
battery or use a battery trickle surface.
Battery posts, terminals, and charger.
related accessories contain lead If the level is below the bottom of
and lead compounds, chemicals the fill plug (1) hole, located on the
Four-Wheel Drive transfer case, some lubricant will
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive Transfer Case need to be added. Add enough
harm. Wash hands after handling. lubricant to raise the level to the
When to Check Lubricant bottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Use
Refer to Maintenance Schedule on care not to overtighten the plug.
Vehicle Storage page 11-3 to determine when to When to Change Lubricant
check the lubricant.
{ Warning Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3 to determine how often to
Batteries have acid that can burn change the lubricant.
you and gas that can explode. What to Use
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on Refer to Recommended Fluids and
page 10-91 for tips on working Lubricants on page 11-12 to
around a battery without determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the

black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down. 1. Fill Plug
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Drain Plug
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-34 Vehicle Care
Front Axle
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check front axle fluid unless a leak
is suspected, or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and
repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the 1500 Series All Except 1500 Series
vehicle should be on a level
surface. 1. Fill Plug 1. Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug 2. Drain Plug
. When the differential is cold, add
enough lubricant to raise the
level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
(1/8 in) below the fill
plug (1) hole.
. When the differential is at
operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of the fill
plug (1) hole.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-35
What to Use out along the axle tubes and has

Refer to Recommended Fluids and not drained back to the sump area.
Lubricants on page 11-12 to Therefore, a reading taken
determine what kind of lubricant five minutes after the vehicle has
to use. been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or
Rear Axle two. The rear axle assembly must
When to Check Lubricant be supported on a flat, level surface
to get a true reading.
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is How to Check Lubricant
suspected or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a All Other Series and Engines
problem. Have it inspected and To get an accurate reading, the
repaired. vehicle should be on a level
All axle assemblies are filled by surface.
volume of fluid during production. . For all 4.3L and 5.3L 1500
They are not filled to reach a certain Series applications, the proper
level. When checking the fluid level level is 1.0 mm to 19.0 mm
on any axle, variations in the (0.04 in to 0.7 in) below the
readings can be caused by factory bottom of the fill hole, located on
fill differences between the minimum the rear axle. Add only enough
and the maximum fluid volume. fluid to reach the proper level.
Also, if a vehicle has just been 2500HD with 6.0L . For 6.2L 1500 Series
driven before checking the fluid
applications, the proper level is
level, it may appear lower than
from 15 mm to 40 mm (0.6 in to
normal because fluid has traveled I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1.6 in) below the bottom of the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-36 Vehicle Care
fill plug hole, located on the rear Noise Control System 2. The use of the vehicle after such
axle. Add only enough fluid to device or element of design has
reach the proper level. The following information relates to been removed or rendered
compliance with federal noise inoperative by any person.
. For all 6.0L 2500HD Series emission standards for vehicles with
applications, the proper level is a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Among those acts presumed to
from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in) (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg constitute tampering are the acts
below the bottom of the fill plug (10,000 lb). The noise control listed below.
hole, located on the rear axle. system warranty is given in your
Add only enough fluid to reach Insulation:
warranty manual.
the proper level. Removal of the noise shields or any
These standards apply only to underhood insulation.
. For all 6.6L Duramax Diesel vehicles sold in the United States.
2500HD Series applications and Engine:
all 3500 Series applications, the Federal law prohibits the following
acts or the causing thereof: Removal or rendering engine speed
proper level is from 17 mm to
governor, if the vehicle has one,
21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below 1. The removal or rendering inoperative so as to allow engine
the bottom of the fill plug hole, inoperative by any person, other speed to exceed manufacturer
located on the rear axle. Add than for purposes of specifications.
only enough fluid to reach the maintenance, repair or
proper level. replacement, of any device or Fan and Drive:
element of design incorporated . Removal of fan clutch, if the
What to Use
into any new vehicle for the vehicle has one, or rendering
Refer to Recommended Fluids and purpose of noise control, prior to clutch inoperative.
Lubricants on page 11-12 to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
determine what kind of lubricant purchaser or while it is in use; or . Removal of the fan shroud, if the
to use. vehicle has one.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-37
Air Intake: 2. Apply both the parking brake Automatic Transmission

and the regular brake.
. Removal of the air cleaner Shift Lock Control
silencer. Do not use the accelerator Function Check
. Modification of the air cleaner. pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
Exhaust: starts. { Warning
. Removal of the muffler and/or 3. For automatic transmission When you are doing this
resonator. vehicles, try to start the engine inspection, the vehicle could
. Removal of the exhaust pipes in each gear. The vehicle should move suddenly. If the vehicle
and exhaust pipe clamps. start only in P (Park) or moves, you or others could be
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts injured.
in any other position, contact
Starter Switch Check your dealer for service.
1. Before starting this check, be
For manual transmission
{ Warning vehicles, put the shift lever in
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
When you are doing this Neutral, push the clutch pedal
parked on a level surface.
inspection, the vehicle could down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should 2. Apply the parking brake. Be
move suddenly. If the vehicle
start only when the clutch pedal ready to apply the regular brake
moves, you or others could be immediately if the vehicle begins
is pushed down all the way to
injured. to move.
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not 3. With the engine off, turn the
1. Before starting this check, be pushed all the way down, ignition on, but do not start the
sure there is enough room contact your dealer for service. engine. Without applying the
around the vehicle. regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-38 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)
normal effort. If the shift lever Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
Ignition Transmission { Warning parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Lock Check When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
While parked, and with the parking the vehicle could begin to move. required.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to You or others could be injured
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
position.
of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
. For automatic transmission inspected for wear or cracking.
vehicles, the ignition should turn roll. Be ready to apply the regular
to LOCK/OFF only when the brake at once should the vehicle Replacement blades come in
shift lever is in P (Park). begin to move. different types and are removed in
different ways. For proper
. For manual transmission windshield wiper blade length and
vehicles, the ignition should turn Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping type, see Maintenance
to LOCK/OFF only when you Replacement Parts on page 11-15.
press the key release button. your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
On all vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's
{ Caution
holding ability: With the engine Allowing the wiper arm to touch
Contact your dealer if service is running and the transmission in
required. the windshield when no wiper
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot blade is installed could damage
pressure from the regular brake
the windshield. Any damage that
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by theInfoparking brake only. (Continued)
r
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-39
2. Press the button (2) in the Headlamp Aiming

Caution (Continued) middle of the wiper arm
connector, and pull the wiper Headlamp aim has been preset and
occurs would not be covered by blade away from the arm should need no further adjustment.
your warranty. Do not allow the connector (1).
wiper arm to touch the windshield. If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
3. Remove the wiper blade. the headlamp aim may be affected.
If adjustment to the headlamps is
To replace the windshield wiper 4. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
necessary, see your dealer.
blade: blade replacement.
1. Pull the windshield wiper Glass Replacement
assembly away from the
windshield. If the windshield or front side glass
must be replaced, see your dealer
to determine the correct
replacement glass.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-40 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn Headlamp

For the proper type of replacement Signal, Sidemarker, and 1. Open the hood.
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Parking Lamps 2. Remove the headlamp bulb
page 10-43. assembly cover by turning it
For any bulb‐changing procedure counterclockwise.
not listed in this section, contact 3. Turn the bulb socket
your dealer. counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly
Halogen Bulbs and pull it straight out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector
{ Warning from the old bulb by releasing
the clip on the bulb socket.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you Turn Signal/Sidemarker/
drop or scratch the bulb. You or Parking Lamp
others could be injured. Be sure 1. Open the hood.
Driver Side
to read and follow the instructions
2. If replacing a bulb on the
on the bulb package. 1. Turn Signal/Sidemarker/ passenger side, remove the
Parking Lamp engine air cleaner.
2. Low-Beam Headlamp
3. Turn the bulb socket
3. High-Beam Headlamp counterclockwise to remove it
See your dealer for passenger side from the headlamp assembly
replacement. and pull it straight out.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: straight out of the bulb socket.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-41
Fog Lamps Taillamps (Chassis Cab Taillamps, Turn Signal,

To replace the front fog lamp bulb: Models) Stoplamps, and Back-Up
1. Locate the fog lamp under the Lamps
front bumper.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly by pressing the
connector release.
3. Remove the bulb from the
housing by squeezing the two
release tabs and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
1. Back-Up Lamp
2. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn 1. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp Signal Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs: 2. Back-Up Lamp
1. Remove the four screws. To replace one of these bulbs:
2. Lift the lens off the lamp 1. Open the tailgate.
assembly.
3. Turn the old bulb
counterclockwise and pull it
straightInout
f
ormat
i
from
onPr
ovi
the socket.
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-42 Vehicle Care
2. Remove the two rear lamp 4. Pull the rear lamp assembly 9. Push the rear lamp assembly
assembly screws. straight back to remove it from straight in until it is seated
the vehicle. against the vehicle.
3. Pull the rear lamp assembly
outboard away from the box side 5. Turn the bulb socket 10. Make sure the rear lamp
until the retainers release. There counterclockwise. assembly is flush with the
will be a noise when the 6. Pull the bulb straight out from box side.
retainers release. the socket. 11. Reinstall the two rear lamp
7. Replace the bulb, then insert the assembly screws.
bulb socket into the rear lamp
assembly and turn clockwise.
8. Verify the retainer ring is in the
proper position. If the retainer
ring is out of position, it will not
engage. Reset
Inf
ormat
i
the
onPr
ovi
retainer by
dedby:
pulling it forward with a tool.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-43
Center High-Mounted To replace one of these bulbs: Replacement Bulbs

Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Exterior Lamp Bulb
Cargo Lamp Number
Back-up Lamp 921 (W16W)
Back-up Lamp* 1156
Cargo Lamp 921 (W16W)
Center 921LL
High-Mounted
Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Fog Lamp PS24W
1. Remove the two screws and lift Front Turn Signal 7443 LL
off the lamp assembly. Lamp and
Parking Lamp
2. Turn the bulb socket
1. Cargo Lamp Bulbs counterclockwise and pull it High-Beam 9005 LL
2. Center High-Mounted straight out. Headlamp
Stoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb
3. Pull the bulb straight out from Low-Beam H11 LL
the socket. Headlamp
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-44 Vehicle Care
Exterior Lamp Bulb Electrical System headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
Number
remain off.
Stoplamp/Taillamp/ 7444 LL Electrical System
Turn Signal Lamp Overload Windshield Wipers
Stoplamp/Turn 1157 The vehicle has fuses to protect If the wiper motor overheats due to
Signal Lamp/ against an electrical system heavy snow or ice, the windshield
Taillamp* overload. Fuses also protect power wipers will stop until the motor cools
devices in the vehicle. and will then restart.
* Chassis Cab Models
Replace a bad fuse with a new one Although the circuit is protected
For replacement bulbs not listed of the identical size and rating. from electrical overload, overload
here, contact your dealer. due to heavy snow or ice may
If there is a problem on the road and cause wiper linkage damage.
a fuse needs to be replaced, there Always clear ice and heavy snow
are some spare fuses and a fuse from the windshield before using the
puller in the Instrument Panel Fuse windshield wipers.
Block. The same amperage fuse
can also be borrowed. Choose If the overload is caused by an
some feature of the vehicle that is electrical problem and not snow or
not needed to use and replace it as ice, be sure to get it fixed.
soon as possible.
Fuses
Headlamp Wiring
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
An electrical overload may cause protected from short circuits by
the lamps to go on and off, or in fuses. This greatly reduces the
some cases to remain off. Have the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-45
Look at the silver-colored band

inside the fuse. If the band is broken { Caution
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new Spilling liquid on any electrical
one of the identical size and rating. component on the vehicle may
damage it. Always keep the
Fuses of the same amperage can covers on any electrical
be temporarily borrowed from component.
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can. A fuse puller is available in the left
instrument panel fuse block.
Engine Compartment The vehicle may not be equipped
Fuse Block Lift the cover to access the fuse with all of the fuses, relays, and
block. features shown.
supplement.
The engine compartment fuse block
is in the engine compartment, on
the driver side of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-46 Vehicle Care
Micro Usage
J-Case
Fuses
1 Trailer Brake
2 Trailer Battery
J-Case Usage
Fuses
3 Antilock Brake
System Pump
4 Instrument Panel
BEC 1
5 Spare
6 4WD Trec
7 Spare
8 Instrument Panel
BEC 2
9 Spare
10 Rear Window
Defogger
11 Starter
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-47
J-Case Usage Micro Fuses Usage Micro Fuses Usage

Fuses (2 Pin) (2 Pin)
12 Cooling Fan 1 20 Electronic 33 Back-up Lamps
Suspension
13 Cooling Fan 2 34 Engine Control
Control Module
Module Ignition
Mini Fuses Usage 21 Fuel Pump Power
35 Air Conditioning
(2 Pin) Module
Compressor Clutch
14 Trailer Stop/Turn 22 Upfitter Switch 1
36 Heated Mirrors
Lamps, Left 23 Upfitter 2
37 Upfitter 1
15 Trailer Parking 24 Front Wiper
Lamps 38 Center
25 Antilock Brake High-Mounted
16 Trailer System Valves Stoplamp
Back-up Lamp
26 Upfitter SW 2 39 Miscellaneous
17 Trailer Stop/Turn Ignition
Lamps, Right 27 Upfitter SW 3
40 Transmission
28 Parking Lamps,
Ignition
Micro Fuses Usage Right
(2 Pin) 41 Fuel Pump 2
29 Parking
18 Fuel Pump Lamps, Left 42 Cooling Fan Clutch
19 Integrated Chassis 30 Upfitter 3 43 Engine

Control Module 31 Upfitter SW 4 44 Fuel Injectors
A, Odd
32 Upfitter 4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-48 Vehicle Care
Micro Fuses Usage Micro Fuses Usage Micro Usage

(2 Pin) (3 Pin) Relays
45 Fuel Injectors 56 Air Conditioning 64 Trailer Parking
B, Even Compressor/ Lamps
Battery Regulated
46 Oxygen Sensor B 65 Run/Crank
Voltage Control
47 Throttle Control 66 Upfitter 1
57 Air Conditioning
48 Horn Compressor 67 Fuel Pump 2
Module/ 68 Air Conditioning
49 Fog Lamp
Battery Pack
Control
50 Oxygen Sensor A
58 Transmission 69 Starter
51 Engine Control Control Module/
Module Engine Control
Module Mini Relays Usage
52 Interior Heater
59 Headlamps 70 Rear Window
53 Spare Defogger
54 Aeroshutter 71 Engine Control
Micro Usage
55 Front Washer Relays Module
60 Fuel Pump
Solid State Usage
61 Upfitter 2 Relay
62 Upfitter 3 72 Cooling Fan Clutch
63 Upfitter 4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-49
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block (Left)
The left instrument panel fuse block

access door is on the driver side
edge of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
block.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-50 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped Number Usage Number Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. 12 Accessory Power 26 Passive Entry
Number Usage Outlet 1/Cigarette Passive Start/Heater,
Lighter Ventilation, and Air
1 Accessory Power Conditioning
Outlet 2 13 Discrete Logic Ignition
Switch 27 Spare
2 SEO Retained
Accessory Power 14 Switch Backlighting 28 Spare
3 Universal Garage 17 Body Control 29 Park Enable/

Door Opener/Inside Module 1 Electrically Adjustable
Rearview Mirror Pedals
19 Spare
6 Body Control 30 SEO
20 Spare
Module 3 31 Accessory/Run Crank
22 Heater, Ventilation,
7 Body Control and Air Conditioning/ 32 Heated Steering
Module 5 Auxiliary Heater, Wheel
8 Driver Window Ventilation and Air
33 Spare
Switch/Mirror Switch Conditioning Ignition
34 Instrument Cluster
9 Spare 23 Instrument Cluster
Ignition/Sensing 36 Spare
10 Accessory Power Diagnostic Module 37 Spare
Outlet Retained Ignition
Accessory Power 40 Left Doors
24 Spare
11 Accessory Power 41 Driver Power Seat
Outlet Battery 25 Data Link Connector/
Driver
I
nfor
mat
ionPSeat
r
ovi Module
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-51
Number Usage Instrument Panel Fuse The right instrument panel fuse
block access door is on the
43 Left Front Heated/ Block (Right) passenger side edge of the
Cooled Seat instrument panel.
44 Right Front Heated/ Pull off the cover to access the fuse
Cooled Seats block.
45 Spare
49 Retained Accessory
Power/Accessory
50 Run/Crank
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-52 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Number Usage
1 Accessory Power
Outlet 3
2 Accessory Power
Outlet 4
7 Body Control
Module 4
8 Body Control
Module 8
9 Rear Seat
Entertainment
10 Cargo Lamp
15 Steering Wheel
Controls
18 Radio
19 Spare
20 Sunroof
23 Airbag/Info
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-53
Number Usage Number Usage Wheels and Tires

26 Export/Power Take 43 Front Blower
Off/SEO Battery 1 Tires
44 SEO
27 Obstacle Detection/ Every new GM vehicle has
45 Body Control
USB Ports high-quality tires made by a
Module 6
28 Body Control leading tire manufacturer. See
46 Body Control the warranty manual for
Module 2
Module 7 information regarding the tire
32 SEO Battery 2 warranty and where to get
47 Passenger Seat
35 AC Inverter
50 Retained Accessory
service. For additional
36 Amplifier Power/Accessory information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
37 Spare 51 Rear Sliding
Window Open
39 Rear Sliding Window { Warning
52 Rear Sliding Window
42 Right Door Window . Poorly maintained and
Close
Motor
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
There could be a blowout
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-54 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are
Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall
page 9-15. is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces
replace them. and weather conditions. Original
. Underinflated tires pose equipment tires designed to GM's
the same danger as . Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria
overloaded tires. The have been damaged by have a TPC specification code
resulting crash could impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original
cause serious injury. curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be
Check all tires frequently identified by the last two characters
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will
to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. be “MS.”
the dealer or an
Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
Consider installing winter tires on
checked when the tires the vehicle if frequent driving on
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is
are cold. replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires. adequate performance for most
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h may not offer the same level of
impact — such as when traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
hitting a pothole. Keep surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended See Winter Tires on page 10-55.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-55

. Use only radial ply tires of the
Winter Tires same size, load range, and Caution (Continued)
This vehicle was not originally speed rating as the original
equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires. occur when coming into contact
tires are designed for increased with road hazards like potholes,
Winter tires with the same speed
traction on snow and ice-covered or sharp edged objects, or when
rating as the original equipment tires
roads. Consider installing winter sliding into a curb. The warranty
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
tires on the vehicle if frequent does not cover this type of
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
driving on ice or snow covered damage. Keep tires set to the
tires with a lower speed rating are
roads is expected. See your dealer correct inflation pressure and
chosen, never exceed the tire's
for details regarding winter tire when possible, avoid contact with
maximum speed capability.
availability and proper tire selection. curbs, potholes, and other road
Also, see Buying New Tires on hazards.
page 10-73. Low-Profile Tires
With winter tires, there may be If the vehicle has P275/55R20,
decreased dry road traction, P285/50R20, or P285/45R22 All-Terrain Tires
increased road noise, and shorter size tires, they are classified as This vehicle may have all-terrain
tread life. After changing to winter low-profile tires. tires. These tires provide good
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle performance on most road surfaces,
handling and braking. { Caution weather conditions, and for off-road
driving. See Off-Road Driving on
If using winter tires:
Low-profile tires are more page 9-6.
. Use tires of the same brand and susceptible to damage from road
tread type on all four wheel The tread pattern on these tires may
hazards or curb impact than wear more quickly than other tires.
positions.
standard profile tires. Tire and/or Consider rotating the tires more
wheel assembly damage can frequently than at 12 000 km
(Continued) (7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-56 Vehicle Care
is noted when the tires are particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of
inspected. See Tire Inspection on aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four
page 10-69. and service description. See the digits of the TIN indicate the tire
“Tire Size” illustration later in this manufactured date. The first two
Tire Sidewall Labeling section for more detail. digits represent the week
Useful information about a tire is (2) TPC Spec (Tire (01-52) and the last two digits,
molded into the sidewall. The Performance Criteria the year. For example, the third
examples show a typical Specification): Original week of the year 2010 would
passenger and light truck tire equipment tires designed to have a four-digit DOT date
sidewall. GM's specific tire performance of 0310.
criteria have a TPC specification (4) Tire Identification Number
code molded onto the sidewall. (TIN): The letters and numbers
GM's TPC specifications meet or following the DOT code are the
exceed all federal safety Tire Identification Number (TIN).
guidelines. The TIN shows the
(3) DOT (Department of manufacturer and plant code,
Transportation): The tire size, and date the tire was
Department of Transportation manufactured. The TIN is
(DOT) code indicates that the molded onto both sides of the
tire is in compliance with the tire, although only one side may
U.S. Department of have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire Transportation Motor Vehicle (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
(1) Tire Size: The tire size code Safety Standards. of cord and number of plies in
is a combination of letters and the sidewall and under the tread.
numbers used to define a I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-57
(6) Uniform Tire Quality proper inflation pressure. See (2) TPC Spec (Tire
Grading (UTQG): Tire Full-Size Spare Tire on Performance Criteria
manufacturers are required to page 10-90. Specification): Original
grade tires based on three equipment tires designed to
performance factors: treadwear, GM's specific tire performance
traction, and temperature criteria have a TPC specification
resistance. For more code molded onto the sidewall.
information, see Uniform Tire GM's TPC specifications meet or
Quality Grading on page 10-75. exceed all federal safety
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation guidelines.
Load Limit: Maximum load that (3) Dual Tire Maximum Load:
can be carried and the Maximum load that can be
maximum pressure needed to carried and the maximum
support that load. For pressure needed to support that
information on recommended Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire load when used in a dual
tire pressure see Tire Pressure configuration. For information on
(1) Tire Size: The tire size code
on page 10-62 and Vehicle Load recommended tire pressure see
is a combination of letters and
Limits on page 9-15. Tire Pressure on page 10-62
numbers used to define a
(8) Temporary Use Only: Only and Vehicle Load Limits on
particular tire's width, height,
use a temporary spare tire until page 9-15.
aspect ratio, construction type,
the road tire is repaired and and service description. See the (4) DOT (Department of
replaced. This spare tire should “Tire Size” illustration later in this Transportation): The
not be driven on over 112 km/h section for more detail. Department of Transportation
(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) (DOT) code indicates that the
when pulling a trailer, with the I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: tire is in compliance with the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-58 Vehicle Care
U.S. Department of (6) Tire Ply Material : The type

Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
DOT Tire Date of (7) Single Tire Maximum
Manufacture: The last four Load: Maximum load that can
digits of the TIN indicate the tire be carried and the maximum Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
manufactured date. The first two pressure needed to support that
digits represent the week load when used as a single. For (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
(01-52) and the last two digits, information on recommended The United States version of a
the year. For example, the third tire pressure see Tire Pressure metric tire sizing system. The
week of the year 2010 would on page 10-62 and Vehicle Load letter P as the first character in
have a four-digit DOT date Limits on page 9-15. the tire size means a passenger
of 0310. vehicle tire engineered to
Tire Designations standards set by the U.S. Tire
(5) Tire Identification Number and Rim Association.
(TIN): The letters and numbers Tire Size
following the DOT code are the (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
The examples show a typical number indicates the tire section
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
passenger vehicle and light width in millimeters from
The TIN shows the
truck tire size. sidewall to sidewall.
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
manufactured. The TIN is number that indicates the tire
molded onto both sides of the height-to-width measurements.
tire, although only one side may For example, if the tire size
have the date of manufacture. aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: item C of the tire illustration, it
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-59
would mean that the tire's (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it

sidewall is 75 percent as high as would mean that the tire's
it is wide. sidewall is 75 percent as high as
(4) Construction Code: A letter it is wide.
code is used to indicate the type (4) Construction Code: A letter
of ply construction in the tire. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire code is used to indicate the type
The letter R means radial ply of ply construction in the tire.
construction; the letter D means (1) Light Truck (LT-Metric) The letter R means radial ply
diagonal or bias ply Tire: The United States version construction; the letter D means
construction; and the letter B of a metric tire sizing system. diagonal or bias ply
means belted-bias ply The letters LT as the first two construction; and the letter B
construction. characters in the tire size mean means belted-bias ply
a light truck tire engineered to construction.
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of standards set by the U.S. Tire
the wheel in inches. and Rim Association. (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
(6) Service Description: These the wheel in inches.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit
characters represent the load number indicates the tire section (6) Load Range: Load Range.
index and speed rating of the width in millimeters from (7) Service Description: The
tire. The load index represents sidewall to sidewall. service description indicates the
the load carrying capacity a tire load index and speed rating of a
is certified to carry. The speed (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire tire. If two numbers are given as
rating is the maximum speed a in the example, 120/116, then
tire is certified to carry a load. height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size this represents the load index for
aspect ratio is 75, as shown in single versus dual wheel usage
item 3 of the
I
nfor light
mat
ionPr
ovitruck
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-60 Vehicle Care
(single/dual). The speed rating is Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
the maximum speed a tire is cords between the plies and the and coolant, but without
certified to carry a load. tread. Cords may be made from passengers and cargo.
steel or other reinforcing DOT Markings: A code molded
Tire Terminology and materials. into the sidewall of a tire
Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch of the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
Accessory Weight: The identify the tire manufacturer,
combined weight of optional the tread.
production plant, brand, and
accessories. Some examples of Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production.
optional accessories are amount of air pressure in a tire,
automatic transmission, power measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
windows, power seats, and air or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
conditioning. before a tire has built up heat on page 9-15.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
of a tire's height to its width. on page 10-62. Rating for the front axle. See
Curb Weight: The weight of a Vehicle Load Limits on
motor vehicle with standard and page 9-15.
optional equipment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
including
ovi
dedby:
the
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-61
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
page 9-15. pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
The side of an asymmetrical tire Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended Inflation
unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. Limits on page 9-15. Pressure on page 10-62 and
Occupant Distribution : Vehicle Load Limits on
Load Index: An assigned page 9-15.
number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at
Maximum Inflation Pressure: 90 degrees to the centerline of
The maximum air pressure to outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
molded onto the sidewall. white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer,
I
nfor
mat
i
brand,
onPr
ovi
dedby:
and/or are seated.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-62 Vehicle Care
Sidewall: The portion of a tire tire's traction, temperature, and recommended inflation pressure.
between the tread and the bead. treadwear. Ratings are See “Tire and Loading
Speed Rating: An determined by tire Information Label” under Vehicle
alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using Load Limits on page 9-15.
a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the Tire Pressure
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tires need the correct amount of
Tire Quality Grading on air pressure to operate
Traction: The friction between page 10-75.
the tire and the road surface. effectively.
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
Tread: The portion of a tire that
number of designated seating { Caution
positions multiplied by
comes into contact with 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated Neither tire underinflation nor
the road. cargo load. See Vehicle Load overinflation is good.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 9-15. Underinflated tires, or tires
bands, sometimes called wear that do not have enough air,
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in:
bars, that show across the tread Tire: Load on an individual tire
of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/ due to curb weight, accessory . Tire overloading and
16 in) of tread remains. See weight, occupant weight, and overheating which could
When It Is Time for New Tires cargo weight. lead to a blowout.
on page 10-72. . Premature or
Vehicle Placard: A label
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality permanently attached to a irregular wear.
Grading Standards): A tire vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling.
information system that provides capacity weight and the original
consumers with ratings for a I
nfor
mati
onPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
equipment tire size and
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-63
For additional information Check the tire inflation pressure

Caution (Continued) regarding how much weight the when the tires are cold, meaning
. Reduced fuel economy. vehicle can carry, and an the vehicle has not been driven
example of the Tire and Loading for at least three hours or no
Overinflated tires, or tires that Information label, see Vehicle more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
have too much air, can Load Limits on page 9-15. How
result in: Remove the valve cap from the
the vehicle is loaded affects tire valve stem. Press the tire
. Unusual wear. vehicle handling and ride gauge firmly onto the valve to
comfort. Never load the vehicle get a pressure measurement.
. Poor handling.
with more weight than it was If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Rough ride. designed to carry. matches the recommended
. Needless damage from When to Check pressure on the Tire and
road hazards. Loading Information label, no
Check the tires once a month
further adjustment is necessary.
or more.
The Tire and Loading If the inflation pressure is low,
Information label on the vehicle Do not forget the spare tire, add air until the recommended
indicates the original equipment if the vehicle has one. See pressure is reached. If the
tires and the correct cold tire Full-Size Spare Tire on inflation pressure is high, press
inflation pressures. The page 10-90 for additional on the metal stem in the center
recommended pressure is the information. of the tire valve to release air.
minimum air pressure needed to How to Check Re-check the tire pressure with
support the vehicle's maximum the tire gauge.
load carrying capacity. Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks
Inf
ormat
determined byionlooking
Pr
ovi
dedby:
at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-64 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure for Vehicles with P275/55R20 or P285/ Each tire, including the spare (if
50R20 size tires require inflation provided), should be checked
High-Speed Operation pressure adjustment when driving monthly when cold and inflated to
the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h the inflation pressure recommended
{ Warning (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire by the vehicle manufacturer on the
inflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi) vehicle placard or tire inflation
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h above the recommended cold tire pressure label. (If your vehicle has
(100 mph) or higher, puts an pressure shown on the Tire and tires of a different size than the size
additional strain on tires. Loading Information label. indicated on the vehicle placard or
Sustained high-speed driving tire inflation pressure label, you
Return the tires to the
causes excessive heat buildup should determine the proper tire
recommended cold tire inflation
and can cause sudden tire failure. inflation pressure for those tires.)
pressure when high-speed driving
You could have a crash and you has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits As an added safety feature, your
or others could be killed. Some on page 9-15 and Tire Pressure on vehicle has been equipped with a
high-speed rated tires require page 10-62. tire pressure monitoring system
inflation pressure adjustment for (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
high-speed operation. When Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
speed limits and road conditions of your tires is significantly
are such that a vehicle can be System under-inflated.
driven at high speeds, make sure The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Accordingly, when the low tire
the tires are rated for high-speed (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
pressure telltale illuminates, you
operation, in excellent condition, technology to check tire pressure
should stop and check your tires as
and set to the correct cold tire levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
soon as possible, and inflate them
inflation pressure for the the air pressure in your tires and
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
vehicle load. transmit tire pressure readings to a
significantly under-inflated tire
receiver located in the vehicle.
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-65
tread life, and may affect the When the malfunction indicator is condition exists. TPMS sensors are
vehicle's handling and stopping illuminated, the system may not be mounted onto each tire and wheel
ability. able to detect or signal low tire assembly, excluding the spare tire
Please note that the TPMS is not a pressure as intended. TPMS and wheel assembly. The TPMS
substitute for proper tire malfunctions may occur for a variety sensors monitor the air pressure in
maintenance, and it is the driver's of reasons, including the installation the tires and transmit the tire
responsibility to maintain correct tire of replacement or alternate tires or pressure readings to a receiver
pressure, even if under-inflation has wheels on the vehicle that prevent located in the vehicle.
not reached the level to trigger the TPMS from functioning properly.
illumination of the TPMS low tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
pressure telltale. telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Your vehicle has also been ensure that the replacement or
equipped with a TPMS malfunction alternate tires and wheels allow the
indicator to indicate when the TPMS to continue to function
system is not operating properly. properly. When a low tire pressure condition
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
See Tire Pressure Monitor is detected, the TPMS illuminates
combined with the low tire pressure
Operation on page 10-65. the low tire pressure warning light
telltale. When the system detects a
located on the instrument cluster.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Radio Frequency Statement on
If the warning light comes on, stop
approximately one minute and then page 13-12.
as soon as possible and inflate the
remain continuously illuminated.
tires to the recommended pressure
This sequence will continue upon Tire Pressure Monitor shown on the Tire and Loading
subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
Operation Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-15.
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
driver when a low tire pressure
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-66 Vehicle Care
A message to check the pressure in A Tire and Loading Information label

a specific tire displays in the Driver shows the size of the original Caution (Continued)
Information Center (DIC). The low equipment tires and the correct
tire pressure warning light and the inflation pressure for the tires when the GM approved tire sealant
DIC warning message come on at they are cold. See Vehicle Load available through your dealer or
each ignition cycle until the tires are Limits on page 9-15, for an example included in the vehicle.
inflated to the correct inflation of the Tire and Loading Information
pressure. If the vehicle has DIC label and its location. Also see Tire TPMS Malfunction Light and
buttons, tire pressure levels can be Pressure on page 10-62. Message
viewed. For additional information The TPMS can warn about a low
and details about the DIC operation The TPMS will not function properly
tire pressure condition but it does if one or more of the TPMS sensors
and displays, see Driver Information not replace normal tire
Center (DIC) (Base Level) on are missing or inoperable. When the
maintenance. See Tire Inspection system detects a malfunction, the
page 5-30 or Driver Information on page 10-69, Tire Rotation on
Center (DIC) (Uplevel) on page 5-32 low tire pressure warning light
page 10-69 and Tires on flashes for about one minute and
and Tire Messages on page 5-43. page 10-53. then stays on for the remainder of
The low tire pressure warning light the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
{ Caution message also displays. The
malfunction light and DIC warning
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This Tire sealant materials are not all message come on at each ignition
could be an early indicator that the the same. A non-approved tire cycle until the problem is corrected.
air pressure is getting low and sealant could damage the TPMS Some of the conditions that can
needs to be inflated to the proper sensors. TPMS sensor damage cause these to come on are:
pressure. caused by using an incorrect tire . One of the road tires has been
sealant is not covered by the
replaced with the spare tire. The
vehicle warranty. Always use only spare tire does not have a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi (Continued)
dedby: TPMS sensor. The malfunction
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-67
light and the DIC message

. Replacement tires or wheels do should be performed after replacing
should go off after the road tire not match the original equipment a spare tire with a road tire
is replaced and the sensor tires or wheels. Tires and wheels containing the TPMS sensor. The
matching process is performed other than those recommended malfunction light and the DIC
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor could prevent the TPMS from message should go off at the next
Matching Process" later in this functioning properly. See Buying ignition cycle. The sensors are
section. New Tires on page 10-73. matched to the tire/wheel positions,
. The TPMS sensor matching
. Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
message should go off after purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS
If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool can also be purchased.
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
sensor matching process. See See Tire Pressure Monitor
low tire condition. See your dealer Sensor Activation Tool at
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
Process" later in this section. www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or
light and DIC message come on call 1-800-GM TOOLS
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stay on. (1-800-468-6657).
missing or damaged. The TPMS Sensor Matching
malfunction light and the DIC There are two minutes to match the
message should go off when the
Process first tire/wheel position, and
TPMS sensors are installed and Each TPMS sensor has a unique five minutes overall to match all four
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification tire/wheel positions. If it takes
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new longer, the matching process stops
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the and must be restarted.
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the TPMS sensor matching process
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-68 Vehicle Care
The TPMS sensor matching 5. If the vehicle has an uplevel 8. Proceed to the passenger side
process is: DIC, press and hold the V (Set/ front tire, and repeat the
1. Set the parking brake. Reset) button located in the procedure in Step 7.
center of the DIC controls. 9. Proceed to the passenger side
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off. If the vehicle has a base level rear tire, and repeat the
DIC, press and hold the trip procedure in Step 7.
3. Uplevel DIC Only: Make sure the
odometer reset stem for about 10. Proceed to the driver side rear
Tire Pressure info page option is five seconds. A message asking
turned on. The info pages on the tire, and repeat the procedure
if the process should begin in Step 7. The horn sounds two
DIC can be turned on and off
should appear. Select yes and times to indicate the sensor
through the Settings menu. See
press the trip odometer reset identification code has been
Driver Information Center (DIC) stem to confirm the selection.
(Base Level) on page 5-30 or matched to the driver side rear
Driver Information Center (DIC) The horn sounds twice to signal tire, and the TPMS sensor
(Uplevel) on page 5-32. the receiver is in relearn mode matching process is no longer
and the TIRE LEARNING active. The TIRE LEARNING
4. If the vehicle has an uplevel ACTIVE message displays on ACTIVE message on the DIC
DIC, use the DIC controls on the the DIC screen. display screen goes off.
right side of the steering wheel
to scroll to the Tire Pressure 6. Start with the driver side 11. Turn the ignition switch to
screen under the DIC info page. front tire. LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle has a base level 7. Place the relearn tool against 12. Set all four tires to the
DIC, use the trip odometer reset the tire sidewall, near the valve recommended air pressure
stem to scroll to the Tire stem. Then press the button to level as indicated on the Tire
Pressure screen. activate the TPMS sensor. and Loading Information label.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matchedI
nfor
mat
i
to othis
onPr vi
tire and
dedby:
wheel position.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-69
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut, Anytime unusual wear is
or other damage that cannot noticed, rotate the tires as soon
We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of as possible, check for proper tire
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the inflation pressure, and check for
vehicle has one, be inspected damage. damaged tires or wheels. If the
for signs of wear or damage at unusual wear continues after the
least once a month. Tire Rotation rotation, check the wheel
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every alignment. See When It Is Time
. The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See for New Tires on page 10-72
more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on and Wheel Replacement on
can be seen. page 11-3. page 10-77.
. There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a If your vehicle has dual rear
showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The wheels, also see Dual Tire
rubber. first rotation is the most Rotation on page 10-71.
important.
. The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
. The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-70 Vehicle Care
Use this rotation pattern when Use this rotation pattern when Use this rotation pattern when
rotating the tires if the vehicle rotating the tires if the vehicle rotating the tires if the vehicle
has single rear wheels. has dual rear wheels (except has polished forged aluminum
polished forged aluminum dual rear wheels. The spare
wheels). wheel can be used in any
Vehicles with polished forged position and can be rotated with
aluminum dual wheels have the rear inner wheels.
three unique wheels; a front, a When installing dual wheels,
rear outer and a rear inner. check that the vent holes in the
These wheels cannot be rotated inner and outer wheels on each
to another position, however, side are lined up.
they can be rotated from left to
right to the same position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-71
Adjust the front and rear tires to “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
the recommended inflation Warning (Continued) Tools” under Tire Changing on
pressure on the Tire and towel can be used; however, use page 10-80.
Loading Information label after a scraper or wire brush later to
the tires have been rotated. See remove all rust or dirt. Dual Tire Rotation
Tire Pressure on page 10-62 When the vehicle is new,
and Vehicle Load Limits on or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,
page 9-15. Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing or wheel nut is replaced, check the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel nut torque after
grease after a wheel change or 160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,
properly tightened. See “Wheel tire rotation to prevent corrosion 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. For
Nut Torque” under Capacities or rust build-up. Do not get proper torque and wheel nut
and Specifications on grease on the flat wheel tightening information, see
page 12-2. mounting surface or on the “Removing the Flat Tire and
wheel nuts or bolts. Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire
{ Warning Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
Changing on page 10-80.
System (TPMS), if the vehicle The outer tire on a dual wheel setup
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
has one. See Tire Pressure generally wears faster than the
parts to which it is fastened, can
Monitor Operation on inner tire. Tires last longer and wear
make wheel nuts become loose more evenly if they are rotated. See
after time. The wheel could come page 10-65. Tire Inspection on page 10-69 and
off and cause an accident. When Check that the spare tire, if the Tire Rotation on page 10-69. Also
changing a wheel, remove any see Maintenance Schedule on
vehicle has one, is stored
rust or dirt from places where the page 11-3.
properly. Push, pull, and then try
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionProvi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-72 Vehicle Care
maintenance affect how fast aging

{ Warning takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
If the vehicle is operated with a equipped, be replaced after six
tire that is underinflated, the tire years, regardless of tread wear. The
can overheat. An overheated tire tire manufacture date is the last four
can lose air suddenly or catch digits of the DOT Tire Identification
fire. You or others could be Number (TIN) which is molded into
injured. Properly inflate all tires, one side of the tire sidewall. The
including the spare. first two digits represent the week
(01-52) and the last two digits, the
See Tire Pressure on page 10-62, year. For example, the third week of
for information on proper tire the year 2010 would have a
Treadwear indicators are one way to four-digit DOT date of 0310.
inflation. tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when Vehicle Storage
When It Is Time for New the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
Tires age when stored normally
Tires or less of tread remaining. Some
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
commercial truck tires may not have
Factors, such as maintenance, a vehicle that will be stored for at
treadwear indicators. See Tire
temperatures, driving speeds, least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Inspection on page 10-69 and Tire
vehicle loading, and road conditions area away from direct sunlight to
Rotation on page 10-69 for
affect the wear rate of the tires. slow aging. This area should be free
additional information.
of grease, gasoline, or other
The rubber in tires ages over time. substances that can deteriorate
This also applies to the spare tire, rubber.
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
Parking for an extended period can
never used. Multiple factors
cause flat spots on the tires that
including temperatures, loading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: may result in vibrations while
conditions, and inflation pressure
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-73
driving. When storing a vehicle for number is molded onto the tire's axle set of worn tires, place the
at least a month, remove the tires or sidewall near the tire size. If the new tires on the rear axle (two
raise the vehicle to reduce the tires have an all-season tread for single rear wheels, four for
weight from the tires. design, the TPC Spec number dual rear wheels).
will be followed by MS for mud
Buying New Tires and snow. See Tire Sidewall { Warning
GM has developed and matched Labeling on page 10-56 for
specific tires for the vehicle. The additional information. Tires could explode during
original equipment tires installed improper service. Attempting
GM recommends replacing worn to mount or dismount a tire
were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four (six
Motors Tire Performance Criteria could cause injury or death.
for dual rear wheels). Uniform Only your dealer or authorized
Specification (TPC Spec) tread depth on all tires will help
system rating. When tire service center should
to maintain the performance of mount or dismount the tires.
replacement tires are needed, the vehicle. Braking and
GM strongly recommends handling performance may be
buying tires with the same TPC adversely affected if all the tires
Spec rating. are not replaced at the same { Warning
GM's exclusive TPC Spec time. If proper rotation and
Mixing tires of different sizes,
system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
brands, or types may cause
critical specifications that impact all four tires (six for dual rear
loss of control of the vehicle,
the overall performance of the wheels) should wear out at
resulting in a crash or other
vehicle, including brake system about the same time. See Tire
performance, ride and handling, Rotation on page 10-69 for (Continued)
traction control, and tire information on proper tire
pressure monitoring rotation. However,
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
if it is
dedby:
performance. GM's TPC Spec necessary to replace only one
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-74 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire

Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) pressure monitoring system
vehicle damage. Use the after many miles of driving. could give an inaccurate
correct size, brand, and type A tire and/or wheel could fail low-pressure warning if non-TPC
of tires on all wheels. suddenly and cause a crash. Spec rated tires are installed.
Use only radial-ply tires with See Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a System on page 10-64.
different size spare than the the wheels on the vehicle.
road tires originally installed The Tire and Loading
on the vehicle. When new, the Winter tires with the same speed Information label indicates the
vehicle included a spare tire rating as the original equipment original equipment tires on the
and wheel assembly with a tires may not be available for H, vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
similar overall diameter as the V, W, Y and ZR speed rated on page 9-15 for the label
road tires and wheels, so it is tires. Never exceed the winter location and more information
all right to drive on it. The tires’ maximum speed capability about the Tire and Loading
spare tire was developed for when using winter tires with a Information label.
use on this vehicle and will not lower speed rating.
affect vehicle handling. Different Size Tires and
If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
Wheels
have a TPC Spec number, make If wheels or tires are installed that
{ Warning sure they are the same size, are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
load range, speed rating, and
Using bias-ply tires on the performance, including its braking,
construction (radial) as the
vehicle may cause the wheel ride and handling characteristics,
original tires. stability, and resistance to rollover
rim flanges to develop cracks
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
may be affected. If the vehicle has
(Continued) electronic systems such as antilock
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-75
brakes, rollover airbags, traction Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
control, electronic stability control, 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
Grading
or to some limited-production
of these systems can also be Quality grades can be found tires.
affected. where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
{ Warning and maximum section width. For General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
example:
If different sized wheels are used, respect to these grades, they
there may not be an acceptable Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
level of performance and safety if Temperature A safety requirements and
tires not recommended for those additional General Motors Tire
wheels are selected. This
The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
increases the chance of a crash standards.
and serious injury. Only use GM United States National Highway
specific wheel and tire systems Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
developed for the vehicle, and (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
have them properly installed by a treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
GM certified technician. temperature performance. This These Grades.
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades Treadwear
See Buying New Tires on
page 10-73 and Accessories and are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a
Modifications on page 10-3. most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
(UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
compact spare
Inf
ormat
i tires,
onPr dedby:tires with
ovi course. For example, a tire
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-76 Vehicle Care
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
differences in road to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade are not necessary on a regular
specified government test C corresponds to a level of basis. Consider an alignment check
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all if there is unusual tire wear or the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet vehicle is significantly pulling to one
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety side or the other. Some slight pull to
Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and the left or right, depending on the
assigned to this tire is based on A represent Ihigher
nf
ormat
ionPr
ovlevels
i
dedby: of crown of the road and/or other road
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-77
surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel

or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor Caution (Continued)
vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts. ground clearance, and tire or tire
to be rebalanced. See your dealer chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel or wheel nut is replaced on a dual
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could wheel setup, check the wheel nut
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming affect the braking and handling of torque after 160, 1 600 and
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and the vehicle. Tires can lose air, 10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi)
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing of driving. For proper torque, see
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel Capacities and Specifications on
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement. page 12-2.
these conditions exist. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Your dealer will know the kind of page 10-79 for more information.
wheel that is needed. { Caution Used Replacement Wheels
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity, The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake
{ Warning
diameter, width, offset and be
mounted the same way as the one it cooling, speedometer or Replacing a wheel with a used
replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp one is dangerous. How it has
aim, bumper height, vehicle been used or how far it has been
(Continued) (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-78 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) { Caution

driven may be unknown. It could parts. The area damaged by the If the vehicle does not have dual
fail suddenly and cause a crash. tire chains could cause you to wheels and has a tire size other
When replacing wheels, use a lose control of the vehicle and than 265/65R18, P265/65R18,
new GM original equipment you or others may be injured in a P275/55R20, LT265/70R17,
wheel. crash. LT265/70R18, LT265/60R20,
Use another type of traction LT275/65R18, P285/50R20, 285/
45R22, or P285/45R22, use tire
Tire Chains device only if its manufacturer
chains only where legal and only
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination when you must. Use chains that
{ Warning and road conditions. Follow that are the proper size for the tires.
manufacturer's instructions. To Install them on the tires of the
If the vehicle has dual wheels or rear axle. Do not use chains on
265/65R18, P265/65R18, P275/ help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust, or remove the tires of the front axle. Tighten
55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/ them as tightly as possible with
70R18, LT265/60R20, LT275/ the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the the ends securely fastened. Drive
65R18, P285/50R20, 285/45R22, slowly and follow the chain
or P285/45R22 size tires, do not vehicle's wheels.
manufacturer's instructions. If you
use tire chains. They can damage If you do find traction devices that can hear the chains contacting
the vehicle because there is not will fit, install them on the rear the vehicle, stop and retighten
enough clearance. Tire chains tires. them. If the contact continues,
used on a vehicle without the slow down until it stops. Driving
proper amount of clearance can too fast or spinning the wheels
cause damage to the brakes, with chains on will damage the
suspension, or other vehicle vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-79
If a Tire Goes Flat

{ Warning Warning (Continued)
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for
are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could
out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has been be badly injured or killed if the
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only
what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
toward that side. Take your foot off severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized to a level place, well off the road,
steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or if possible. Turn on the hazard
maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard
gently brake to a stop, well off the possible. Warning Flashers on page 6-4.
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a { Warning
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
{ Warning Changing a tire can be
used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip
accelerator pedal and steer to it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall
straighten the vehicle. It may be dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire. To
to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with help prevent the vehicle from
if possible. moving:
the vehicle, it is designed only for
Inf
ormat
ovi
(Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-80 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), Tire Changing
use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of Removing the Spare Tire and
1. Set the parking brake firmly. the wheel blocks (1). Tools
2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive
gear– not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
1. Wheel Block
is raised.
2. Flat Tire
5. Do not allow passengers to
The following information explains Crew Cab
remain in the vehicle.
how to use the jack and change
6. Place wheel blocks on both a tire. 1. Wheel Blocks
sides of the tire at the 2. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
opposite corner of the tire Blocks
being changed. 3. Tool Kit
4. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
5. Jack
6. Jack Knob
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-81
1. Turn the knob on the jack

counterclockwise to lower the
jack head to release the jack
from its holder.
2. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise to remove the
wheel blocks and the wheel
block retainer.
3. Turn the wing nut used to retain
the storage bag and tools
counterclockwise to remove it.
Regular Cab Double Cab Use the jack handle extensions and
the wheel wrench to remove the
1. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel 1. Wheel Blocks underbody-mounted spare tire.
Blocks 2. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
2. Wheel Blocks 3. Tool Kit
3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit 4. Jack
4. Tool Kit 5. Jack Knob
5. Jack For regular cab models, the
6. Jack Knob equipment you will need is behind
the passenger seat. For double and
crew cab models, the equipment is
on the shelf behind the passenger
side second row seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-82 Vehicle Care
1. Spare Tire (Valve Stem 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (7) Continue to turn the wheel
Pointed Down) and the two jack handle wrench until the spare tire can
2. Tire/Wheel Retainer extensions (6), as shown. be pulled out from under the
3. Hoist Cable vehicle.
4. Hoist Assembly 5. Pull the spare tire out from under
5. Hoist Shaft the vehicle.
6. Jack Handle Extensions
7. Wheel Wrench
8. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)
9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
10. Hoist End of Extension Tool
1. Open the spare tire lock cover
on the bumper and use the 3. Insert the hoist end (open
ignition key to remove the spare end) (10) of the extension
tire lock (8). To remove the spare through the hole (9) in the rear
tire lock, insert the ignition key bumper. 6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle
turn and pull straight out. Do not use the chiseled end of with some slack in the cable to
the wheel wrench. access the tire/wheel retainer.
Be sure the hoist end of the Tilt the retainer and pull it
extension (10) connects to the through the center of the wheel
hoist shaft. The ribbed square along with the cable and spring.
end of the extension is used to 7. Put the spare tire near the
lower the spare tire. flat tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench
spare tire Ito
nforthe
mati ground.
onProvi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-83
Removing the Flat Tire and The tools you will be using include If the vehicle has a center cap
Installing the Spare Tire the jack (1), the wheel blocks (2), with wheel nut caps, the wheel
the jack handle (3), the jack handle nut caps are designed to stay
Use the following pictures and extensions (4), and the wheel with the center cap after they are
instructions to remove the flat tire wrench (5). loosened. Remove the entire
and raise the vehicle. center cap.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-79 for more
information.
If the wheel has a smooth center

cap, place the chisel end of the
wheel wrench in the slot on the
1. Jack wheel, and gently pry it out.
2. Wheel Blocks
3. Jack Handle
4. Jack Handle Extension 2. If the vehicle has wheel nut
5. Wheel Wrench caps, loosen them by turning the
wheel wrench counterclockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-84 Vehicle Care
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it Front Position – 1500 Models Front Position – All Other Models
counterclockwise to loosen the 4. If the flat tire is on the front of If the flat tire is on the front of
wheel nuts. Do not remove the the vehicle (1500 models), the vehicle (all other models),
wheel nuts yet. position the jack under the position the jack under the
bracket attached to the vehicle's vehicle, as shown.
frame, behind the flat tire, as
shown.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-85
{ Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
Rear Position – 1500 Models Rear Position – All Other Models { Warning
5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for For all other models, position the
1500 models position the jack jack under the rear axle between Raising the vehicle with the jack
under the rear axle about 5 cm the spring anchor and the shock improperly positioned can
(2 in) inboard of the shock absorber bracket. damage the vehicle and even
absorber bracket. make the vehicle fall. To help
If a snow plow has been added
avoid personal injury and vehicle
to the front of the vehicle, lower
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
the snow plow fully before
raising the vehicle. head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack head is
positioned so that the rear axle
is resting securely between the 6. Turn the wheel wrench
grooves that are on the clockwise to raise the vehicle.
jack head. Raise the vehicle far enough off
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-86 Vehicle Care
the ground so there is enough

room for the spare tire to fit Warning (Continued) { Warning
under the wheel well.
changing a wheel, remove any Never use oil or grease on bolts
rust or dirt from places where the or nuts because the nuts might
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In come loose. The vehicle's wheel
an emergency, a cloth or a paper could fall off, causing a crash.
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to 10. Put the wheel nuts back on
remove all rust or dirt. with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
11. Tighten each wheel nut by
hand. Then use the wheel
wrench to tighten the nuts until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
7. Remove all the wheel nuts and
12. Turn the wheel wrench
take off the flat tire.
vehicle. Lower the jack
{ Warning completely.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can { Warning
make wheel nuts become loose If wheel studs are damaged, they
after time. The wheel could come 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, can break. If all the studs on a
off and cause an accident. When wheel broke, the wheel could
and spare wheel.
(Continued) I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
9. Install the spare tire.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-87
Warning (Continued) { Warning Caution (Continued)

come off and cause a crash. Wheel nuts that are improperly or sequence and to the proper
If any stud is damaged because incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. See
of a loose-running wheel, it could the wheels to become loose or Capacities and Specifications on
be that all of the studs are come off. The wheel nuts should page 12-2 for the wheel nut
damaged. To be sure, replace all be tightened with a torque wrench torque specification.
studs on the wheel. If the stud to the proper torque specification
holes in a wheel have become after replacing. Follow the torque
larger, the wheel could collapse in specification supplied by the
operation. Replace any wheel if aftermarket manufacturer when
its stud holes have become larger using accessory locking wheel
or distorted in any way. Inspect nuts. See Capacities and
hubs and hub‐piloted wheels for Specifications on page 12-2 for
damage. Because of loose original equipment wheel nut
running wheels, piloting pad torque specifications.
damage may occur and require
replacement of the entire hub, for
proper centering of the wheels. 13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
When replacing studs, hubs, { Caution crisscross sequence, as
wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to shown, by turning the wheel
Improperly tightened wheel nuts wrench clockwise.
use GM original equipment parts. can lead to brake pulsation and
rotor damage. To avoid expensive For vehicles with dual wheels, have
a technician check the wheel nut
brake repairs, evenly tighten the
tightness of all wheels with a torque
wheel nuts in the proper
wrench after the first 160, 1 600 and
I
nfor
mat
ovi 10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi).
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-88 Vehicle Care
Repeat this service whenever you Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Store the tire under the rear of the
have a tire removed or serviced. and Tools vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 12-2.
{ Warning
When reinstalling the regular wheel
and tire, also reinstall either the Storing a jack, a tire, or other
center cap, or bolt-on hub cap, equipment in the passenger
depending on what the vehicle is compartment of the vehicle could
equipped with. For center caps, cause injury. In a sudden stop or
place the cap on the wheel and tap collision, loose equipment could
it into place until it seats flush with strike someone. Store all these in
the wheel. The cap only goes on the proper place.
one way. Be sure to line up the tab
on the center cap with the
indentation on the wheel. For
bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic { Caution 1. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
nut caps with the wheel nuts and Pointed Down)
then tighten by hand. Then use the Storing an aluminum wheel with a
flat tire under your vehicle for an 2. Tire/Wheel Retainer
wheel wrench to tighten.
extended period of time or with 3. Hoist Cable
the valve stem pointing up can 4. Hoist Assembly
damage the wheel. Always stow 5. Hoist Shaft
the wheel with the valve stem 6. Jack Handle Extensions
pointing down and have the 7. Wheel Wrench
wheel/tire repaired as soon as 8. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)
possible. 9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
10. Hoist End of Extension Tool
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-89
1. Put the tire on the ground at the

rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
2. Pull the cable and spring
through the center of the wheel.
Tilt the wheel retainer plate
down and through the center
wheel.
4. Insert the hoist end (10) through
Make sure the retainer is fully the hole (9) in the rear bumper
seated across the underside of and onto the hoist shaft.
the wheel.
Do not use the chiseled end of 7. Make sure the tire is stored
the wheel wrench. securely. Push, pull, and then try
5. Raise the tire part way upward. to turn the tire. If the tire moves,
Make sure the retainer is seated use the wheel wrench to tighten
in the wheel opening. the cable.
6. Raise the tire fully against the 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock,
underside of the vehicle by if the vehicle has one.
turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You
3. Attach the wheel wrench (7) and cannot overtighten the cable.
extensions (6) together, as
shown.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-90 Vehicle Care
To store the jack and jack tools: 2. Tighten down the wing nut (3). If equipped with a temporary use
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (2) full-size spare tire, it is indicated on
and jack (7) together with the the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall
wing nut (1) and retaining Labeling on page 10-56. This spare
bolt (8). tire should not be driven on over
112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h
4. Position the jack (7) in the (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at
mounting bracket (6). Position the proper inflation pressure.
the holes in the base of the Repair and replace the road tire as
jack (7) onto the pin in the soon as it is convenient, and stow
mounting bracket (6). the spare tire for future use.
5. Return them to their original
location in the vehicle. See { Caution
“Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools.” If the vehicle has four-wheel drive
1. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel and a different size spare tire is
Blocks
2. Wheel Blocks Full-Size Spare Tire installed, do not drive in
four-wheel drive until the flat tire
3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit If this vehicle came with a full-size is repaired and/or replaced. The
4. Wheel Wrench and spare tire, it was fully inflated when vehicle could be damaged and
Extensions new, however, it can lose air over
the repairs would not be covered
5. Tool Bag time. Check the inflation pressure
by the warranty. Never use
6. Jack Mounting Bracket regularly. See Tire Pressure on
page 10-62 and Vehicle Load Limits four-wheel drive when a different
7. Jack size spare tire is installed on the
8. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks on page 9-15. For instructions on
how to remove, install, or store a vehicle.
1. Put the tools (4) in the tool spare tire, see Tire Changing on
bag (5) and place them in the page 10-80. InformationProvidedby:
retaining bracket (3).
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-91
The vehicle may have a different Jump Starting

size spare tire than the road tires { Caution
originally installed on the vehicle. For more information about the
This spare tire was developed for vehicle battery, see Battery on Ignoring these steps could result
use on this vehicle, so it is all right page 10-32. in costly damage to the vehicle
to drive on it. If the vehicle has that would not be covered by the
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) vehicle warranty. Trying to start
four-wheel drive and a different size has run down, you may want to use
spare tire is installed, drive only in the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
another vehicle and some jumper
two-wheel drive. will not work, and it could damage
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
the vehicle.
After installing the spare tire on the to use the following steps to do it
vehicle, stop as soon as possible safely.
and check that the spare tire is 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
correctly inflated. { Warning have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced and installed Batteries can hurt you. They can
back onto the vehicle as soon as be dangerous because: { Caution
possible so the spare tire will be . They contain acid that can
available in case it is needed again. burn you. If the other vehicle does not have
a 12-volt system with a negative
Do not mix tires and wheels of . They contain gas that can ground, both vehicles can be
different sizes, because they will not explode or ignite. damaged. Only use a vehicle that
fit. Keep your spare tire and its has a 12-volt system with a
. They contain enough
wheel together. If the vehicle has a
electricity to burn you. negative ground for jump starting.
spare tire that does not match the
original road tires and wheels in size If you do not follow these steps
and type, do not include the spare in exactly, some or all of these 2. If you have a vehicle with a
the tire rotation. things can hurt you. diesel engine with two batteries,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: you should know before you
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-92 Vehicle Care
begin that, especially in cold before setting the parking brake. 5. Open the hood on the other
weather, you may not be able to If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle and locate the
get enough power from a single vehicle, be sure the transfer positive (+) and negative (−)
battery in another vehicle to start case is in a drive gear, not in terminal locations on that
your diesel engine. If your N (Neutral). vehicle.
vehicle has more than one The positive (+) terminal is under
battery, using the battery that is
closer to the starter will reduce
{ Caution a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the
electrical resistance. This is If any accessories are left on or positive (+) terminal, open the
located on the passenger side, plugged in during the jump red plastic cover.
in the rear of the engine starting procedure, they could be
compartment. damaged. The repairs would not For more information on the
be covered by the vehicle location of the remote
3. Get the vehicles close enough positive (+) and remote negative
so the jumper cables can reach, warranty. Whenever possible, turn
(−) terminals, see Engine
but be sure the vehicles are not off or unplug all accessories on
Compartment Overview on
touching each other. If they are, either vehicle when jump starting. page 10-6.
it could cause an unwanted
ground connection. You would
not be able to start your vehicle,
4. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
{ Warning
and the bad grounding could
accessories plugged into the An electric fan can start up even
damage the electrical systems.
accessory power outlets. Turn when the engine is not running
To avoid the possibility of the off the radio and all the lamps and can injure you. Keep hands,
vehicles rolling, set the parking that are not needed. This will clothing and tools away from any
brake firmly on both vehicles avoid sparks and help save both underhood electric fan.
involved in the jump start batteries. And it could save the
procedure. Put the automatic radio!
transmission in P (Park) or a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
manual transmission in Neutral
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-93
too. And do not connect the

{ Warning { Warning negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the
Using an open flame near a Fans or other moving engine dead battery because this can
battery can cause battery gas to parts can injure you badly. Keep cause sparks.
explode. People have been hurt your hands away from moving
doing this, and some have been parts once the engine is running.
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light. 6. Check that the jumper cables do
Be sure the battery has enough not have loose or missing
water. You do not need to add insulation. If they do, you could
water to the battery installed in get a shock. The vehicles could
your new vehicle. But if a battery be damaged too.
has filler caps, be sure the right Before you connect the cables,
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, here are some basic things you
add water to take care of that should know. Positive (+) will go
first. If you do not, explosive gas to positive (+) or to a remote
could be present. positive (+) terminal if the 5.3L Shown, 4.3L, 6.0L, 6.2L and
vehicle has one. Negative (−) 6.6L Similar
Battery fluid contains acid that
will go to a heavy, unpainted
can burn you. Do not get it on metal engine part or to a remote 7. Connect the red positive (+)
you. If you accidentally get it in negative (−) terminal if the cable to the positive (+) terminal
your eyes or on your skin, flush vehicle has one. of the vehicle with the dead
the place with water and get battery.
medical help immediately. Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery Iand
nf
ormat
imaybe
onPr
ovi other parts
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-94 Vehicle Care
8. Do not let the other end touch

metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
9. Connect the black negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal
of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
4.3L Shown, 5.3L and 6.2L Similar 6.0L
anything until the next step.
‐ To the metal bracket that is ‐ To the generator bracket, on
10. Connect the other end of the
bolted to the engine and the vehicle with the dead
negative (−) cable.
supports the resonator, on battery.
the vehicle with the dead
battery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-95
{ Caution Towing the Vehicle

If the jumper cables are { Caution
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting Incorrectly towing a disabled
may occur and damage the vehicle may cause damage. The
vehicle. The repairs would not be damage would not be covered by
covered by the vehicle warranty. the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct order, Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
making sure that the cables do car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck
6.6L not touch each other or other could damage the vehicle.
metal.
‐ To the negative (−) post on Consult your dealer or a
the auxiliary battery, on the professional towing service if the
vehicle with the dead battery. Jumper Cable Removal disabled vehicle must be towed.
11. Start the vehicle with the good Reverse the sequence exactly when
battery and run the engine for a removing the jumper cables. Recreational Vehicle
while. Towing
12. Try to start the vehicle that had Recreational vehicle towing means
the dead battery. If it will not towing the vehicle behind another
start after a few tries, it vehicle, such as a motor home. The
probably needs service. two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are
dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghy
towing is towing the vehicle with all
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
four wheels on the ground. Dolly
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-96 Vehicle Care
towing is towing the vehicle with two Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
wheels on the ground and two be towed with all four wheels on the
wheels on a dolly. Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles ground.
Follow the tow vehicle Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
manufacturer’s instructions. See
your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
{ Caution
Use of a shield mounted in front
of the vehicle grille could restrict
airflow and cause damage to the
transmission. The repairs would
warranty. If using a shield, only { Caution
use one that attaches to the Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drive
towing vehicle. If the two-wheel-drive vehicle is vehicles with a two-speed transfer
towed with all four wheels on the case that have an N (Neutral) and a
ground, the drivetrain Four-Wheel Drive Low (4 (n) setting.
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-97
shifting the transmission to

{ Warning R (Reverse) and then to D { Caution
(Drive). There should be no
Shifting a four-wheel-drive movement of the vehicle while If the steering column is locked,
vehicle's transfer case into shifting. vehicle damage may occur.
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is 5. With the transmission in D
(Drive), turn the ignition to ACC/ 8. Move the steering wheel to
in P (Park). You or others could make sure the steering column
be injured. Set the parking brake ACCESSORY.
is unlocked.
before shifting the transfer case
to N (Neutral). { Caution 9. Release the parking brake.
10. Keep the ignition key in the
Failure to disconnect the negative
Follow these steps to dinghy tow: towed vehicle in ACC/
battery cable or to have it contact ACCESSORY to prevent the
1. Position the vehicle being towed the terminals can cause damage steering column from locking.
behind the tow vehicle, facing to the vehicle.
forward and on a level surface. Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle
2. Securely attach the vehicle 6. Disconnect the negative battery Before disconnecting the towed
being towed to the tow vehicle. cable at the battery and secure vehicle:
the nut and bolt. Cover the 1. Park on a level surface.
3. Apply the parking brake and negative battery post with a
start the engine. non-conductive material to 2. Set the parking brake, shift the
4. Shift the transfer case to prevent any contact with the transmission to P (Park), and
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into negative battery terminal. move the ignition key to OFF.
N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel 7. Shift the transmission to 3. Connect the battery.
Drive on page 9-42 for the P (Park). 4. Apply the brake pedal.
proper procedure. Check that
the vehicle is in N (Neutral) by I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-98 Vehicle Care
5. Start the engine, then shift the Dolly Towing

transfer case out of N (Neutral) Caution (Continued)
to Two-Wheel Drive High. See Front Towing (Front Wheels Off
Four-Wheel Drive for directions the Ground) – Two-Wheel-Drive warranty. Never tow the vehicle
on shifting out of N (Neutral). Vehicles with the rear wheels on the
ground.
6. Check that the vehicle is in
Two-Wheel Drive High by
shifting the transmission to Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
R (Reverse) and then to D be towed with the rear wheels on
(Drive). There should be the ground. Two-wheel-drive
movement of the vehicle while transmissions have no provisions
shifting. for internal lubrication while being
towed.
7. Shift the transmission to
P (Park) and turn off the ignition. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, the vehicle must be towed
8. Disconnect the vehicle from the with the rear wheels on the dolly.
tow vehicle. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
9. Release the parking brake. the Ground)” later in this section.
10. Reset any lost presets. { Caution
The outside temperature If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is
display will default to 32°F but towed with the rear wheels on the
will reset with normal usage. ground, the transmission could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-99
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off 8. Release the parking brake only
the Ground) – Four-Wheel-Drive { Warning after the vehicle being towed is
Vehicles firmly attached to the tow
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle.
vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
to roll even if the transmission is Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
in P (Park). You or others could the Ground)
be injured. Set the parking brake
before shifting the transfer case Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
to N (Neutral).
5. Use a clamping device designed

for towing to ensure that the
front wheels are locked into the
straight position.
To dolly tow a four-wheel-drive
vehicle from the front: 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
1. Attach the dolly to the tow instructions.
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions. 7. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
2. Drive the front wheels onto the N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel
dolly. Drive on page 9-42 for the To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive
proper procedure. vehicle from the rear:
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park). 1. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly.
4. Set the parking brake. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-100 Vehicle Care
2. Set the parking brake. See To dolly tow a four-wheel-drive Appearance Care
Parking Brake on page 9-51. vehicle from the rear:
3. Put the transmission in P (Park). 1. Drive the rear wheels onto the Exterior Care
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly dolly.
following the manufacturer's 2. Set the parking brake. See
Locks
instructions. Parking Brake on page 9-51. Locks are lubricated at the factory.
Use a de-icing agent only when
5. Use a clamping device designed 3. Put the transmission in P (Park).
absolutely necessary, and have the
for towing to ensure that the 4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly locks greased after using. See
front wheels are locked into the following the manufacturer's Recommended Fluids and
straight position. instructions. Lubricants on page 11-12.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 5. Use a clamping device designed Washing the Vehicle
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles for towing to ensure that the
front wheels are locked into the To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct
{ Warning straight position.
sunlight.
6. Shift the transfer case to
Shifting a four-wheel-drive N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
vehicle's transfer case into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive { Caution
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle on page 9-42 for the proper
Do not use petroleum-based,
to roll even if the transmission is procedure.
acidic, or abrasive cleaning
in P (Park). You or others could 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. agents as they can damage the
be injured. Set the parking brake
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic
before shifting the transfer case
parts. If damage occurs, it would
to N (Neutral).
warranty. Approved cleaning
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-101
washed. This could cause damage repaired. Foreign materials such as

Caution (Continued) that would not be covered by the calcium chloride and other salts, ice
vehicle warranty. melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
products can be obtained from sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
follow with the car wash industrial chimneys, etc., can
manufacturer directions regarding damage the vehicle's finish if they
correct product usage, necessary instructions. The windshield wiper
and rear window wiper, if equipped, remain on painted surfaces. Wash
safety precautions, and the vehicle as soon as possible.
appropriate disposal of any must be off. Remove any
accessories that may be damaged If necessary, use non-abrasive
vehicle care product. cleaners that are marked safe for
or interfere with the car wash
equipment. painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
{ Caution washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove
cleaning agents completely. If they
Avoid using high-pressure are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See
washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
to the surface of the vehicle. Use products.
of power washers exceeding Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Do not apply waxes or polishes to
8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
avoid surface scratches and water
in damage or removal of paint decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
spotting.
and decals. as damage can occur.
Finish Care
This symbol e is on any Application of aftermarket clearcoat
underhood compartment electrical sealant/wax materials is not
center that should not be power recommended. If painted surfaces
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
oassessed
vi
dedby: and
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-102 Vehicle Care
The bright metal moldings on the rinse the bedliner surface following
{ Caution vehicle are aluminum. To prevent a chemical spill to avoid permanent
damage always follow these damage.
Machine compounding or cleaning instructions:
aggressive polishing on a Spray-in bedliners can fade from
. Be sure the molding is cool to oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only the touch before applying any hauling, and hard water stains.
non-abrasive waxes and polishes cleaning solution. Clean it periodically by washing off
that are made for a basecoat/ . Use a cleaning solution the loose dirt and using a mild
approved for aluminum. Some detergent. To restore the original
clearcoat paint finish on the
cleaners are highly acidic or appearance, apply the bedliner
vehicle.
contain alkaline substances and conditioner available through your
can damage the moldings. dealer.
To keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
. Always dilute a concentrated
cleaner according to the
{ Caution
manufacturer’s instructions. Using silicone-based products
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Moldings
. Do not use chrome cleaners. may damage the bedliner, reduce
the slip-resistant texture, and
. Do not use cleaners that are not
attract dirt.
{ Caution intended for automotive use.
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the
Failure to clean and protect the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
vehicle after washing to protect
bright metal moldings can result and extend the molding finish. Lenses, Emblems, Decals and
in a hazy white finish or pitting. Stripes
This damage would not be Spray-In Bedliner Care
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
A spray-in bedliner is a permanent soft cloth, and a car washing soap
coating that bonds to the truck bed to clean exterior lamps, lenses,
and cannot beInforemoved.
r
mat
ionPr
ovi
Promptly
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-103
emblems, decals and stripes. Follow Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
instructions under "Washing the { Caution cloth or paper towel soaked with
Vehicle" previously in this section. windshield washer fluid or a mild
Failure to clean lamps properly detergent. Wash the windshield
Lamp covers are made of plastic, can cause damage to the lamp
and some have a UV protective thoroughly when cleaning the
cover that would not be covered blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
coating. Do not clean or wipe them by the vehicle warranty.
while they are dry. a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
Do not use any of the following on streaking.
lamp covers:
. Abrasive or caustic agents.
{ Caution Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
. Washer fluids and other cleaning Using wax on low gloss black caused by extreme dusty
agents in higher concentrations finish stripes can increase the conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
than suggested by the gloss level and create a snow, and ice.
manufacturer. non-uniform finish. Clean low
gloss stripes with soap and
Weatherstrips
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
water only.
or other harsh cleaners. weatherstrips to make them last
. Ice scrapers or other hard items. longer, seal better, and not stick or
Air Intakes squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips
. Aftermarket appearance caps or
Clear debris from the air intakes, once a year. Hot, dry climates may
covers while the lamps are
between the hood and windshield, require more frequent application.
illuminated, due to excessive
when washing the vehicle. Black marks from rubber material on
heat generated.
painted surfaces can be removed by
Windshield and Wiper Blades rubbing with a clean cloth. See
Clean the outside of the windshield Recommended Fluids and
with glass cleaner. Lubricants on page 11-12.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-104 Vehicle Care
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
{ Caution Caution (Continued)
clean the tires. Chrome wheels and other chrome automatic car wash that uses
trim may be damaged if the silicone carbide tire cleaning
{ Caution vehicle is not washed after driving brushes. Damage could occur
on roads that have been sprayed and the repairs would not be
Using petroleum-based tire with magnesium, calcium, covered by the vehicle warranty.
dressing products on the vehicle or sodium chloride. These
may damage the paint finish and/ chlorides are used on roads for
or tires. When applying a tire Steering, Suspension, and
conditions such as ice and dust.
dressing, always wipe off any Chassis Components
Always wash the chrome with
overspray from all painted soap and water after exposure. Visually inspect steering,
surfaces on the vehicle. suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
or missing parts or signs of wear at
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
{ Caution least once a year.
To avoid surface damage, do not Inspect power steering for proper
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
soap and water to clean the wheels. use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, chafing, etc.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. brushes, or cleaners that contain Visually check constant velocity joint
A wax may then be applied. acid on aluminum or boots and axle seals for leaks.
chrome-plated wheels. Use only 1500 Series vehicles, at least every
approved cleaners. Also, never other oil change lubricate the outer
drive a vehicle with aluminum or tie rod ends.
chrome-plated wheels through an
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi (Continued)
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-105
2500/3500 Series vehicles, at least with a clean cloth will make them Finish Damage
every other engine oil change last longer, seal better, and not stick
Quickly repair minor chips and
lubricate the upper and lower or squeak.
scratches with touch-up materials
control arm ball joints. Control arm
Underbody Maintenance available from your dealer to avoid
ball joints on 1500 series vehicles
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
are maintenance-free. At least twice a year, spring and fall, damage can be corrected in your
2500/3500 Series vehicles equipped use plain water to flush dirt and dealer's body and paint shop.
with steering linkage, at least every debris from the vehicle's underbody.
other engine oil change lubricate the Your dealer or an underbody car Chemical Paint Spotting
tie rod ball joints, idler arm pivot washing system can do this. If not
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
shaft bearings, idler arm socket, and removed, rust and corrosion can
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
pitman arm socket. develop.
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular
{ Caution If the vehicle is damaged and
dark spots etched into the paint
surface. Refer to “Finish Care”
Lubrication of applicable Steering/ requires sheet metal repair or previously in this section.
Suspension points should not be replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
done unless temperature is -12°C
material to parts repaired or Interior Care
(10°F) or higher, or damage could
replaced to restore corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
result.
protection. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
Body Component Lubrication parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
protection while maintaining the that can transfer color to home
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
transfer color to the vehicle's
steel fuel door hinge unless the
interior.
components are plastic. Applying
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
silicone grease on weatherstrips
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-106 Vehicle Care
Use a soft bristle brush to remove To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass
dust from knobs and crevices on the the interior using the following
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
instrument cluster. Using a mild cleaners or techniques:
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
soap solution, immediately remove . Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth.
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
repellent from all interior surfaces or from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
permanent damage may result.
. Never use a brush with stiff the interior glass with plain water.
Your dealer may have products for bristles.
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
specifically designed for the . Never rub any surface { Caution
surfaces being cleaned to prevent aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use
permanent damage. Apply all pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive
cleaners directly to the cleaning . Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage
on any switches or controls. degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger.
Cleaners should be removed use approximately 20 drops per
quickly. Never allow cleaners to 3.8 L (1 gal) of water.
remain on the surface being A concentrated soap solution will Cleaning the windshield with water
cleaned for extended periods leave a residue that creates during the first three to six months
of time. streaks and attracts dirt. Do not of ownership will reduce tendency
use solutions that contain strong to fog.
Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the or caustic soap. Speaker Covers
interior. Before using cleaners, read . Do not heavily saturate the
and adhere to all safety instructions Vacuum around a speaker cover
upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
. Do not use solvents or cleaners be damaged. Clean spots with just
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents. water and mild soap.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
windows.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-107
Coated Moldings To clean: cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small

1. Saturate a clean lint-free hidden area for colorfastness before
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
colorfast cloth with water. using a commercial upholstery
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
Microfiber cloth is recommended
sponge or soft lint-free cloth formation occurs, clean the entire
to prevent lint transfer to the
dampened with water. fabric or carpet.
fabric or carpet.
. When heavily soiled, use warm Following the cleaning process, a
2. Remove excess moisture by
soapy water. paper towel can be used to blot
gently wringing until water does
not drip from the cleaning cloth. excess moisture.
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
using a soft brush attachment. If a soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
rotating brush attachment is being center. Rotate the cleaning cloth Radio Displays
used during vacuuming, only use it to a clean area frequently to For vehicles with high gloss
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, prevent forcing the soil in to the surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
gently remove as much of the soil fabric. microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
as possible using one of the 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
following techniques: soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
. Gently blot liquids with a paper longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
towel. Continue blotting until no the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
more soil can be removed. 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
. For solid soils, remove as much or solvents. Periodically hand wash
as possible prior to vacuuming. solution followed only by plain
water. the microfiber cloth separately,
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
use a commercial upholstery
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-108 Vehicle Care
{ Caution Caution (Continued) { Caution

Do not attach a device with a may cause permanent damage. Use of air fresheners may cause
suction cup to the display. This Wipe excess moisture from these permanent damage to plastics
may cause damage and would surfaces after cleaning and allow and painted surfaces. If an air
not be covered by the warranty. them to dry naturally. Never use freshener comes in contact with
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot any plastic or painted surface in
removers. Do not use cleaners the vehicle, blot immediately and
Instrument Panel, Leather,
that contain silicone or wax-based clean with a soft cloth dampened
Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,
products. Cleaners containing with a mild soap solution.
Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and these solvents can permanently Damage caused by air fresheners
Natural Open Pore Wood change the appearance and feel would not be covered by the
Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not vehicle warranty.
Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended.
dampened with water to remove
Care of Safety Belts
dust and loose dirt. For a more
Do not use cleaners that increase
thorough cleaning, use a soft Keep belts clean and dry.
gloss, especially on the instrument
microfiber cloth dampened with a
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
mild soap solution.
visibility through the windshield { Warning
under certain conditions.
{ Caution Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
Soaking or saturating leather, a crash, they might not be able to
especially perforated leather, as provide adequate protection.
well as other interior surfaces, Clean safety belts only with mild
(Continued) soap and lukewarm water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care 10-109

. Do not use a floor mat if the
Floor Mats vehicle is not equipped with a
floor mat retainer on the driver
{ Warning side floor.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or . Use the floor mat with the
is not properly installed, it can correct side up. Do not turn
interfere with the pedals. it over.
Interference with the pedals can . Do not place anything on top of
cause unintended acceleration the driver side floor mat.
and/or increased stopping . Use only a single floor mat on
distance which can cause a crash the driver side.
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
. Do not place one floor mat on Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
pedals. top of another. retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snapping into position.
Removing and Replacing the
Use the following guidelines for Floor Mats Make sure the floor mat is properly
proper floor mat usage: secured in place.
Pull up on the rear of the driver side
. The original equipment floor floor mat to unlock each retainer Verify the floor mat does not
mats were designed for your and remove. interfere with the pedals.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
interfere with the pedals.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
10-110 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information transportation, and online

scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance This maintenance section applies to
vehicles with a gasoline engine. For
needs.
Your dealer recognizes the
diesel engine vehicles, see the
importance of providing
General Information maintenance schedule section in
competitively priced maintenance
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax diesel supplement.
and repair services. With trained
Your vehicle is an important technicians, the dealer is the place
Maintenance Schedule investment. This section describes for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 the required maintenance for the changes and tire rotations and
Special Application Services vehicle. Follow this schedule to help additional maintenance items like
Special Application protect against major repair tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 expenses resulting from neglect or blades.
inadequate maintenance. It may
and Care
also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
{ Caution
Additional Maintenance responsibility of the owner to have Damage caused by improper
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 all required maintenance performed. maintenance can lead to costly
Recommended Fluids, Your dealer has trained technicians repairs and may not be covered
Lubricants, and Parts who can perform required by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids and maintenance using genuine Maintenance intervals, checks,
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 replacement parts. They have inspections, recommended fluids,
Maintenance Replacement up-to-date tools and equipment for and lubricants are important to
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 fast and accurate diagnostics. Many keep the vehicle in good working
dealers have extended evening and condition.
Maintenance Records Saturday hours, courtesy
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The Tire Rotation and Required

. Are driven on reasonable road
Services are the responsibility of the surfaces within legal driving { Warning
vehicle owner. It is recommended to limits.
have your dealer perform these Performing maintenance work can
. Use the recommended fuel. See
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. be dangerous and can cause
Fuel on page 9-67.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to serious injury. Perform
keep the vehicle in good working Severe Service maintenance work only if the
condition, improves fuel economy, In addition to the normal service required information, proper tools,
and reduces vehicle emissions. schedule, some vehicles require and equipment are available.
service more often. Severe service If they are not, see your dealer to
Because of the way people use
is for vehicles that are: have a trained technician do the
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
There may need to be more work. See Doing Your Own
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic Service Work on page 10-4.
frequent checks and services. in hot weather.
Normal Service . Mainly driven in hilly or
All maintenance services, including mountainous terrain.
those listed under Additional . Frequently towing a trailer.
Required Services, are for . Used for high-speed or
vehicles that:
competitive driving.
. Carry passengers and cargo . Used for taxi, police, or delivery
within recommended limits on
service.
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-15.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maintenance for up to a year. The engine oil and

filter must be changed at least once
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
Schedule a year and the oil life system must or areas with high dust levels.
be reset. Your trained dealer Replacement may also be needed if
Owner Checks and Services technician can perform this work. there is a reduction in air flow,
At Each Fuel Stop If the engine oil life system is reset excessive window fogging, or odors.
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Check the engine oil level. See within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Tire Rotation and Required
Engine Oil on page 10-11. last service. Reset the oil life Services Every 12 000 km/
Once a Month system when the oil is changed. 7,500 mi
See Engine Oil Life System on Rotate the tires, if recommended for
. Check the tire inflation page 10-14.
pressures. See Tire Pressure on the vehicle, and perform the
page 10-62. Passenger Compartment Air following services. See Tire
Filter Rotation on page 10-69.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See
Tire Inspection on page 10-69.
. Check engine oil level and oil
The passenger compartment air
life percentage. If needed,
. Check the windshield washer filter removes dust, pollen, and
change engine oil and filter, and
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on other airborne irritants from outside
reset oil life system. See Engine
page 10-29. air that is pulled into the vehicle.
Oil on page 10-11 and Engine
The filter should be replaced as part
Oil Life System on page 10-14.
Engine Oil Change of routine scheduled maintenance.
Inspect the passenger compartment . Check engine coolant level. See
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
air filter every 36 000 km/ Engine Coolant on page 10-22.
SOON message displays, have the
engine oil and filter changed within 22,500 miles or two years, . Check windshield washer fluid
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven whichever comes first. Replace if level. See Washer Fluid on
under the best conditions, the necessary. More frequent page 10-29.
engine oil life system may not replacement may be needed if the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
indicate the need for vehicle service
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Visually inspect windshield wiper components at least every other
. Check parking brake and
blades for wear, cracking, oil change. (If equipped with automatic transmission park
or contamination. See Exterior grease fittings) mechanism. See Park Brake and
Care on page 10-100. Replace P (Park) Mechanism Check on
worn or damaged wiper blades.
. Check restraint system page 10-38.
See Wiper Blade Replacement components. See Safety System
Check on page 3-19.
. Check accelerator pedal for
on page 10-38. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Check tire inflation pressures.
. Visually inspect fuel system for Replace if needed.
See Tire Pressure on damage or leaks.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
page 10-62. . Visually inspect exhaust system signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire and nearby heat shields for damage. Check the hold open
Inspection on page 10-69. loose or damaged parts. ability of the strut. See your
. Visually check for fluid leaks.
. Lubricate body components. See dealer if service is required.
Exterior Care on page 10-100. . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
. Check starter switch. See Starter if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 10-19. Switch Check on page 10-37. page 2-23.
. Inspect brake system.
. Check automatic transmission . Verify spare tire key lock
shift lock control function. See operation and lubricate as
. Visually inspect steering, Automatic Transmission Shift needed. See Tire Changing on
suspension, and chassis Lock Control Function Check on page 10-80.
components for damaged, page 10-37.
loose, or missing parts or signs
of wear at least once a year.
. Check ignition transmission lock.
See Exterior Care on See Ignition Transmission Lock
page 10-100. Lubricate the Check on page 10-38.
suspension and steering
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Additional Required Services
1 2 0 0 0 k m /7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m /1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m /2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m /3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m /3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m /4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m /5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m /6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m /6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m /7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m /8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m /9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m /9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m /1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m /11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m /1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m /1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m /1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m /1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m /1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @
Replace clutch fluid. (6) @ @ @
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Footnotes — Maintenance (2) Or every four years, whichever (5) Or every 10 years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required comes first. comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services - Normal (3) Check all fuel and vapor lines excessive cracking, or damage;
(1) Or every two years, whichever and hoses for proper hook-up, replace, if needed.
comes first. More frequent routing, and condition. (6) Or every three years, whichever
replacement may be needed if the comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy comes first. See Cooling System on
traffic, areas with poor air quality, page 10-21.
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @
Severe Service: Change transfer case fluid,
if equipped with 4WD. (4)
@ @ @
Extreme Service: Change transfer case fluid,
if equipped with 4WD. (5)
@ @ @ @ @ @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (6) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (7) @
Replace brake fluid. (8) @ @ @
Replace clutch fluid. (8) @ @ @
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Extreme service for full-size Special Application

Schedule Additional Required pickups mainly driven off-road in
Services - Severe four-wheel drive or used in farming, Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever mining, forestry, Department of . Vehicles with Dual Wheels:
comes first. More frequent Natural Resources (DNR), or snow
Check dual wheel nut torque at
replacement may be needed if the plowing. Do not directly power wash
160, 1 600 and 10 000 km (100,
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy the transfer case output seals. High
1,000 and 6,000 mi) of driving.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, pressure water can overcome the
Repeat this service whenever a
or areas with high dust levels. seals and contaminate the transfer
tire/wheel is serviced or
Replacement may also be needed if case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
removed.
there is a reduction in air flow, decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced. . Severe Commercial Use
excessive window fogging, or odors.
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
(2) Or every four years, whichever (6) Or every five years, whichever
components every 5 000 km/
comes first. comes first. See Cooling System on
3,000 mi.
page 10-21.
(3) Check all fuel and vapor lines . Have underbody flushing service
and hoses for proper hook-up, (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
performed. See “Underbody
routing, and condition. comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Maintenance” in Exterior Care
excessive cracking, or damage;
(4) Do not directly power wash the on page 10-100.
replace, if needed.
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the (8) Or every three years, whichever
seals and contaminate the transfer comes first.
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services — their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: filled.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Hoses Shocks and Struts Tires

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated,
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include the tires can save money and fuel,
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ and can reduce the risk of tire
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer failure.
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven . Signs that the tires need to be
Lamps tire wear. replaced include three or more
. As part of the multi-point visible treadwear indicators; cord
Properly working headlamps, or fabric showing through the
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect rubber; cracks or cuts in the
important to see and be seen on tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
the road. the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals, split in the tire.
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise . Trained dealer technicians can
attention include dimming, failure when service is needed. inspect and recommend the right
to light, cracking, or damage. tires. Your dealer can also
The brake lamps need to be provide tire/wheel balancing
checked periodically to ensure services to ensure smooth
that they light when braking. vehicle operation at all speeds.
. With a multi-point inspection, Your dealer sells and services
your dealer can check the lamps name brand tires.
and note any concerns.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Care
. Your dealer has the required Wiper Blades
equipment to ensure proper
To help keep the vehicle looking like wheel alignment. Wiper blades need to be cleaned
new, vehicle care products are and kept in good condition to
available from your dealer. For Windshield provide a clear view.
information on how to clean and For safety, appearance, and the . Signs of wear include streaking,
protect the vehicle’s interior and best viewing, keep the windshield skipping across the windshield,
exterior, see Interior Care on clean and clear. and worn or split rubber.
page 10-105 and Exterior Care on
page 10-100.
. Signs of damage include . Trained dealer technicians can
scratches, cracks, and chips. check the wiper blades and
Wheel Alignment replace them when needed.
. Trained dealer technicians can
Wheel alignment is critical for inspect the windshield and
ensuring that the tires deliver recommend proper replacement
optimal wear and performance. if needed.
. Signs that the alignment may
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
handling, or unusual tire wear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an
Allison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 ® specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See
Engine Oil on page 10-11.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-22.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021185, in Canada 89021186).
(2500/3500 Series Only)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
®
Automatic Transmission (All except DEXRON -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
6.2L with 8-Speed transmission)
Automatic Transmission (6.2L with DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19300536, in
8-Speed transmission) Canada 19300537).
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 93436060).
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle (1500 Series) – SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, in
Four-Wheel Drive Canada 89021672).
Rear Axle (1500) SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, in
Canada 19300458).
Front and Rear Axle (2500/3500) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Canada 89021678).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Front Axle Driveshaft Splines (All Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, in
4WD 1500/2500/3500 Series) and Canada 19257122).
Rear Axle Driveshaft Splines (All
2WD 1500 Series with Automatic
Transmission)
Rear Driveline Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
(Two-Piece Driveshaft) lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Canada 10953474).
Hinge and Linkage, Fuel Door Hinge,
Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges,
Latch Bolt, and Linkage
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C
Oil Filter
4.3L V6 89017525 PF63
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 89017525 PF63
6.0L V8 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12622441 41–114
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 12622441 41–114
6.0L V8 12621258 41–110
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754397 -
Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754398 -
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Odometer
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Odometer
Reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.1 L 15.9 qt
5.3L V8 1500 Series 15.7 L 16.6 qt
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 16.1 L 17.0 qt
6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.7 L 16.6 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 5.7 L 6.0 qt
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 8.0 L 8.5 qt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal
1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 (LV3) H 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
4.3L V6 (LV1) P 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
5.3L V8 (L83) C 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
6.0L V8 (L96) G 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
6.2L V8 (L86) J 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines 6.0L V8 Engines

V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
supplement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
12-6 Technical Data
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12 of your dealership or the general
Radio Frequency manager.
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington , VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
case will generally be heard within
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa , Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user I (Service History): View and
in the U.S. can communicate print dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
with Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre,
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio (if equipped), and OnStar
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
account information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
alerts, OnStar onboard vehicle
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
. Location of the vehicle.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14

. Model, year, color, and license General Motors North America and
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
plate number of the vehicle. Chevrolet reserve the right to limit change a flat tire with the spare
. Odometer reading, Vehicle services or payment to an owner or tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Identification Number (VIN), and driver if they decide the claims are must be in good condition and
delivery date of the vehicle. made too often, or the same type of properly inflated. It is the owner's
claim is made many times. responsibility for the repair or
. Description of the problem. replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
Coverage
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
Services are provided up to 5 years/ Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever vehicle to get to the nearest
comes first. service station. Services Not Included in
In the U.S., anyone driving the Roadside Assistance
. Lock-Out Service: Service to
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
person driving the vehicle without locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
permission from the owner is not be available if you have OnStar.
covered.
. Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
Roadside Assistance is not a part of must present identification
. Mounting, dismounting,
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
General Motors North America and chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Chevrolet reserve the right to make Road or Highway: Tow to the Service is not provided if a vehicle
any changes or discontinue the nearest Chevrolet dealer for is in an area that is not accessible
Roadside Assistance program at warranty service, or if the vehicle to the service vehicle or is not a
any time without notification. was in a crash and cannot be regularly traveled or maintained
driven. Assistance is not given public road, which includes ice and
when the vehicle is stuck in the winter roads. Off-road use is not
sand, mud,Infoor snow. covered.
r
mati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Services Specific to permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles emergency road service. You will your dealership, let them know this,
receive payment, up to $100, and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement after sending the original receipt
is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel If your dealer requests you to bring
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
delivery may be restricted. Mechanical failures may be
Propane and other fuels are not urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for
provided through this service. parts and labor for repairs not same-day repair.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
150 kilometers from where your Appointments To enhance your ownership
trip was started to qualify. experience, we and our participating
When the vehicle requires warranty dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and Transportation, a customer support
Limited requires
request an appointment. By program for vehicles with the
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant Coverage period in Canada),
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your extended powertrain, and/or
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your hybrid-specific warranties in both
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience. the U.S. and Canada.
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
payment. into the service department options are available to assist in
. immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Assistance advisor may give
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Courtesy Transportation is not a by GM for shuttle service. If U.S. It may not be possible to provide a
part of the New Vehicle Limited customers arrange their own like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Warranty. A separate booklet transportation, limited
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimbursement for reasonable fuel Additional Program
Owner Assistance Information” expenses may be available. Claim Information
furnished with each new vehicle amounts should reflect actual costs All program options, such as shuttle
provides detailed warranty coverage and be supported by original service, may not be available at
information. receipts. See your dealer for every dealer. Contact your dealer
information. for specific availability.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle General Motors reserves the right to
Warranty service can generally be
For an overnight warranty repair, the unilaterally modify, change,
completed while you wait. However,
dealer may provide an available or discontinue Courtesy
if you are unable to do so, your
courtesy rental vehicle or provide for Transportation at any time and to
dealer may offer the following
reimbursement of a rental vehicle. resolve all questions of claim
transportation options:
Reimbursement is limited and must eligibility pursuant to the terms and
Shuttle Service be supported by original receipts as conditions described herein at its
well as a signed and completed sole discretion.
This includes one-way or round-trip
shuttle service within reasonable rental agreement and meet state/
time and distance parameters of provincial, local, and rental Collision Damage Repair
your dealer's area. vehicle provider requirements. If the vehicle is involved in a
Requirements vary and may include collision and it is damaged, have the
Public Transportation or Fuel minimum age requirements,
Reimbursement damage repaired by a qualified
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. technician using the proper
If overnight warranty repairs are Additional fees such as fuel usage equipment and quality replacement
needed, and public transportation is charges, taxes, levies, usage fees, parts. Poorly performed collision
used, the expense must be excessive mileage, or rental usage repairs diminish the vehicle resale
supported by original receipts and beyond the completion
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
of the repair
dedby:
within the maximum amount allowed are also your responsibility.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment.
related failures are not covered by
Collision Parts that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
performance; however, the history of able to recommend
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
oviadbcollision
de y: repair
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-26. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications Or write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Manual. Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals 47911 Halyard Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 – Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Pouch: Owner Manual only. obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: delivery.
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
Service Bulletins
shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional funds.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Reporting Safety

Identification (RFID) Statement Defects
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that Reporting Safety Defects
pressure monitoring and ignition complies with Part 15/Part 18
system security, as well as in of the Federal Communications
to the United States
connection with conveniences such Commission (FCC) rules and with Government
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Industry Canada Standards If you believe that your vehicle
transmitters for remote door locking/ RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
has a defect which could cause
unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage a crash or could cause injury or
two conditions: death, you should immediately
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause inform the National Highway
personal information or link with any harmful interference. Traffic Safety Administration
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
personal information. interference received, including General Motors.
interference that may cause If NHTSA receives similar
undesired operation of the complaints, it may open an
device.
investigation, and if it finds
Changes or modifications to any of that a safety defect exists in a
these systems by other than an group of vehicles, it may order a
authorized service facility could void recall and remedy campaign.
authorization to use this equipment.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: dealer, or General Motors.
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Transport Canada at
Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau , QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a
The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under
about the vehicle’s performance and bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender,
vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties,
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation.
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
.
special equipment, can read the
retain personal preferences, such as How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling. InformationProvidedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
GM will not access this data or OnStar® Infotainment System

share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with If the vehicle is equipped with a
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar® and has an active navigation system as part of the
consent of the lessee; in response subscription, additional data may be infotainment system, use of the
to an official request by police or collected through the OnStar system may result in the storage of
similar government office; as part of system. This includes information destinations, addresses, telephone
GM's defense of litigation through about the vehicle’s operation; numbers, and other trip information.
the discovery process; or, as collisions involving the vehicle; the See the infotainment manual for
required by law. Data that GM use of the vehicle and its features; information on stored data and for
collects or receives may also be and, in certain situations, the deletion instructions.
used for GM research needs or may location and approximate GPS
be made available to others for speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
research purposes, where a need is OnStar Terms and Conditions and
shown and the data is not tied to a Privacy Statement on the OnStar
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. website.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
2 NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview satellite signals to be available and

operating. OnStar acts as a link to
existing public emergency service
providers. OnStar may collect
OnStar Overview
information about you and your
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
vehicle, including location
OnStar Services information. See OnStar’s Terms
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 and Conditions and Privacy
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Statement for more details including
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 = Voice Command Button system limitations at
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Q Blue OnStar Button www.onstar.ca (Canada).
> Emergency Button The OnStar system status light is
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional This vehicle may be equipped with a next to the OnStar buttons. If the
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 comprehensive, in-vehicle system status light is:
that can connect to a live OnStar . Solid Green: System is on.
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
Navigation, Connection, and . Flashing Green: On a call.
Diagnostic Services. OnStar . Red: Indicates a problem.
services may require a paid
subscription. OnStar requires the
. Off: System is off. Press the blue
vehicle battery and electrical OnStar button twice to speak
system, cellular service, and GPS with an OnStar Advisor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
14-2 OnStar
. Receive On-Demand
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR OnStar Services
Diagnostics for a check of the
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
vehicle’s key operating systems.
Advisor. Emergency
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press = to: With Automatic Crash Response,
. Manage WiFi Settings (if
. Make a call, end a call, the OnStar system can
equipped).
or answer an incoming call. automatically connect to an OnStar
Press > to get a priority connection Emergency Advisor. The built-in
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling system can automatically connect to
to an OnStar Emergency Advisor
voice commands. help in certain crashes.
available 24/7 to:
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn . Get help for an emergency. Press > to connect to an OnStar
Navigation voice commands.
Requires a specific OnStar . Be a Good Samaritan or Emergency Advisor. GPS
subscription plan. respond to an AMBER Alert. technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
. Get assistance in severe
. Obtain the WiFi network name, important information to emergency
or Service Set Identifier or SSID, weather or other crisis and personnel. OnStar Emergency
and passphrase (if equipped). evacuation routes. Advisors are trained to provide
assistance and link to existing
Press Q to connect to a live
public emergency service providers
Advisor to: in emergency situations.
. Verify account information or With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially
update contact information. trained Crisis Advisors are available
. Get driving directions. Requires 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to
a specific OnStar provide a central point of contact,
subscription plan.. assistance, and information if a
crisis occurs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
OnStar 14-3
Security 4. Follow the voice-guided 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds

commands. with the last direction given, then
OnStar provides services including responds with “OnStar ready,”
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Using Voice Commands then a tone.
Ignition Block, and Roadside During a Planned Route
Assistance, if equipped. OnStar can Get My Destination
unlock the vehicle doors remotely, Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
if equipped with automatic door 1. Press =. System responds:
locks, and can help police locate the “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say
vehicle if it is stolen. “Cancel route.” System 2. Say “Get my destination.”
responds: “Do you want to System responds with the
Navigation cancel directions?” address and the distance to the
destination, then responds with
OnStar navigation requires a 2. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
specific OnStar subscription plan. “OK, request completed, thank
you, goodbye.” Other Navigation Services
Press Q to receive directions or Available from OnStar
have them sent to the vehicle Route Preview
navigation screen, if equipped. OnStar eNav: Subscribers can
Destinations can also be forwarded 1. Press =. System responds: send destinations from
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com. “OnStar ready,” then a tone. MapQuest.com to the vehicle
2. Say “Route preview.” System Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
Turn-by-Turn Navigation responds with the next three screen-based navigation system (if
maneuvers. equipped). When ready, the
1. Press Q to connect to a live
directions will be downloaded to the
Advisor. Repeat vehicle.
2. Request directions.
1. Press =. System responds:
3. Directions are downloaded to the “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
vehicle. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
14-4 OnStar
Destination Download: Press Q, WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped) pressure (if the vehicle is equipped
then request the Advisor to The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot that with the tire pressure monitoring
download directions to the provides a high-speed, wireless system); or activate remote horn
navigation system in the vehicle (if Internet connection to connect and lights. Also remote start the
equipped). After the call ends, press multiple mobile devices (data plan vehicle (if factory equipped) or
the “Go” button on the navigation required). unlock the doors from anywhere
screen to begin driving directions. with a wireless connection (if
1. To retrieve WiFi hotspot equipped with automatic locks).
If directions are downloaded to the information, press = and select With a required specific OnStar
navigation system, the route can or say “WiFi settings.” subscription plan, a destination can
only be canceled through the be sent to the vehicle. For OnStar
navigation system. 2. The WiFi settings will display the RemoteLink information and
WiFi network name/SSID, compatibility, see www.onstar.com
Destinations can also be passphrase, and level of
downloaded on the go. For (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
encryption.
information about eNav or OnStar RemoteLink® Key Fob
Destination Download, see 3. To change the SSID or
Services
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or passphrase, press Q or call
www.onstar.ca (Canada). 1-888-4-ONSTAR to connect This feature is included for five
with an Advisor. years and allows for remote door
Connections lock/unlock (if equipped with
OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App automatic locks), remote start (if
The required specific Onstar (If Equipped) factory equipped), or activation of
subscription plan includes the horn and lights from anywhere with
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
services that follow to help a wireless signal. Download the app
mobile app to select Apple®,
customers stay connected. and start using it any time during the
Android™, and BlackBerry® or
For coverage maps, see Windows 7 or 8 mobile devices. trial period to get started.
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or From the mobile device, check the
www.onstar.ca (Canada). vehicle’s fuel Ilevel,
nf
ormat
i oil
onProvi
dlife,
edby: or tire
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Hands-Free Calling 4. Say “Call.” System responds: 3. Say the entire number without
“OK, dialing 911.” pausing. System responds:
This service allows calls to be made
“Please say the name tag.”
and received from the vehicle. Retrieve My Number
4. Pick a name tag. System
To Make a Call 1. Press =. System responds: responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: “OnStar ready.” tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.” 2. Say “My number.” System 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: responds: “Your OnStar again. System responds: “OK,
“Call. Please say the name or Hands-Free Calling number is,” storing <name tag>.”
number to call.” then says the number.
Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without End a Call Number
pausing, including a “1” and the
Press =. System responds: “Call 1. Press =. System responds:
area code. System responds:
“OK calling.” ended.” “OnStar ready.”
Store a Name Tag for Speed 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
Calling 911 Emergency responds: “OK, calling
Dialing
1. Press =. System responds: <name tag>.”
“OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.” Verify Minutes and Expiration
a tone.
2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds: Press = and say “Minutes” then
“Call. Please say the name or “Please say the number you “Verify” to check how many minutes
number to call.” would like to store.” remain and their expiration date.
3. Say “911” without pausing.
System responds: “911.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
14-6 OnStar
Vehicle Diagnostics OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics can Information Automatic Crash Response,
perform a vehicle check every Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
transmission, antilock brakes, and Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
other major vehicle systems. It also Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
checks the tire pressures, if the eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
Pressure Monitoring System. If an account information. all OnStar services are available
On-Demand Diagnostics check is everywhere or on all vehicles. For
Selling/Transferring the more information, a full description
needed, press Q, and an Advisor Vehicle of OnStar services, system
can run a check.
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediately limitations, and OnStar terms and
to terminate your OnStar services if conditions:
the vehicle is disposed of, sold, . Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
transferred, or if the lease ends. (1-888-466-7827).
Reactivation for Subsequent . See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
Owners . See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible. The Advisor will update
. Press Q to speak with an
vehicle records and explain the Advisor.
OnStar service options available. OnStar services cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: wireless service provider for service
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
OnStar 14-7
in that area. The wireless service Services for People with OnStar Personal Identification
provider must also have coverage, Disabilities Number (PIN)
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar Advisors provide services to help A PIN is needed to access some of
services. Service involving location subscribers with physical disabilities the OnStar services, like Remote
information about the vehicle cannot and medical conditions. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
work unless GPS signals are Assistance. The PIN will need to be
Press Q for help with: changed the first time when
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar . Locating a gas station with an speaking with an Advisor. To
hardware. OnStar services may not attendant to pump gas. change the OnStar PIN, contact an
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
properly installed or it has not been that meets accessibility needs. calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
. Providing directions to the Warranty
or modified, OnStar services may closest hospital or pharmacy in OnStar equipment may be
not work. Other problems beyond urgent situations. warranted as part of the vehicle
the control of OnStar may prevent TTY Users warranty.
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system OnStar has the ability to Languages
design and architecture of the communicate to deaf, The vehicle can be programmed to
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired respond in multiple languages.
crash, or wireless phone network customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
congestion or jamming. Advisors are available in English,
system can provide in-vehicle
See Radio Frequency Statement on access to all of the OnStar services, Spanish, and French. Available
page 13-12. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar languages may vary by country.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
14-8 OnStar
Potential Issues A temporary loss of GPS can cause to function properly. These systems
loss of the ability to send a may not operate if the battery is
OnStar cannot perform Remote
Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The discharged or disconnected.
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Advisor may give a verbal route or
Assistance after the vehicle has Add-on Electrical Equipment
may ask for a call back after the
been off continuously for five days.
vehicle is driven into an open area. The OnStar system is integrated
After five days, OnStar can contact
Roadside Assistance and a into the electrical architecture of the
Cellular and GPS Antennas vehicle. Do not add any electrical
locksmith to help gain access to the
vehicle. Do not place items over or near the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
antenna to prevent blocking cellular Equipment on page 9-100. Added
Global Positioning and GPS signal reception. Cellular electrical equipment may interfere
System (GPS) reception is required for OnStar to with the operation of the OnStar
send remote signals to the vehicle. system and cause it to not operate.
. Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall Unable to Connect to OnStar Privacy
buildings; in parking garages; Message The complete OnStar Privacy
around airports; in tunnels,
If there is limited cellular coverage Statement may be found at
underpasses; or in an area with
or the cellular network has reached www.onstar.com (U.S.),
very dense trees. If GPS signals
maximum capacity, this message or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We
are not available, the OnStar
may come on. Press Q to try the recommend that you review it. If you
system should still operate to
call again or try again after driving a have any questions, call
call OnStar. However, OnStar
few miles into another cellular area. 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
could have difficulty identifying
the exact location. or press Q to speak with an
Vehicle and Power Issues Advisor. Users of wireless
. In emergency situations, OnStar communications are cautioned that
OnStar services require a vehicle
can use the last stored GPS the privacy of any information sent
electrical system, wireless service,
location to send to emergency via wireless cellular communications
and GPS satellite technologies to be
responders. cannot be assured. Third parties
available and Inoperating
for
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
for features
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
OnStar 14-9
may unlawfully intercept or access above copyright notice and this or other dealings in this Software
transmissions and private permission notice appear in all without prior written authorization of
communications without consent. copies. the copyright holder.
OnStar - software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED unzip:
acknowledgements “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR This is version 2005-Feb-10 of
Certain OnStar components include IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
libcurl and unzip software and LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES The definitive version of this
other third party software. Below are OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS document should be available
the notices and licenses associated FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
with libcurl and unzip and for other AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF license.html indefinitely.
third party software please see THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
http://www.lg.com/global/support/ EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR rights reserved.
opensource/index and COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
https://www.onstar.com/web/portal/ For the purposes of this copyright
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
getdocuments DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, the following set of individuals:
libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
THE SOFTWARE. Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
All rights reserved. Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
Except as contained in this notice, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
Permission to use, copy, modify, the name of a copyright holder shall
and distribute this software for any Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
not be used in advertising or Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
purpose with or without fee is otherwise to promote the sale, use
hereby granted, provided that the I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
14-10 OnStar
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White. to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the addresses or of the
incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not Info-ZIP URL(s).
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
inability to use this software. disabled. the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports and “MacZip” for its own source
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces, and binary releases.
freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
(compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” I(or
nf
or any
mat
ionPr
ovvariation
idedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Accessories and
How Does an Airbag AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Antenna
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Passenger Sensing Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-33
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Antilock Brake
Add-On Electrical
What Makes an Airbag System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Adding a Snow Plow or
What Will You See after an Appearance Care
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Additional Information
When Should an Airbag Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Assistance Program,
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-22 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Airbags Assistance Systems for
Adjustable Throttle and
Adding Equipment to the Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Assistance Systems for
Adjustments
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Audio
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-19
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Air Filter, Passenger
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-20 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Alarm Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Vehicle Security
I
nformat ionPr
.d.ed. b.y.:. . . . . . . . . 2-11
ovi
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Bluetooth Bulb Replacement (cont'd)

Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Overview . . . . . . . . 7-31, 7-32, 7-37, Headlamps, Front Turn
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 7-42, 7-46 Signal, Sidemarker, and
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Brake Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Transmission Fluid . . 10-15, 10-18 Pedal and Adjustable Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Automatic Transmission Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Stoplamps, and
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-24 Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Shift Lock Control Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Auxiliary Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 C
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
California
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Perchlorate Materials
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Center High-Mounted
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Capacities and
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Carbon Monoxide
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Voltage and Charging Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-38 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Card Reader
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-3
Cargo Cleaning Coolant

Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105 Engine Temperature
Cautions, Danger, and Climate Control Systems . . . 8-1, 8-3 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3 Courtesy Transportation
Center High-Mounted Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Compartments Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Check Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Text Telephone (TTY)
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Ignition Connections Customer Information
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-38 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Service Publications
Child Restraints Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Infants and Young Traction and Electronic Customer Satisfaction
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Lower Anchors and Control Light
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-44 Hill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57, 3-61 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-4 INDEX
D Driving Electrical System

Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Engine Compartment
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8
Characteristics and Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Danger, Warnings, and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Instrument Panel
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-49, 10-51
Daytime Running
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-30 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11 Emergency
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-14 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Check and Service Engine
Door
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Dual Automatic Climate Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Coolant Temperature
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-5
Dual Tire Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Driver
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Teen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-60 Cooling System Messages . . .5-37
Driver Information E Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30, 5-32
Electrical Equipment, Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-5
Engine (cont'd) Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Front Seats

Overheated Protection Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 FlexFuel Heated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-34 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-109 Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Fluid Filling a Portable Fuel
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Automatic Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 Transmission . . . . . . . 10-15, 10-18 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Four-Wheel Drive Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-28
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Requirements, California . . . . .9-69
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
F Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Fan Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Forward Collision Alert Engine Compartment
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Features Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-42, 10-33 Instrument Panel
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-49, 10-51
Filter, Frequency Statement
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4 Front Fog Lamp
Light . . . . I.nf.or.ma
. t.io.n.Pr.ov.id.ed. b.y.:. . . . . . . . .5-29
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-6 INDEX
G H Heating and Air

Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-64
Gauges Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine Coolant Headlamps
Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . 9-56
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . 5-26
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Daytime Running
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Headlamps, Front Turn
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Signal, Sidemarker, and
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Warning Lights and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-29
General Information High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 I
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-29 Idle System
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73 Heated Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Heated and Cooled Front Ignition Transmission Lock
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Heater Indicator
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-7
Infants and Young Children, L LATCH, Lower Anchors and

Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-56
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Light
Lamps
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Hill Decent Control . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Auxiliary Roof
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Lighting
Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Instrument Panel Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-19 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Internet Radio Lights
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Pandora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Exterior Lamps Off
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Antilock Brake System
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
J Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Jack Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
K Lane Departure
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-39 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Keyless Entry Lane Departure Warning
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-26
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-17
LATCH System
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Replacing Parts after a
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Crash . I.nf.or.ma . t.io.n.Pr.ov.id.ed. b.y.:. . . . . . . . .3-57
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-8 INDEX
Lights (cont'd) M Messages (cont'd)

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Maintenance
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Traction Control System Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Maintenance and Care
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Object Detection System . . . . .5-40
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-3
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Recommended Fluids
Locks Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-21
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-28 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Mirrors
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lower Anchors and Tethers Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Messages
for Children (LATCH Automatic Dimming
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Battery Voltage and
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-37
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Engine Oil . I.nf.or.ma . t.ion. P.r.ov.id.ed. b.y:. . . . . . .5-38
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-9
Mirrors (cont'd) Oil Outlets

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14 Overheated Engine
Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Engine Oil Pressure Protection
Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-19 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Monitor System, Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36 Overview, Infotainment
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
N OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 P
Navigation OnStar® Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . . . 7-11
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Park
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 OnStar® Additional Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-36 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
O OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Object Detection System Brake and P (Park)
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-38
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-32
OnStar® Vehicle Parking or Backing
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Operating Mode Passenger Airbag Status
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Overheated Engine
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Passenger Compartment Air
Ordering Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Service Publications
Inf
ormat ionPr ovidedby:
. . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-29
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-10 INDEX
Perchlorate Materials Proposition 65 Warning, Reimbursement Program,

Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Personalization Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 R System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Phone Radio Frequency Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . 7-31, 7-32, 7-37, Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Replacement
7-42, 7-46 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Radio Frequency
Pickup Conversion to Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104 Replacement Parts
Radios
Port Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Power Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Replacing LATCH System
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Replacing Safety Belt
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-28 Reporting Safety Defects
Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Pregnancy, Using Safety Restraints
Recommended Fluids and
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Privacy Retained Accessory
Records
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Program Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Recreational Vehicle
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
Towing . . . . .In.fo.rma
. .tio.n.P.ro.vid.e.d.by.:. . . . . 10-95
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-11
Ride Control Systems Safety Defects Reporting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Accessories and
Roads General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Roadside Assistance Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16
Roof Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Maintenance, General
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5 Seats Publications Ordering
Running the Vehicle While Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Services
S Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Shift Lock Control Function
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11 Check, Automatic
How to Wear Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Securing Child Shifting
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57, 3-61 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Security Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Signals, Turn and
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-18 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Vehicle Alarm I
nformat i
. . .ov.id.ed. b.y.:. . . . . . . . . 2-11
onPr
Special Application Services . . . 11-8
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-12 INDEX
Specifications and Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Switches All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
StabiliTrak Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 System Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Forward Collision Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 13-15 Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Systems If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-65
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 T Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Steering System Messages . . . . 5-42 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Storage Areas Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-64
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13 Terminology and
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Uniform Tire Quality
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
INDEX i-13
Tires (cont'd) Trailer Updates

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-77 Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . 9-100 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
When It Is Time for New Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Transmission V
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Vehicle
Towing Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-15, 10-18 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-73 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-73 Transportation Program, Identification
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-95 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Trailer Sway Truck-Camper Loading Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95 Turn and Lane-Change Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Traction Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Control System (TCS)/ Turn Signal Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Traction Control/Electronic U Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-26
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Care
Trademarks and License Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54 Vehicle Data Recording
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56 and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Programming
I
nfor
mat io.
n.Pr.ov.id.ed. b.y.:. . . . . . . . .5-54
Mexico-8425172) - 2015 - CRC - 6/20/14
i-14 INDEX
Vehicle Diagnostics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Windshield
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter
W Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Warning Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-38
Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-66
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-43 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2015 Silverado2500hd

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2015 Silverado2500hd

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Silverado2500hd

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k15i_ct_silverado_23208669B.

2015 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License

2015 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

Initial Drive See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

To adjust the power lumbar support,

2. To recline, move the seatback Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features

Press I to heat the driver or

Passenger Sensing Exterior Mirrors

Throttle and Brake Pedal

Interior Lighting ON: Turns all dome lamps on.

Dome Lamps Reading Lamps

The switch used to adjust the

Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on the

For vehicles first sold in Canada, off

1. Fan Control 4. Defrost

Climate Control System (with Air Conditioning)

1. Fan Control 7. K Rear Window Defogger (If

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

The Range Selection Mode switch,

Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls g: If equipped with OnStar® or a

Cruise Control SET−: Press briefly to set the

Forward Collision Alert change to amber and flash. In

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To When the sunroof is opened, an air Performance and

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The combination and size of the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start):

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

To replace the battery: Remote Vehicle Start

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Pressing the power lock switch

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Doors To shut the tailgate, firmly push it

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Using hood-mounted air deflectors

The passenger side mirror is convex

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Folding Mirrors The mirrors may also include a Manual Folding

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17